SlideShare a Scribd company logo
1




Microsoft Project Server 2010
Administrator's Guide
Copyright
This document is provided “as-is”. Information and views expressed in this document, including
URL and other Internet Web site references, may change without notice.
This document does not provide you with any legal rights to any intellectual property in any
Microsoft product. You may copy and use this document for your internal, reference purposes.
© 2011 Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved.
Microsoft, Active Directory, Excel, Internet Explorer, Outlook, SharePoint, SQL Server, and
Windows are trademarks of the Microsoft group of companies. All other trademarks are property of
their respective owners.
Table of Contents




Table of Contents
Introduction                                                                         1
      What Will You Learn from this Book? ..................................... 1
      Who Should Read this Book? ................................................. 1
      How is this Book Structured? ................................................. 2
1 Security                                                                                  5
     Manage Permissions .............................................................. 6
     Manage Users ......................................................................... 8
             Add or Edit a User ...................................................................................................... 8
             Deactivate a user account ...................................................................................... 19
             Reactivate a user account ....................................................................................... 20
         Manage Groups..................................................................... 20
             Create or modify a security group ........................................................................... 21
             Delete a security group ............................................................................................ 26
             Active Directory Group Synchronization ................................................................. 26
         Manage Categories ................................................................31
             Create or modify a category .................................................................................... 32
             Delete a category ..................................................................................................... 39
         Manage Security Templates ................................................. 40
             Create or modify a security template ...................................................................... 40
             Delete a security template ...................................................................................... 43
         Manage Project Web App Permissions ................................. 44
         Manage Delegates ................................................................ 45
             Turn Delegation on or off ......................................................................................... 46
             Set up who can act as delegate .............................................................................. 46
             Set up who can have delegates assigned to them ................................................ 48
             Create a new delegation .......................................................................................... 49

2 Enterprise Data                                                      50
     Enterprise Custom Fields and Lookup Tables .......................51
             Understanding Enterprise Custom Fields ............................................................... 52
             Creating Enterprise Custom Fields ......................................................................... 52
             Creating Enterprise Custom Lookup Tables ........................................................... 64
Departments ......................................................................... 68
           Configuring departments ......................................................................................... 72
       The Resource Breakdown Structure (RBS) ............................74
       Enterprise Global................................................................... 77
       Enterprise Calendars ............................................................ 79
           Create a New Calendar ............................................................................................ 80
           Copy an Existing Calendar ....................................................................................... 81
           Edit an Existing Calendar ......................................................................................... 82
           Delete a Calendar .................................................................................................... 83
           Modify Working and Nonworking Times ................................................................. 84
       Resource Center.................................................................... 95
           Create a New Resource ........................................................................................... 95

3 Database Administration                                                          103
     Delete Enterprise Objects ................................................... 103
           Delete projects .......................................................................................................103
           Delete resources and users ..................................................................................105
           Delete status report responses.............................................................................106
           Delete timesheets ..................................................................................................106
           Delete user delegates............................................................................................107
       Force Check-in Enterprise Objects ...................................... 108
           Check-in Enterprise Projects .................................................................................109
           Check in Enterprise Resources .............................................................................110
           Check in Enterprise Custom Fields .......................................................................110
           Check in Enterprise Calendars ..............................................................................111
           Check in Lookup Tables for Enterprise Custom Fields ........................................111
           Check in Resource Plans .......................................................................................112
       Daily Schedule Backup ....................................................... 113
           Project Retention Policy Versions .........................................................................113
           Items .......................................................................................................................113
       Administrative Backup and Restore ................................... 115
           Administrative Backup ...........................................................................................115
           Administrative Restore ..........................................................................................115
       OLAP Database Management.............................................. 117
           Create an OLAP Cube ............................................................................................117
           Configure an OLAP cube ........................................................................................121
           Copy an OLAP cube ................................................................................................125
           Delete an OLAP cube .............................................................................................126
           Build an OLAP cube ...............................................................................................126
Table of Contents


4 Look and Feel                                                                         128
     Manage Views ..................................................................... 129
             Create a New View .................................................................................................134
             Modify a View .........................................................................................................137
             Copy a View ............................................................................................................138
             Delete a View .........................................................................................................139
         Grouping Formats ............................................................... 139
         Gantt Chart Formats ............................................................ 141
         Quick Launch .......................................................................142
             Change Quick Launch Behavior ............................................................................143
             Add a New Link ......................................................................................................144
             Modify an Existing Link ..........................................................................................145
             Reorder Quick Launch Items .................................................................................145
             Delete a Link ..........................................................................................................146

5 Time and Task Management                                                                 147
     Fiscal Periods .......................................................................148
             Define Fiscal Periods .............................................................................................148
             Delete Fiscal Periods .............................................................................................151
         Time Reporting Periods ....................................................... 151
             Create Bulk Time Reporting Periods .....................................................................152
             Insert or Delete Time Reporting Periods...............................................................153
         Timesheet Adjustment .........................................................155
         Line Classifications ..............................................................156
         Timesheet Settings and Defaults ........................................158
         Administrative Time .............................................................160
         Task Settings and Display ....................................................162
         Close Tasks to Update..........................................................163
6 Queue Management                                                                     165
     Queue System Overview ......................................................165
     Queuing process ..................................................................167
     Queuing architecture ...........................................................168
             Queuing modules ...................................................................................................168
             How it all works together .......................................................................................172
         The Project and Timesheet queues ..................................... 174
             How the Project and Timesheet queues are used ...............................................175
Queue groupings ..................................................................177
       Parent/Child Relationships between submitted Jobs .........178
       Queuing states .....................................................................179
           Changes in queue state.........................................................................................180
       Queue Administration Settings ........................................... 181
           Manage Queue Jobs ..............................................................................................182
           Queue Settings .......................................................................................................186

7 Operational Policies Management                                                   197
     Alerts and Reminders ......................................................... 197
           Notification E-mail Settings ...................................................................................198
           Schedule E-Mail Reminder Service .......................................................................199
       Additional Server Settings................................................... 199
           Project 2007 Compatibility Mode .........................................................................200
           Project Professional Versions ................................................................................202
           Enterprise Settings ................................................................................................203
           Currency Settings ...................................................................................................204
           Resource Capacity Settings...................................................................................206
           Resource Plan Work Day .......................................................................................208
           Exchange Server Details ........................................................................................208
           Task Mode Settings ...............................................................................................209
       Server Side Event Handlers .................................................210
       Active Directory Resource Pool Synchronization ................ 212
           To configure Enterprise Resource Pool synchronization .....................................213
       Project Sites .........................................................................216
           Create Site ..............................................................................................................217
           Edit Site Address ....................................................................................................218
           Synchronize ............................................................................................................219
           Delete Site ..............................................................................................................220
           Go to Project Site Settings .....................................................................................220
       Project Site Provisioning Settings ....................................... 221
           Site URL ..................................................................................................................222
           Default Site Properties ..........................................................................................222
           Automatic Provisioning ..........................................................................................223
           Project Site Permissions ........................................................................................224
       Bulk Update Project Sites ................................................... 225
           Update Site Paths ..................................................................................................226
           Update Content Types ...........................................................................................227
           Project Site Permissions ........................................................................................227
Table of Contents


8 Workflow and Project Detail Pages                                                 228
     Enterprise Project Types ..................................................... 229
             Create New Enterprise Project Type .....................................................................229
         Workflow Phases .................................................................. 231
             New Workflow Phase .............................................................................................231
         Workflow Stages ................................................................. 233
             New Workflow Stages ............................................................................................233
         Change or Restart Workflows ............................................. 236
             Change or Restart a Workflow ..............................................................................236
         Project Detail Pages .............................................................237
             Create or Edit Project Detail Pages .......................................................................237
         Project Workflow Settings ....................................................240
A Project Server 2010 Category Permissions                                                                              243
B Project Server 2010 Global Permissions                                                                                255
C Project Server 2010 Default Security Groups                                     280
     Default global permissions ..................................................281
     Default category permissions ............................................. 285
D Project Server 2010 Default Categories                                                    289
     Categories ........................................................................... 289
     Category permissions ......................................................... 290
Microsoft project server 2010 administrators guide
1




Introduction
     The Microsoft Project Server 2010 Administrator’s Guide helps your organization understand the
     tasks involved with administering Microsoft Project Server 2010.
     Send us your feedback (projdocs@microsoft.com). Please let us know what you think
     about the quality of this content. If this text does not meet your needs, let us know how we
     can improve it. If this text was helpful to you, let us know how it helped.



What Will You Learn from this Book?
     There are several important tasks that an administrator must manage in Microsoft Project
     Server 2010 for Project Web App users to access and interact effectively with project data,
     including:
           Managing users, groups, and categories.
           Customizing Project Web App to fit the specific needs of your organization.
           Managing workflows.
           Managing enterprise data (custom fields, calendars, views, etc.).
           Managing queue settings for your specific environment.
           Managing time and task tracking.
           Configuring Active Directory synchronization to security groups and resources.



Who Should Read this Book?
     This book is designed to produce maximum benefits for the following professionals:
     Project Server administrators
        Those individuals who will have administrative privileges for Project Server and will
        perform the duties required to configure and maintain Project Server.
     SharePoint Server farm administrators
        Those individuals responsible for administering the SharePoint Server Central
        Administration web site and ensuring that Project Server and Microsoft SharePoint
2   Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide



            Server are always properly synchronized and that SharePoint Server features and
            functionality are available.
         Project Management Office (PMO)
            Those individuals who help to define and maintain project management standards and
            practices throughout the organization.
         Project site administrators
            Those individuals who will have administrative privileges for Project Server and will
            perform the duties required to configure Project Server to meet organizational portfolio
            and project management needs.
         Active Directory administrators
            Those individuals responsible for setting up individual e-mail accounts and security
            groups in the Active Directory directory service that will be mapped to the Project
            Server Enterprise Resource Pool and Project Server security groups.
         Any member of your organization’s Project Server deployment planning team
            Those individuals within your organization who will plan the deployment of Project
            Server 2010 and who may need a better understanding of the day-to-day Project Server
            administrative tasks that are available in Project Web App.



How is this Book Structured?
         This book has eight chapters and four appendices. You can review these chapters in any
         order you need to; they are organized in the same manner in this book as they are
         organized in Project Web App. Appendix data is primarily reference data and lists:
Introduction


                  Introduction
                  Chapter 1, “Security”
                  Chapter 2, “Enterprise Data”
                  Chapter 3, “Database Administration”
                  Chapter 4, “Look and Feel”
                  Chapter 5, “Time and Task Management”
                  Chapter 6, “Queue Management”
                  Chapter 7, “Operational Policies Management”
                  Chapter 8, “Workflow and Project Detail Pages”
                  Appendix A, “Project Server 2010 Category Permissions”
                  Appendix B “ Project Server 2010 Global Permissions”
                  Appendix C “ Project Server 2010 Default Security Groups”
                  Appendix D “ Project Server 2010 Default Categories”
Microsoft project server 2010 administrators guide
5




1
Security
This chapter about Project Server 2010 Security contains the following sections:
               Manage Permissions
               Manage Users
               Manage Groups
               Manage Categories
               Manage Security Templates
               Manage Project Web App Permissions
               Manage Delegates
6   Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide




Manage Permissions
         A permission is the authority to perform a specific action within the context of Project
         Server. You can Allow, Deny, or not configure (select neither Allow nor Deny) each
         permission in Project Server. For example, the Log On permission can be allowed or
         denied for any given user or group. There are two types of permissions in Project Server:
          Global Permissions grant users and groups the ability to perform actions throughout an
             instance of Microsoft Project Web App (PWA). Global Permissions are assigned on a
             user or group level.
          Category Permissions grant users and groups the ability to perform actions on specific
             projects and resources. Category Permissions also grant permissions to Views in PWA.
             Category Permissions are assigned on a category level.
         Permissions can be set in a number of different places within the Project Server 2010
         administration menu. You can allow or deny permissions by selecting the check boxes in
         the Allow and Deny columns. If neither the Allow nor the Deny check boxes are selected,
         the default state is Not Allow. The Not Allow state does not prevent users from accessing
         the feature associated with the permission if they are granted permission in some other
         way. For example, a user might belong to one group for which permission is not
         configured (Not Allowed), but might be granted permission by means of membership in a
         group for which the permission is allowed. However, if the permission is explicitly denied
         anywhere, permission is denied everywhere for a particular user or group.
Security                                                                                                       7




           Project Server permissions
           You can configure all Project Server 2010 permissions from the Project Web App Server
           Settings page. Permissions can be configured in the following ways:
            Allow Enables users or group members to perform the actions associated with the
                permission.
            Deny Prevents a user or group from performing the actions associated with the
                permission. Use caution when denying permissions. Note that if a user is denied a
                specific permission, the deny setting supersedes any Allow settings that might apply to
                other groups to which the user belongs. No permissions are set to Deny by default.
            Not Allow If you select neither Allow nor Deny for a permission, the default state is
                Not Allow. If a user belongs to more than one group, and a permission is set to Not
                Allow for one group and is set to Allow (but not Deny) for another group, then the
                user is allowed to perform the actions associated with the permission.
           It is important to consider when you are configuring a permission to Deny that the Deny
           setting supersedes any Allow settings that apply to the user for that permission by means
           of other group memberships. Limiting your use of the Deny setting can simplify
           permissions management for large groups of users.
           Important The Deny setting enables you to deny access to functionality, because this setting
           overrides the Allow setting. Therefore, use caution when selecting the Deny check box. Select the
           Deny check box to prevent a user from outside the organization from accessing Project Server
           security objects or to deny functionality to a user or group).

           For organizations that include a large number of users, assigning and administering
           permissions on an individual basis can be an overwhelming task. You can use groups to
           assign permissions to multiple users with a single action. Create the groups and define the
           set of permissions to associate with the groups as part of your initial Project Server 2010
           deployment planning process, before you assign users to groups and groups to categories.
8   Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide



         After you define groups, the permissions associated with the groups, and group
         memberships, the day-to-day administration of users, groups, and categories involves
         adding users to or removing users from security groups. This helps to reduce the volume of
         required day-to-day administrative tasks, and can simplify troubleshooting permissions
         issues.


Manage Users
         When you make the initial connection to Microsoft Project Server 2010 through the
         Microsoft Project Web App (PWA) site, you must be logged on by using the account used
         to provision the PWA site. You can use this initial account to create other user accounts
         that can access Project Server. For example, this initial account can be used to create the
         user accounts for Project Server administrators, who can create other user accounts and do
         additional post-installation configuration.
         You can use the Manage Users page that is available from the Server Settings page to add
         new individual users, modify existing users, deactivate user accounts, and reactivate inactive
         user accounts. You can also assign permissions to users by adding them to one of the built-
         in groups or by creating a custom group and assigning specific permissions to the custom
         group.
         Note If you have more than 2,000 users in PWA, the Manage Users page will not display users
         until you select one of the Show options at the top of the page.


         Add or Edit a User
         To add a new user account, perform the following procedure.
     To add a user account
      1. On the Server Settings page, in the Security section, click Manage Users.
         2. On the Manage Users page, click New User.
         3. On the New User page, fill out the required information for the user. See the following
            sections for details on each option.
         4. Click Save.
         To edit an existing user account, perform the following procedure.
     To edit a user account
      1. On the Server Settings page, in the Security section, click Manage Users.
         2.   On the Manage Users page, click the user that you want to edit.
         3.   On the Edit User page, fill out the required information for the user. See the following
              sections for details on each option.
Security                                                                                                 9


           4.   Click Save.

           Identification Information
           Use the Identification Information section to specify user information such as name,
           email address, and account status.




           Project Server user identification information
           The following table describes the user identification options.
                Attribute                  Description
                User can be assigned       Select User can be assigned as a resource if you want this
                as a resource              user account to be able to be assigned tasks as a resource.
                                           Selecting this entry makes the user an Enterprise Resource.
                                           This setting is selected by default. Once a user account
                                           becomes an Enterprise Resource it cannot be changed back
                                           to a non-Enterprise Resource even if the check box is
10 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide


                                           deselected.
              Display Name                 The name for the user account. This is a required field.
              E-mail address               The email address for the user. This field is required to
                                           synchronize tasks with Exchange Server.
              RBS                          The user’s position in the Resource Breakdown Structure
                                           hierarchy.
              Initials                     The user’s initials.
              Hyperlink Name               The name of the user’s web site (for example, a team web
                                           site) if applicable.
              Hyperlink URL                The URL of the user’s web site, if applicable.
              Account Status               Can be set to Active or Inactive. If the value is set to Active,
                                           the user account functions normally. If the value is set to
                                           Inactive, the user will be unable to access the account.


    User Authentication
    Use the User Authentication section to specify the user’s logon account and whether the user
    account should be synchronized with Active Directory.




    Project Server user account information
    The following table describes the user account options.
              Attribute                         Description
              User logon account                If you are using Integrated Windows authentication, type
                                                the user's account name in the form of
                                                DomainNameUserAccountName.
                                                If you are using forms-based authentication, type the
                                                user account name in the form of
                                                MembershipProviderName:UserAccount.
              Prevent Active Directory          Selecting the Prevent Active Directory synchronization for
              synchronization for this user     this user check box prevents a user account from being
                                                synchronized during Active Directory Resource Pool
                                                Synchronization.
Security                                                                                                    11


    Assignment Attributes
    Use the Assignment Attributes section to define information associated with the user’s
    assignment to tasks, including calendar, booking type, timesheet manager, assignment owner,
    and cost and availability information.
    Note If you have not selected the User can be assigned as a resource check box, these options are not
    available.




    Project Server assignment attributes
    The following table describes the Project Server user assignment attribute options.
             Attribute                       Description
             Resource can be leveled         Indicates whether the resource can be leveled. Leveling is
                                             the process that is used to resolve resource conflicts or
                                             over-allocations by delaying or splitting certain tasks.
12 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide


              Attribute                        Description
                                               When Project levels a resource, its selected assignments
                                               are distributed and rescheduled.
              Base Calendar                    A base calendar is a calendar that can be used as a
                                               project and task calendar that specifies default working
                                               and non-working time for a set of resources.
              Default Booking Type             Using the Default Booking Type list, you can configure a
                                               user's booking type as either Committed or Proposed. A
                                               committed resource is formally allocated to any task
                                               assignment within a project. A proposed resource has a
                                               pending resource allocation to a task assignment that has
                                               not yet been authorized. This resource assignment does
                                               not detract from the availability of the resource to work on
                                               other projects.
              Timesheet manager                If the user has a timesheet manager, specify that user
                                               here.
              Default Assignment Owner         An assignment owner is an enterprise resource who is
                                               responsible for entering progress information in PWA. This
                                               person can differ from the person first assigned to the
                                               task. For example, a material resource cannot log on to
                                               PWA but the assignment owner field allows an enterprise
                                               resource to enter progress for the resource within PWA.
              Earliest Available               The earliest date that the user is available as a resource.
                                               This date corresponds to the resource availability dates
                                               for a resource that can be seen in Microsoft Project
                                               Professional.
              Latest Available                 The latest date that the user is available as a resource.
                                               This date corresponds to the resource availability dates
                                               for a resource that can be seen in Project Professional.
              Standard Rate                    The rate for the work on an assignment that is scheduled
                                               during the regular working hours of an assigned resource.
                                               To establish variable rates, open the enterprise resource
                                               in Project Professional and set this information in the Cost
                                               Rate tables.
              Overtime Rate                    The rate for the work on an assignment that is scheduled
                                               beyond the regular working hours of an assigned
                                               resource. To establish variable rates, open the enterprise
                                               resource in Project Professional and set this information
                                               in the Cost Rate tables.
              Current Max. Units (%)           The percentage of time that the resource is available for
                                               assignments. The current max units is tied to the early
                                               and late availability dates, if set. For example, if today is
                                               1/1/2011 and the earliest available date is 1/2/2011
Security                                                                                              13


            Attribute                        Description
                                             then the max value is 0% and text next to the field will say
                                             “Custom availability detected, edit in Project
                                             Professional.”
            Cost/Use                         The per-use cost of the resource, if applicable. For work
                                             resources, a per-use cost accrues every time that the
                                             resource is used. For material resources, a per-use cost is
                                             accrued only one time.


    Exchange Server Details
    Use the Exchange Server Details section to specify whether the user’s tasks should be
    synchronized with Exchange Server.




    Exchange synchronization configuration
    Select the Synchronize Tasks check box if you want to enable task synchronization using
    Microsoft Exchange for this user. Exchange integration must be configured for task
    synchronization to function.
    For more information about how to configure task synchronization with Exchange Server, see
    Deploy Project Server 2010 with Exchange Server (http://technet.microsoft.com/en-
    us/library/ff793353.aspx).

    Departments
    Use the Departments section to define whether the user is a member of a particular
    department. You define departments for your organization by populating the Departments
    custom lookup table.




    User department configuration
14 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide


    If the user is a member of a department, click the expand button (...) and select the department
    from the displayed hierarchy.

    Security Groups
    Use the Security Groups section to specify the user’s membership in security groups.




    Security group configuration
    To add the user to a security group, select the group in the Available Groups list, and then
    click Add.
    The following table describes the security group configuration options for a user.
              Attribute                        Description
              Available Groups                 The Available Groups list contains the groups that the
                                               user is currently not a member of.
              Groups that contain this         The Groups that contain this user list contains the groups
              user                             that the user is currently a member of.


    Security Categories
    Use the Security Categories section to specify the user’s membership in security categories.
Security                                                                                                 15




    Security category configuration
    To add the user to a category, select the category in the Available Categories list, and then click
    Add. To modify the category permissions for this user in a category, select the category in the
    Selected Categories list, and then select Allow for the permissions that you want to allow.
    Important We recommend that you do not set category permissions for a single user. Instead, assign
    the user to a group and set category permission for the group. This allows for easier maintenance.

    The following table describes the security category configuration options for a user.
      Attribute                           Description
      Available Categories                The Available Categories list contains the categories that
                                          the user is not a member of.
      Selected Categories                 The Selected Categories list contains the categories that
                                          the user is a member of.
      Permissions for <category>          The Permissions for <category> area lets you configure
                                          category permissions for this user for the selected
                                          category.
      Set permissions with                The Set permission with Template option can be used to
      Template                            prepopulate a set of category permissions based on a
                                          predefined template for the user’s role (such as Executive
                                          or Project Manager).
16 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide


    Global Permissions
    Use the Global Permissions section to configure global permissions for the user.




    Global permissions configuration
    To allow or deny a global permission for the user, select the Allow or Deny check box for the
    permission.
    We recommend that you do not configure global permission for a single user. Instead,
    configure permissions at the group level and add users to the appropriate group. Doing this
    allows for much easier administration and helps in troubleshooting permissions issues.
    For a complete list of global permissions, see Appendix B, “Project Server 2010 Global
    Permissions.”

    Group Fields
    Use the Group Fields section to define group and cost information for the user. Group fields
    are not tied to Project Server security, but are a way of specifying that a user belongs to a
    particular group in your organization. These fields appear in the Project Server reporting
    database and can be used for reporting. Cost Type can be added to the resource and assignment
    OLAP cubes.
Security                                                                                         17




    Group fields configuration
    If your organization uses group names, codes, or cost center information for individuals, type
    the information in the Group Fields area. The values available for Cost Type are those that are
    defined in the Cost Type custom lookup table. By default, the Group field is synchronized
    with Active Directory if you use Active Directory synchronization.

    Team Details
    Use the Team Details section to define a team association for the user. To use teams, you must
    first do the following:
    1. Create a custom lookup table and populate it with the team names that you want to use.
    2. Edit the Team Name custom field to use the new lookup table.




    Team details configuration
    You can use teams to pool assignments under a single resource where they can be later
    reassigned to other resources. For example, you could create a team resource named
    “Development” to which you assign software development tasks. By assigning this resource to
    the Development team and selecting the Team Assignment Pool check box, you enable other
    users on the Development team to see any tasks assigned to the Development resource and to
    accept the assignments in PWA. You could also select Team Assignment Pool for a team lead
    and have all assignments go through that person for distribution to team members.
18 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide


    System Identification Data
    The System Identification Data section displays user meta data, such as when the account was
    created, updated, or checked out.




    System identification data
    In the System Identification Data section, type additional identifying information for the user in
    the External ID box. This information can be used to link the person to corresponding
    information elsewhere in the organization, or to facilitate the consolidation of reporting of
    resource use beyond what Project Server provides.
    The following table describes the system identification data fields.
              Attribute                        Description
              GUID                             The unique ID associated with this user.
              External ID                      Can be used to link this user to external data.
              Active Directory GUID            The unique ID for this user’s Active Directory account.
              Date Created                     The date this user account was created.
              Date last updated                The date this user account was last updated.
              Checked out by                   The user who currently has this user account checked
                                               out.
              Checkout date                    The date this user account was checked out.
Security                                                                                           19



    Deactivate a user account
    At times, you may need to make Project Server user accounts unavailable. When you deactivate
    a user account, that user’s information and data remains in the database, but the user is
    unavailable for new assignments. The user account is inactive until it is reactivated.
    Deactivating a user account means that it can no longer be used to log on to Project Server
    2010. Users cannot use this account to send assignment updates, request status reports, or
    delegate tasks.
    Once a user is deactivated, the Project Manager is prompted to reassign the user’s remaining
    work. This prompt occurs when the Project Manager opens the project in Microsoft Project
    Professional 2010.
    User accounts, when deactivated, are not actually deleted from the Project Server database. This
    ensures that any relationships that resource might have with project data can be preserved in
    case the account is reactivated later. The option to delete a user is available in the Database
    Administration section in Server Settings. However, deactivating a user to preserve data is
    recommended.
    After deactivating an account, the account cannot access Project Server 2010 until it has been
    reactivated. The Manage users and groups global permission in Project Server 2010 is required
    to complete this procedure.
    When using Active Directory synchronization, Project Server users not found in the Active
    Directory group being synchronized will be deactivated. If a user is to be removed from Active
    Directory but you do not want the account deactivated, select the Prevent Active Directory
    synchronization for this user check box under User Authentication on the Edit User page.




    Deactivate users
    Use this procedure to deactivate an active Project Server 2010 user account.
 To deactivate a user account
  1. On the Project Web App home page, in the Quick Launch, click Server Settings.
20 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide


    2. On the Server Settings page, in the Security section, click Manage Users.
    3. On the Manage Users page, in the Users list, find the user account you want to deactivate.
       (You can use the Search box to search for a specific user.) Click the check box next to the
       user name of the account you want to deactivate. Note that you can select multiple user
       accounts.
    4. Click Deactivate Users.
    5. A message box will appear asking confirmation. Click OK to deactivate the user account or
       user accounts.

    Reactivate a user account
    After deactivating a user account, you may need to reactivate it at some later time. Because the
    user information still exists in the Project Server database, you simply need to change the
    account status from Inactive to Active.
    Use this procedure to reactivate a deactivated Project Server 2010 user account. After you have
    performed this procedure, the reactivated account is able to access Project Server 2010. The
    Manage users and groups global permission in Project Server 2010 is required to complete this
    procedure.
 To reactivate a user account
  1. On the Project Web App home page, in the Quick Launch, click Server Settings.
    5. On the Server Settings page, in the Security section, click Manage Users.
    6. On the Manage Users page, in the Users list, find the user account you want to reactivate.
       (You can use the Search box to search for a specific user.) Click the user name of the
       account.
    7. On the Edit User page for the selected user, in the Identification Information section,
       select Active from the Account Status drop-down list.




    8.   Click Save.


Manage Groups
    A group is a container for users that can be assigned permissions in Microsoft Project Server
    2010. Users automatically inherit the permissions of any group to which they belong. By adding
    users to groups, you can significantly reduce the amount of time spent managing user
Security                                                                                         21


    permissions. You can manage groups from the Microsoft Project Web App (PWA) Server
    Settings page.
    The following groups are created by default when Project Server 2010 is installed:
     Team Members Users have general permissions for using PWA, but limited project-level
       permissions. This group is intended to give everyone basic access to PWA. All new users
       are automatically added to the Team Members group. This group is associated with the My
       Tasks category.
     Project Managers Users have most global and category-level project permissions and
       limited resource permissions. This group is intended for users who maintain project
       schedules on a daily basis. This group is associated with the My Organization and My
       Projects categories.
     Resource Managers Users have most global and category-level resource permissions. This
       group is intended for users who manage and assign resources and edit resource data. This
       group is associated with the My Direct Reports, My Organization, My Projects, and My
       Resources categories.
     Executives Users have permissions to view project and Project Server data, but cannot
       make changes. This group is intended for high-level users who need visibility into projects
       but are not themselves assigned project tasks. This group is associated with the My
       Organization category.
     Team Leads Users have limited permissions around task creation and status reports. This
       group is intended for people in a lead capacity who do not have regular assignments on a
       project. This group is associated with the My Projects category.
     Portfolio Managers Users can create and edit data, but cannot perform Project Server
       administrative tasks such as adding users or creating groups. Portfolio Managers are able to
       view and edit all projects and resources in the organization. This group is associated with
       the My Organization category.
     Administrators This group is granted all available Project Server permissions. It is
       associated with the My Organization category.
    These default groups are designed to be used together with the five default categories.

    Create or modify a security group
    Seven default security groups are installed with Microsoft Project Server 2010. To better meet
    the security requirements of your own organization, you can also create custom groups by using
    the Manage Groups page on the Microsoft Project Web App (PWA) site Server Settings page.
    Perform the following procedure to create a custom group in Project Server 2010.
 To add a security group
  1. On the Server Settings page, in the Security section, click Manage Groups.
22 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide


    2. On the Manage Groups page, click New Group.
    3. Complete the required fields on the Add or Edit Group page. See the sections below for
       information about each area.
    4. Click Save.
    Avoid creating unnecessary groups. Having a large number of groups and categories within an
    organization can lead to additional management complexity. Additionally, large numbers of
    groups and categories can stress the authorization system, which can affect performance.
    You can modify the information associated with any security group in Microsoft Project Server
    2010. For example, you may need to modify the group for changes to users or categories, or for
    changes to the Active Directory group to which it is currently being synchronized.
    We recommend not modifying the default Project Server groups, but rather creating a new
    group with the same permissions and modifying the new group.
    Perform the following procedure to modify an existing group in Project Server 2010.
 To modify a security group
  1. On the Project Web App home page, in the Quick Launch, click Server Settings.
    2. On the Server Settings page, in the Security section, click Manage Groups.
    3. On the Manage Groups page, in the Group Name list, click the name of the group you
       want to modify.
    4. On the Add or Edit Group page for the selected group, make your changes to the group
       information. See the sections below for information about each area.
    5. Click Save.

    Group Information
    Use the Group Information section to specify a name and description for the group.




    Group information
    If you want to synchronize the membership of this group with an Active Directory group, click
    Find Group and search for the group that you want to synchronize. To stop synchronizing an
    existing group, click Clear Group.
Security                                                                                              23


    The following table describes the group information options.
             Attribute                       Description
             Group Name                      The name of the group.
             Description                     A description of the group.
             Active Directory Group to       The name of the Active Directory group from which this
             Synchronize                     group gets its membership. If you configure this group to
                                             synchronize with an Active Directory group, the
                                             membership of this group will be synchronized with the
                                             Active Directory group specified on the schedule that you
                                             configure.


    Users
    Use the users section to specify which Project Server users are a member of this group.




    Available users and users in the group
    To add users to the group, select the users in the Available Users list, and then click Add. To
    remove users from the group, select the users in the Selected Users list, and then click
    Remove.
    If you have configured Active Directory synchronization for this group, the group membership
    is maintained by that mechanism. Any changes you make manually may be overwritten the next
    time the group is synchronized with Active Directory.
    The following table describes the options for users in the group.
             Attribute                       Description
             Available Users                 The users in Project Server that are not members of this
                                             group.
             Selected Users                  The users in Project Server that are members of this
                                             group.


    Categories
    Use the Categories section to define which security categories area associated with this group.
24 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide




    Categories options
    To associate a category with this group, select the category in the Available Categories list,
    and then click Add.
    To set the category-level permissions for a particular category, select the category in the
    Selected Categories list, and then click Allow for the permissions that you want to allow for
    this category/group combination.
    The following table describes the categories options for a group.
              Attribute                        Description
              Available Categories             The categories that are not associated with this group.
              Selected Categories              The categories that are associated with this group.
              Permissions for <category>       The permissions that members of this group have within
Security                                                                                                        25


             Attribute                          Description
                                                the selected category. This option appears when you
                                                select a category in the Available Categories list.
             Set permissions with               To set the category permissions for the selected category
             Template                           from a template – such as Project Manager or Team
                                                Member – select the desired template from the dropdown
                                                list, and then click Apply.


    Global Permissions
    Use the Global Permissions section to configure global permissions for this group.




    Global permissions
    To allow a permission for the group, select the Allow check box for that permission.
    To deny a permission for the group, select the Deny check box for that permission.
    For a complete list of global permissions, see Appendix B, “Project Server 2010 Global
    Permissions.”
    Note If neither check box is selected for a permission, the user is not allowed the permission unless it
    is allowed in another group that the user is a member of, or it is allowed at the user level. If the Deny
    check box is selected for a permission, that permission is denied for all users in the group and cannot
    be allowed through other group or user settings.
26 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide



    Delete a security group
    If you no longer need a security group in Microsoft Project Server 2010, you can delete it.
    Before you delete a group, ensure that no other users or groups depend on it for required
    permissions.
    Security groups are permanently deleted, unlike deactivated user accounts (which can be
    reactivated). If you delete a security group and then find that you want to have it again, you
    must recreate it. The Manage users and groups global permission in Project Server 2010 is
    required to complete this procedure.
    Important We highly recommend not deleting the default Project Server groups. The Team Members
    group cannot be deleted.




    Delete a custom security group
    Perform the following procedure to delete a group in Project Server 2010.
 To delete a custom group
  1. On the Server Settings page, in the Security section, click Manage Groups.
    2. On the Manage Groups page, in the Group Name list, find the group you want to delete.
       Select the check box next to the group that you want to delete. Note that you can select
       multiple groups.
    3. Click Delete Group.
    4. A message box appears, asking for confirmation and noting that the group will be
       permanently removed. Click OK to delete the group.

    Active Directory Group Synchronization
Project Server 2010 security group synchronization controls Project Server security group
membership by automatically adding and removing users from specified Project Server security
groups based on group membership in the Active Directory directory service. Each Project Server
Security                                                                                              27


security group can be mapped to a single Active Directory group. This Active Directory group can,
however, contain nested groups whose members will also be synchronized.
The following actions can occur during a Project Server security group synchronization process:
          A new Project Server user account can be created based on an Active Directory account.
          An existing Project Server user can be removed from a Project Server security group.
          An existing Project Server user can be added to a Project Server security group.
          An existing Project Server user account's metadata (name, e-mail address, and so on) can
           be updated if it has changed in Active Directory.
          A previously inactive Project Server user account can be reactivated.


Before you perform this procedure, confirm that:
     You have access to Project Server through Project Web Access with an account with the
           Manage Active Directory Settings and the Manage users and groups global settings.
     The Service Application service account for the Project Server instance has Read access to
           all Active Directory groups and user accounts involved in the synchronization. You can
           verify this account in the on the Service Application page on the Central Administration
           site.

           To configure security group synchronization
Use this procedure to configure security group synchronization with Active Directory in Project
Server 2010.
The following table describes possible scenarios and corresponding actions that occur when
security group synchronization takes place:

Scenario                                         Action

 The user exists in Active Directory and is a    A new corresponding user account is created in
 member of the Active Directory group            Project Server and is granted membership to the
 mapped to the current Project Server            current Project Server security group.
 security group. The user does not exist in
 Project Server.

 The user is not a member of the Active          The existing Project Server user is removed as a
 Directory group mapped to the current           member of the current Project Server security
 Project Server security group. The user         group.
 also exists in Project Server and is a
28 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide



 Scenario                                       Action

 member of the current Project Server
 security group.

 The user exists in Active Directory and is a   The existing Project Server user is given
 member of the Active Directory group           membership to the current Project Server security
 mapped to the current Project Server           group.
 security group. The user also exists in
 Project Server, but is not a member of the
 current Project Server security group.

 The user exists in Active Directory and is a   The corresponding Project Server user
 member of the Active Directory group           information is updated (if applicable).
 mapped to the current Project Server
 security group. The user also exists in
 Project Server and is a member of the
 current Project Server security group. User
 information has been updated in Active
 Directory.

 The user exists in Active Directory and is a   If the Automatically reactivate currently
 member of the Active Directory group           inactive users if found in Active Directory
 mapped to the current Project Server           during synchronization option is selected in
 security group. The user also exists in        Project Server, the account is reactivated and is
 Project Server, but as an inactive account.    added to the current Project Server security
                                                group. If the option is not selected, the account
                                                remains inactive in Project Server.


 To configure security group synchronization
  1. On the Project Web App Home page, click Server Settings.
    2. On the Server Settings page, in the Security section, click Manage Groups.
    3. On the Manage Groups page, in the Group Name column, click the name of the security
       group that you want to synchronize.
    4. On the Add or Edit page for the group you selected, in the Group Information section,
       for Active Directory Group to Synchronize, click Find Group.
Security                                                                                                        29




    5.     On the Find Group in Active Directory page, in the Group Name field, enter all or part of
           the name of the Active Directory group which you want to synchronize with your security
           group. Click the button next to the Group Name field to search the Active Directory
           forest based on your search criteria.
           To select a group from a remote forest, type the fully qualified domain name of the group
           (for example, group@corp.contoso.com). You can synchronize to a security or distribution
           group of any scope (Local, Global, or Universal).
           Note The Active Directory forest that is search is displayed at the top of the Find Group in the
           Active Directory page. The forest is defined by the fully qualified domain name of the account for
           the Service Application on which the Project Server instance is running.




    6. From the Group Name list, select the group with which you want to synchronize your
       Project Server security group. Click OK.
    7. On the Add or Edit Group page, you should see the Active Directory group you selected
       in the Group Information section next to Active Directory Group to Synchronize. Click
       Save.
    8. On the Manage Groups page, in the Group Name column, select the check box next to
       the security group that you just configured for synchronization. Then click Active
       Directory Sync Options.
30 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide




          Synchronize Project Server Groups with Active Directory


    9.    If you want to schedule synchronization to occur on a scheduled basis, on the Synchronize
          Project Server Groups with Active Directory page, in the Scheduling section, select
          Schedule Synchronization. Alternatively, you can choose to manually run the security
          group synchronization. If you prefer the manual option, skip the following step and
          continue to step 11.
    10.   In the Frequency fields, define the frequency at which you want synchronization to occur
          between the Project Server security group and the Active Directory group. This can be
          scheduled over a defined period of days, weeks, or months. Select a start date and time.
    11.   You can enable inactive user accounts to be reactivated if they are found in the Active
          Directory group during synchronization. To do so, in the Options section, select
          Automatically reactivate currently inactive users if found in Active Directory during
          synchronization. (For example, enabling this option would ensure that if an employee
          were rehired, the employee's user account would be reactivated).
    12.   Click Save to save the settings. Click Save and Synchronize Now if you want to
          synchronize your Project Server security group immediately. If you choose not to schedule
          the synchronization, you can rerun it manually when needed by returning to this page and
          clicking Save and Synchronize Now.
    13.   You can check the status of the security group synchronization by returning to the
          Synchronize Project Server Groups with Active Directory page for the specific security
Security                                                                                                31


           group and reviewing the information in the Status section. It will contain information such
           as when the last successful synchronization occurred.


Manage Categories
    Categories are the collections of projects, resources, and views to which users and groups in
    Project Server are granted access. Categories define which collections of specific data (projects,
    resources, and views) that these users and groups have access to. Categories also allow the
    administrator to filter data using security rules, like Resource Breakdown Structure (RBS), that
    can help organize and display data in specific ways.
    You can manually add projects and resources to categories by choosing them from lists, or you
    can use dynamic filters to automatically add them to categories. Any user associated with a
    category can be granted permission to the projects and resources in that category.
    You must have the Manage users and groups global permission to add, modify, or delete a
    group.
    Avoid creating unnecessary categories. Having a large number of groups and categories within
    an organization can stress the authorization system, which can affect performance.
    Microsoft Project Server 2010 creates five default categories during installation. These default
    categories enable Project Server to provide the most common layer of security for a hierarchical
    organization or matrix organization.
    The Manage users and groups global permission in Project Server 2010 is required in order to
    create, modify, or delete a category.
           Default category      Default groups in the    Description
                                 category
           My Tasks              Team Members             Primarily used by project resources who
                                                          have assigned tasks.
           My Projects           Project Managers         Provides access to all projects that a user
                                 Resource Managers        owns.
                                 Team Leads
           My Resources          Resource Managers        Intended for resource managers and is
                                                          useful only after the Resource Breakdown
                                                          Structure (RBS) is defined.
           My Direct Reports     Resource Managers        Intended for users who need to approve
                                                          timesheets.
           My Organization       Executives               Used to grant access to all information in
                                 Portfolio Managers       the organization. This category is intended
                                 Project Managers         for members of a Project Management
                                                          Office (PMO), executives in an organization,
                                 Resource Managers
32 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide


         Default category          Default groups in the   Description
                                   category
                                   Administrators          and other key users who require the ability
                                                           to view projects and resources across the
                                                           entire organization.


    Create or modify a category
    In Microsoft Project Server 2010, you can add custom security categories as necessary to create
    a Project Server security model that meets the specific needs of users and groups in your
    organization.
    Avoid creating unnecessary categories. Having a large number of groups and categories within
    an organization can lead to greater administrative complexity. Additionally, large numbers of
    groups and categories can stress the authorization system, which can affect performance.
    If there are many users at the highest level of the RBS, consider adding them to a custom
    category that gives them visibility of all projects (avoiding dynamic rules). Top-level RBS users
    probably have access to all projects, so assigning them to this category avoids unneeded work
    by the authorization system.
    The Manage users and groups global permission in Project Server 2010 is required to complete
    these procedures.
    To create a new category, perform the following procedure.
 To create a category
  1. On the Project Web App home page, in the Quick Launch, click Server Settings.
    2. On the Server Settings page, in the Security section, click Manage Categories.
    3. On the Manage Categories page, click New Category.
    4. Complete the Add or Edit Category page. See the following sections for information about
       each setting.
    5. Click Save.
    To modify an existing category, perform the following procedure.
 To modify a category
  1. On the Project Web App home page, in the Quick Launch, click Server Settings.
    2. On the Server Settings page, in the Security section, click Manage Categories.
    3. On the Manage Categories page, click the category that you want to modify.
    4. Complete the Add or Edit Category page. See the following sections for information about
       each setting.
    5. Click Save.
Security                                                                                           33


    Name and Description
    Use the Name and Description section to specify a name and description for the category.




    Category name and description
    The following table describes the name and description options for a category.
            Attribute                      Description
            Category Name                  The name of the category. This name must different be
                                           than that of other categories.
            Description                    Description of the category.


    Users and Groups
    Use the Users and Groups section to specify which users and groups are associated with this
    category.




    Category users and groups
    To associate a user or group with this category, select the user or group in the Available Users
    and Groups list, and then click Add.
    To remove the association between a user or group and this category, select the user or group
    in the Users and Groups with Permissions list and then click Remove.
    For easiest administration, only associate groups with categories.
            Attribute                      Description
            Available Users and Groups     Users and groups that are not associated with this
                                           category.
            Users and Groups with          Users and groups that are associated with this category.
            Permissions
34 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide



    To select the category permissions for each user or group, select the user or group in the Users
    and Groups with Permissions list. This will display the category permissions for the selected
    group in this category.




    Category permissions for the Project Managers group
    Each user or group can be assigned distinct permission within a category.
    For a complete list of category permissions, see Appendix A, “Project Server 2010 Category
    Permissions.”

    Projects
    Use the Projects section to specify the projects that users associated with this category can
    view.
Security                                                                                              35




    Category / project association
    You can explicitly select projects that users with permissions in this category can view, or you
    can use one of the dynamic security options to have projects made available to users based on
    their relationship to the project or their RBS value.
             Attribute                     Description
             All current and future        When this option is selected, users in this category can
             projects in Project Server    see all projects in this instance of Project Web App.
             database
             Only the projects indicated   When this option is selected, users in this category can
                                           view the projects in the Selected Projects list and any
                                           projects from the Available Projects list that the user has
                                           permissions to see using the dynamic permissions
                                           options. The dynamic permissions features only work
                                           when this option is selected.
             Available projects            Projects that are not explicitly part of this category. Users
                                           may still be able to view these projects if any of the
                                           dynamic permissions options are configured to allow it.
             Selected projects             Projects that users in this category can view.
             The User is the Project       Gives users permissions on any project they own. Also
             Owner or the User is the      gives Status Managers permissions on projects that
             Status Manager on             contain assignments that they manage.
36 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide


              Attribute                        Description
              assignments within that
              Project.
              The User is on that              Gives users permissions on any project where they are on
              project's Project Team           the project team. Users do not need to have assignments
                                               on the project.
              The Project Owner is a           Gives users permissions on any project that is managed
              descendant of the User via       by resources subordinate to them in the Resource
              RBS                              Breakdown Structure (RBS) hierarchy.
              A resource on the project's      Allows a user to view any project where a resource
              Project Team is a                subordinate to the user in the RBS is on the project team.
              descendant of the User via       Avoid using this rule for users who have many resources
              RBS                              under them in the RBS. If the resources under them are
                                               on many projects involving many categories, this stress on
                                               the authorization system can affect performance (for
                                               example, delay the loading of the Project Center page).
              The Project Owner has the        Allows a user to view projects managed by persons that
              same RBS value as the            have the same RBS value that the user has.
              User


    Resources
    Use the Resources section to specify which resources the users associated with this category
    can view.
Security                                                                                             37




    Category / resource association
    You can explicitly select resources that users with permissions in this category can view, or you
    can use one of the dynamic security options to have resources made available to users based on
    their relationship to the resource or their RBS value.
            Attribute                     Description
            All current and future        When this option is selected, users in this category can
            resources in Project Server   see all resources in this instance of Project Web App.
            database
            Only the resources            When this option is selected, users in this category can
            indicated                     view the resources in the Selected Resources list and any
                                          resources from the Available Resources list that the user
                                          has permissions to see using the dynamic permissions
                                          options.
            Available Resources           Resources that are not explicitly part of this category.
                                          Users may still be able to view these resources if any of
                                          the dynamic permissions options are configured to allow
                                          it.
            Selected Resources            Resources that users in this category can view.
            The User is the resource      Gives users permissions to view information about
                                          themselves (such as assignments).
            They are members of a         Gives users permissions to view information for all
38 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide


              Attribute                        Description
              Project Team on a project        resources in projects they own.
              owned by the User
              They are descendants of          Gives users permissions to view information for all
              the User via RBS                 resources under them in the RBS.
              They are direct                  Gives users permissions to view information about
              descendants of the User          resources that are directly under them in the RBS.
              via RBS
              They have the same RBS           Gives user permissions to view information about
              value as the User                resources that have the same RBS value.


    Views – Add to Category
    Use the Views – Add to Category section to specify views that users associated with this
    category can see.




    Global permissions
    To add a view to the category, select the Add check box for that view. To remove a view, clear
    the Add check box for that view.
Security                                                                                                     39



    Delete a category
    In Project Server 2010, you can delete any existing custom category from the Manage
    Categories page in Microsoft Project Web App.
    Note Default Project Server categories cannot be deleted.
    The Manage users and groups global permission in Project Server 2010 is required to complete
    this procedure.




    Delete a custom category
    Perform the following procedure to delete an existing category in Project Server 2010.
    Caution Verify that the category you are deleting is the one you intend to delete. If you accidentally
    delete the wrong category, it is permanently deleted and will need to be recreated.

 To delete a category
  1. On the Project Web App home page, in the Quick Launch, click Server Settings.
    2. On the Server Settings page, in the Security section, click Manage Categories.
    3. On the Manage Categories page, in the Category Name list, find the category that you
       want to delete. Select the check box next to the category that you want to delete. Note that
       you can select multiple categories.
    4. Click Delete Categories.
    5. A warning message appears, noting that the category will be permanently removed. Click
       OK.
40 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide



Manage Security Templates
    Security templates provide a method for you to quickly apply or reset predefined permission
    profiles to new or existing users, groups, and categories. By applying security templates, you can
    easily standardize the permissions that you assign according to user's role in the organization. A
    number of predefined security templates are created by default when Microsoft Project Server
    2010 is installed. These align with the predefined groups. You can customize these security
    templates or create new security templates according to your needs.
    Creating custom templates requires planning. You must first identify the common Project
    Server usage patterns in your organization that are not reflected in the default Project Server
    security templates. This helps you to identify your requirements for custom security templates.
    Then, determine the permissions that the users who share the common Project Server usage
    patterns require. This defines the security template. Next, determine the set of projects,
    resources, views, and so on, that the users and groups require access to; this defines the security
    category. Create the custom security template and apply it to the group of users that share the
    common usage pattern. The permissions that you define in the custom security template
    enables users to access the Project Server security objects that they require.
    Project Server 2010 creates eight default security templates during installation:
     Administrators
     Executives
     Portfolio Managers
     Project Managers
     Proposal Reviewers
     Resource Managers
     Team Leads
     Team Members
    Each security template is given a set of default category and global permissions, based on the
    functions that each group typically does in an organization. As mentioned previously, when
    creating new security templates, you are allowed to copy the permissions for a default security
    template and then customize it to suit your needs. We recommend not modifying the default
    templates.
    The Manage users and groups global permission in Project Server 2010 is required to create,
    modify, or delete a security template.

    Create or modify a security template
    In Microsoft Project Server 2010, you can group commonly used permissions into a security
    template and then use it to assign permissions to users, groups, and categories.
Security                                                                                               41


    The Manage users and groups global permission in Project Server 2010 is required to complete
    this procedure.
    Perform the following procedure to create a template in Project Server 2010.
 To create a template
  1. On the PWA home page, in the Quick Launch, click Server Settings.
    2. On the Server Settings page, in the Security section, click Manage Templates.
    3. On the Manage Templates page, click New Template.
    4. Complete the Add or Edit Template page. See the following sections for information about
       each setting.
    5. Click Save.
    In Microsoft Project Server 2010, you can modify the permissions for any existing template in
    the Manage Templates page in Microsoft Project Web App Server Settings.
    As a best practice, do not make any changes to the default Project Server templates.
    The Manage users and groups global permission in Project Server 2010 is required to complete
    this procedure.
    Note Modifying a template does not make any changes to users, groups, or categories to which the
    template was applied in the past.

    Perform the following procedure to modify an existing template in Project Server 2010.
 To modify a template
  1. On the Project Web App home page, in the Quick Launch, click Server Settings.
    2. On the Server Settings page, in the Security section, click Manage Templates.
    3. On the Manage Templates page, in the Template Name list, click the template that you
       want to edit.
    4. On the Add or Edit Template page, make your changes to the template. See the following
       sections for information about each setting.
    5. Click Save.

    Name
    Use the Name section to specify a name and description of the template and, optionally, to
    select an existing template to copy the settings from an existing template into the new template.
42 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide




    Template name and Copy Template options
    If you choose a template from the Copy Template dropdown list, the values from that template
    are copied to this template.
    Important The values from the copied template will overwrite any existing values in this template.

    After you copy the template, you can modify the values as needed to meet your needs.
    If you do not copy a template, this template will be blank and you can modify the values as
    needed.

    Category Permissions
    Use the Category Permissions section to set the category permissions for this template.




    Category Permissions
    To allow a category permission for this template, select the Allow check box for that
    permission. If you do not select the Allow check box for a permission, that permission will not
    be allowed in the categories where you use this template, but could be allowed in other
    categories.
Security                                                                                         43


    To deny a category permission for this template, select the Deny check box for that
    permission.

    Global Permissions
    Use the Global Permissions section to set the global permissions for this template.




    Global Permissions
    To allow a global permission for this template, select the Allow check box for that permission.
    If you do not select the Allow check box for a permission, that permission will not be allowed
    in the groups where you use this template, but could be allowed in other groups.
    To deny a global permission for this template, select the Deny check box for that permission.

    Delete a security template
    In Microsoft Project Server 2010, you can delete any existing security templates from the
    Manage Templates page on the Microsoft Project Web App site.
    As a best practice, do not delete any of the default Project Server templates.
    The Manage users and groups global permission in Project Server 2010 is required to complete
    this procedure.
44 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide




    Delete a template
    Perform the following procedure to delete a template.
 To delete a template
  1. On the Project Web App home page, in the Quick Launch, click Server Settings.
    2. On the Server Settings page, in the Security section, click Manage Templates.
    3. On the Manage Templates page, in the Template Name list, select the check box next to
       the templates that you want to delete.
    4. Click Delete Template. A warning message appears, noting that the template will be
       permanently removed.
    5. Click OK.


Manage Project Web App Permissions
    You can use the Manage Project Web App Permissions page to control which global and
    category permissions are enabled on a given Microsoft Project Server 2010 instance. An
    administrator can use the Project Web App Permissions page to deny access to all Project
    Server 2010 users for a particular feature in Microsoft Project Professional or a Microsoft
    Project Web App (PWA) instance. If a Project Web App permission is disabled on this page,
    the equivalent global or category permission is disabled for users throughout PWA. All
    permissions on this page are enabled by default.
    For example, if you deny the Delete project permission, users throughout PWA cannot delete
    projects, regardless of whether they have the Delete project category permission.
    Important Before disabling a Project Web App permission, thoroughly consider the effects on your
    organization of doing so. If you want to turn off a permission for only some Project Web App users, verify
    whether you can do it by creating a custom group and denying the permissions you want to restrict.
Security                                                                                         45




    Disable Project Web App Permission
    The Manage users and groups global permission in Project Server 2010 is required to complete
    this procedure. Perform the following procedure to disable a Project Web App organizational
    permission in Project Server 2010.
 To disable a Project Web App permission
  1. On the Project Web App home page, in the Quick Launch, click Server Settings.
    2. On the Server Settings page, in the Security section, click Project Web App Permissions.
    3. On the Project Web App Permissions page, in the Available Project Web App
       Permissions list, clear the Enable check box next to the permission that you no longer
       want to make available to Project Web App users. (All Project Web App permissions are
       enabled by default.)
    4. Click Save.
    Enabling a previously disabled permission is simply done by selecting the Enable check box
    next to the permission that has been disabled.




Manage Delegates
    Microsoft Project Server 2010 enables user delegation throughout all of Project Web App. This
    means that one user can act as another user in every part of Project Web App, regardless of the
    permission level difference of one user compared to the other.
46 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide



    Turn Delegation on or off
    The user delegation feature in Project Web App can be enabled or disabled globally, for all
    users and groups. When user delegation is turned on, you can set permissions to control the
    specific behavior of the feature in Project Web App.


 To turn delegation on or off
  1. On the PWA home page, click Server Settings.
    2. On the Server Settings page, under Security, click Project Web App Permissions
    3. In the Resource section, select the check box for the Manage Resource Delegates
       permission to turn on the user delegation feature within Project Web App.
    4. Choose any additional delegation permissions that meet your organization's needs:
        Manage My Resource Delegations Select this check box to enable users to set up
           delegations for other users.
        Manage My Delegations Select this check box to enable users to create delegations
           for themselves.
        Can be Delegate Select this check box to enable users to actively become a delegate
           for another user, after a delegation has been created.
    5. Click Save to save the permissions on the server.




    Set up who can act as delegate
    In Project Web App, there are user or group level permissions that enable you to determine
    which users or groups can act as delegates for other people. By default, the only group with
    these permissions turned on is the administrators group, so if you want users in your
    organization to be able to act as delegates, you'll need to set the appropriate permissions.
Security                                                                                   47




 To set permissions for a specific user
  1. On the PWA home page, click Server Settings.
    2. Under Security, click Manage Users.
    3. Click the name of the user for which you are setting permissions.
    4. On the Edit User page, expand the Global Permissions section.
    5. In the Global Permissions section, under Resource, choose the appropriate permissions
       for this user.
        Can be Delegate Select the Allow check box for this permission to enable this user
            to actively become a delegate for another user.
        Manage My Delegations Select the Allow check box for this permission to enable
            this user to create his or her own delegations.
        Manage My Resource Delegations Select the Allow check box for this permission
            to enable this user to set up delegations for other users.

    6.     Click Save to save the permissions on the server.




 To set permissions for a group
  1. On the PWA home page, click Server Settings.
    2. Under Security, click Manage Groups.
    3. Click the name of the group for which you are setting permissions.
    4. On the Add or Edit Group page, expand the Global Permissions section.
    5. In the Global Permissions section, under Resource, choose the appropriate permissions
       for this group.
48 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide




             Can be Delegate Select the Allow check box for this permission to enable members
              of this group to actively become delegates for other users.
             Manage My Delegations Select the Allow check box for this permission to enable
              members of this group to create their own delegations.
             Manage My Resource Delegations Select the Allow check box for this permission
              to enable members of this group to set up delegations for other users.




    6.   Click Save to save the permissions on the server.




    Set up who can have delegates assigned to them
    Categories are used to determine which users or groups can have delegates do work on their
    behalf. For a delegation to work properly, the user requesting the delegation must have the
    correct category permissions, and the user who will act as the delegate must have the correct
    individual user or group permissions.


 To set up who can have delegates assigned to them
  1. On the PWA home page, click Server Settings.
    2. Under Security, click Manage Categories.
    3. Click the name of the category that contains the user or group for which you want to
       enable user delegation.
    4. In the Users and Groups section, click the name of group or a specific user in the Users
       and Groups with Permissions box.
Security                                                                                             49


    5. In the permissions box that appears, scroll down to the Resource section, and select the
       check box for the Manage Resource Delegates permission to turn on the user delegation
       feature for that user or group.
    6. Click Save to save the permissions on the server.

    Create a new delegation
    Creating a new delegation allows one user to work on behalf of another user, such as
    submitting a second user’s timesheet.


 To create a delegation
  1. On the PWA home page, click Server Settings.
    2. Under Security, click Manage Delegates.
    3. On the interface ribbon click New




    4.     In the Set Delegation Period section, select the date range for the period during which
           the delegate will be able to manage work.




    5. In the Set Delegation section, select the delegate that you want to manage work during
       the specified period.
    6. In the Working on Behalf of section, select the user who requires a substitute.
    7. Click Save to save the permissions on the server.
50 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide




2
Enterprise Data
    This chapter about Project Server 2010 Enterprise Data Administration contains the following
    sections:
             Enterprise Custom Fields and Lookup Tables
             Departments
             The Resource Breakdown Structure (RBS)
             Enterprise Global
             Enterprise Calendars
             Resource Center
Enterprise Data                                                                                     51




Enterprise Custom Fields and Lookup Tables
    You can use Enterprise Custom Fields to help to establish consistency across all of your
    organization’s projects. That way you can ensure that fields and associated lookup tables are
    used in the same way for all projects, tasks, resources, and assignments.
    Enterprise Custom Fields can include custom formulas and can allow the use of lookup tables
    and graphical indicators. By using Enterprise Custom Fields effectively, you can help to
    customize Project Server 2010 to fit the unique needs of your organization. When you use
    Enterprise Custom Fields, all users in your organization have access to a standard set of fields,
    which enables operations to be applied the in same way across entire sets of projects. For
    example:
     You can customize project management to reflect your organization’s structure and
        processes. All users in your organization can have access to a standard set of fields,
        enabling the same operations to be completed across entire sets of projects.
     You can set Enterprise Custom Fields as required fields so that users are prompted to enter
        information in that field before saving.
     You can use Enterprise Custom Fields on a per-department basis.
    Because creating Enterprise Custom Fields can range from being simple to being very complex
    and time-consuming, it is important to correctly design your Enterprise Custom Fields. To
    determine the scope of Enterprise Custom Fields that your organization requires, consider the
    following questions:
52 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide


     What words or phrases are used by stakeholders in your organization, such as return on
         investment (ROI), Key Performance Indicator (KPI), and so on? You might want to
         quantify and codify these concepts by means of Enterprise Custom Fields. Also consider
         the concepts behind the common words and phrases used by stakeholders in your
         organization.
        What are the user requirements in your organization? User requirements are frequently
         based on reporting requirements.
        How will you sort and select data? How will you use graphical indicators to help users
         identify the correct data?

    Understanding Enterprise Custom Fields
    You can use Enterprise Custom Fields to create a set of project management standards that can
    be applied across your organization and to enhance the capabilities of Project Server 2010. You
    can create Enterprise Custom Fields at the task, project, and resource level. It is important to
    determine which specific Enterprise Custom Fields your organization needs when you review
    your business requirements while planning your Project Server 2010 deployment. It is best to
    do this after you have performed a gap analysis by comparing the capabilities of Project Server
    2010 against the business needs of your organization.
    For example, a group of executives in an organization wants to be able to view project data by
    department. In order to achieve this business requirement, they need to define a consistent
    method for identifying departments within the organization. In addition, if each department has
    a different accounting method or funding process, the executives might need to identify a
    method for defining this, as well. You can use the Project Departments or Resource
    Departments custom fields in conjunction with the Department custom lookup table, or any
    enterprise custom filed with the Department property set to accomplish this.
    The most important use for Enterprise Custom Fields is to enable organizations to enforce
    consistency across all projects. For example, if two project managers use different fields to
    identify a resource’s location, then users will be unable to identify when the same resource is
    assigned to projects managed by each project manager.

    Creating Enterprise Custom Fields
    Project Server Enterprise Custom Fields are created and maintained through the Server Settings
    page in Microsoft Project Web App (PWA).
Enterprise Data                                                                               53




    New Custom Field page
    The New Custom Field page allows you to specify the options for a custom field. Use the
    following procedure to create a new enterprise custom field.
 To create Enterprise Custom Fields
  1. On the PWA Server Settings page, click Enterprise Custom fields and Lookup Tables.
    2.   Under Enterprise Custom Fields, click New Field.
54 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide


    3. Fill out the New Custom Field page with the custom field options that you want to use. See
       the descriptions for each field in the following sections.
    4. Click Save.

    Name and Description
    Use the Name and Description areas to specify a name and description for the custom field.




    Custom Field Name and Description
    The following table describes the name and description fields.
         Attribute                                       Description
         Name                                            The name of the custom field.
         Description                                     A description of the custom field.


    Entity and Type
    Use the Entity and Type areas to specify whether you want a Project, Resource, or Task custom
    field, and what data type the field should be.




    Custom Field Entities
    The following table describes each of the available entities.
         Attribute                                       Description
         Project                                         Select to create Enterprise Custom Fields
                                                         that are applied at the project level.
         Resource                                        Select to create Enterprise Custom Fields
Enterprise Data                                                                                     55


         Attribute                                      Description
                                                        that are applied at the resource level.
         Task                                           Select to create Enterprise Custom Fields
                                                        that are applied at the task level.

    The Type selection defines the data type of the custom field. The value you choose here will
    affect which options are available in the Custom Attributes, Calculation for Summary Rows,
    and Behavior section.




    Custom Field Types
    The following table describes the available custom field types.
         Attribute        Description
         Cost             Use custom cost fields to define currency data. For example, you can use
                          a custom cost field to define a project’s Approved Budget.
         Date             Use custom date fields to specify date-driven data. For example, you can
                          create an Enterprise Custom Field called Project Approval Date, and use it
                          to record the date on which a project is approved.
         Duration         Use custom duration fields to define a duration. These are frequently
                          defined as calculations that use custom formulas. For example, a custom
                          duration field can enable your organization to define a way for a project
                          manager to show and store the difference between a project’s original
                          schedule and the actual schedule.
         Flag             Use custom flag fields to define anything that can have only two choices
                          for defining the data. For example, you might use a flag field to determine
                          whether to display a field or to enable a macro that controls whether a
                          particular set of data will be available in the project.
         Number           Use custom number fields to define any numeric set of data or to perform
                          a custom calculation by using a custom formula. For example, you might
                          use a task-level field to record the estimated lines of code in a software
                          development project or to compare a project’s actual cost to its proposed
                          cost.
         Text             Use custom text fields to define simple, non-hierarchical, alphanumeric
56 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide


         Attribute             Description
                               data. For example, you can create a custom text field called Project Status
                               that includes options such as Initiated, Approved, In-Progress, Suspended,
                               Cancelled, and Closed.


    Custom Attributes
    When you select a Project Text custom field, you have the option of specifying one or multiple
    lines of text for the custom field.




    Custom Attributes - text
    The following table describes the custom text options.
         Attribute                             Description
         Single line of text                   Select if you want the custom field to be a single line of text.
                                               This option is available only for Project Text fields.
         Multiple lines of text                Select if you want the custom field to be multiple lines of
                                               text. This option is available only for Project Text fields. The
                                               project field created with this option is not visible in project
                                               information tab in Project Professional. This field however
                                               can be exposed via web based PDP page.

    You can choose to have a custom lookup table supply the values for a custom field. This allows
    you to control the values chosen for the custom field. You can:
     Choose whether to have a default value if no other is chosen
     Choose whether to allow multiple values to be selected from the lookup table
     Choose to restrict available values to those values in the table that have no subordinates
    The lookup table option is available when you have selected Text as the filed type.




    Custom Attributes – lookup table
Enterprise Data                                                                                                   57


    The following table describes the lookup table options for custom fields.
         Attribute                        Description
         Lookup Table                     The name of the Enterprise Custom Lookup Table that you
                                          want to associate with this custom field. Once you have
                                          associated a lookup table with a field and have saved it, you
                                          will not be able to remove the lookup table relationship.
                                          Therefore, make sure you need the lookup table before making
                                          this association.
         Choose a values to use as        If you want to have a default value included in this custom field
         a default when adding            in cases where the user does not specify one, select this check
         new items                        box, and then select the default value.
         Default value                    The default value to be used in this field when users do not
                                          specify a value. To set the value, click the browse button and
                                          select the desired value.
         Only allow codes with no         Select this option if you want to allow only values in the lookup
         subordinate values               table that have no subordinate values (that is, values at the
                                          lowest level of each branch).
         Allow multiple values to         Select this option if you want to allow users to select more than
         be selected from lookup          one value from the lookup table. Once this selection has been
         table                            made and saved, it cannot be removed.

    Note If you plan to create a custom field that will refer to a lookup table, create the lookup table before
    creating the custom field.

    You can use formulas to define your own parameters for how your Enterprise Custom Fields
    will measure data or present information when they are used in a project. Formulas cannot be
    used with all types of Enterprise Custom Fields.
    The formula option is available with all field types.
58 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide




    Custom Attributes - formula

    Note Once a formula is associated with a custom field, it can be edited but it cannot be removed.
     To use a known formula, type the formula in the Edit formula box.
     To add a field to the formula, click Pick field, point to a field type, and then click the
         name of the field that you want to reference. For example, Baseline Finish and Finish in
         this example. To reference an existing Enterprise Custom Field, point to a field type, point
         again to a custom field type (such as Custom Date or Custom Finish), and then click the
         Enterprise Custom Field that you want.




     To use a function in the formula, click Pick function, click a function type, and then click
         the function that you want. Each function includes placeholder arguments that you can
         replace with the fields and values that you want to use.
Enterprise Data                                                                                    59




     To build a formula by using a standard set of operators, click Pick operator and choose
         the operator that you need. The formula can operate by using referenced fields, functions,
         or literal data.




    The following table describes the formula options.
         Attribute                    Description
         Enter formula                Type the formula you want to use in the Enter formula text
                                      box.
         Insert field                 Use Insert field to insert a field (cost, date, duration, flag,
                                      number, or text) into the formula.
         Insert function              Use Insert function to insert a function (conversion, date/time,
                                      general, math, Microsoft Project, or text) into the formula.
         Insert operator              Use Insert operator to insert an operator (mathematical or
                                      Boolean) into the formula.


    Department
    You can select a department to be associated with a custom field. Selecting a department allows
    you to limit a user’s ability to see the custom field if they are not a member of that department.
    If you do not specify a department, then all users will be able to see the custom field.
60 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide




    Custom fields department selector
    The values available for Department are specified in the Department custom lookup table.

    Calculation for Summary Rows
    For entity types of Resource and Task, you can select options for the calculation of summary
    rows.




    Summary row calculation options
    Note that summary row calculation is not available with a field type of Text.
    The following table describes the options for summary task calculation.
         Attribute                 Description
         None                      Choose None if you do not want the custom field to be applied to
                                   summary and group summary rows.
         Rollup                    Choose Rollup to roll up the individual rows for the summary row.
         Use formula               Choose Use formula to use a specific formula to calculate the
                                   summary row. You must specify the formula to use under Custom
                                   Attributes.


    Calculation for Assignment Rows
    For resource types of Resource and Task, you choose to use a roll down calculation for
    assignment rows.




    The following table describes the options for calculating assignment rows.
Enterprise Data                                                                                       61



         Attribute                 Description
         None                      Choose None if you do not want to roll down assignment rows.
         Roll down, unless         Choose Roll down if you want data entered at task or resource level to
         manually specified        be rolled down and copied to each assignment with the same value.


    Values to Display
    You can choose to display raw data or to have the data represented graphically.




    Values to display - data
    If you choose Graphical indicators, you can choose different criteria for Non-summary rows,
    Summary rows, and, if you are using an entity type of Project, Project summary.




    Graphical indicators options
    When you choose an option, further configurable parameters specific to that option will be
    displayed.
    The following table describes the options for graphical indicators.
         Attribute                        Description
         Non-summary rows                 Choose Non-summary rows to specify criteria for graphical
                                          representation of data rows that are not summary rows.
         Summary rows                     Choose Summary rows to specify criteria for graphical
                                          representation of summary rows.
         Project summary                  Choose Project summary to specify criteria for graphical
                                          representation of the project summary.
    When you configure graphical indicators, you can specify the exact value and comparison
    parameters that determine when a particular graphic will be used. The available comparison
    (test) parameters are:
     Equals
62 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide


        Does not equal
        Is greater than
        Is greater than or equal to
        Is less than
        Is less than or equal to
        Is within
        Is not within
        Contains
        Does not contain
        Contains exactly
        Is any value
    These are used to compare the data value with a threshold value that you specify to determine
    which graphic to display. For example, you can configure values greater than or equal to 50 to
    display a green indicator and values less than 50 to display a red indicator.




    Graphical indicators
    You can specify as many different images for different values as required. Add a new row to the
    table for each test/value comparison. Rows in the table will be evaluated from top to bottom
    and the image associated with the first row where the test/value combination is true will be
    displayed.
    The following table describes the graphical indicator options for non-summary rows.
         Attribute                  Description
Enterprise Data                                                                                       63


         Attribute              Description
         Test                   Choose the operator (equals, less than, etc.) to apply to the field
                                value to determine the image to use.
         Values                 Type the field value or a field reference (e.g., [cost]) that, combined
                                with the operator in the test column, determines when to use the
                                image in the Image column.
         Image                  Choose the image to display when the test/value combination is
                                true.
         Move                   Use the move buttons to move a row up or down in the table.
         Show data values in    Select the Show data values in ToolTips to show the field value in
         ToolTips               the tool tip associated with the image.

    When using graphical indicators for summary rows, you can choose to inherit the graphical
    indicator settings that you have defined for non-summary rows.




    Graphical indicators – summary rows
    If you select the Inherit criteria from non-summary rows check box when configuring
    graphical indicators for summary rows, the graphical indicator parameters you configured for
    the non-summary rows will be used.




    Graphical indicators – project summary
    If you select the Inherit criteria from summary rows check box when configuring graphical
    indicators for project summary, the graphical indicator parameters you configured for the
    summary rows will be used.

    Behavior
    You can configure a custom field to be controlled by workflow or to require a value.
64 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide




    Behavior options
    If you choose to have the custom field controlled by a workflow, the required field option will
    not be available since that behavior will be controlled by workflow.
    The following table describes the options for configuring custom field behavior.
         Attribute                        Description
         Behavior controlled by           Select this check box if you want the custom field behavior to
         workflow                         be controlled by workflow.
         Require that this field has      Choose whether you want this to be a required field (that is, the
         information                      field cannot be left blank). This option is not available if the
                                          Behavior controlled by workflow option is selected.


    Creating Enterprise Custom Lookup Tables
    Consider using custom lookup tables for any Enterprise Custom Field for which
    standardization of data is the most important factor. For example, it might not be a good
    practice to allow users to enter any integer value in a custom Status field. One project manager
    might enter Started, and another might enter In-Progress, both indicating that the project has
    begun and is underway. Without using lookup tables, it is difficult to standardize terminology in
    your organization.
    For example, you might create a custom text field that is associated with Resources. To do this,
    you click the Resource option, select Text from the list, and rename it Manager. If you do not
    specify a lookup table for this custom text field, a user can enter any text value in the Manager
    field.
Enterprise Data                                                                               65




    New custom lookup table page
    The New Lookup table page allows you to specify the options for a custom lookup table. Use
    the following procedure to create a new enterprise custom lookup table.
 To create Enterprise Custom Fields
  1. On the PWA Server Settings page, click Enterprise Custom fields and Lookup Tables.
    2. Under Lookup Tables for Custom Fields, click New Field.
    3. Type a name for the lookup table in the Name box.
    4. Fill out the New Custom Field page with the custom field options that you want to use. See
       the descriptions for each field in the following sections.
    5. Click Save.
66 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide


    Type
    You must specify a data type for each lookup table. It is not possible to mix field types within a
    table.




    Lookup table types
    The table below describes the options for data types within a custom lookup table.
         Attribute                 Description
         Cost                      Each field in the table will be a cost value.
         Date                      Each field in the table will be a date value.
         Duration                  Each value in the table will be treated as a duration.
         Number                    Each value in the table will be a number.
         Text                      Each value in the table will be text. Choosing Text also allows a
                                   hierarchy of values to be specified if desired.


    Code Mask
    The code mask option only appears when a field type of Text has been selected.




    Code mask options
    The code mask allows you to specify what type of text characters will appear in the lookup
    table, the length of the string, and what characters to use to separate levels in a hierarchy. If you
Enterprise Data                                                                                    67


    are creating a hierarchical lookup table, you must specify a code mask for each level of the
    hierarchy.
    The following table describes the options available for configuring code masks.
         Attribute         Description
         Code preview      Displays a preview of the code mask for the table.
         Sequence          Specify the type of text characters to allow. Choose Numbers, Uppercase
                           characters, Lowercase characters, or Characters.
         Length            Specify the maximum length of the string. Choose a number from 1 to
                           255 or Any.
         Separator         Specify from one to three characters to use as a separator between
                           levels of the table hierarchy.


    Lookup Table
    Use the Lookup Table section of the New Lookup table page to specify the values in the
    lookup table.




    Lookup table options
    Type each that you want in the lookup table in the Value column. Create as many rows as
    needed to accommodate the values that you want to include. Optionally, include a description
    for the value in the Description column.
    The following table describes the options for creating lookup table values.
         Attribute      Description
68 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide


         Attribute        Description
         Level            Denotes the level in the hierarchy. This is a read-only field. Select the row
                          and use the Indent and Outdent buttons to change levels.
         Value            The value of the field.
         Description      An optional description of what the field represents.
         Move             Use the Move buttons to change the position of rows in the table. Select the
                          row and click the Up or Down Move button to move a row.
         Display          Use the display order options do specify how to sort the lookup table. If you
         order for        choose By row number, the table will remain sorted as you specify it. If you
         lookup table     choose to sort ascending or descending, the table will be sorted based on the
                          values in the Value column.



Departments
    The Department field is a new feature for Project Server 2010. Both projects and resources can
    have departments. The main purpose of departments is to act as a filter for what custom fields
    are displayed to users within given areas of Microsoft Project Professional 2010 and PWA.
    Departments allow for different business units to define and make visible their own set of
    custom fields. Departments are also used to filter OLAP databases so that only the data for that
    department is loaded.
    When configuring a cube, you can specify both the project and resource departments so that
    the database data is filtered based on these criteria. These values are specified in the OLAP
    Database Build Settings page.
    Also, within the OLAP database configuration, you can add the Project department field as a
    dimension to the Project and Tasks cubes. And you can add the Resource department field as a
    dimension to the Resource cube as long as the department field has not been converted to a
    multi-value field.
    With Project Server 2010, departmental custom fields help relieve the problem of too much
    information and too many choices. Departments help you manage the custom field list, and
    help you define, at a resource, task, or project level, which fields are required or not required.
    In Microsoft Office Project Server 2007 all custom fields are globally scoped, which means the
    fields are available to all users. In Project Server 2010, fields can be globally scoped or they can
    be scoped to a specific department.
    Departmental fields enable two primary functions:
     Filtering custom fields so that a user sees, by default, only those fields that are either global
       to the system or in the department that the user belongs to.
     Controlling which fields require input.
Enterprise Data                                                                                                69


    Example of departments in use
         Field                        Scope                      Department                 Required?
         ProjectCustomText1           Global                     -                          No
         ProjectCustomText2           Global                     -                          Yes
         ProjectCustomText3           Department                 Marketing                  No
         ProjectCustomText4           Department                 Marketing                  Yes
         ProjectCustomText5           Department                 Development                Yes
         ProjectCustomText6           Department                 Development                No

    If John Woods belongs to the Development department, then when he views areas of the
    product that have departmental custom fields enabled, he will see:
     ProjectCustomText1
     ProjectCustomText2
     ProjectCustomText5
     ProjectCustomText6
    John will be required to enter data into ProjectCustomText2 and ProjectCustomText5.
    Cindy White belongs to the Marketing department; when she views areas of the product that
    have departmental custom fields enabled, she will see:
     ProjectCustomText1
     ProjectCustomText2
     ProjectCustomText3
     ProjectCustomText4
    Cindy will be required to enter data into ProjectCustomText2 and ProjectCustomText4.
    By default, departments filter the list of custom fields that John Woods and Cindy White see.
    But the filter does not prevent them from viewing custom fields assigned to the other
    departments.
    Important Departmental fields are not tied into security. You cannot use them with security categories
    and groups to enable or disable fields and their functions. Instead, their main purpose is to filter out
    fields which are not useful for the target user.

    Department considerations for cubes
         Which cubes are                No project department          Project department specified
         filtered by which value        specified
         No resource department         All data is loaded for all     Project non-timephased cube
         specified                      cubes                          Task non-timephased cube
                                                                       Issues cube
                                                                       Risks cube
70 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide


         Which cubes are                No project department    Project department specified
         filtered by which value        specified
                                                                 Deliverables cube
                                                                 MSP_Project_WSS virtual cube
                                                                 MSP_Project_Timesheet virtual cube
                                                                 MSP_Portfolio_Analyzer virtual cube
                                                                 Assignment non-timephased cube
                                                                 Assignment timephased cube
                                                                 EPM timesheet cube
         Resource department            Assignment non-          Filtered by Project Department:
         specified                      timephased cube                 Project non-timephased cube
                                                                        Task non-timephased cube
                                        Assignment timephased           Issues cube
                                        cube
                                                                        Risks cube
                                        Resource non-
                                                                        Deliverables cube
                                        timephased cube                 MSP_Project_WSS virtual
                                                                         cube
                                        Resource timephased
                                        cube                     Filtered by Resource & Project
                                                                 Department:
                                        Timesheet cube                Assignment non-timephased
                                                                         cube
                                        MSP_Project_Timesheet           Assignment timephased cube
                                        virtual cube                    EPM timesheet cube
                                                                        MSP_Project_Timesheet
                                        MSP_Portfolio_Analyzer           virtual cube
                                        virtual cube                    MSP_Portfolio_Analyzer
                                                                         virtual cube

                                                                 Filtered by Resource Department:
                                                                      Resource no- timephased
                                                                         cube
                                                                        Resource timephased cube
                                                                        Timesheet cube
Enterprise Data                                                                                         71


    Cubes include assignments for resources in projects that belong to other departments or to no
    department. This ensures that all data is present when examining data such as a department's
    resources full calendar capacity.
    The subset of projects and resources will be used to filter at the project and timesheet level as
    follows:
    Project non-timephased:
     The data in this cube will be filtered by the departmental project list.
     Projects with assignments to the department’s resources will be included.
    Task non-timephased:
     Non-departmental tasks with assignments to the department's resources will be included.
        The full non-departmental project will not be included.
     All tasks for departmental projects will be included.
    Assignment non-timephased:
     Non-departmental project assignments for the department’s resources will be included.
     All assignments for departmental projects will be included.
    Assignment timephased:
     Non-departmental project assignments for the department's resources will be included.
     All assignments for departmental projects will be included.
    Deliverables:
     All deliverables owned by the filtered list of projects will be included.
     All deliverables to which the filtered list subscribes and the projects/tasks that subscribe to
        the filtered list's deliverables will be included.
     All deliverables offered by non-departmental projects that are subscribed to by
        departmental projects will be included.
    Issues:
     Issues connected to the filtered list of projects and tasks will be included.
    Risks:
     Risks connected to the filtered list of projects and tasks will be included.
    Resource non-timephased:
     Resources in the departmental list will be included.
    Resource timephased:
     Resources in the departmental list will be included.
    Timesheet:
     Timesheets for departmental list resources will be included.
72 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide


    EPM Timesheet:
     Timesheets for departmental list resources will be included.
     Task assignments from projects outside the department will be included.
    Resources are described in three ways in the OLAP databases:
     Fact focus (timesheets, capacity)
     Associated with Facts (project task assignments)
     Owning Facts (project owner, issue owner, assignment owner)
    The departmental resource list is used to filter facts with focus (Timesheets). Consequently, a
    non-departmental resource will never have any timesheets or capacity in the OLAP database if
    the database has a resource filter. However the non-departmental resource will be in the
    Resource List dimension if it has association with a departmental project, and will only have the
    relevant assignment facts.
    Resources who own things that have separate dimensions (that is, Assignment Owner) do not
    have to be in the resource list. The Resource List dimension for a specific OLAP database
    contains:
     The departmental resources
     All resources with assignments to departmental projects

    Configuring departments
    Departments are configured using a built in Enterprise Custom Lookup Table called
    Departments. By configuring values in this table, you can define a hierarchy of departments for
    your organization.
Enterprise Data                                                                                 73




    Department custom lookup table
    Use the following procedure to add initial values to the Department custom lookup table or to
    modify it.
 To modify the Department lookup table
  1. On the PWA Server Settings page, click Enterprise Custom Fields and Lookup Tables.
    2. On the Enterprise Custom Fields and Lookup Tables page, under Lookup Tables for
       Custom Fields, click Department.
    3. In the Code Mask section, create a code mask for each level of the hierarchy that you plan
       to have for the Department lookup table:
       a. In the Sequence column, choose Characters from the dropdown list.




         b.   Keep the defaults for the Length and Separator columns.
74 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide




    4.   In the Lookup Table section, type a Value and optionally a Description for each
         Department.




    5.   If you are creating a hierarchy with more than one level, use the Indent and Outdent
         buttons to change the level values for each department as required for you hierarchy.




    6.   Click Save.



The Resource Breakdown Structure (RBS)
    The Resource Breakdown Structure (RBS) is a hierarchical structure typically based on the
    management reporting structure of your organization, although it can also be structured in
    other ways. The RBS can be an important element in your Project Server security model when
    it is used to define the reporting relationships among users and projects in your organization.
    When you specify an RBS value for each Project Server user, you can take advantage of the
    dynamic security options that can be defined for each security category.
Enterprise Data                                                                                  75




    RBS custom lookup table
    The RBS structure is defined by adding values to the RBS custom lookup table that is built in
    to Project Server 2010. Once you define the structure, you can assign RBS values to individual
    users by setting the RBS property in the user's account settings page.
    Once the RBS is configured, Categories can use RBS codes to dynamically determine which
    projects and resources particular users can view or access.
    Dynamic filtering based on RBS code can be applied to projects in the following ways:
     Users can see projects owned by their descendants in the RBS
     Users can see projects on which their descendants in the RBS are a resource
     Users can see projects owned by other users with the same RBS value
    Dynamic filtering based on RBS can applied to resources in the following ways:
     Users can see their descendants in the RBS
     Users can see their direct descendants in the RBS
     Users can see other users with the same RBS value
    Use the following procedure to create a new Resource Breakdown Structure or to modify an
    existing one.
 To modify the Resource Breakdown Structure
  1. On the PWA Server Settings page, click Enterprise Custom Fields and Lookup Tables.
    2. On the Enterprise Custom Fields and Lookup Tables page, under Lookup Tables for
       Custom Fields, click RBS.
    3. In the Code Mask section, create a code mask for each level of the hierarchy that you plan
       to have for the Department lookup table:
76 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide


         a.   In the Sequence column, choose Characters from the dropdown list.




         b.   Keep the defaults for the Length and Separator columns.




    4.   In the Lookup Table section, type a Value and optionally a Description for each
         Department.




    5.   If you are creating a hierarchy with more than one level, use the Indent and Outdent
         buttons to change the level values for each department as required for you hierarchy.
Enterprise Data                                                                                      77




    6.   Click Save.




Enterprise Global
    The Enterprise Global setting allows you to make changes to the Enterprise Global file in
    Project Professional 2010. The Enterprise Global file contains all custom enterprise objects
    that are available to your users (for example, views, tables, groups, filters, and reports). When a
    Project Professional user connects to Project Server 2010, the latest version of the Enterprise
    Global file is loaded and cached on the client computer. This allows the user to access all
    enterprise custom objects available on the server.
    Through the Enterprise Global file, you are able to enforce standards in your organization that
    can be applied to all project and resources that work with Project Server data. By using views,
    tables, filters, and other related elements contains in the Enterprise Global file, you can help to
    ensure effective standardization in your organization.
78 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide




    Decisions regarding what to include in the Enterprise Global file should be made at an
    organizational level. You should check with your Project Management Office (PMO) before
    making any significant changes to the Enterprise Global file.
         Note To be able to modify the Enterprise Global file, you must have the Save Enterprise Global
         permission Project Server 2010.



To open the Enterprise Global file through the Enterprise Global setting:
    1. On the Quick Launch, under Settings, click Server Settings.
    2. On the Server Settings page, under Enterprise Data, click Configure Project
         Professional.
    3. Project Professional will open the Enterprise Global file. The name of the project in the
         title bar will be “Checked-out Enterprise Global”.
    4. Make changes to your custom objects through your Enterprise Global file.
    5. After you have completed your changes, click File, and then click Save.
    6. After Save has completed successfully, click File, and then click Close.
    7. A dialog box will display asking if you would like to check-in the Enterprise Global file.
         Click Yes.
Enterprise Data                                                                                                  79




    Note If users have Project Professional open when an updated Enterprise Global file is checked in to
    the server, the changes in the updated Enterprise Global file will not be available until Project
    Professional is closed and reopened.



    Important Make sure not to add into the Enterprise Global file any view, table, filter, grouping, reports,
    etc. that has the same name as an element that exists natively in Project. Verify that you give any new
    enterprise-wide elements a unique name that does not conflict.



Enterprise Calendars
    Enterprise calendars capture the predefined working hours, holidays, and other schedule details
    within an organization. They are used to standardize the working time for all of an
    organization’s projects. In Project Web App, you can view a list of existing calendars, select a
    calendar to edit, or begin the process of creating a new calendar. However, to create or modify
    a calendar, you must have Project Professional 2010 installed on the computer that you are
    using to access Project Web App.
80 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide



    Create a New Calendar
    Project Server uses a standard enterprise calendar for scheduling, by default. Some
    organizations may use multiple calendars. For example, if some of your organization’s
    employees work in another country, those workers will likely observe different holidays, and so
    will need a different enterprise calendar for scheduling project work. You can create a new,
    blank enterprise calendar using Project Web App and Project Professional 2010.
    To create a new, blank enterprise calendar
    1. On the Quick Launch, under Settings, click Server Settings.
    2. On the Server Settings page, under Enterprise Data, click Enterprise Calendars.
    3. On the Enterprise Calendars page, click New Calendar.




    4.   On the Windows Security dialog box, type your user name and password to connect to
         Project Server through Project Professional 2010, and then click OK.
         Note If you are using integrated Windows authentication and your Internet Explorer settings are
         set to automatically log you on, or if Project is already connected to the server using the correct
         profile, then you will not be prompted for credentials.




         Project Professional 2010 opens and displays the Change Working Time dialog box.
    5.   Type a name for the new calendar in the For calendar box.
Enterprise Data                                                                                   81




    6. Use the calendar with the Exceptions and Work Weeks tabs to modify the working and
       nonworking times for your organization. For more information, see the “Modify Working
       and Nonworking Times” section of this guide.
    7. Click OK on the Change Working Time dialog box to save the new calendar to Project
       Server.
    8. Close Project Professional 2010.

    Copy an Existing Calendar
    If an existing calendar has many of the same holidays and other calendar items that you want to
    use in a new calendar, you can base a new calendar on an existing calendar. Copy the existing
    calendar in Project Web App, and then modify the copy in Project Professional 2010. For
    example, if the standard calendar in your organization captures all of your organization’s unique
    holidays and events, but you need a separate calendar to reflect a 24/7 working schedule, you
    can copy the standard calendar and then modify it for the 24/7 schedule.
    To create a new calendar as a copy of an existing calendar
    1. On the Quick Launch, under Settings, click Server Settings.
    2. On the Server Settings page, under Enterprise Data, click Enterprise Calendars.
    3. Click the row containing the calendar you want to copy, and then click Copy Calendar.




    4.   On the Copy Calendar dialog box, type a name for the new calendar in the Name box,
         and then click OK. The calendar is added to the list on the Enterprise Calendars page.
82 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide




    5.   Click the row containing the new, copied calendar, and then click Edit Calendar.




         If the Windows Security dialog box appears, log on to Project Server.
       Project Professional 2010 opens and displays the Change Working Time dialog box.
    6. Use the calendar with the Exceptions and Work Weeks tabs to modify the working and
       nonworking times for your organization. For more information, see the “Modify Working
       and Nonworking Times” section of this guide.
    7. Click OK on the Change Working Time dialog box to save the new calendar to Project
       Server.
    8. Close Project Professional 2010.

    Edit an Existing Calendar
    As you are initially configuring Project Server, you can modify the default standard enterprise
    calendar to account for the working and nonworking times observed by your organization. You
    can modify any enterprise calendar at any time by selecting the calendar in Project Web App,
    and making changes in Project Professional 2010.
To modify an existing enterprise calendar
    1. On the Quick Launch, under Settings, click Server Settings.
    2. On the Server Settings page, under Enterprise Data, click Enterprise Calendars.
    3. Click the row containing the calendar you want to change, and then click Edit Calendar.
Enterprise Data                                                                                       83




         If the Windows Security dialog box appears, log on to Project Server.
       Project Professional 2010 opens and displays the Change Working Time dialog box.
    4. Use the calendar with the Exceptions and Work Weeks tabs to modify the working and
       nonworking times for your organization. For more information, see the “Modify Working
       and Nonworking Times” section of this guide.
    5. Click OK on the Change Working Time dialog box to save the new calendar to Project
       Server.
    6. Close Project Professional 2010.

    Delete a Calendar
    If you find your organization is not using a specific enterprise calendar, you can easily delete it
    in Project Web App.
    To delete an enterprise calendar
    1. On the Quick Launch, under Settings, click Server Settings.
    2. On the Server Settings page, under Enterprise Data, click Enterprise Calendars.
    3. Click the row containing the calendar you want to delete, and then click Delete Calendar.




    4.   When prompted, click OK to delete the selected calendar.
         Note If the calendar is currently in use, a notification will appear.
84 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide



    Modify Working and Nonworking Times
    When working with calendars in Project Professional 2010, there are a few different things you
    can do to accurately account for working and nonworking time in your organization. The
    following sections provide examples for each type of change, and walk you through the steps
    involved with making each change.

    Change a working day into a nonworking day
    Occasionally, you may need to turn a working day into a nonworking day. For example, if your
    organization observes specific days as holidays, you can turn those holidays into nonworking
    days. Project Server will not schedule work on nonworking days.
    To change a working day into a nonworking day
    1. Click the date on the calendar that you want to turn into a nonworking day.




    2.   On the Exceptions tab, type a name for the nonworking day in the Name column. The
         Start and Finish columns are automatically populated with the date you clicked in Step 1.
Enterprise Data                                                                                             85




         Note While you can create multiple exceptions that contain a specific day, only the lowest-level
         exception will apply on that day. For example, you might have one exception that changes the
         standard working times for a month, and another exception that calls out a specific day within
         that month as a nonworking day. Because the single-day exception is at a lower level than the
         month-long exception, the single nonworking day exception will be applied on that day. You
         cannot create multiple single-day exceptions on the same day.


    Change a nonworking day into a working day
    There may be times when your organization has to work on what would otherwise be a
    nonworking day. For example, say your organization participates in a convention each year that
    takes place over a weekend. You can turn the weekend days of the convention into working
    days, so that Project Server knows to schedule work on those days.
    To change a nonworking day into a working day
    1. Click the date on the calendar that you want to turn into a nonworking day.
86 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide




    2.   On the Exceptions tab, type a name for the working day in the Name column, and then
         press Enter.




         Note While you can create multiple exceptions that contain a specific day, only the lowest-level
         exception will apply on that day. For example, you might have one exception that changes the
         standard working times for a month, and another exception that calls out a specific day within
         that month as a nonworking day. Because the single-day exception is at a lower level than the
         month-long exception, the single nonworking day exception will be applied on that day. You
         cannot create multiple single-day exceptions on the same day.
Enterprise Data                                                                                             87


    3.   Click the row you added for the working day, and then click Details.




    4.   Under Set working times for these exceptions, click Working times, and then set the
         working times for that day by adjusting the times in the From and To columns.




    5.   If your organization observes these working times on a regular basis (for example, once a
         month or once a year), under Recurrence pattern, choose whether these times should
         recur Daily, Weekly, Monthly, or Yearly, and then set the following options:
          Daily Set the frequency for these working times. For example, every 10 days.
             Tip If you find that the working day exception is happening very frequently, you may find it
             easier to change the default calendar options under Schedule on the Project Options dialog
             box in Project Professional 2010. All calendars begin with these default days and times. It
             may be easier to change the default calendar options than to set up exceptions that recur
             frequently.




            Weekly Specify how often you want the working times to recur, and on what day of
             the week you want them to recur. For example, every two weeks on Saturday.
88 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide




             Monthly Choose what day of the month and at what monthly frequency you want
              the working times to recur. For example, day 15 of every 3 months, or the third
              Saturday of every 6 months.




             Yearly Choose what day of the year you want the working times to recur. For
              example, August 21, or the third Saturday of July.




    6.   Under Range of recurrence, choose the period when you want the recurrence to take
         place, if appropriate.
          Start Choose the date when you want the recurrence pattern to begin.
          End after If you want the recurrence to happen only a set number of times, choose
             End after, and then type the number of instances when the working times should
             occur.
          End by If you want the recurrence to happen only during a certain time period,
             choose End by, and then choose when the recurrence should stop.




    7.   Click OK.
Enterprise Data                                                                                    89


    Change the working times for a working day
    While the specific days on the calendar may be accurately accounted for as working and
    nonworking, there may be working days that use a different time schedule than the typical 8-
    hour work day. You can adjust the working times for a specific working day so that work is
    accurately scheduled on that day.
    To change the working times for a working day
    1. Click the date on the calendar for the working day that you want to adjust.




    2.   On the Exceptions tab, type a name for the changed working day in the Name column,
         and then press Enter.
90 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide




              Note While you can create multiple exceptions that contain a specific day, only the lowest-
              level exception will apply on that day. For example, you might have one exception that
              changes the standard working times for a month, and another exception that calls out a
              specific day within that month as a nonworking day. Because the single-day exception is at
              a lower level than the month-long exception, the single nonworking day exception will be
              applied on that day. You cannot create multiple single-day exceptions on the same day.

    3.   Click the row you added for the changed working day, and then click Details.




    4.   Under Set working times for these exceptions, click Working times, and then set the
         working times for that day by adjusting the times in the From and To columns.
Enterprise Data                                                                                      91




    5.   If your organization observes these working times on a regular basis (for example, once a
         month or once a year), under Recurrence pattern, choose whether these times should
         recur Daily, Weekly, Monthly, or Yearly, and then set the following options:
          Daily Set the frequency for these working times. For example, every 10 days.




            Weekly Specify how often you want the working times to recur, and on what day of
             the week you want them to recur. For example, every two weeks on Saturday.




            Monthly Choose what day of the month and at what monthly frequency you want
             the working times to recur. For example, day 15 of every 3 months, or the third
             Saturday of every 6 months.
92 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide




             Yearly Choose what day of the year you want the working times to recur. For
              example, August 21, or the third Saturday of July.




    6.   Under Range of recurrence, choose the period when you want the recurrence to take
         place, if appropriate.
          Start Choose the date when you want the recurrence pattern to begin.
          End after If you want the recurrence to happen only a set number of times, choose
             End after, and then type the number of instances when the working times should
             occur.
          End by If you want the recurrence to happen only during a certain time period,
             choose End by, and then choose when the recurrence should stop.




    7.   Click OK.

    Change the working times for each day of a work week
    If your organization has a specific work week (or set of work weeks) when the working times
    are different from the default, you can make those changes to the working times for each day in
    a work week, during a set period of time. For example, if your organization does not use the
    default Monday through Friday, 8am to 5pm schedule, you can change the working times for
    each day in the work week to reflect your organization’s accurate schedule.
    To change the working times for each day of a work week
    1. Click the date on the calendar when you want the changed working times to begin.
Enterprise Data                                                                                     93




    2.   On the Work Weeks tab, type a name for the changed work week(s) in the Name column,
         and then press Enter.




    3.   Change the date in the Finish column for the row you just added, to reflect the last day
         that you want to include in the changed work week(s).
94 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide




    4.   Click Details.




    5.   Under Select day(s), click the day of the week that you want to use adjusted working
         times. Press Ctrl and click, or press Shift and click to select multiple days.




    6.   If you want to turn the selected day(s) into nonworking time, click Set days to
         nonworking time.




    7.   If you want to change the working times for the selected day(s), click Set day(s) to these
         specific working times, and then set the working times by typing in the From and To
         columns.
Enterprise Data                                                                                      95




    8.   Click OK.




Resource Center
    The Resource Center is a view in Project Web App that can be used to create new resources
    and modify existing ones. It can be accessed from the Server Settings page.
    Tip Depending on how your organization has Project Web App configured, you may also be able to
    access the Resource Center from the Quick Launch.


    Create a New Resource
    When you create a new Project Server user, you can choose to also make that user a resource.
    However, sometimes you may want to create a resource that cannot log on to Project Server.
    For example, you may want to add a material resource, such as a conference room, that has no
    need to be able to log on to Project Server. Project managers can still assign the resource to
    work, but if there is not any work to track, and the project manager can account for when the
    resource is actually used, there is not a need for that resource to also be a user.
    To create a new resource
    1. On the Quick Launch, under Settings, click Server Settings.
    2. On the Server Settings page, under Enterprise Data, click Resource Center.
    3. On the Resources tab, in the Editing group, click New Resource.
96 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide




    4.   In the Type section, complete the following:
          Type Choose whether you are creating a Work, Material, or Cost resource.
          Budget If the resource is a budget resource, select the Budget check box.
          Generic If the resource is generic, meaning that you will use it for planning purposes
             and replace it with at least one named resource further in the planning process, select
             the Generic check box.




    5.   In the Identification Information section, complete the following:
          Resource can logon to Project Server Select this check box if you want the
             resource to also be a Project Web App user.
          Display Name Type the resource’s name in this box. This field is required.
          E-mail address If this resource has an e-mail address that he or she wants associated
             with project work, type the address in this box.
          RBS If your organization uses a resource breakdown structure (RBS), click the button
             next to this field and choose the appropriate RBS code for this resource from the list.
          Initials This field is automatically populated with the resource’s initials, based on the
             name typed in the Display Name box. If you want to use different initials to refer to
             this resource, type them in the Initials box.
          Hyperlink Name If this resource has an associated Web site, type the name of that
             site in this box.
          Hyperlink URL If this resource has an associated Web site, type the URL to that
             site in this box.
Enterprise Data                                                                                         97




    6.   In the Assignment Attributes section, complete the following:
          Resource can be leveled If you want to enable project managers to balance this
             resource’s workload based on his or her availability and assignments (leveling), select
             this check box.
          Base Calendar Choose the calendar that most closely represents this resource’s
             overall availability. For example, if your organization has a base calendar that accounts
             for specific holidays or events, you can set that as this resource’s calendar, and work
             assigned to this resource will be scheduled around the calendar’s nonworking days.
          Default Booking Type Choose whether you want this resource to be Committed
             or Proposed when assigning work.
          Timesheet manager Type the name of the person who approves or rejects this
             resource’s timesheets, or click Browse to choose the timesheet manager from a list.
             Resources may not have separate timesheet managers.
          Default Assignment Owner Type the name of the person who approves or rejects
             this resource’s task progress, or click Browse to choose the assignment owner from a
             list. Resources may not have separate assignment owners. For example, if the resource
             is a conference room, and the project manager tracks the amount of time that the
             conference room is used, the assignment owner may be the project manager.
             Tip You can set the assignment owner within the project on an assignment-by-assignment
             basis.

            Earliest Available Choose the date when the resource becomes available to assign to
             tasks, if appropriate. If the resource does not have a set period of availability (that is, if
             he or she is always available), leave this blank.
98 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide


              Note The earliest and latest available dates correspond to the resource availability dates
              for a resource, as seen in Project Professional.

             Latest Available Choose the last date that the resource is available to work on tasks,
              if appropriate. If the resource does not have a set period of availability (that is, if he or
              she is always available), leave this blank.
             Standard Rate Type the resource’s standard pay rate in this box.
             Overtime Rate Type the resource’s overtime pay rate in this box.
             Current Max. Units (%) Specify the maximum amount of time that a resource is
              available for work, as a percentage. For example, if the resource is available full-time,
              type 100%. If the resource is available half-time, type 50%.
             Cost/Use If the resource has a flat fee associated with each use, type that cost in this
              box. For example, a van rental may require a flat fee upfront, with an added standard
              cost per mile. The flat fee is its cost per use.
Enterprise Data                                                                                             99




    7.   In the Departments section, click the button next to the Resource Departments box,
         and choose which department(s) the resource is associated with. If the resource is not
         associated with a particular department, leave this blank.
         Tip Associating a resource with a department narrows down what the resource sees when
         using Project Web App. It can help the resource find what he or she is looking for more quickly,
         by removing things from other departments that do not apply to his or her work.




    8.   If your organization created codes for grouping and costing purposes, in the Group Fields
         section, complete the following:
          Group Type the name of the group in this box.
          Code Type the code for the group in this box.
          Cost Center Type the cost center code for the group in this box.
100 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide


             Cost Type Click the button next to the Cost Type field, and then choose the type of
              cost associated with this group.




    9.   In the Team Details section, click the button next to the Team Name box, and choose
         which team the resource belongs to, if appropriate. If the resource will be managing and
         delegating tasks that are assigned to the team, select the Team Assignment Pool check
         box.
         Tip Some organizations create a generic resource for each team, so that tasks assigned to the
         team first go to the generic resource. This way, no single resource takes on the task assignment
         before it is appropriately delegated. If you choose to use a generic resource in this way, set the
         assignment owner for the resource as the team manager, select the Team Assignment Pool
         check box, and choose the team from the Team Name list.




    10. In the System Identification Data section, type additional identifying information for the
         user in the External ID box, if appropriate.
         For example, your organization’s HR department may use employee ID numbers to track
         data in their HR systems. By providing that ID number in the External ID box, you
         identify an association between the resource that you are creating and the HR department’s
         employee data. The External ID box can also be used to facilitate the consolidation of
         reporting of resource use beyond what Project Server provides.
         Tip If you are not sure whether you should be capturing any data in the External ID box, check
         with other departments in your organization to find out if it would be useful to connect resource
         data with other systems, or simply leave this box blank.
Enterprise Data                                                                                                    101




    11. Click Save to create the new resource.
    Once a resource is added, you may find that you need to make changes to the resource’s
    information. Perhaps the resource had a rate change, or needs to use a different base calendar.
    To edit a resource
    1. On the Quick Launch, under Settings, click Server Settings.
    2. On the Server Settings page, under Enterprise Data, click Resource Center.
    3. Select the check box in the left column for the row containing the resource you are editing.
         Tip If your organization has a lot of resources and you cannot easily find the one you want to
         edit, you can filter the Resource Center. On the Resources tab, in the Data group, click Custom
         Filter in the Filter list. Identify the parameters for the resource you are editing, and then click OK.




    4.   On the Resources tab, in the Editing group, click Edit Resource.




    5.   Make changes to the resource data, as needed, and then click Save.
    In some cases, several resources may require the same change. For example, if several resources
    use the same timesheet manager, and that person takes a job elsewhere, you will need to replace
102 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide


    the timesheet manager for those resources with whoever steps in as a replacement. Project Web
    App supports bulk editing of several resources at once. You can bulk edit the Timesheet
    manager, Default Assignment Owner, RBS, Team Name, Cost Type, and Resource
    Departments fields.
    Tip Another good way to edit many resources simultaneously is by using Project Professional 2010. By
    making changes through the Project Professional 2010, you can add fields that you will not see if you
    make bulk changes through Project Server 2010, and you can also copy and paste from Microsoft Excel
    or another list.

    To make the same change to several resources simultaneously
    1. On the Quick Launch, under Settings, click Server Settings.
    2. On the Server Settings page, under Enterprise Data, click Resource Center.
    3. Select the check box in the left column for each row containing a resource you are editing.
    4. On the Resources tab, in the Editing group, click Bulk Edit.




    5.   For each field that you want to edit, select the Apply Changes check box, to the left of the
         field, and then make your changes.




         Tip If you are having trouble remembering which resources you are editing, expand the
         Resources Selected section. This section displays a list of all resources that will be changed
         when you click Save.




    6.   Click Save to save your changes to all selected resources.
Database Administration                                                                         103




3
Database Administration
    This chapter about Project Server 2010 Database Administration contains the following
    sections:
     Delete Enterprise Objects
     Force Check-in Enterprise Objects
     Daily Schedule Backup
     Administrative Backup and Restore
     OLAP Database Management

Delete Enterprise Objects
    You can delete enterprise objects from Project Server when they are no longer needed. You can
    delete the following types of objects from PWA:
     Projects
     Resources and users
     Status report responses
     Timesheets
     User delegates

    Delete projects
    When a project is no longer needed, you can delete it from Project Server. Note that this
    process deletes the project entirely from Project Server and it cannot be retrieved.
104 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide




    Delete project
    Use the following procedure to delete a project from Project Server.
    Important The project will be permanently deleted from Project Server.

 To delete a project
  1. On the PWA home page, click Server Settings.
    2. On the Server Settings page, under Database Administration, click Delete Enterprise
       Objects.
    3. On the Delete Enterprise Objects page, select the Projects option.
    4. Select one of the following options:
         Delete projects from Draft and Published databases to display a list of projects
           found in both the Draft and Published databases.
         Delete projects only from the Published database to display a list of projects in the
           Published database.
         Delete projects only from the Archived database to display a list of projects in the
           Archive database.
Database Administration                                                                                   105


    5.   To delete the associated SharePoint site, select the Delete the associated Microsoft
         SharePoint Foundation sites check box.
         Note If you do not delete the associate SharePoint site and you save and publish a new project
         with the same name as the deleted project, the SharePoint site publish process will fail.

    6.   Select the project that you want to delete.
    7.   Click Delete.

    Delete resources and users
    When a resource or user is no longer needed, you can delete it from Project Server.
    Important We recommend not deleting resources from Project Server as this can affect the reporting of
    actuals. Instead, deactivate resources that are no longer needed.




    Delete resources and users
    Use the following procedure to delete resources and users from Project Server.
    Important The resources and users will be permanently deleted from Project Server.

 To delete resources and users
  1. On the PWA home page, click Server Settings.
    2. On the Server Settings page, under Database Administration, click Delete Enterprise
       Objects.
    3. On the Delete Enterprise Objects page, select the Resources and Users option.
106 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide


    4. Select the user or resource that you want to delete.
    5. Click Delete.

    Delete status report responses
    When a status report response is no longer needed, you can delete it from Project Server. Note
    that this process deletes the status report response entirely from Project Server and it cannot be
    retrieved.




    Delete status report responses
    Use the following procedure to delete status report responses from Project Server.
 To delete status report responses
  1. On the PWA home page, click Server Settings.
    2. On the Server Settings page, under Database Administration, click Delete Enterprise
       Objects.
    3. On the Delete Enterprise Objects page, select the Status Report Responses option.
    4. Specify a period end date parameter (number of days, weeks, months, or years ago prior to
       which you want to delete all status report responses).
    5. Click Delete.

    Delete timesheets
    When a timesheet is no longer needed, you can delete it from Project Server. Note that this
    process deletes the timesheet entirely from Project Server and it cannot be retrieved.
Database Administration                                                                         107




    Delete timesheets
    Use the following procedure to delete timesheets from Project Server.
 To delete timesheets
  1. On the PWA home page, click Server Settings.
    2. On the Server Settings page, under Database Administration, click Delete Enterprise
       Objects.
    3. On the Delete Enterprise Objects page, select the Timesheets option.
    4. Select the range of timesheet end dates that you want to delete.
    5. Click Delete.

    Delete user delegates
    When a user delegate is no longer needed, you can delete it from Project Server. Note that this
    process deletes the user delegate entirely from Project Server and it cannot be retrieved.
108 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide




    Delete delegates
    Use the following procedure to delete user delegates from Project Server.
 To delete
  1. On the PWA home page, click Server Settings.
    2. On the Server Settings page, under Database Administration, click Delete Enterprise
       Objects.
    3. On the Delete Enterprise Objects page, select the User Delegates option.
    4. Specify a period end date parameter (number of days, weeks, months, or years prior to
       which you want to delete all user delegates).
    5. Click Delete.


Force Check-in Enterprise Objects
    If an enterprise object has been checked out and the user who checked it out is unavailable or
    unable to check it back in, you can force a check-in.
    Important If you force check-in an enterprise object that a user is modifying, the modifications may be
    lost.

    You can force check-in the following types of enterprise objects:
     Enterprise projects
     Enterprise resources
     Enterprise custom fields
     Enterprise calendars
     Lookup tables for enterprise custom fields
     Resource plans
Database Administration                                                                             109




    Enterprise object check-in options
    On the Force Check-in Enterprise Objects page in PWA Server Settings, choose the type of
    enterprise object that you want to check in to see a list of objects of that type that are checked
    out.

    Check-in Enterprise Projects
    You can force the check-in of an enterprise project that is checked out. Note that forcing a
    check-in of a project that is being modified by a user may result in the loss of those changes.
    We highly recommend that users check in projects normally and that you use force check-in
    only when absolutely necessary.




    Check in Enterprise Projects
    Use the following procedure to check in enterprise projects.
 To check in Enterprise Projects
  1. On the Server Settings page, click Force Check-in Enterprise Objects.
    2. From the Select the type of object you want to force check-in dropdown list, choose
       Enterprise Projects.
    3. Select the projects that you want to check in.
    4. Click Check In.
110 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide



    Check in Enterprise Resources
    You can force the check-in of an enterprise resource that is checked out. Note that forcing a
    check-in of a resource that is being modified by a user may result in the loss of those changes.




    Check in Enterprise Resources
    Use the following procedure to check in enterprise resources.
 To check in Enterprise Resources
  1. On the Server Settings page, click Force Check-in Enterprise Objects.
    2. From the Select the type of object you want to force check-in dropdown list, choose
       Enterprise Resources.
    3. Select the resources that you want to check in.
    4. Click Check In.

    Check in Enterprise Custom Fields
    You can force the check-in of an enterprise custom field that is checked out. Note that forcing
    a check-in of a custom field that is being modified by a user may result in the loss of those
    changes.




    Check in Enterprise Custom Field
    Use the following procedure to check in enterprise custom fields.
Database Administration                                                                             111


 To check in Enterprise Custom Fields
  1. On the Server Settings page, click Force Check-in Enterprise Objects.
    2. From the Select the type of object you want to force check-in dropdown list, choose
       Enterprise Custom Fields.
    3. Select the custom fields that you want to check in.
    4. Click Check In.

    Check in Enterprise Calendars
    You can force the check-in of an enterprise calendar that is checked out. Note that forcing a
    check-in of an enterprise calendar that is being modified by a user may result in the loss of
    those changes.




    Check in Enterprise Calendars
    Use the following procedure to check in enterprise calendars.
 To check in Enterprise Calendars
  1. On the Server Settings page, click Force Check-in Enterprise Objects.
    2. From the Select the type of object you want to force check-in dropdown list, choose
       Enterprise Calendars.
    3. Select the calendars that you want to check in.
    4. Click Check In.

    Check in Lookup Tables for Enterprise Custom Fields
    You can force the check-in of an enterprise lookup table that is checked out. Note that forcing
    a check-in of a lookup table that is being modified by a user may result in the loss of those
    changes.
112 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide




    Check in Lookup Tables for Enterprise Custom Fields
    Use the following procedure to check in lookup tables.
 To check in Lookup Tables for Enterprise Custom Fields
  1. On the Server Settings page, click Force Check-in Enterprise Objects.
    2. From the Select the type of object you want to force check-in dropdown list, choose
       Lookup Tables for Enterprise Custom Fields.
    3. Select the lookup tables that you want to check in.
    4. Click Check In.

    Check in Resource Plans
    You can force the check-in of an enterprise resource plan that is checked out. Note that forcing
    a check-in of a resource plan that is being modified by a user may result in the loss of those
    changes.




    Check in Resource Plans
    Use the following procedure to check in resource plans.
 To check in Resource Plans
  1. On the Server Settings page, click Force Check-in Enterprise Objects.
    2.   From the Select the type of object you want to force check-in dropdown list, choose
         Resource Plans.
Database Administration                                                                           113


    3. Select the resource plans that you want to check in.
    4. Click Check In.




Daily Schedule Backup
Daily Schedule Backup allows you to define your daily backup schedule to support item-level
restore. Item-level backup is designed to work with, not instead of, SQL Server database backups.



    Project Retention Policy Versions
    The Project Retention Policy sets the number of versions of daily backups that will be kept for
    item level restore. Increasing the project retention policy will affect your archive database. The
    more versions in the Project Retention Policy that you keep, the greater the disk space required.




    Project Retention Policy


    Items
    In this area you can select whether or not you want to schedule item level backups for Projects,
    Enterprise Resource Pool and Calendars, Enterprise Custom Fields, Enterprise Global, View
    Definitions, System settings, and Category and Group settings.




    Delete resources and users
    Use the following procedure to delete resources and users from Project Server.
114 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide


    Important The resources and users will be permanently deleted from Project Server.

 To schedule an item level backup
  1. On the PWA home page, click Server Settings.
    2.   On the Server Settings page, under Database Administration, click Daily Backup
         Schedule
    3.   On the Daily Backup Schedule page, set the Project Retention Policy to your desired
         number keeping in mind your disk storage capacity and backup needs.
    4.   Under Item change the Option dropdown from “Never” to “Schedule” for each item you
         would like to backup daily.
    5.   Under Time set the dropdown for the time for which you would like to have the system
         perform he daily backup.
    6.   Click Save.
Database Administration                                                                        115



Administrative Backup and Restore
Administrative Backup allows you to manually backup individual item-level objects to your archive
database. As an administrator, you can also restore items that have been accidentally deleted from
the database using Administrative Restore.



    Administrative Backup
    On this page you can manually select the items that you wish to have backed up.
    Items that can be backed up are: Projects, Enterprise Resource Pool and Calendars, Enterprise
    Custom Fields, Enterprise Global, View Definitions, System settings, and Category and Group
    settings.




    Items For Backup



 To Backup data manually
  1. On the PWA home page, click Server Settings.
    2. On the Server Settings page, under Database Administration, click Administrative
       Backup.
    3. In the Select Items section, select the check box next to each project item that you want
       to back up.
    4. Click Backup. The items that you selected are backed up immediately.



    Administrative Restore
    Here you can individually select backed up items that you wish to restore.
116 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide




    Delete resources and users
    Use the following procedure to delete resources and users from Project Server.
    Important The resources and users will be permanently deleted from Project Server.

 To restore project items manually
  1. On the PWA home page, click Server Settings.
    2. On the Server Settings page, under Database Administration, click Administrative
       Restore.
    3. In the Item list, select the item that you want to restore.
    4. If you selected Projects from the Item list, select the version of the project that you want to
       restore as the current working version of the project.
         Note The versions that are available for you to restore depend upon the number of backups
         that have been completed and the total number of backups that you have chosen to retain.




    Project Version Selection


    5.   Click Restore.
Database Administration                                                                         117



OLAP Database Management
    Through Microsoft Project Web App (PWA), multiple OLAP databases can be delivered that
    contain the specific resources, projects, and custom fields that each group within your
    organization requires for its particular group reporting needs.
    In Microsoft Project Server 2010, you can create multiple OLAP databases that have the
    following characteristics:
     They only contain data for projects and resources that they administer
     They only contain facts and dimensions that they select from the new integrated OLAP
         database management user interface
     They support departmental filtering to restrict which projects and resources are loaded into
         the OLAP database
     They include data for Inactive Tasks and User Scheduled Tasks
     They have support for Multiple Measure groups in a single OLAP database
     They contain field names in multiple languages to enable multi-language report creation
    Also, when a new OLAP database is created, the necessary Office Data Connections and Excel
    Reporting templates are created in the Business Intelligence Center in the Reports folder. This
    data-connected blank template will help you quickly create new reports that are based on the
    new OLAP database.

    Create an OLAP Cube
    OLAP cubes are managed on the OLAP Database Management page in Server Settings on a
    Microsoft Project Web App (PWA) site.
    To create an OLAP cube, you must have the Manage Cube Building Service Global Permission.
    Perform the following procedure to create a new OLAP cube.
    Use the following procedure to create an OLAP cube.
 To create an OLAP cube
  1. On the PWA home page, click Server Settings.
    2. On the Server Settings page, in the Database Administration section, click OLAP
       Database Management.
    3. On the OLAP Database Management page, click New.
    4. Configure the settings on the OLAP Database Build Settings page. See the following
       sections for details on each setting.
    5. Click Save.
118 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide


    Analysis Services Settings
    Use the Analysis Services Settings area to specify server and database name information along
    with, optionally, an extranet URL and description.




    Analysis Services Settings
    The following table describes the server and network settings for an OLAP cube.
         Attribute                              Description
         Analysis Services Server               The name of the instance of Microsoft SQL Server Analysis
                                                Services (SSAS) where you want to build the cube.
         Analysis Services Database to          The name of the database that you want to create.
         be created
         Extranet URL                           The URL for the extranet site.
         Description                            A description of this OLAP cube.


    Project Department
    Use the Project Department area to specify which department to use to filter project data in the
    OLAP cube.




    OLAP Department settings (example)
    If you have projects assigned to departments, you can use this setting to specify the department
    that you want to have included in the cube. If no department is selected, then no departmental
    filtering occurs.
Database Administration                                                                         119


    The selection of departments available is controlled by the Department custom lookup table.
    To allow multiple selections, modify the Project Departments custom field and select the Allow
    multiple values to be selected from lookup table check box.
    Note To deselect a department once selected, click the department again.

    Resource Department
    Use the Resource Department area to specify which department to use to filter resource data in
    the OLAP cube.




    OLAP Resource settings (example)
    If you have resources assigned to departments, you can use this setting to specify the
    department that you want to have included in the cube. If no department is selected, then no
    departmental filtering occurs.
    The selection of departments available is controlled by the Department custom lookup table.
    To allow multiple selections, modify the Resource Departments custom field and select the
    Allow multiple values to be selected from lookup table check box.
    Note To deselect a department once selected, click the department again.

    Database Date Range
    Use the Database Date Range area to specify the date range of projects, based on project start
    date, to include in the OLAP cube.
120 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide




    OLAP database date range settings
    The following table describes the database date range options for an OLAP cube.
         Attribute                              Description
         Use the earliest project start         Select this option if you want to base the date range of
         date and the latest project finish     the cube on the earliest start date of any project and the
         date                                   latest finish date of any project.
         Use the following last and next        Select this option if you want the date range to be
         time units to calculate the date       configured automatically based on a delta from the date
         range at the time that the OLAP        on which the cube is built. In the Last and Next boxes,
         database is built                      type the number of days, weeks, or months that you
                                                want to use for the delta.
         Use the fixed date range               Select this option if you want to use a fixed date range.
         specified below                        In the From and To boxes, type the dates that you want
                                                to use.


    OLAP Database Update Frequency
    Use the OLAP Database Update Frequency area to specify when and how often you want to
    build the OLAP cube. We recommend you choose a time of low system use because building
    cubes can be resource intensive.
Database Administration                                                                          121




    OLAP database update settings
    The following table describes the database update settings for an OLAP cube.
        Attribute                      Description
        Update periodically            Select this option if you want to schedule an update
                                       frequency. If this option is not selected, the cube is not
                                       updated automatically.
        Immediately retry the OLAP     If the scheduled cube build fails because the queue is not
        database update if             available, selecting this option causes the build job to start
        scheduled time fails because   automatically when the queue becomes available instead of
        of queue down time             waiting for the next scheduled time.
        Update every                   Select the number of hours, days, weeks, or months for the
                                       cube to be rebuilt.
        Start date                     Select the start date for the first automated cube build.
        Start time                     Select the start time for each automated cube build.


    Configure an OLAP cube
    OLAP cubes are managed on the OLAP Database Management page in Server Settings on a
    Microsoft Project Web App (PWA) site. You can configure OLAP cube dimensions and
    measures, or you can configure the build settings of a cube.
    To configure an OLAP cube, you must have the Manage Cube Building Service Global
    Permission.
    There are two sets of parameters that can be configured on an existing OLAP cube:
     Dimensions and measures
     Cube build settings
    Use the following procedure to configure the build settings of an existing OLAP cube.
 To configure OLAP cube build settings
  1. On the PWA home page, click Server Settings.
122 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide


    2. On the Server Settings page, in the Database Administration section, click OLAP
       Database Management.
    3. On the OLAP Database Management page, in the OLAP Database Name column, click
       the database that you want to configure.
    4. Configure the settings on the OLAP Database Build Settings page:
    5. Click Save.
    Use the following procedure to configure the dimensions and measures of an existing OLAP
    cube.
 To configure OLAP cube dimensions and measures
  1. On the PWA home page, click Server Settings.
    2. On the Server Settings page, in the Database Administration section, click OLAP
       Database Management.
    3. On the OLAP Database Management page, select an OLAP database from the list, and
       then click Configuration.
    4. Configure the settings on the Database Configuration page:
    5. Click Save.

    Cube dimensions
    Use the Cube dimensions area to specify the custom fields that you want to add to the OLAP
    cube as dimensions.




    Cube selector
    Select a cube from the dropdown list to display the available and selected dimensions.
Database Administration                                                                         123




    Cube dimension selector
    Choose the dimensions that you want to include in that cube in the Available fields list and
    click Add to include them in the cube. Do this for each cube in the Cube dropdown list.

    Cube measures
    Use the Cube measures area to specify the custom fields that you want to add to the OLAP
    cube as measures.




    Cube selector
    Select a cube from the dropdown list to display the available and selected measures.




    Cube measure selector
    Choose the measures that you want to include in that cube in the Available fields list and click
    Add to include them in the cube. Do this for each cube in the Cube dropdown list.
124 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide


    Built-in measures
    Use the Built-in measures area to select the build-in measures that you want to include in the
    OLAP cubes.




    Cube built-in measure selector
    The fields that you select will be added to the Project, Task, and Assignment cubes as measures.

    Inactive tasks
    Use the Inactive tasks area to specify if you want to include inactive tasks in the OLAP cubes.




    Inactive tasks selector
    If you want the cube to include inactive tasks, select the Include Inactive Tasks check box.

    Calculated measures
    Use the Calculated measures area to specify an MDX expression to define a calculated measure.




    Cube selector
Database Administration                                                                            125


    Select the cube that you want to define an expression for from the Cube dropdown list.




    MDX expression tool
    Click Insert to add a custom MDX expression.
    For more information about MDX expressions, see Multidimensional Expressions (MDX) Reference
    (http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/ms145506.aspx).

    Copy an OLAP cube
    OLAP cubes are managed on the OLAP Database Management page in Server Settings on a
    Microsoft Project Web App (PWA) site.
    To copy an OLAP cube, you must have the Manage Cube Building Service Global Permission.
    Perform the following procedure to copy an existing OLAP Cube. Copying a cube will create a
    new cube with the same settings and configuration as the cube you copied. Copying a cube
    does not copy the Analysis Services database, but rather copies all the cube settings from which
    you can build a new Analysis Services database.
    Note You must specify a new name for the Analysis Services database after you copy the cube.




    Copy an OLAP cube
    Use the following procedure to copy an OLAP cube.
 To copy an OLAP cube
  1. On the PWA home page, click Server Settings.
    2. On the Server Settings page, in the Database Administration section, click OLAP
       Database Management.
    3. On the OLAP Database Management page, select the cube that you want to copy, and then
       click Copy.
126 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide


    4. On the OLAP Database Build Settings page, type the name of the server and the database
       that you want created and adjust any other desired settings.
    5. Click Save.

    Delete an OLAP cube
    OLAP cubes are managed on the OLAP Database Management page in Server Settings on a
    Microsoft Project Web App (PWA) site.
    To delete an OLAP cube, you must have the Manage Cube Building Service Global Permission.
    Perform the following procedure to delete an OLAP Cube.
    Note Deleting an OLAP cube in Project Server does not delete the OLAP database from Analysis
    Services.




    Delete an OLAP cube
    Use the following procedure to delete an OLAP cube.
 To delete an OLAP cube
  1. On the PWA home page, click Server Settings.
    2. On the Server Settings page, in the Database Administration section, click OLAP
       Database Management.
    3. On the OLAP Database Management page, select the cube that you want to delete, and
       then click Delete.

    Build an OLAP cube
    OLAP cubes are managed on the OLAP Database Management page in Server Settings on a
    Microsoft Project Web App (PWA) site.
    OLAP cubes can be scheduled to be built on a regular basis. For more information, see
    Configure an OLAP cube (Project Server 2010). You can also start the build process manually.
    To build an OLAP cube, you must have the Manage Cube Building Service Global Permission.
    Perform the following procedure to build an existing OLAP cube.
Database Administration                                                                    127




    Build an OLAP cube
    Use the following procedure to build an OLAP cube.
 To build an OLAP cube
  1. On the PWA home page, click Server Settings.
    2. On the Server Settings page, in the Database Administration section, click OLAP
       Database Management.
    3. On the OLAP Database Management page, select the cube that you want to build, and
       then click Build Now.
128 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide




4
Look and Feel
    Project Server 2010 supports customization of various user interface elements, including:
         Views
         Color and text formats of grouping levels within views
         Color and shape options for Gantt bars
         Links, or groups of links, included on the Quick Launch in Project Web App
    The options that are described in this chapter are available under Look and Feel on the Server
    Settings page in Project Web App.




    Server Settings page
Look and Feel                                                                                     129



Manage Views
    Team members can view project information by selecting different views from the View list at
    the top of most pages within Project Web App. As an administrator, you can better meet the
    information needs of your organization by adding new views and changing the existing views.
    There are several different kinds of views in Project Web App, as listed in the following table.
          View Type                  Example

          Project
          Use this type of view
          to review the task,
          assignment, and
          resource details of a
          specific project when
          a team member clicks
          a project in the Project
          Center.




          Project Center
          Use this type of view
          to review information
          about all projects in
          the Project Center.
130 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide



           View Type                  Example

           Resource Assignments
           Use this type of view
           to review details about
           specific resource
           assignments.




           Resource Center
           Use this type of view
           to review and compare
           all resources in the
           Resource Center.
Look and Feel                                131



          View Type                Example

          My Work
          Team members use
          this type of view to
          review their task
          assignments.




          Resource Plan
          Managers use this
          type of view to create
          resource plans for
          their projects.
132 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide



           View Type                  Example

           Team Tasks
           Team members use
           this type of view to
           review the tasks to
           which their team is
           assigned as a
           resource.




           Team Builder
           Managers use this
           type of view to create
           a team for their
           project (not a resource
           plan).
Look and Feel                                  133



          View Type                  Example

          Timesheet
          Team members use
          this type of view to
          report time against the
          projects to which they
          are assigned.




          Portfolio Analyses
          Portfolio managers
          use this type of view to
          compare project
          proposals and
          determine which meet
          organizational goals.
134 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide



           View Type                  Example

           Portfolio Analysis
           Project Selection
           Portfolio managers
           use this type of view to
           choose which
           proposals to approve
           as projects.




    Create a New View
    Options for creating a new view vary depending on the type of view you are creating.
    To create a new view
    1. On the Quick Launch, under Settings, click Server Settings.
    2. On the Server Settings page, click Manage Views. A list of views is displayed.
    3. Click New View.




    4.   In the Name and Type section, in the View Type list, select the type of view you are
         creating.




    5.   In the Name box, type the name of the new view.
Look and Feel                                                                                              135


    6. In the Description box, type a description of the new view.
    7. Complete the remaining fields on the New View page. Not all options listed below are
       available for every view type.
        Task, Resource, or Assignment Choose the type of information to display in the
            view.




                Note These choices are only available when Project is selected as the View Type.

               Available fields and Displayed fields In the Available fields list, select the fields
                that you want to include in the view and then click Add. To reorder the fields, click a
                field name in the Displayed fields box, and then click Up or Down to move it within
                the list.
               Field width Click the name of a field in the Displayed fields box, and then type a
                number of pixels in the Field width box. You can repeat this for each field listed in
                the Displayed fields box. Setting this value is optional.
               Custom Label Click the name of a field in the Displayed fields box, and then type
                a display name in the Custom Label box. You can repeat this for each field listed in
                the Displayed fields box. Setting this value is optional.
                Note Custom labels are not available for the Resource Plan, Team Tasks, Team Builder, or
                Portfolio view.

               Make column read only Click the name of a field in the Displayed fields box, then
                select this check box to make that field read-only. Not all fields can be made read-only.
                Note Only the Timesheet and My Work views have this option.

               Gantt Chart format Select the type of Gantt chart that you want to use to display
                information.
                Note This option is only available for views that can show a Gantt chart.

               Left offset for the splitter bar Type an offset measurement in pixels to define the
                placement of the splitter bar in the view.
                Note This option is only available for views that can show a Gantt chart.
136 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide


             Show Select the number of outline levels that you want to display, by default, in this
              view. People using the view will be able to expand additional outline levels.
             Grouping format Select the grouping style that you want to use, and then define the
              order of grouping by using the Group by and Then by lists. For more information on
              setting up grouping formats, see “Grouping Formats,” later in this chapter.




             Sort by Select the fields by which you want to sort the view. In the Order list, select
              Ascending or Descending to define the order in which you want to sort the view.
             Filter Click this button to create or edit filters that you can apply to this view. For
              more information, see “To set up a filter for a view
         
             Filter Resources to user’s RBS branch Select this check box to display only those
              resources that fall under the resource breakdown structure branch of the resource
              looking at the view.
              Note This option is only available in Resource Center views.

             Available categories and Categories which access this view Click a category in
              the Available categories list, and then click Add to make the new view available to
              users in that security category.




              Tip If users are unable to see views that they think they should be able to see, a best
              practice is to first check that the correct categories are added to the view.
Look and Feel                                                                                                137


    8.   After you have set all appropriate options for the new view, click Save.
    You can apply a filter to a view, so that data in the view is automatically narrowed down based
    on a set of criteria.
    To set up a filter for a view
    1. On the New View page, in the Filter section, click Filter. The Custom Filter dialog box
        is displayed.
    2. On the Custom Filter dialog box, select a field in the Field Name list and a test in the
        Test list, and then type a value to test for in the Value box. You can set a range of values
        by typing two values separated by a comma (,) in the Value box.
         Tip As you create the filter rules, a green check mark or a red X is displayed to the left of the
         rule, under the Valid? heading. If you see a red X next to a rule, hover over the X for more
         information on why the rule is not considered.




    3. If the filter contains more than one row, select an operator in the And/Or column to start
       a new row.
    4. Click OK when you have finished setting up filters.

    Modify a View
    After you have been using a view in Project Web App, you may find that it needs some fine-
    tuning. It may need a field added, or some adjustments to the security settings. You can easily
    modify existing views.
    To modify an existing view
    1. On the Quick Launch, under Settings, click Server Settings.
    2. On the Server Settings page, under Look and Feel, click Manage Views.
    3. Click the name of the view you want to modify, in the Name column.
138 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide


         Tip If you know the view type for the view you want to modify, you can collapse the other view
         types to reduce the number of views to scroll through.

    4.   Modify the fields and options for the view, and then click Save.

    Copy a View
    Sometimes it may be easier to create a new view by basing it on an existing view. You can select
    a view and copy it to create a new view.
    To create a new view as a copy of an existing view
    1. On the Quick Launch, under Settings, click Server Settings.
    2. On the Server Settings page, under Look and Feel, click Manage Views.
    3. Click a cell in the row for the view you are copying, and then click Copy View.
         Note Be careful NOT to click the name of the view, in the Name column. This will open that view
         for editing, instead of selecting it.




    4.   On the Copy View dialog box, type a name for the new view, and then click OK. The
         copied view is added to the table on the Manage Views page.




    5. Scroll through the list of views to find the view you just created, and then click the name of
       the new view in the Name column.
    6. Modify the fields and options for the new view, and then click Save.
Look and Feel                                                                                              139



    Delete a View
    If a view is not meeting your organization’s needs, or is just not being used, you can delete it
    from Project Web App.
    To delete a view
    1. On the Quick Launch, under Settings, click Server Settings.
    2. On the Server Settings page, under Look and Feel, click Manage Views.
    3. Click a cell in the row for the view you are deleting, and then click Delete View.
         Note Be careful NOT to click the name of the view, in the Name column. This will open that view
         for editing, instead of selecting it.




    4.   When prompted, click OK to delete the view.


Grouping Formats
    You can change how rows (or levels) of information appear when task and resource
    information is grouped in the Project Center, Resource Center, Project, Task, Timesheet,
    and Assignment views. By changing the appearance of these grouping levels, you can highlight
    specific information for your team members.
    The following figure shows an example of grouping level formatting. The first-level groups are
    shaded in yellow with bold text, and the second-level groups are shaded in blue with bold text.
140 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide




To change the appearance of grouping levels
    1. On the Quick Launch, under Settings, click Server Settings.
    2. On the Server Settings page, under Look and Feel, click Grouping Formats. A list of
        grouping formats appears.
    3. In the Grouping format list, above the table, select the grouping level that you want to
        format. This will refresh the table and narrow down which levels are displayed.




    4.   To rename the selected grouping level, click Rename.


         Type the new name in the New name for the grouping format box, and then click OK.
         If you do not want to rename the selected grouping level, skip this step.
    5.   Use the lists in the Cell Color, Font Color, and Font Style columns to define the
         appearance of each grouping level.




    6.   Click Save, at the bottom of the page.
Look and Feel                                                                                     141


    After you have created a format for grouped task or resource information, you apply the
    formatting when a new view is created or modified. See “Manage Views,” earlier in this chapter,
    for more information.


Gantt Chart Formats
    You can format the color, shape, and pattern of the Gantt bars in Gantt Charts views, Project
    Center views, and other views.
    To format a Gantt chart
    1. On the Quick Launch, under Settings, click Server Settings.
    2. On the Server Settings page, under Look and Feel, click Gantt Chart Formats.
    3. In the Gantt Chart list, above the table, select the name of the Gantt chart view that you
         want to format.




    4.   To rename the selected Gantt chart view, click Rename. Type the new name in the New
         name for Gantt Chart box, and then click OK. If you do not want to rename the selected
         Gantt chart view, skip this step.
         Note You cannot change the names of the individual Gantt bars.

    5.   For each bar type within the selected Gantt chart view (represented as a row in the table),
         choose the following:
          Display Select this check box to display this bar type on the selected Gantt chart
             view.
          Middle bar shape Select the shape you want to use for the bar type.
142 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide




             Bar Color Choose a color to fill in the selected bar shape.
             Bar Pattern Choose a pattern to fill in the selected bar shape.
             Start shape Choose a graphic to display at the start of a Gantt bar of this type.
             Start color Choose a color to fill in the start shape.
             End shape Choose a graphic to display at the end of a Gantt bar of this type.
             End color Choose a color to fill in the end shape.
         A preview of the resulting Gantt bar is displayed on the right side of the table.




    6.   Click Save, at the bottom of the page, below the table.


Quick Launch
    The Quick Launch is the left navigation list in Project Web App.
Look and Feel                                                                                      143




    You can change how links behave on the Quick Launch, add new links or groups of links,
    reorder the links, or delete links or groups of links.

    Change Quick Launch Behavior
    Links on the Quick Launch can be displayed at all times, or you can choose to collapse links
    based on the context of what a user is currently viewing. You can also choose whether to
    include links from Microsoft SharePoint Foundation.
    To change how the Quick Launch displays links
    1. On the Quick Launch, under Settings, click Server Settings.
    2. On the Server Settings page, under Look and Feel, click Quick Launch.
    3. In the Edit Quick Launch section, under Expand menu items for, choose from the
        following options:
         All sections If you want to display all Quick Launch items at all times, regardless of
             what view is currently displayed, click All sections.
         Current section only If you want to collapse the Quick Launch items to just the top-
             level headings for sections that do not apply to the current view, click Current section
             only. For example, if you have selected Current section only, when you are looking at
             the Project Center, you will only see the Quick Launch items under the Projects
             heading.
144 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide




    4. Select the Show menu items from Microsoft SharePoint Foundation check box to also
       show any applicable Quick Launch items that are part of SharePoint Foundation. If you
       clear this check box, only Project Web App items will be displayed on the Quick Launch.
    5. Click Save.

    Add a New Link
    You can also add new links to the Quick Launch, to meet your organization’s needs. Links can
    be to views within Project Web App, intranet sites, or even external Web sites.
    To add a link to the Quick Launch
    1. On the Quick Launch, under Settings, click Server Settings.
    2. On the Server Settings page, under Look and Feel, click Quick Launch.
    3. Under Set Menu Item Details, click New Link.




    4. Type a name for the link in the Custom link name box. This is the text that will appear
       linked on the Quick Launch.
    5. Type the URL for the link in the Custom Web address box.
    6. In the Heading section, choose the placement for the new link:
        If you are creating a new heading link for the Quick Launch, similar to the Projects
           and My Work headings, select New Heading.
        If you are creating a link to be included below an existing heading, select the existing
           heading from the list. The link will be indented below the selected heading.
Look and Feel                                                                                                145




    7.   If you want to hide the new link from the Quick Launch, click No in the Display link in
         Quick Launch list.
       For example, if you are creating a new group of links below a new heading, you can choose
       to hide the new heading, then create all of the new links below the heading and set those to
       display. When you have the group of links ready to go, you can change the Display link in
       Quick Launch setting for the new heading to Yes, and the group of links is added to the
       Quick Launch.
    8. Click OK to add the link to the Quick Launch.

    Modify an Existing Link
    If a link on the Quick Launch is not pointing to the right place, is not categorized under the
    right heading, or needs to be temporarily hidden, you can easily make those changes.
To modify an existing Quick Launch item
    1. On the Quick Launch, under Settings, click Server Settings.
    2. On the Server Settings page, under Look and Feel, click Quick Launch.
    3. Under Set Menu Item Details, click the name of the link you want to modify, in the
        Name column.
         Tip If you have a long list of Quick Launch items to scroll through, you can collapse the headers
         to hide the links you do not want to modify.

    4.   Modify the link name, URL, and/or display option for the link, and then click OK.

    Reorder Quick Launch Items
    As you use Project Web App, you may find that the links on the Quick Launch would be more
    helpful if they appeared in a different order. You can reorder the links to meet your
    organization’s needs.
    To reorder the links on the Quick Launch
    1. On the Quick Launch, under Settings, click Server Settings.
    2. On the Server Settings page, under Look and Feel, click Quick Launch.
146 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide


    3.   Under Set Menu Item Details, click a cell in the row for the Quick Launch item you are
         moving, and then click Move Up or Move Down. If you select a heading, all items
         indented below the heading will move with it.
         Note Be careful NOT to click the name of the link, in the Name column. This will open that link
         for editing, instead of selecting it.




    Delete a Link
    If you find that your organization is not using a link that is currently included on the Quick
    Launch, you can easily remove it.
    To delete a link from the Quick Launch
    1. On the Quick Launch, under Settings, click Server Settings.
    2. On the Server Settings page, under Look and Feel, click Quick Launch.
    3. Under Set Menu Item Details, click a cell in the row for the Quick Launch item you are
        deleting, and then click Delete Link. If you select a heading, all items indented below the
        heading will also be deleted.
         Note Be careful NOT to click the name of the link, in the Name column. This will open that link
         for editing, instead of selecting it.




    4.   When prompted, click OK to delete the link, or group of links, from the Quick Launch.
Time and Task Management                                                                     147




5
Time and Task Management
    Site administrators and others with appropriate permissions can configure how timesheets and
    task status are captured and handled in Project Server 2010. This includes:
          Setting up fiscal periods and time reporting periods
          Adjusting timesheets
          Setting up timesheet line classifications
          Choosing the right timesheet settings
          Configuring administrative time categories
          Choosing task status settings
          Preventing certain tasks from being updated
    The options that are described in this chapter are available under Time and Task
    Management on the Server Settings page in Project Web App.
148 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide




    Server Settings page


Fiscal Periods
    Fiscal periods define the start and beginning dates of the business calendar. They are used to
    calculate financial statements on an annual basis. By setting up fiscal periods in Project Server
    2010, you provide a way to map project work against your organization’s fiscal planning
    structure. Once set up, you can use fiscal periods as a dimension in your OLAP cubes.

    Define Fiscal Periods
    Using Project Web App, you can easily define the fiscal periods for a specific year. By creating
    the fiscal periods in bulk, you can base them off of several different models, and Project Server
    will calculate the dates accordingly.
    For example, if your organization divides each quarter into three periods—one that is four
    weeks long, followed by one that is five weeks long, and then another that is four weeks long—
    you can specify this model in Project Web App, and Project Server will create fiscal periods for
    the year according to that schedule. So, if the fiscal year begins on January 1, 2011, the first
    quarter will have three periods:
         Period 1: 1/1/2011 – 1/28/2011
         Period 2: 1/29/2011 – 3/4/2011
         Period 3: 3/5/2011 – 4/1/2011
Time and Task Management                                                                                    149


To set fiscal periods in Project Web App
    1. On the Quick Launch, under Settings, click Server Settings.
    2. On the Server Settings page, under Time and Task Management, click Fiscal Periods.
    3. In the Manage Fiscal Period section, click the year that you want to define as the fiscal
          period, and then click Define.



    4. In the Define Fiscal Period Start Date section, type the date on which the fiscal year
       should begin, or select it using the date picker.
    5. In the Set Fiscal Year Creation Model section, select a formatting method for the fiscal
       period:
        4,5,4 Method This fiscal quarter method sets a four-week fiscal period, followed by a
           five-week fiscal period, and then another four-week fiscal period.
        4,4,5 Method This fiscal quarter method sets a four-week fiscal period, followed by
           another four-week fiscal period, and then a five-week fiscal period.
        5,4,4 Method This fiscal quarter method sets a five-week fiscal period, followed by a
           four-week fiscal period, and then another four-week fiscal period.
        13 months This method sets each fiscal period as four weeks.
        Standard calendar year This method sets each fiscal period according to the
           standard 12 month year, beginning on January 1.
         Note If you want to use a different model for your organization’s fiscal year, use the steps in
         this procedure to choose a model that is closest to what you would like your fiscal year to look
         like. Once you have saved, you can go back and modify the calendar dates to refine the
         schedule to meet your organization’s needs.

    6.   In the Define Period Naming Convention section, create a unique name for the periods
         by entering:
          Prefix A prefix of up to 15 characters.
          Next Sequence Number A sequence number of up to six digits.
          Suffix A suffix of up to 15 characters.
         Tip As you enter a naming convention in the Prefix, Next Sequence Number, and Suffix fields,
         an example of the final naming convention is displayed below the fields, next to Sample.
150 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide




    7.   Click Create and Save.
    On the Fiscal Periods page, the fiscal period will be displayed with the individual periods
    showing in the Adjust Fiscal Months grid.
    After defining a fiscal period, you can edit it by using the Adjust Fiscal Months grid.
    To refine the fiscal period dates
    1. On the Quick Launch, under Settings, click Server Settings.
    2. On the Server Settings page, under Time and Task Management, click Fiscal Periods.
    3. In the Manage Fiscal Period section, select the year that you want to adjust.
    4. In the Adjust Fiscal Months section, in the End Date column, click the end date that
         you want to modify, and then use the date picker to choose a new end date. Start and end
         dates for periods following the modified end date will be automatically adjusted so that all
         periods are contiguous.




    5.   Click Save.
Time and Task Management                                                                             151



    Delete Fiscal Periods
    After you have initially defined the fiscal periods for your organization, you may decide that a
    13 month schedule would work better, or that you would prefer a 5,4,4 schedule over the 4,5,4
    schedule that you initially selected. Instead of redefining each date, it may be easier to delete the
    fiscal periods altogether and start over from scratch.
    To delete the fiscal period for a specific year in Project Web App
    1. On the Quick Launch, under Settings, click Server Settings.
    2. On the Server Settings page, under Time and Task Management, click Fiscal Periods.
    3. In the Manage Fiscal Period section, select the year that contains the fiscal periods you
        want to delete.
    4. In the Adjust Fiscal Months section, click Delete.




        All periods are deleted, and the year returns to an Undefined status.
    Once you have deleted the fiscal periods for a year, you can redefine them using the process
    outlined in the “Define Fiscal Periods” section.


Time Reporting Periods
    Time reporting periods define the start and end dates used for each timesheet and task status
    report. You can create several time reporting periods in bulk to set them up, and then insert or
    delete individual periods, as necessary. For example, you can create several time reporting
152 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide


    periods for an entire fiscal year, and then modify those periods, as needed, to meet the
    individual needs of your organization.

    Create Bulk Time Reporting Periods
    Rather than creating each time reporting period individually, you will save yourself quite a bit of
    time if you create them in bulk, using parameters for how many periods to create, when the
    first period should begin, and how long each period should last.
    To create several time reporting periods at once
    1. On the Quick Launch, under Settings, click Server Settings.
    2. On the Server Settings page, under Time and Task Management, click Time
        Reporting Periods.
    3. In the Define Bulk Period Parameters section, enter the following:
         Number of periods to be created Type the number of time reporting periods you
             want to create at one time. If you want to create time reporting periods for each week
             in a year, leave this set to 52.
         Date the first period starts Type the date on which you want the first time reporting
             period to start, or use the date picker to choose a date. Project Server will calculate the
             dates for all subsequent periods, based on the date selected in this field.
              Note Be sure to select the correct day of the week, as all time reporting periods will be
              based on this date.

          Length of the standard period (days) Type the number of days in each time
           reporting period. If you want to use one-week time reporting periods, leave this set to
           7.
    4. In the Define Batch Naming Convention section, create a unique name for each of the
       periods by entering:
        Prefix A prefix of up to 20 characters.
        Next Sequence Number A sequence number of up to six digits.
        Suffix A suffix of up to 20 characters.
         Tip As you enter a naming convention in the Prefix, Next Sequence Number, and Suffix fields,
         an example of the final naming convention is displayed below the fields, next to Sample.
Time and Task Management                                                                                   153




    5.   Click Create Bulk to create the time reporting periods you specified.
         Note The Status column for all new time reporting periods is set to Open. Only a Project Server
         administrator can close a period. It is possible to restrict future timesheets from being
         submitted. See the “Timesheet Settings and Defaults” section for more information.

    6. To make changes to a period label, date, or status, click in the grid in the Create Periods
       section, and then enter the modifications. See “Insert or Delete Time Reporting Periods”
       for more information.
    7. Click Save.

    Insert or Delete Time Reporting Periods
    Occasionally, you may need to insert an additional time reporting period. For example, if the
    current fiscal year uses Monday-Sunday time reporting periods, and you have decided that the
    next fiscal year will use Sunday-Saturday time reporting periods, you may need to insert a
    shortened period to transition between the two models.
    To insert a time reporting period
    1. On the Quick Launch, under Settings, click Server Settings.
    2. On the Server Settings page, under Time and Task Management, click Time
         Reporting Periods.
    3. In the Create Periods section, scroll through the list to find where you want to insert a
         new time reporting period, and then click the nearest existing period.
    4. Click Insert Before or Insert After to create a new row for the period you are inserting.
154 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide




    5. In the Period Label column, replace the New Period text with the name of the inserted
       period.
    6. Replace the dates in the Start Date and End Date columns, if necessary.
    7. If the inserted period is not currently open for resources to report data, select Closed in
       the Status column.
    8. Click Save.
    You may also find that you occasionally need to delete existing time periods. For example, if
    your organization has already set up one-week time reporting periods for the entire year, and
    partway through the year you decide to switch to two-week time reporting periods, you will
    need to delete the remaining one-week periods, and recreate the rest of the year as two-week
    periods.
To delete a time reporting period
    1. On the Quick Launch, under Settings, click Server Settings.
    2. On the Server Settings page, under Time and Task Management, click Time
         Reporting Periods.
    3. In the Create Periods section, click the row for the time period you want to delete, and
         then click Delete.
         Important To protect project data provided by team members, time reporting periods that have
         associated timesheets cannot be deleted. Because it is common for time reporting periods to
         have associated timesheets, it is unlikely that you will be able to delete past time reporting
         periods.
Time and Task Management                                                                           155




    4.   Click Save.


Timesheet Adjustment
    Occasionally, a resource will identify changes that need to be made to a timesheet after the
    timesheet has been submitted and approved. People with the appropriate permissions can
    adjust timesheet data.
To adjust timesheets
    1. On the Quick Launch, under Settings, click Server Settings.
    2. On the Server Settings page, under Time and Task Management, click Timesheet
        Adjustment.
    3. Choose filter options to help you display the timesheet you want to adjust:
         Approved by me Choose this option to display only timesheets that you have
             approved.
         Available timesheets to adjust Choose this option to display all timesheets available
             for adjustment.
         My Resources Unsubmitted Timesheets Choose this option to show all
             timesheets for resources assigned to your projects. This option may display a very long
             list of timesheets. You can use the options to the right of the line in the shaded filter
             section to narrow down the list.
156 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide




          Date Use this option in combination with Approved by me, Available timesheets
           to adjust, or My Resources Unsubmitted Timesheets. Select the Date check box,
           and then choose whether you want to filter for a specific Fiscal Period, or a Custom
           Date Range.
        Resources Use this option in combination with Approved by me, Available
           timesheets to adjust, or My Resources Unsubmitted Timesheets. Select the
           Resources check box, and then choose whether you want to filter for a specific Cost
           Center, and/or a specific Resource Name.
    4. Click Apply, on the far right side of the shaded filter section, to filter the list of timesheets
       using the options you selected.




    5.   Click the name of the timesheet you want to adjust, in the Timesheet Name column. This
         opens the timesheet.



    6. Make adjustments to the timesheet, as necessary. Rows that you have adjusted will show as
       Not Submitted in the Process Status column, indicating that the data for those rows was
       not submitted by the resource.
    7. On the Timesheet tab of the ribbon, in the Actions group, click Save.




Line Classifications
    Timesheet line classifications are used to report different types of time against the same task
    assignment. For example, your organization may have different classifications for Travel,
    Training and Standard (default) work. Using classifications enables the timesheet user to add
    the same task assignment once per classification type.
    Note The Standard line classification is required, even if all work on the task assignment is being
    reported against timesheet lines with other classifications.
Time and Task Management                                                                               157


    By default, all timesheet lines use the Standard (or default) line classification. Resources can
    manually change a timesheet line to use one of the additional line classifications you have
    configured.
    To create a new timesheet line classification
    1. On the Quick Launch, under Settings, click Server Settings.
    2. On the Server Settings page, under Time and Task Management, click Line
        Classifications.
    3. In the Edit, Enter Line Classification section, click New Classification.
    4. In the grid, type a new name and description that identifies the timesheet line classification
        for team members.
    5. Click Save.
    If you no longer want resources to be able to use a classification in timesheets, but that
    classification has been used in previous timesheets, you can make the classification inactive.
    This will maintain the classification in previous timesheets, for historical reporting purposes,
    but prevent it from being available in future timesheets.
    To inactivate an existing timesheet line classification
    1. On the Quick Launch, under Settings, click Server Settings.
    2. On the Server Settings page, under Time and Task Management, click Line
         Classifications.
    3. In the Edit, Enter Line Classification section, choose Inactive in the Status column for
         the line classification you no longer want available to resources.
         Note The Standard line classification cannot be inactivated.




    4.   Click Save.
    If a line classification has never been used on a timesheet, you can delete it from Project Server
    altogether.
    To delete an existing timesheet line classification
    1. On the Quick Launch, under Settings, click Server Settings.
    2. On the Server Settings page, under Time and Task Management, click Line
        Classifications.
    3. In the Edit, Enter Line Classification section, click the row for the line classification you
        are deleting, and then click Delete Classification.
158 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide




    4.   Click Save.


Timesheet Settings and Defaults
    Site administrators can choose several different options to control how resources enter time on
    their timesheets, and whose approval is required. The Timesheet Settings and Defaults page
    is also where you choose whether your organization will use Single Entry Mode, a feature new
    to Project Server 2010 that combines task status updates with timesheets in one view.
    To configure timesheet settings and defaults
    1. On the Quick Launch, under Settings, click Server Settings.
    2. On the Server Settings page, under Time and Task Management, click Timesheet
        Settings and Defaults.
    3. In the Project Web App Display section, select the The timesheet will use standard
        Overtime and Non-Billable time tracking check box to enable team members to submit
        overtime and non-billable time. If you do not want team members to be able to submit
        overtime or non-billable time, clear this check box.
    4. In the Default Timesheet Creation Mode section, specify which data should be included
        in the default timesheet:
         Select Current task assignments to pre-populate timesheets with information about
             the team members' tasks assignments.
         Select Current projects to pre-populate timesheets with information about the team
             members' current projects.
         Select No prepopulation to create blank timesheets for team members.
    5. In the Timesheet Grid Column Units section, specify whether you want timesheet
        columns to represent Days or Weeks. If you choose Weeks, each column in a timesheet
        represents 7 days, and the date in the column represents the first day of the week.
    6. In the Default Reporting Units section, specify whether team members report time
        within each timesheet column in Hours or Days.
    7. To specify how many hours constitute an entire day's worth of work, type the hours in the
        The number of hours in a standard timesheet day is box.
Time and Task Management                                                                              159


    8. To specify how many hours constitute a standard work week, type the hours in the The
       number of hours in a standard timesheet work week is box.
    9. In the Hourly Reporting Limits section, specify the maximum and minimum hours
       allowed in a timesheet, as well as the maximum number of hours allowed to be reported in
       a day. If team members report time beyond these limits, errors will appear on their
       timesheets when they submit them.
         Note You may need to put some restrictions on how time is entered based on accounting
         systems, customers, or internal business policies. Also, if your organization uses team
         resources, remember this when setting the maximum and minimum values in the Hourly
         Reporting Limits section.

        If you don't want to set a maximum or a minimum hourly reporting limit, type 999 in the
        Maximum Hours per Timesheet box to represent unlimited hours, or type 0 in the
        Minimum Hours per Timesheet box to represent no minimum time. Typing either of
        these options effectively turns off reporting limits.
    10. In the Timesheet Policies section, specify the following:
         Select the Allow future time reporting check box to enable team members to record
             time for periods in the future.
         Select the Allow new personal tasks check box to enable team members to create as
             many personal tasks as needed. This time is not mapped to any Project Server project
             or task. Personal tasks will not show up outside of a team member’s timesheet and/or
             task status.
         Select the Allow top-level time reporting check box to enable team members to
             report time against summary tasks. If this check box is cleared, team members must
             report time against lower-level tasks, and those values will roll up to the summary level.
         Under Task Status Manager Approval, click Enabled to allow project managers to
             coordinate or approve/reject timesheet lines on a per-line basis. If you select Enabled,
             you can choose to select the Require line approval before timesheet approval
             check box, if you want each line approved before the entire timesheet can be
             approved. If you only want to approve entire timesheets (no line-by-line approval),
             select Disabled.
             Note If you are using Single Entry Mode, you must enable task status manager approval.
160 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide




    11. In the Auditing section, select the Enable Timesheet Auditing check box to create a
         detailed record of all changes made to a timesheet.
         Tip Click Purge Log to clear the auditing log.

    12. In the Approval Routing section, select the Fixed Approval Routing check box to
        prevent team members from manually specifying the next approver when they submit their
        timesheet.
    13. In the Single Entry Mode section, select the Single Entry Mode check box if you want
        to enable team members to report task progress, as well as actual work, on their timesheets.
    14. Click Save.


Administrative Time
    Time spent on things other than project work can be classified as administrative time.
    Administrative time may include vacation, sick leave, organizational meetings, training, or
    travel. Site administrators can set up different categories for administrative time, so that
    resources can capture those hours on their timesheets to accurately represent what they have
    done during a given reporting period.
    To add an administrative time category
    1. On the Quick Launch, under Settings, click Server Settings.
    2. On the Server Settings page, under Time and Task Management, click Administrative
        Time.
    3. Click New Category. A row is added to the table.
Time and Task Management                                                                                        161




    4.   Type a name for the new administrative time category in the Categories column.
    5.   In the Status column, choose whether the category is currently Open for use on
         timesheets, or Closed.
    6.   In the Work Type column, choose whether the category captures Working time, such as
         training or travel, or Non Work time, such as vacation or sick leave.
    7.   In the Approve column, choose whether you want time reported in this category to require
         approval from a manager.
    8.   Select the check box in the Always Display column if you want to display a row for this
         category, by default, on every timesheet for every user. For example, you might choose to
         always display a timesheet row for the Sick time category, so that team members are
         reminded to report those hours.
    9.   Click Save.
         Tip Before clicking Save, be sure you have the right set of categories listed. Once you click
         Save, any new categories you have added cannot be deleted.

    As you create administrative time categories, you may decide that you do not actually need a
    category and would rather delete it. If you have not yet saved the new categories, you can easily
    delete the category you do not need.
    Tip If you want to make it so that a category that has been saved is no longer available for selection in
    a timesheet, change the Status column for that category to Closed, and be sure the check box in the
    Always Display column is cleared.

    To delete an administrative time category
    1. On the Quick Launch, under Settings, click Server Settings.
    2. On the Server Settings page, under Time and Task Management, click Administrative
        Time.
    3. Click the row header for the category you are deleting, and then click Delete Category.
        The category is removed.
162 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide




         Note You can only delete categories that are not yet saved. For example, say you have created
         several new categories on the Administrative Time page, but have not yet clicked Save on that
         page. You can delete any of the new categories you created while on that page. Once you click
         Save on the Administrative Time page, the categories you added can no longer be deleted.

    4.   Click Save.


Task Settings and Display
    Site administrators can use the Task Settings and Display page to change how resources
    report task progress, how actual work can be updated, and other task settings.
To configure task settings and display options
    1. On the Quick Launch, under Settings, click Server Settings.
    2. On the Server Settings page, under Time and Task Management, click Task Settings
         and Display.
    3. In the Tracking Method section, select the tracking method that best represents how you
         want team members to report their progress on project tasks. Options in this section can
         only be modified if you are not using Single Entry Mode. If you are using Single Entry
         Mode, the Hours of work done per period and Force project managers to use
         progress reporting method specified above for all projects options are automatically
         selected and cannot be modified.
         Tip If you want project managers to have the option of displaying different reporting methods
         for their projects, clear the Force project managers to use the progress reporting method
         specified above for all projects check box. However, requiring the same reporting method
         provides a consistent user experience throughout all projects in your organization, and may
         make it easier for team members to report progress.

    4. In the Reporting Display section, choose whether you want resources to report their
       hours daily or weekly. If you choose the Resources should report their total hours
       worked for a week option, select the appropriate day from the Week starts on list.
    5. In the Protect User Updates section, specify how you want updates on actuals to occur:
Time and Task Management                                                                                         163


          To prevent the project manager from updating a team member's actual time worked,
           select the Only allow task updates via Tasks and Timesheets check box.
        To import actual work from all timesheet lines, regardless of line classification, select
           the Import all timesheet line classifications check box. If this check box is cleared,
           only actual work from timesheet lines that have a standard classification will be
           imported into task status.
        To enable users to provide task updates using periods that they define, select the Allow
           users to define custom periods for task updates check box.
    6. In the Define Near Future Planning Window section, type the number of reporting
       periods you want to include in the Near Future Planning Window on the Tasks page.


Close Tasks to Update
    If you have the appropriate permissions, you can lock project tasks in order to prevent people
    from submitting task updates.
    Note Changes to task updating will not take effect until the next time that the project is published.

    To prevent updates to a task
    1. On the Quick Launch, under Settings, click Server Settings.
    2. On the Server Settings page, under Time and Task Management, click Close Tasks to
        Update.
    3. On the Close Tasks to Update page, in the Select a project list, click the project that
        contains that task you want to close for updating.
    4. In the Select Tasks section, in the Lock column, select the check box for each task that
        you want to close to updating.
        Tip If you want to prevent updates to all tasks in a project, click Select All, below the table in the
        Select Tasks section. You can also click Clear All to remove all current selections in the Lock
        column.
164 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide




    5.   Do one of the following:
          To publish your project and close the selected tasks to updating, click Publish.
              Note Publishing your project to close tasks to updating will also publish all applied task
              updates and any other changes that were made to the plan. If you are not ready to publish
              that information, click Submit instead, to save your task closure settings. When you are
              ready to publish other changes to your project, the task closure settings will also be
              published.

             To save your changes without publishing the project, click Submit. Tasks that you
              selected to be closed for updating will remain open until you publish the project.
165




6
Queue Management
This chapter describes the Microsoft Project Server 2010 Queuing System. This chapter provides
an overview of the Queuing System, which describes the queuing process and architecture, the
methods in which queuing jobs are grouped, states that queuing jobs can be in, and how
multithreading works in the queue. This chapter also describes how to manage queuing through the
Microsoft Project Web App Server Settings page.




Queue System Overview
A queue is a waiting line that becomes a necessity when the number of service requests becomes
greater than the optimum serving capacity. In an Enterprise Project Management System, there are
several instances when this is true. For example:
166 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide




   At the end of the workday on Friday, nearly all 500 employees of a small company submit their
    timesheets.
   A few hours before their team status meeting, nearly all project managers publish their projects.

The purpose of the Project Server 2010 Queuing System is to handle these abrupt changes in
demand gracefully and reliably. The Project Server 2010 Queuing System takes all the users' input,
records entries for the requests in Microsoft SQL Server, and then processes the data
asynchronously on a first-come, first-served basis. Having a queue ensures that the Project Server
2010 EPM solution does not stop working when a spike in demand occurs.

Nearly all critical operations in the Project Server 2010 system go through the Project Server 2010
Queuing System. These include:
 Project Save
 Project Publish
 Timesheet Save
 Timesheet Submit
 Project Backup/Recovery
 Report Data Service operations
 Cube Building Service operations
 Server Side Scheduling
The Project Server Queuing System provides the following advantages:

   Reliability

         o    Data integrity: There is a well-defined protocol to save any job in the queue. If a job is
              just half-saved, it is not processed. Also, all jobs are saved into SQL Server (not the file
              system) and take advantage of SQL Server transactions.

         o    In-order delivery: If a user of Project Professional clicks Save and then Publish, the
              Project Queuing System ensures that the Save job is processed first and is then
              followed by a Publish job.

         o    Fault tolerance: Failed jobs in the queue can be retried. Also, when more than one
              instance of the Queue NT Service is running, if one of them stops responding, the
              other one picks up the extra load automatically. (This process is called transparent
              failover.)

   Scalability
Queue Management                                                                                167



        o   Multithreading: The Project Server 2010 Queuing System can process multiple jobs at
            the same time. For example, Project 1 Save, Project 2 Publish, and a cube building job
            can be processed simultaneously.

        o   You can simply add more middle-tier servers to handle load better. Each middle-tier
            server will have a Project Queuing Service, and the loads will be balanced
            automatically.

        o   The number of jobs in the queue is limited only by the scale limitations of SQL Server.

   Manageability


Queuing process
The following illustration shows the queuing process:




    Queuing Process
168 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide


1.   The user makes a server request from a client application (for example, publishing a project
     from Project Professional). The user passes a Job ID (a unique identifier that tracks the request)
     as part of the request.

2.   The Project Web service takes the request and puts it in the queue.

3.   A Job ID is issued to the user as an acknowledgement.

4.   The user queries to check the status of the request through the issued Job ID.

5.   The Project Server 2010 Queuing System returns the status of the request to the user.


Queuing architecture
This section describes:
        Queuing modules
        How the Queuing modules work together


     Queuing modules
     The Queue NT Service is installed on every Project Server application server computer as part
     of provisioning. It starts one "Queue Worker Process" per Service Application defined in the
     farm. The Queue Worker Process services all the instances of Project Web App (PWA) that are
     associated with its Service Application, and it runs under the "Service Application
     Administrator" identity. For example, if two Project Web App sites are defined for the Service
     Application, the Queue Worker Process will service both of them. Remember this deployment
     model when going through the rest of this section.

The Project Server Queuing System is composed of the following four modules, and is dependent
on how the four modules work together:

1.   Job Storage: Queue jobs are stored in the Draft and Published Project Server databases. In this
     manner, the jobs are backed up and restored as part of the normal Project Server database
     backup and recovery routines.
Queue Management                                                                                     169




2.   Job Polling: Job storage is polled at regular intervals by a Job Polling thread to check for new
     jobs. Polling intervals are configured by administrators in the Project Web App Server Settings
     Queue Management pages.




            The Queue Worker process starts the Job Polling threads for each instance of PWA
             that it services. The Job Polling thread runs inside the "Queue Worker Process"
             process and under the "Queue Worker Process" identity.

            The Job Polling thread has two main properties:

             o     Type - A given job polling thread could be a "project job polling thread" (looking
                   for project-related jobs) or a "timesheet job polling thread" (looking for timesheet-
                   related jobs).

             o     Project Web App instance - Every job polling thread looks for jobs originating
                   from a specific instance of Project Web App.
170 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide


3.   Job Processing: The Job Polling thread spawns one Job Processing thread for each job that it
     finds. The maximum number of Job Polling threads can be configured by administrators. Note
     that the job processing threads run under the "Microsoft Project Server Queue Service 2010"
     identity.




4.   Job Status Check and Management: This is the module of the Project Server Queue that the
     end user sees.




        Project Web App Manage Queue page: Administrators use this to see the status of any job
         in the queue. They can also cancel or retry failed jobs. This feature is part of PWA — there
         is no need to download a special tool.
Queue Management                                                                             171




        Job Grid on the Manage Queue page

       Project Web App Queue Settings page: Administrators can view or change the settings of a
        queue, such as the polling interval and the maximum number of job processor threads.
        This feature is part of PWA — there is no need to download a special tool.




        Queue Settings page

       Project Web App My Queued Jobs page: Any user can check the status of a job using this
        interface. This feature is part of PWA — there is no need to download a special tool.
172 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide


        Queue Status PSI: Software developers can use these APIs to get the status of any queue
         job. There are several powerful filters to narrow the search.

     How it all works together
     The Project Server Queuing System modules must interact and work as a whole when the
     system is tasked with requests, such as adding jobs, processing jobs, and retrieving job status.

     Adding Jobs
     There are many ways in which jobs can be added to the queue. For example, a project manager
     can save a project from Project Professional, a team member can submit a timesheet, or a third-
     party application can publish a project. Each of these actions causes a call to an element in the
     Project Server Interface (PSI), which in turn adds the appropriate jobs to the queue.




     Job Processing
     Job processing occurs in different phases and involves interaction between various modules:

1.   Start Queue Worker Process: When the Queue NT Service starts, it starts one child Queue
     Process per PWA instance. The Queue NT Service should always be running for the Project
     Queuing System to work.
Queue Management                                                                                      173



2.   Start Job Polling threads: When the Queue Worker Process starts, it starts the job polling
     threads, which are specific to instances of Project Web App.

3.   Pick up new jobs: The polling thread looks for new jobs in the project databases.

4.   Create job processing threads: If there are new jobs, job processing threads are created.

5.   Write status: Once a job processing thread finishes, the status of the job (success or failure) is
     written back to the database.
174 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide


    Retrieving status
    Job status can be checked in various ways. Administrators can use the Project Web App Queue
    Management pages, team members can use the My Queued Jobs page, or software developers
    can programmatically get status using the Queue PSI methods.




The Project and Timesheet queues
The Project Server 2010 Queuing System is composed of two separate queues:

        Project Queue Primarily used for project-related messages such as Saving, Publishing,
         Reporting, and Cube Building, although other types of messages may be sent to this queue
         as well. Its tables and stored procedures are stored in the Project Server 2010 Draft
         database.
Queue Management                                                                                             175



       Timesheet Queue Primarily used for timesheet-related messages such as Timesheet Save
        and Timesheet Submit, although other types of messages may be sent to this queue as well.
        Its tables and stored procedures are stored in the Project Server 2010 Published database.

The two queues are designed the same way, except that their jobs reside in different databases. The
advantages in having two types of queues include:

       Performance: Storing queue job data in the same database as the core data saves the queue
        from making expensive cross-database calls during job processing. Let us look at an
        example: When a Timesheet Submit job occurs, the data entered by the user (for example,
        hours worked) is packaged as part of the submitted queue job and put into the SQL Server
        job store. Also, there is already existing information about a timesheet (duration, name, and
        so forth), and this information is available in the "Published" database. To process the
        Timesheet Submit job, both sets of data are necessary. Performance is improved if both
        these sets of data reside in the same database. That is why Timesheet queue jobs are stored
        in the "Published" database (where all timesheet core data resides) and Project queue jobs
        are stored in the "Draft" database (where most of the project core data resides).

       Fine-tuning: Every setting in the queue can be specified separately for the Project and
        Timesheet queues. This gives administrators flexibility in configuration. For example, if a
        customer is using Project Server 2010 primarily for timesheets and there are very few
        projects, the polling interval of the timesheet queue can be set to 10 seconds, and the
        project queue could be set to a slightly higher time interval.

        Note The polling interval specifies the frequency with which the queuing service checks either of
        the queues for new jobs. This setting can be specified in the Project Web App Queue Settings page.


    How the Project and Timesheet queues are used
    The following image shows how the modules in the Project Server Queuing System work with
    the project and timesheet queues.
176 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide




1.   Start Job Polling threads: For every instance of Project Web App serviced by the queue (the
     queue can service more than one instance of Project Web App), a polling thread pair is
     launched — one thread to service the project queue, another to service the timesheet queue.
     Both of these threads reside within the "Queue Worker Process" process space and run under
     the "Queue Worker Process" identity (which is the Service Application Administrator identity).

2.   Job Storage: As mentioned above, the project-related jobs (Project Save, Publish, Reporting,
     Cube Building, and so on) are stored in the "Draft" database. The timesheet-related jobs
     (Timesheet save, Timesheet submit, and so on) are stored in the "Published" database.

3.   Job processing: When the "job polling threads" discover new jobs, new job processing threads
     are created. Note that the job processing threads still reside within the "Queue Worker
     Process" process space and run under the "Queue Worker Process" identity (which is the
     Service Application Administrator identity).

     Status-checking modules will continue to check for status of a job; they do not care which
     queue the job is part of. Queue management is always done on a per-queue basis — in the
Queue Management                                                                                         177



     Project Web App Queue Management pages, administrators have to select which queue
     (project or timesheet) they are changing the settings for.


Queue groupings
There are three distinct levels of grouping for queued data:

1.   Jobs A job is a trackable packet of work that gets executed by Project Server (for example,
     project save, project publish, timesheet submit). Some jobs are not explicitly initiated by the
     user (for example, email notifications, reporting data synch-up). Jobs are the level at which
     queuing is tracked (using a Job ID).

2.   Correlated Job Group A correlated job group is a categorization of jobs imposed by internal
     rules of Project Server. Jobs within a correlated job group are always processed together and in
     order (with some exceptions). In the example below, Project 1 is edited and saved from Project
     Professional and then checked in. Project 1 is then checked out by another user, who then
     publishes it. Publishing Project 1 triggers Reporting and a Reporting job is added to the queue
     as well. Project Server assembles a correlation group comprised of the four jobs related to
     Project 1. It then will attempt to process the jobs in sequence since the Project Server internal
     rules dictates that there is a dependency between the jobs. The dependency that exists is that
     the Project 1 publish and the Reporting database update cannot occur until Project 1 is saved.
     Also, if any of the jobs in the correlation fail, the other jobs after it in the correlation group will
     be blocked. For example, if the Save Project 1 job (job ID 12) fails, the Checkin Project 1 job
     (job ID 13) should get blocked. If the Checkin Project 1 job were executed, this would lead to
     problems because someone else may then checkout Project 1 and then attempt to modify it
     which may be in an inconsistent state due to the failed save.

3.   Sub-jobs Each job can be broken down further into smaller segments called sub-jobs. If a job
     is very large (such as saving a 10 MB project) it will be broken into multiple sub-jobs. Sub-jobs
     are not exposed to the PSI or the Project Web App user. However, sub-jobs may be noted in
     ULS logs (depending on the verbosity option that is selected).
178 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide




Parent/Child Relationships between submitted Jobs
It is important to realize that parent/child relationships can exist for submitted jobs which require
that further processing be done. For example, if a user publishes Project 1, a reporting request for
Project 1 will be generated, as well as notification requests regarding Project 1. Note that
Notifications for Project 1 will always be generated, but since Reporting Project 1 is generated only
if the Publish of Project 1 is successful, should the publish job fail, the Reporting Project 1 job will
not be generated.




Similarly, a child job may fail without any effect to the parent job. For example, if Notification
Project 1 should fail, there will be no effect on Publish Project 1 since it will have already occurred.
It is important to note that although the user may be aware that the publish of Project 1 was
processed through the queue, he/she may not be aware that a child job may have failed. If you
would like to verify what child jobs were spawned from a parent job that they had entered into the
queue as well as their status, you can do this through the My Queued Jobs page in Project Web
App. Administrators can use the Queue Management UI and see all jobs in the queue.
Queue Management                                                                                    179



Queuing states
When a job is submitted to the queue it can transition through various states. The table below
describes each of these states:

       State                                          Description

 Getting queued      Job is put into the queue. A job ID is issued.
 Waiting to be       Job is in the queue and is waiting to be processed.
 Processed
 Processing          Job is being processed.
 Success             Job has been successfully processed. This is a terminating state in which
                     the job can go no further.
 Blocked             Job has been blocked by failure of another job before it in the same
                     correlation group. The user will need to retry or cancel.
 Failed and Not      Job has failed, but is not blocking any other jobs in its group. This is a
 Blocking            terminating state in which the job can go no further.
 Correlation
 Failed and          Job has failed and may be blocking one or more dependent jobs.
 Blocking
 Correlation
 Skipped for         Job has been skipped because a duplicate job has been found after it within
 optimization        the group. For example, a project manager may attempt the following in
                     sequence when working with a project:
                     1. Saves Project 1
                     2. Publishes Project 1
                     3. Changes a task in Project 1
                     4. Save Project 1
                     5. Publishes Project 1
                     6. Changes the start date of Project 1
                     7. Save Project 1
                     8. Publishes Project 1
                     All three incremental saves to Project 1 will be processed. However, all
                     three publish attempts do not need to be processed. If the last publish job
                     is processed, it would produce the same results as if all three publish jobs
                     were processed. For optimization, the first two publish attempts are
                     skipped.
180 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide



         State                                           Description

 Cancelled               Job has been cancelled. A job can be cancelled from any state except the
                         two terminating states (Success, Failed and Not Blocking Correlation).

 Sleeping                Job could not process immediately because of another conflicting job and
                         is temporarily in an inactive mode. The job will be retried.


    Changes in queue state
    As jobs are entered into the queue and processed, it is important to understand the possible
    changes in queue state that can occur. The following flowchart describes the possible paths
    through each state.




    State                                   Next Possible State
    Getting Queued                         Waiting to be Processed
                                           Cancelled
Queue Management                                                                                  181



    State                             Next Possible State
    Waiting to be Processed          Processing
                                     Cancelled
                                     Blocked
                                     Skipped for optimization
    Processing                       Success
                                     Failed and Not Blocking Correlation
                                     Failed and Blocking Correlation
                                     Cancelled
    Success                          End
    Blocked                          Processing
                                     Cancelled
    Failed and Not Blocking          End
    Correlation
    Failed and Blocking              Cancelled
    Correlation                      Processing
    Skipped for Optimization         Blocked (due to a failed job)
                                     Cancelled
                                     Success
                                     Failed and Not Blocking Correlation
                                     Failed and Blocking Correlation
                                     Processing
    Cancelled                        End




Queue Administration Settings
Queue management and administration can be done through the Project Web App Server Settings
page.




In the Queue section of the Server Settings page there are two options to administer the queue:
182 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide


   Manage Queue Jobs You can use this page to view jobs in the queue. You can use the
    configuration options to filter jobs and only see the ones you are interested in viewing. You can
    also retry or cancel jobs through this page.
   Queue Settings You can set configuration options that control the way by which jobs are
    pulled from the Project and Timesheet queues and processed. These settings get applied
    without the need to restart the Queue Service.
You must have the Manage Queue permission in order to access the Queue Administration settings
pages.

    Manage Queue Jobs

    The Manage Queue Jobs page allows you to view jobs in the queue through the jobs grid.
    Viewable jobs are displayed according to the following filter options
     Filter Type
     Job History
     Job Types
     Job Completion States
     Columns
     Advanced Options



    Filter Type




    This configuration option allows you to select filters to query for specific types of jobs that will
    display in the Job Grid. The filters available in the Filter Type drop-down menu are:

             By Status- Displays jobs in the queue in order by status. This is the default setting.
Queue Management                                                                                183



           My Jobs – Displays only jobs initiated by you.
           By Project – Displays jobs in the queue in order by project.
           By ID – Displays jobs in the queue in order by Job ID.
           Active – Displays all jobs that have a status of Active.
           Blocked- Displays all jobs that have a status of Blocked.




    Job History




    This configuration option enables you to select the date range of jobs that display in the Job
    Grid. Use the From and To fields to select a beginning and end data. The default selection is
    to select the one-day date range for the present date.
    You can use the Maximum Number of Jobs field to limit the number of jobs that display for
    a given date range. If the selected date range contains a huge number of jobs that need to
    display in the Job Grid, the load time for the Manage Queue Jobs page can be very long. The
    Maximum Number of Jobs field allows you to limit the jobs that display. The default setting
    is 500.



    Job Types




    The Job Types configuration option enables you to select the type of job (for example, Project
    Create, Timesheet Submit, Notifications etc.) that you want to appear in the Job Grid. By
    default, all job types will be listed in the Selected Jobs list.
184 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide


    Job Completion States




    The Job Completion States configuration option enables you to select the job states (for
    example, Success, Blocked Due to a Failed Job, Processing, etc. ) of the jobs that you want to
    appear in the Job Grid. By default, all job state types except Success will be listed in the
    Selected Jobs list. Success is not available by default because we assume Project Server
    Administrators would be more interested about problems that can be caused by non-successful
    jobs rather than successful one.
    This setting can be helpful for troubleshooting jobs that are not completing successfully in the
    queue. For example, some of your users might be experiencing problems over the past few
    days. You can see specifically which jobs are not completing successfully by going to the Job
    Completion States setting and adding all job states except Success. You can also select a Job
    History date range for that corresponds to when shortly before the problems occurred (for
    example, seven days). The Job Grid should display information about all jobs that are in a non-
    successful job status that have occurred over the past week.


    Columns




    The columns configuration option allows you to select the columns that will appear in the Jobs
    Grid section.
Queue Management                                                                                      185



    Advanced Options




    The Advanced Options queue settings both apply to the way that jobs in the queue are
    cancelled:

   Cancel jobs getting enqueued: Selecting this option will cancel all jobs that remain in a
    “getting enqueued” state for a prolonged period of time. When a job is in this state, it means
    that the queue has been told to start receiving a job that will be processed later, but it has not
    received a tag telling it that all the data for the job has been received. Until the full job has been
    received, the job will remain in the getting queued state. If a job remains in the getting queued
    state for a prolonged period of time, it is likely that something is preventing the job from
    finishing. If the job continues to remain in this state after rerunning it, review your ULS logs to
    troubleshoot why they problem is occurring.
    Saving a project from Project Professional to Project Server is a job that typically enqueues.
    When you save a project from Project Profession to the Project Server, the job synchronizes
    with the server. If the synchronization does not complete, then the job remains in the
    enqueued state.
    This setting is enabled by default.
   Cancel subsequent jobs in the correlation: When you cancel a job that spawns additional
    jobs, this option will automatically cancel those jobs as well. For example, a Project 1 Publish
    job that is cancelled will also cancel the Project 1 Reporting job that was automatically created.
    This setting is also enabled by default.
186 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide


    Jobs Grid




    The Jobs Grid provides a view the jobs that meet the criteria listed in the Manage Queue Jobs
    page. Options within this section enable you to select a job or group of jobs and to apply the
    following options to them, if applicable:
     Retry Job: Allows you to try to rerun selected jobs in the queue that did not complete
         successfully.
     Cancel Job: Allows you to selected jobs in the queue that did not complete successfully.
     View Related Jobs: Allows you to view jobs that have a dependency relationship (for
         example, jobs in the same correlation) with a selected job in the queue.
     Refresh Status: Allows you to update the jobs in your job grid with the latest status.



    Queue Settings
    Queue Settings options allow you to configure the way the queue does operates. The Queue
    Settings page contains the following configuration options:

        Queue Type
        Maximum Number of Job Processor Threads
        Polling Interval (in milliseconds)
        Retry Interval (in milliseconds)
        Retry limit
        SQL retry interval (in milliseconds)
        SQL retry limit
        SQL Timeout (in seconds)
        Cleanup Interval (in hours)
        Cleanup Interval Offset (in minutes)
        Cleanup Age Limit for Successful Jobs (in hours)
Queue Management                                                                               187



       Cleanup Age Limit for Non-Successful Jobs (in hours)
       Bookkeeping Interval (in milliseconds)
       Queue Timeout (in minutes)
       Fast Polling


    Queue Type




    The Queue Type setting allows you to select the queue (either Project or Timesheet) to which
    the settings on the page will apply.




    Maximum Number of Job Processor Threads




    The Maximum Number of Job Processor Threads setting determines how many job processor
    threads are available for use for the selected queue type (Project or Timesheet).
188 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide


    As a starting point, we recommend that you set the maximum number of processor threads
    settings based on the number of available processors (or cores). For example, if the Project
    Server application server uses a single dual-core processor, configuring the settings for two
    threads per queue is a good starting point. If your application server uses a quad dual-core
    processor, you might be able to use eight threads per queue. You can adjust these settings
    accordingly based not only on the volume of transactions, but also the average size of the
    transactions (for example, publishing 10-line projects versus 1000-line projects).
    You should also take into account the farm topology and other applications that are running on
    the farm. For example, if you have four application servers on the farm and each server has two
    cores, a setting of “4” gives you the potential for 32 threads to be operating.
    Adjust the setting accordingly if your application server is also serving as a front-end Web
    server or running search or other processor-intensive activities.
    It is also important to consider the throughput of the SQL Server hosting the Project Server
    databases. For instance, suppose you have eight application servers that can process threads
    and the Maximum Number of Job Processor Threads setting is at “4” (potential for 32 threads
    all processing jobs). The SQL Server may start having contention issues simply because all the
    threads are operating on the same table.
    Additionally, you can monitor performance counters, application logs, and ULS logs to guide
    you in fine-tuning the queue to work with your normal server loads.


    Polling Interval




    The Polling Interval setting allows you to specify the time interval (in milliseconds) in which the
    Queue NT Service polls the project or timesheet database (depending what you selected for Job
    Type) for new jobs. The valid range is 500 through 300000, with a default value of 1000.
Queue Management                                                                                  189



    Retry Interval




    The Retry Interval setting allows you to set the length of time (in milliseconds) between retries
    for jobs that have failed through SQL-related issues, such as SQL deadlocks. The valid range is
    0 (immediate retry) to 300000, with a default value of 1000.




    Retry Limit




    The Retry Limit setting allows you to set the limit on retries on a failed polling query. The
    Project Server Queuing System polls the databases on a regular basis to retrieve jobs that need
    processing. If this query should fail for an SQL-related reason, the system will attempt to poll
    the database again after a period of time.
190 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide


    SQL Retry Interval




    The queue polls the database at regular intervals for jobs that need processing. If the query fails,
    the SQL Retry Interval setting allows you to set the length of time (in milliseconds) before the
    query is retried. The valid range is 0 (immediate retry) to 60000, with a default value of 1000.



    SQL Retry Limit




    The queue polls the database at regular intervals for jobs that need processing. If the query fails,
    the SQL Retry Limit setting allows you to set the number of times the query will be retried. The
    valid range is 0 (no retries) to 100, with a default value of 5.
Queue Management                                                                                  191



    SQL Timeout




    The queue makes SQL calls for retrieving and executing jobs. This SQL Timeout setting allows
    you to set the timeout value (in seconds) for these calls. If any job fails due to an SQL Timeout
    error, you can increase the value for this setting and retry the job. The valid range is 30 to
    86400 (one day), with a default value of 1800 (30 minutes).


    Cleanup Interval




    This Cleanup Interval setting allows you to configure the frequency (in hours) with which the
    Queue Cleanup job runs. The valid range is 1 to 100000, with a default value of 24 (one day).
    For example, if the cleanup interval is set to the default value of “24”, the Queue Cleanup job
    will run every 24 hours. You can set the time which the Queue Cleanup job will run with the
    Cleanup Interval Offset setting.
192 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide


    Cleanup Interval Offset




    The Cleanup Interval Offset setting determines the time at which the Queue clean up job will
    run. The default value is 0, which sets the cleanup to occur at 12:00AM. The valid range is 0
    (12:00 a.m.) to 1439 (11:59 p.m.). Use this in conjunction with the Cleanup Interval setting.
    For example, if the Cleanup Interval Offset value is set to “180”, and the Cleanup Interval
    value is set to “24”, the Queue Cleanup job will run daily at 3:00AM.
    You may want to use the Cleanup Interval Offset to run after the Cube service is scheduled to
    run. In this situation, if the Cube service starts at midnight, you may want to postpone the
    cleanup to occur a couple of hours after midnight.


    Cleanup Age Limit for Successful Jobs




    The Cleanup Age Limit for Successful Jobs setting allows you to configure when a job that has
    been completed successfully will be removed from the system. You can configure this setting
    by entering the value (in hours) in the Cleanup Age Limit for Successful Job field. The value
    you enter configures the queue to delete the job during the cleanup interval, only if the age of
    the successfully created job is equal to or greater than that value.
Queue Management                                                                                              193



    For example, you configure the Cleanup Age Limit for Successful Jobs value to be 24 (default
    value). Cleanup Interval Offset is configured to clean up jobs at 12:00AM daily. If you have a
    publish job that completed successfully on 11:55PM on Sept 1, it will not be removed from the
    system until September 3 at 12:00AM when it will be over 24 hours old. The Sept 2 12:00AM
    cleanup will not remove the job since it will only be five minutes old.

    Note Typically the number of successful jobs in comparison to non-successful jobs is very high.
    Therefore, Cleanup Age for Successful Jobs is usually set to a lower value in comparison to the Cleanup
    Age Limit for Non-Successful Jobs value.
    Note Default Project Server categories cannot be deleted.




    Cleanup Age Limit for Non-Successful Jobs




    The Cleanup Age Limit for Non-Successful Jobs setting allows you to configure when a job
    that has completed in an unsuccessful state will be removed from the system. You can
    configure this setting by entering the value (in hours) in the Cleanup Age Limit for Non-
    Successful Job field. The value you enter configures the queue to delete the job during the
    cleanup interval, only if the age of the unsuccessful job is equal to or greater than that value.
    The method in which unsuccessful jobs are removed from the system is identical to the way
    successfully completed jobs are removed from the system.
194 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide


         Note Jobs that are in an “Unsuccessful and blocking correlation” state will stay in the history until
         they are successfully retried or cancelled. The cleanup for non-successful jobs does not affect jobs
         in this state.

    The default value of this setting is 168 hours (7 days). Since job status information is
    important in helping to troubleshoot problems when a job has not completed successfully, it is
    recommended to not set this value to less than the default setting.


    Bookkeeping Interval




    There are a number of "bookkeeping" tasks that are run by the Queuing System. For example,
    these include awakening jobs in a "sleeping" state, updating the heartbeat timestamp, or
    checking if the Queue Cleanup job needs to be run. The Bookkeeping Interval setting controls
    the time interval (in milliseconds) at which these tasks are run.
    The valid range is 500 to 300000, with a default value of 10000 (ten seconds).
Queue Management                                                                                           195



    Queue Timeout




    In a farm containing multiple Application servers, if the Queue Service fails on one of the
    servers, jobs are automatically distributed the remaining Application servers on which the
    Queuing service is active. A Queue Service is considered to have timed out if it has not updated
    its heartbeat for longer than the Queue Timeout value (in minutes). The heartbeat is updated by
    the Queue in all the Project Web App databases that it touches (for example, each time the
    Published and Draft databases are polled for jobs).
    The valid range is 2 to 20, with a default value of 3.
    Note The Queue Timeout value cannot be less than four times the Bookkeeping Interval at any time. If
    the Queue Timeout value will automatically be changed to four times the Bookkeeping value if the rule is
    violated.
    Note Default Project Server categories cannot be deleted.
196 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide


    Fast Polling




    The Fast Polling setting is enabled by default and allows the Queue to process all jobs in a
    Waiting to be Processed state to be processed as soon as possible. However, if this fast
    processing overwhelms the server and the Queue needs to slow down, this setting can be
    disabled.
    If Fast Polling is disabled, the Queue will check if there are any free threads to process jobs. If
    there are, the free threads will be loaded with jobs in a Waiting to be Processed state. It will
    then wait for the polling interval, and repeat the process.
    If Fast Polling is enabled, the Queue will not wait for the polling interval if there are pending
    jobs. As jobs get processed, all pending jobs will start getting processed immediately.
Operational Policies Management                                                       197




7
Operational Policies Management
This chapter about Operational Policies Management contains the following sections:
 Alerts and Reminders
 Additional Server Settings
 Server-Side Event Handlers
 Active Directory Resource Pool Synchronization
 Project Sites
 Project Site Provisioning Settings
 Bulk Update Project Sites




Alerts and Reminders
198 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide


    Project Server 2010 generates e-mail notifications and reminders for each user whenever new,
    overdue, rejected, or forthcoming events occur. Administrators can configure alerts for their
    reminders from the Alerts and Reminders page in the Additional Settings page of your Project
    Web App Server Settings.
    Before e-mail notifications and reminders can be used by members of your organization, the
    appropriate server and account information must be identified. As a Project Web App
    administrator, you can configure the following settings in the Alerts and Reminders page:

     Notification E-mail Settings
     Schedule E-mail Reminder Service


    Notification E-mail Settings
    The Notification E-mail Settings allows the Project Server Administrator to maintain the
    default sender e-mail address and message information that is automatically included with each
    email notification or reminder sent by Project Server. It also allows you to specify the SMTP
    server and associated port number.




To configure the Notification E-mail setting:
   1. On the Server Settings page, in the Operational Policies page, click Alerts and Reminders.
    2.   On the Alerts and Reminders page, in the Notification E-mail Settings section, enter the
         following information:
         a. Select Turn on notifications with the following settings check box to maintain all
              of your Notification email settings, but turn off notifications globally.
              Note This setting was not available in Project Server 2007. In Office Project Server 2007,
              you had to remove the SMTP server details to stop notifications and reminders from being
              sent.

         b. In the SMTP mail server box, type the name of your SMTP server. Verify the port
            number in the Port box.
Operational Policies Management                                                               199



       c. In the From address box, enter the default email address. This address is the reply-to
           address for all notification and reminder e-mails.
       d. In the Company domain box, enter the domain name of your company (for example,
           Contoso.com).
       e. In the E-mail foot box, type the default message you want appended to all notification
           emails. For example: This email message may contain confidential information and is
           intended only for the recipients named above.
    3. Click Save.

    Schedule E-Mail Reminder Service
    The Schedule E-mail Reminder Service allows a Project Server Administrator to set the time of
    day at which the e-mail reminder service scans the Project Server databases to determine who
    should receive e-mail reminders (users with upcoming or overdue tasks and status reports).




    Depending on the volume of notification and reminder e-mails, you should consider setting the
    service to run at a time when the overall load on the server is low.


To configure the Schedule E-mail Reminder service:
   1. On the Server Settings page, in the Operational Policies page, click Alerts and Reminders.
    2. On the Alerts and Reminders page, in the Schedule E-Mail Reminder Service section, click
       the Schedule e-mail reminder service to run every day at drop-down menu and select
       the time at which you want the service to run.
    3. Click Save.




Additional Server Settings
    The Alerts and Reminders page allows you to configure settings for:
     Project 2007 Compatibility Mode
     Project Professional Versions
     Enterprise Settings
200 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide


        Currency Settings
        Resource Capacity Settings
        Resource Plan Work Day
        Exchange Server Details
        Task Mode Settings




    Project 2007 Compatibility Mode
    The Project 2007 Compatibility Mode setting allows an upgraded Project Server 2010 instance
    to accept client connections from Project Professional 2007 with Service Pack 2 (SP2) as well as
    Project Professional 2010. This setting is only configurable if your deployment has been
    upgraded from Office Project Server 2007 (it is enabled by default after the upgrade). This
    feature in Project Server 2010 is also referred to as Backward Compatibility Mode (BCM).
    Note Project Server 2010 will not accept connections from Project Professional 2003, even if BCM in
    enabled.




    Backward compatibility mode (BCM) is a feature in Project Server 2010 that assists in the
    upgrade of your Enterprise Project Management environment. Project Server 2010 accepts
    connections from the Microsoft Project Professional 2010 client, but it can also accept
    connections from Microsoft Office Project Professional 2007 with Service Pack 2 (SP2) if BCM
    is enabled in Project Server 2010. BCM is enabled automatically after you upgrade to Project
    Server 2010. After you upgrade to Project Server 2010 (by either the in-place or database-attach
    upgrade method), BCM allows you to avoid having to upgrade your Office Project Professional
    2007 client computers at the same time. Because Project Server 2010 accepts connections from
    both Office Project Professional 2007 SP2 and Project Professional 2010 clients when BCM is
    enabled, you can decide to upgrade your clients later, and in batches (running in a mixed
    environment), if you want. When you have finished upgrading the clients to Project
Operational Policies Management                                                                            201



    Professional 2010, you can turn off BCM in Project Server 2010 server settings, which then
    allows for only Project Professional 2010 connections.
    Important Once the Project 2007 Compatibility Mode is disabled, it cannot be re-enabled. Verify that
    you want to disable BCM if you are going to make the change.


We recommend that BCM be enabled only as a temporary measure to help in the upgrade process.
When Project Server 2010 is configured in backward compatibility mode, Project Professional 2010
clients that connect with Project Server 2010 have certain features that are disabled. These include
the following:

   Manually scheduled tasks are not available on the server or client.
   Tasks cannot be set to inactive.
   Font strikethrough is not available.
   All departmental custom fields are enforced in Office Project Professional 2007.

All new features that are available in Project Professional 2010 (for example, Timeline, Team
Planner, 32-bit colors) are available to Project Professional 2010 users, but not to Office Project
Professional 2007 SP2 users.

Office Project Professional 2007 SP2 connecting to Project Server 2010 in BCM mode is blocked
from providing functionality that requires loading a Microsoft Project Web App page in the client.
This includes doing approvals and opening enterprise resources. As a workaround, you can use
Project Web App on a Web browser to do these functions until you are ready to upgrade to Project
Professional 2010. Additionally, workflow-controlled custom fields are not available in Office
Project Professional 2007 SP2.

Project Server 2010 prevents you from creating cross-project type links (resource sharing, cross-
project dependencies, and master/subproject) on mixed Project file versions. For example, you
cannot create a cross-project link from a project that is in Compatibility mode (Office Project 2007
format) with one that is in the Native mode (Project 2010 format). What this means is that after you
disable backward compatibility mode, as you open and save projects, they are converted to Native
mode. However, projects that have not been opened and saved remain in Compatibility mode.
Project Server 2010 does not allow you to create or even connect projects that are in different
modes. Therefore, your cross-project links do not fully function until all of the related projects are
opened and saved so that they are all in Project 2010 format.


When BCM is disabled in Project Server 2010, Project Server is running in Native mode. In Native
mode, only Project Professional 2010 clients are able to connect to Project Server 2010. However,
Project Professional 2010 features that were not available in BCM (such as manually scheduled
tasks), become available in Native mode.
202 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide




To disable Project 2007 Compatibility Mode (Backward Compatibility Mode):
   1. Verify that all projects are checked in to Project Server 2010. You can verify this by
    2. On the Server Settings page, in the Operational Policies page, click Additional Server
       Settings.
    3. On the Additional Settings page, in the Project 2007 Compatibility Mode section, clear
       the Enable Project 2007 Compatibility Mode check box.
    4. Click OK.
    5. After making the change, you must check out and open the Enterprise Global file in
       Microsoft Project Professional 2010. In the Enterprise Global file, make a very minor
       change (for example, dragging the splitter bar on the screen), save the file, and then check it
       back in. This is required to upgrade the Enterprise Global file to the newer version of the
       Microsoft Project Professional client.

    Important The Enterprise Global file must be upgraded to the Project Professional 2010 client after
    BCM is disabled (step 5 in the procedure above). This step ensures that all new projects are in native
    mode with all Project Professional 2010 features enabled. (All new projects are based on the Enterprise
    Global file). Neglecting to upgrade the Enterprise Global file with the Microsoft Project Professional client
    can lead to serious problems. Objects in the file (for example, views, tables, filters) will remain in Office
    Project 2007 format and they will be expected to be in Project 2010 format when new projects are
    created.




    Project Professional Versions




The Project Professional Versions setting allows you to specify which versions (build numbers) of
Project Professional client will be able to connect to your Project Server 2010 environment. This
setting allows you to ensure that Project Professional client connections to the server are all at a
required base level. For example, if you recently updated both Project Server 2010 and Project
Professional 2010 to the October 2010 Cumulative Update, you can verify that all clients
connecting to the server are at least at this level by entering the build number (14.0.5128.5000). All
Operational Policies Management                                                                                 203



Project Professional 2010 clients that have not been updated to the October 2010 Cumulative
Update or later will not be able to connect.
Note If Backward Compatibility Mode (BCM) is enabled, you do not need to make any additional changes to
this setting to allow Project Professional 2007 SP 2 clients to connect to the server. However, you can enter
a build number for the Office Project Server 2007 client if you require a minimum build.

For example, BCM is enabled and you only want the following two builds (and higher) to connect
to Project Server 2010:
   Project Professional 2007 with Service Pack 3 (SP3)
   Project Professional 2010 with the December 2010 Cumulative update
    In the above example, for the Project Professional Versions setting you would enter the build
    number for each version, separated by a comma.
To configure the Project Professional Versioning Settings:
   1. On the Server Settings page, in the Operational Policies section, click Additional Server
       Settings.
    2. On the Additional Server Settings page, in the Project Professional Versions section, type
       the build number of each Project Professional version that you want to connect to Project
       Server 2010. Versions older than the build number you enter will not be able to connect.
    3. Click Save.




         Enterprise Settings


         The Enterprise Settings setting allows you to determine whether or not Project Server 2010
         allows projects to have the following capabilities:
                  Allow master projects to be saved and published to Microsoft Project Server
                   2010 (enabled by default) – Enabling this setting allows master projects to be used
                   in Project Server 2010. Master projects are projects that contain sub-projects, and
                   usually contain tasks that are dependent on each other. Check with your Project
                   Management Office to see if your organization prohibits the use of master
                   projects.
                  Allow projects to use local base calendars – Enabling this settings allows users
                   to not only use enterprise base calendars that are on the system for their enterprise
204 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide


                   projects, but to also use base calendars local base calendars that your users create.
                   Disabling this setting (default) will restrict users to using only enterprise base
                   calendars that are on the system for their projects. Restricting your users to use
                   only enterprise calendars gives you more control by preventing problems that can
                   occur when projects use local base calendars that contain conflicting data. For
                   example, a project using a local base calendar that differs from an enterprise
                   calendar (for example, July 4th as a working day versus a holiday) can lead to faulty
                   calculations and other issues.


    To configure the Enterprise Settings:
       1. On the Server Settings page, in the Operational Policies section, click Additional
            Server Settings.
         2. On the Additional Server Settings page, in the Enterprise settings section:
            a. Select Allow master projects to be saved and published to Microsoft Project
                Server 2010 if you to enable this setting (enabled by default).
            b. Select Allow projects to use local base calendars if you want to enable this
                setting (cleared by default).
         3. Click Save.



         Currency Settings



         Through the currency setting you can select the default currency setting for projects that
         are published to the server (used for reports and the default view for new projects). The
         default value will be based on the default currency of the language used for the Project
         Web App instance.
         You can also select the currency settings for publishing:
                  Allow projects to be published in various currencies – Select this option if
                   your company uses multiple currencies for costs within projects (this is the default
                   setting).
                  Enforce that projects are published in the server currency – Select this option
                   if your company only uses a single currency for costs within projects. The
                   currency used will be the one selected as the default server currency.
Operational Policies Management                                                                     205




     To configure the Currency settings:
      1. On the Server Settings page, in the Operational Policies section, click Additional
            Server Settings.
         2. On the Additional Server Settings page, in the Currency Settings section, select one of
            the following currency options:
             Allow projects to be published in various currencies (default).
             Enforce that projects are published in the server currency
         3. You will see the following message box if you selected Enforce that projects are
            published in the server currency:




            This message box warns you that the change will only be enforced on all subsequent
            projects that are published to the server. All projects that are not using the default
            server currency must be changed to the default currency and republished. Click OK.
         4. All projects published to the server that are using a currency that is in conflict with the
            server currency will be displayed in the Currency Settings section:




            You can use this as a reference to note which projects need to have their currency
            changed to the server currency.
         5. Click Save.
206 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide


         Change currency option for a project
         Use the following procedure in Project Professional 2010 to change the currency settings
         for a project. You can use this procedure to:
                  Select the currency for a specific project if the currency setting allows you to use
                   multiple currencies.
                  Change the currency setting on a project to the server currency if the currency
                   setting allows you to only use the server currency.


    To change the currency for a project in Project Professional 2010:
       1. Open Project Professional 2010 and log on to Project Server 2010.
         2.   Check out and open a project from Project Server 2010.
         3.   Click File, and then click Options.
         4.   On the Project Options page, click Display.
         5.   On the Display page, in the Currency options for this project section, select the
              Currency that you want to use for this project.
         6.   Click OK.
         7.   Click File, and then click Save to save the project.
         8.   Click File, and then click Publish to publish the project.



         Resource Capacity Settings




         The Resource Capacity Settings are used to calculate your resources availability for work
         over a specified time range. Your resources capacity data for the specified time range is
         stored on the Reporting database, and is updated daily through a timer job which is run at a
         time you specify in the settings. You are able to set the Active capacity view by entering a
         time range in relative terms - months in the past, and months in the future – using the
Operational Policies Management                                                                     207



         current date as a relative date point. You can use the Resource Capacity report or create a
         custom report to view this data from the Reporting database.
         The default Active capacity view settings are “1” month behind and “12” months
         ahead. This means that when you view the data in the Reporting database, you can view a
         resources future availability for up to 12 months from the current date, as well as utilization
         over the last month. By increasing the Month Ahead setting, you will get more capacity
         computed for future periods. For example, a company is planning for new projects later in
         the year and wants to forecast the capacity for resources from 12 months to 24
         months. Some customers might want to increase the months behind value if they want to
         get an accurate report of work completed in the past (for example, to account for any users
         who might report time long after work in completed). Note that increasing either value
         will also increase the amount of time it will take for the daily timer job to run.
         The data from the timer job is stored on the Reporting database on a day-to-day basis, and
         can be configured to run at a specific time through the “Scheduled Time” setting. The
         default value for the Scheduled Time setting is 1:00 AM.
    To configure the Resource Capacity setting:
       1. On the Server Settings page, in the Operational Policies section, click Additional
            Server Settings.
         2. On the Additional Server Settings page, in the Resource Capacity Settings section, for
            Active capacity view, enter the following:
            a. In the Months behind field, enter the number of months in the past that you
                want resource data to be calculated from.
            b. In the Months ahead field, enter the number of months in the future that you
                want resource data to be calculated from.
            c. For Scheduled time, enter the time at which you would like latest resource
                capacity information to be processed (the default value is 1:00 AM).
         3. Click Save.
208 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide



         Resource Plan Work Day




         The Resource Plan Work Day setting allows you to specify the length of a work day (full-
         time equivalents or FTE) for all resources in your resource plan. This value can be
         calculated from either the resource’s base calendar, or can be manually entered in as a
         value.


    To configure the Resource Plan Work Day setting:
       1. On the Server Settings page, in the Operational Policies section, click Additional
            Server Settings.
         2. On the Additional Server Settings page, in the Resource Plan Work Day section, for
            Calculate resource full-time equivalent from, select one of the two options:
            a. Resource base calendars – Use this option if you want the full-time equivalents
                to be calculated from each resources base calendar. This is the default option.
            b. Hours per day – Use this option if you want to specify the full-time equivalents
                for your resources in the resource plan. After selecting this option, enter the value
                (in hours) of the standard work day you would like to use for your organization.
                Note that this value will be used for all resources in the resource plan.
         3. Click Save.



         Exchange Server Details



         In Office Project Server 2007, users could view their tasks in Microsoft Outlook with the
         use of an Outlook Add-in that had to be downloaded and installed to each user’s
         computer. In Project Server 2010, Exchange Server can be integrated with Project Server
         2010 to provide task synchronization with Outlook 2007 or Outlook 2010. For more
         information about how to configure task integration with Exchange Server, see the
Operational Policies Management                                                                     209



         TechNet article set “Deploy Project Server 2010 with Exchange Server”
         (http://technet.microsoft.com/en-us/library/ff793353.aspx).


    To configure the Exchange Server Details setting:
       1. On the Server Settings page, in the Operational Policies section, click Additional
            Server Settings.
         2. On the Additional Server Settings page, in the Exchange Server Details section, click
            Synchronize Tasks if you want to automatically synchronize tasks from Project Server
            2010 with Outlook 2007 or Outlook 2010.
         3. Click Save.



         Task Mode Settings




         The Task Mode Settings allow you to select the default mode in which tasks are scheduled
         (manually or automatically). Additionally, if you select the default setting (Manually
         Scheduled), you can also configure if you want task to be published to team members.
         Manually scheduled tasks (also referred to as “User-Controlled Scheduling”) is a new
         feature available in Project Server 2010. When a new project is using the manually
         scheduled task mode, when a new task is created it ignores the scheduling engine and
         creates the task without a duration, start date, or finished date (can be entered manually). It
         can be useful for scheduling tasks with hard dates that are difficult to move (for example,
         training).
         For more information about the Manually Scheduled task feature, see the MSDN article
         “Project 2010: Introducing User-Controlled Scheduling”
         (http://blogs.msdn.com/b/project/archive/2009/10/23/project-2010-introducing-user-
         controlled-scheduling.aspx).


    To configure the Task Mode setting:
       1. On the Server Settings page, in the Operational Policies section, click Additional
              Server Settings.
210 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide


         2.   In the Task Mode Settings section:
              a. Select Manually Scheduled tasks can be published to team members (enabled
                 by default) if you want to allows project managers to publish their manually
                 scheduled task to team members.
              b. For Default task mode in new projects, select one of the two following settings:
                       Manually Scheduled – You need to enter duration, start, and finish dates for
                        your tasks. This is selected by default.
                       Automatically Scheduled: Scheduling engine will automatically calculate
                        durations, start, and finish dates for your tasks.
              c.Select Users can override the default selection in Project Professional
                (enabled by default) if you want to allow your Project Professional users to
                override your default task mode settings you selected.
         3. Click Save.




Server Side Event Handlers
Similar to Office Project Server 2007, Project Server 2010 provides public events that enable
development of custom processes such as adding and enforcing business rules, validation, data
processing, notification services, and workflow. These custom processes are written as server side
event handlers by developers in an organization and can be associated to Project Server 2010 events
through the Server Side Event Handlers page in Project Web App Server Settings. For example,
developers in your organization can create an event handler that starts a custom workflow.
Through the Server Side Event Handlers page, you can associate that event handler with the Project
Published event so that a workflow starts whenever the event occurs.
For more information about Project Server Events, see the MSDN article “Project Server Events”
(http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/ms481079(v=office.12).aspx)
For more information about Project Server Event Handlers, see the MSDN article “How to Write
and Debug a Project Server Event Handler” (http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-
us/library/ms469450(office.12).aspx).
Operational Policies Management                                                                     211




To associate an event handler with a server side event:
   1. On the Server Settings page, in the Operational Policies section, click Server Side Event
       Handlers.
    2. On the Server Side Event Handlers page, in Events list, find the event that you want to
       associate your new event with, and then click the Event Source listed next to the Event
       Name (for example, click the Project Event Source for the Published Event Name).
    3. In the Event Handlers section, the Event Source and Event Name should populate with the
       Event you selected. Any event handlers that are currently associated with the event will
       display in the Event Handlers list. Click New Event Handler.
    4. In the New Event Handler page, enter the following information for the event handler you
       want to associate with the selected event:
       a. In the Display Information section, enter the Event Handler name. You can also
           optionally enter a description of the Event Handler.




         b. In the System Information section, in the Assembly Name field, enter the full name of
            the strongly named event handler assembly.




         c. In the Class Name field, enter the fully qualified name of the class the implements the
            event handler functionality.
212 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide




           d. In the Order field, provide the order number of the event handler. If it is the only event
              handler associated with the event, enter “1”. If there are multiple event handlers
              associated with the event, enter the order number in which this event handler will be
              executed.




  5.       Click Save.




Active Directory Resource Pool Synchronization
Project Server 2010 Active Directory Enterprise Resource Pool synchronization is used to create or
update multiple Project Server enterprise resources at once. Project Server enterprise resources can
also be automatically activated and deactivated based on group membership in the Active Directory
directory service. For example, new employees in your department can automatically be added as
Project Server enterprise resources as long as they are in the Active Directory group selected for
synchronization. Conversely, employees who are removed from the Active Directory group have
their Project Server accounts deactivated upon synchronization.
Enterprise Resource Pool synchronization also updates enterprise resource properties with the
most current data from Active Directory. For example, an employee's name and e-mail address may
change due to marriage. As long as the change is made in Active Directory and the user is in the
linked group, the change occurs in the user’s Enterprise Resource properties when synchronization
occurs.
The Enterprise Resource Pool can be mapped to a single Active Directory group for
synchronization. This Active Directory group can, however, contain nested groups whose members
are also synchronized.
The following actions can occur during the Enterprise Resource Pool synchronization process:
            A new Project Server enterprise resource and corresponding user account can be created
             based on an Active Directory account.
            An active Project Server resource/user account can be deactivated.
Operational Policies Management                                                                     213



        An existing Project Server user account’s metadata (for example, name, e-mail address, and
         so on) can be updated if it has changed in Active Directory.
        A previously inactive Project Server resource/user account can be reactivated.
Before you perform this procedure, confirm that:
        You have access to Project Server through Project Web App with an account with the
         Manage Active Directory Settings and the Manage users and groups global settings.
        The Service Application (SA) service account for the Project Server instance has Read
         access to all Active Directory groups and user accounts involved in the synchronization.
         You can verify this account in the SA's properties on the Service Application
         Administration page on the SharePoint Central Administration Web site.

         To configure Enterprise Resource Pool synchronization
Use this procedure to configure Enterprise Resource Pool synchronization in Project Server 2010.
The following table describes possible scenarios and corresponding actions that occur when
Enterprise Resource Pool synchronization takes place:

Scenario                                        Action

 The user exists in Active Directory and is a   A new corresponding Project Server user and
 member of the Active Directory group           enterprise resource is created in Project Server
 mapped to the Enterprise Resource Pool.        and added to the Team Members Project Server
 The user does not exist in Project Server.     security group.

 The user exists in Project Server, but does    If Prevent Active Directory synchronization
 not exist in Active Directory or is not a      for this user is not enabled for the user account
 member of the Active Directory group           in Project Server, the corresponding Project
 mapped to the Enterprise Resource Pool.        Server user account status is set to inactive.
                                                Otherwise the account will stay active.

 The user exists in Active Directory and is a   The corresponding Project Server enterprise
 member of the Active Directory group           resource and user information is updated (if
 mapped to the Enterprise Resource Pool.        applicable).
 The user exists in Project Server as an
 enterprise resource and a user. The user's
 information has been updated in Active
 Directory.

 The user exists in Active Directory and is a   If the Automatically reactivate currently
214 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide



 Scenario                                            Action

 member of the Active Directory group                inactive users if found in Active Directory
 mapped to the Enterprise Resource Pool.             during synchronization resource option is
 The user exists in Project Server, but as an        selected in Project Server, the account is
 inactive account.                                   reactivated. If the option is not selected, the
                                                     account remains inactive in Project Server.



    Configure Enterprise Resource Pool synchronization
       1. On the Server Settings page, in the Operational Policies section, click Active
              Directory Resource Pool Synchronization.
         2.   On the Active Directory Enterprise Resource Pool Synchronization page, in the Active
              Directory Group section, under Active Directory Group to Synchronize, click Find
              Group.




         3.   On the Find Group in Active Directory — Webpage Dialog page, in the Group
              Name field, enter all or part of the name of the Active Directory group which you
              want to synchronize with the Enterprise Resource Pool. Click the button next to the
              field to search the Active Directory forest based on your search criteria.




         4.   To select a group from a remote forest, type the fully qualified domain name of the
              group (for example, group@corp.contoso.com). You can synchronize to a security or
              distribution group of any scope (Local, Global, or Universal).
              Note The Active Directory forest that is searched is shown at the top of the Find Group in
              Active Directory — Webpage Dialog page. The forest is defined by the fully qualified domain
              name of the account for the Shared Services Provider on which the Project Server instance
              is running.
Operational Policies Management                                                                  215



         5.   From the Group Name list, select the group with which you want to synchronize your
              Enterprise Resource Pool.




              Click OK. When you do so, the Active Directory group membership of the selected
              group is put into memory. This includes all users who are members of nested
              active directory groups across domains and forests.
         6.   On the Active Directory Enterprise Resource Pool Synchronization page, you should
              see the Active Directory group you selected next to Active Directory Group to
              Synchronize: in the Active Directory Group section.




         7.   If you want to configure synchronization to occur on a scheduled basis, in the
              Scheduling Options section, select Schedule Synchronization. Alternatively, you
              can choose to manually run Active Directory Enterprise Resource Pool
              synchronization. If you prefer the manual option, skip the following step and continue
              to step 8.




         8.   In the Frequency fields, define the frequency at which you want synchronization to
              occur between the Enterprise Resource Pool and the Active Directory group. This can
              be scheduled over a defined period of days, weeks, or months. Select a start date and
              time.
216 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide


         9.   You can enable inactive accounts to be reactivated if they are found in the Active
              Directory group during synchronization. To do so, in the Resource Option section,
              select Automatically reactivate currently inactive users if found in Active
              Directory during synchronization. (For example, enabling this option would ensure
              that if an employee were rehired, the employee's user account would be reactivated).



         10. Click Save to save the settings. Click Save and Synchronize Now if you want to
             synchronize your Enterprise Resource Pool immediately. If you choose not to schedule
             Enterprise Resource Pool synchronization, you can rerun it manually when needed by
             returning to this page and clicking Save and Synchronize Now.
         11. You can check the status of the Enterprise Resource Pool synchronization by returning
             to the Active Directory Enterprise Resource Pool Synchronization page and reviewing
             the information in the Synchronization Status section. It contains information such
             as when the last successful synchronization occurred.




Project Sites
         Project Sites were referred to as Project Workspaces in previous versions of Project Server.
         The Project Sites page in Server Settings allows you to manage Project Sites for your
         projects in Project Server 2010. You can do the following through the Project Sites page:
          Create a new Project Site
          Edit a Project Site Address
          Synchronize
          Delete a Project Site
          Go to Project Site Settings
Operational Policies Management                                                                    217




         Create Site
         The Create Site setting allows you to create a new Project Site for your project if you did
         not originally create one when the project was originally published to Project Server 2010.
         You can view the Project Sites list to determine if a project does not have an existing
         Project. All projects without project sites will not have a corresponding URL next to it in
         the Site Address column.
    To create a Project site for a project:
       1. On the Server Settings page, in the Operational Policies section, click Project Sites.
         2. From the Project Name list, select a project for which you want to create the project
            site.
         3. Click Create Site.




         4.   The Create Project Site message box appears.
218 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide




         5. In the Web Application list, select the Web Application you want for the Project Site.
         6. In the Site Application field, verify the site URL for the project site. You can edit the
            Site URL information if needed. The site URL will be appended to the Web
            Application to provide you with the Destination URL (as seen in the Destination URL
            field).
         7. Click OK. The project site you created will now display next to the project name you
            selected in step 2.

         Edit Site Address
         The Edit Site Address setting allows you to edit the destination URL for a project site to
         point to a new site address. Changing the site address information breaks the existing link
         between the project and the existing Project Site. You can then enter the information to
         the new Project Site.
         Note Before changing the Project Site URL for a project, be sure to provision a new Project Site
         with a new site template.

    To edit a site address for a Project site:
       1. On the Server Settings page, in the Operational Policies section, click Project Sites.
         2. From the Project Name list, select a project for which you want to edit the Project site
            information.
         3. Click Edit Site Address.




         4.   The Edit Site Address dialog box appears.
Operational Policies Management                                                                             219




         5. Type a new SharePoint site URL will be selected by default. Change the project site
            URL information to the new URL.
         6. Click Test URL to verify if the new project site URL can be opened.
         7. Click OK. The project site URL for the project you selected in step 2 will be changed
            to the new URL.



         Synchronize
         The Synchronize button allows you to manually synchronize the Project Site’s users,
         permissions, and other Project Server-related information between Project Server 2010 and
         the Web Server that is running SharePoint Foundation.
         If you want to automatically run synchronization for your Project Sites, see the Project Site
         Provisioning Settings Automatic Provisioning setting.
         To synchronize your Project Site information between Project Server and SharePoint
              Foundation Server:
                1. On the Server Settings page, in the Operational Policies section, click Project
                   Sites.
                2. From the Project Name list, select a project for which you want to synchronize
                   your Project site information between Project Server 2010 and SharePoint
                   Foundation.
                3. Click Synchronize.




                Note To view a confirmation that Synchronization occurred, you can go to the Manage Queue
                Job Server Settings and verify that the synchronization job completed successfully.
220 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide



         Delete Site
         The Delete Site setting allows you to permanently remove a Project Site and its content.
         Important Verify that you truly want to permanently remove a site and its content before you
         proceed with this procedure. Deleted Project Sites are not recoverable.

         To delete a Project site:
            1. On the Server Settings page, in the Operational Policies section, click Project
                 Sites.
              2. From the Project Name list, select a project for which you want to delete a Project
                 Site.
              3. Click Delete Site.




              4.   A message box appears that will ask you to confirm if you want to delete the
                   Project Site. It will also warn you that




                 Click OK to proceed with deleting the site. Click Cancel if you no longer want to
                 delete the site.
              5. If you clicked OK, the Project Site will be deleted and will no longer display next
                 to the project it was associated with in the Project Sites page.



         Go to Project Site Settings
         The Go to Project Site Settings setting allows you to go directly to a Project Site’s site
         settings page. From the Site Settings page, you can make changes to the site, such as add
         or remove users to the site, add Web Parts to the site, customize the site’s look and feel,
         and many others.
Operational Policies Management                                                                    221



    To go to the Site Settings page for a Project site:
       1. On the Server Settings page, in the Operational Policies section, click Project Sites.
         2. From the Project Name list, select a project for which you want to view the Project
            Site settings page.
         3. Click Go to Project Site Settings.




         4.   The Site Settings page for the selected Project Site will open. You can make changes
              to the Project Sites site settings from this page.




Project Site Provisioning Settings
         The Project Site Provisioning Settings page allows you to configure settings for the Project
         Sites that are created for projects. You can configure the following settings:
          Site URL
          Default Site Properties
          Automatic Provisioning
          Project Site Permissions
222 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide



         Site URL




         The Site URL settings allow you to change the default Web application in which your
         Project Sites are created. The default Site URL information on this page is based on the
         information provided during the provision of the Project Web App instance.
    To specify Site URL information:
       1. On the Project Web App Home page, click Server Settings.
         2. On the Server Settings page, in the Operational Policies section, click Project Site
            Provisioning Settings.
         3. On the Project Site Provisioning Settings page, in the Site URL section, select the Web
            application you want to be the default Web Application that your Project Sites will be
            created in from the Default Web application drop-down menu.
         4. In the Site URL field, type the URL path (for example, PWA).
         5. Click Save.



         Default Site Properties




         The Default Site Properties settings allow you select the default site template language and
         the default Project Site template that will be used to create your Project Sites.
         When selecting a Project Site template, you can only use the “Microsoft Project Site”
         template that installs with Project Server 2010, or a template that is derived from it. The
Operational Policies Management                                                                                223



         Microsoft Project Site template is built to supports features and functionality in SharePoint
         Server 2010.
         Important Project Server 2010 and Office Project Server 2007 do not support the use of the
         Project Tracking Workspace template from the SharePoint Server 2010 “Fab 40” templates to
         create project sites. For more details, see Project Server 2010 –The Fab 40 Strikes Again! on the
         Microsoft Project Support Weblog
         (http://blogs.msdn.com/b/brismith/archive/2010/12/06/project-server-2010-the-fab-40-strike-
         again.aspx).

    To configure default site properties for your Project Sites:
       1. On the Server Settings page, in the Operational Policies section, click Project Site
            Provisioning Settings.
         2. On the Project Site Provisioning Settings page, in the Default Site Properties section,
            select the default language for your Project Sites from the Default site template
            language drop-down menu.
         3. In the Default Project Site template drop-down menu, select the Project Site template
            that will be used to create your Project Sites.
         4. Click Save.



         Automatic Provisioning




         The Automatic Provisioning setting allows you to indicate whether you want to have
         Project Server 2010 create Project Sites for projects when the projects are newly published
         to the server. Alternatively, the settings can be configured to allow the Project Server
         Administrator to create Project Sites manually after projects have been published, if
         desired.
         Note If you have a group of Project Managers who will not need to create Project sites, you can set
         the provision mode to Allow users to manually crate project sites in Project Server as noted above.
         Additionally, denying this group of users the “Manage SharePoint Foundation” global permission
         will eliminate the display of a Publish Project Site dialog box that typically displays whenever a
         project is created.
224 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide


    To configure the Automatic Provisioning setting:
       1. On the Server Settings page, in the Operational Policies section, click Project Site
            Provisioning Settings.
         2. On the Project Site Provisioning Settings page, in the Automatic Provisioning section,
            under Provisioning Mode select one of the two options:
             Automatically create a project site for each project when first published to
                Project Server
             Allow users to manually create project sites in Project Server
         3. Click Save.



         Project Site Permissions




         The Project Site Permissions setting allows you to specify access is granted to Project sites
         in Project Server 2010. This setting allows you to automatically synchronize Project Web
         App users with Project Sites over the following circumstances:
                  When Project Sites are created
                  When project managers publish projects
                  When user permissions change in Project Server 2010
         When the Project Site Permissions setting is enabled, the following occur automatically
         when any of the circumstances above occur:
                  Project managers who have published a project or who have Save Project
                   permissions on a project are added to the Project Managers (Microsoft Project
                   Server) site group.
                  Team members with assignments in a project are added to the Team Members
                   (Microsoft Project Server) site group.
                  Other Project Server users who have View Project Site permission on a project are
                   added to the Readers (Microsoft Project Server) site group.
Operational Policies Management                                                                    225



    To enable the Project Site Permissions setting:
       1. On the Project Web App Home page, click Server Settings.
         2. On the Server Settings page, in the Operational Policies section, click Project Site
            Provisioning Settings.
         3. On the Project Site Provisioning Settings page, in Project Site Permissions section,
            click Check to automatically synchronize Project Web App users with Project
            Sites when they are created, when project managers publish projects, and when
            user permissions change in Project Server. When the check box is cleared, Project
            Server users are never synchronized with Project Sites.
         4. Click Save.


When the check box is cleared, users are not automatically added to their respective Web sites. To
add or update users to their sites, click the Synchronize button on the Project Sites page of the
Operational Policies section of Project Web App Server Settings.


Bulk Update Project Sites
The Bulk Update Project Sites page allows you to change site path information for Project Sites in
one Web application to a different one (for example, when migrating). It allows you to break the
original links between Project and their corresponding Project Sites in one site collection, and then
relinking to the new Project Sites in the new site collection.

          Update Site Paths
          Update Content Types
          Project Site Permissions
226 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide



         Update Site Paths




         The Update Site Paths setting allows you break links between projects and Project Sites
         contained in one site collection and relink with the new Project Sites in a different site
         collection.
    To update Project Site paths to a new site collection:
       1. On the Server Settings page, in the Operational Policies section, click Bulk Update
            Project Sites.
         2. On the Bulk Update Project Sites page, in the Update Site Paths section, for Previous
            Site Paths:
             Select the Web Application for your Project Sites that you want to break the link
                 to. If you are migrating project sites on the same server, the Web Application you
                 need to select may display as a URL. If you are migrating projects sites from a
                 different server, the Web Application you need to select may display as a GUID.
             In the Site URL field, type the site URL information (for example, PWA).
         3. In the New Site Paths:
             Select the Web Application that contains the Project Sites that you want to link to
                 (for example, http://hr1.contoso.com).
             In the Site URL field, type the site URL information (for example, PWA).
         4. Click Save.
Operational Policies Management                                                                           227



         Update Content Types




         The Update Content Types setting allows you to ensure that when migrating content from
         one farm to another, that the content types of Project Issues, Risks, and Documents are
         updated in the new location so that item links will remain functional.
    To enable the Update Content Types setting:
       1. On the Server Settings page, in the Operational Policies section, click Bulk Update
            Project Sites.
         2. On the Bulk Update Project Sites page, in the Update Content Types section, click
            Update Content Types.
         3. Click Save.



         Project Site Permissions




         The Project Site Permissions setting allows you to synchronize permissions to the Project
         Sites while updating the site paths. This allows users to immediately access their Project
         Sites.
         Note For the Project Site Permissions site permissions setting to be enabled, the Project Site
         Permissions setting must also be enabled on the Project Site Provisioning page.

    To enable the Synchronize Site Permissions setting:
       1. On the Server Settings page, in the Operational Policies section, click Bulk Update
            Project Sites.
         2. On the Bulk Update Project Sites page, in the Project Site Permissions section, click
            Synchronize site permissions.
         3. Click Save.
228 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide




8
Workflow and Project Detail Pages
    This chapter about Project Server 2010 Workflow and Project Detail Pages contains the
    following sections:
             Enterprise Project Types
             Workflow Phases
             Workflow Stages
             Change or Restart Workflows
             Project Detail Pages
             Project Workflow Settings
Workflow and Project Detail Pages                                                                   229



Enterprise Project Types
An enterprise project type represents a wrapper that encapsulates phases, stages, a single workflow,
and PDPs. Each EPT represents a single project type. Normally, project types are aligned with
individual departments, for example, marketing projects, IT projects, or HR projects. Using project
types helps to categorize projects within the same organization that have a similar project life cycle.
For a user, the EPTs appear in a drop-down list of project types when the user clicks New Project
on the Ribbon in Project Web App.



          Create New Enterprise Project Type
      To create a new enterprise project type
     1. On the PWA home page, click Server Settings.
     2. On the Server Settings page, under Workflow and Project Detail Pages, click Enterprise
        Project Types
     3. Click New Enterprise Project Type. In the Name box, enter a name for the type, and
        then provide a brief description in the Description box.
230 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide




    4.    Select a workflow from the Site Workflow Association list. Once you associate a site
          workflow with a project type and save the type, you cannot go back and update the type to
          use a different workflow.
          Note If you're not seeing any workflows in this list, be sure that your server administrator has
          installed and configured workflows on the Microsoft Project Server 2010 machine. The Project
          Server 2010 workflow platform is built on the SharePoint workflow platform, which, in turn, is
          built on the Windows workflow platform.

    5.    Select a project detail page from the New Project Page list.
    6.    If you selected No Workflow from the Site Workflow Association list, select the project
          detail pages that you want to include in this project type from the Available Project Detail
          Pages box, and then click Add to move them to the box on the right.
    7.    If the enterprise project type that you are creating is the one that all new projects should
          use by default, select the Use this as the default Enterprise Project Type during
          Project Creation check box.
    8.    Click the button next to the Departments field to select the departments you want to
          associate with this project type, if appropriate.
    9.    If you want to associate an image with this project type, provide the URL for the image in
          the Type the URL box.
    10.   In the Order section, choose whether you want this project type to appear at the end of
          the list of project types, or if you want to control its placement in the list.
    11.   To include this type at the end of the list, select the Position this type at the end check
          box.
    12.   To control the placement of this type in the list, clear the Position this type at the end
          check box, and then choose the type that you want to appear just before the type you're
          creating from the Choose the type before which the current type should be
          positioned list.
    13.   Select a template from the Project Plan Template list, if appropriate.
    14.   Select a template from the Project Site Template list, if appropriate.
    15.   Click Save to save this enterprise project type to the server, making it available for new
          project or proposal creation.
Workflow and Project Detail Pages                                                                    231



Workflow Phases
          A phase represents a collection of stages grouped to identify a common set of activities in
          the project life cycle. Examples of phases are project creation, project selection, and project
          management (shown as Create, Select, and Manage Phases). Phases do not have any direct
          technical effect on the behavior of an Enterprise Project Type. That is, changing the order
          of phases does not affect how the system reacts. The primary purpose of demand
          management phases is to provide a smoother user experience where users have the option
          of organizing stages into logical groups.




          Default Workflow Phases


          New Workflow Phase
      To create a new workflow phase
     1. On the PWA home page, click Server Settings.
     2. On the Server Settings page, under Workflow and Project Detail Pages, click Workflow
        Phases
     3. Click the New Workflow Phase button on the toolbar.
     4. Under Name enter the name of the desired phase and optionally enter a description of the
        phase in the Description text box.
     5. Click Save.




          Add Workflow Phase
232 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide




     To edit an existing workflow phase
    1. On the PWA home page, click Server Settings.
    2. On the Server Settings page, under Workflow and Project Detail Pages, click Workflow
       Phases
    3. Click the existing workflow phase in the Workflow Phases column that you wish to modify.
    4. Under Name change the name to the desired phase name and optionally enter a
       description of the phase in the Description text box.
    5. Click Save.
Workflow and Project Detail Pages                                                                233



Workflow Stages
A stage represents one step within a project life cycle. A stage is composed of one or more Project
Detail Pages linked by common logic or theme. Stages at a user level appear as steps within a
project. At each step, data must be entered, modified, reviewed, or processed.




          Workflow Stages




          New Workflow Stages
      To create a new workflow stage
     1. On the PWA home page, click Server Settings.
     2. On the Server Settings page, under Workflow and Project Detail Pages, click Workflow
        Stages.
     3. Click the New Workflow Phase button on the toolbar.
     4. Under Name enter the name of the desired stage and optionally enter a description of the
        stage in the Description text box.
     5. Under Description for Submit type the description that will be displayed to end-users
        when submitting to workflow. By default, this description will be displayed in the following
        places:
        a. As a Tool Tip when users rest the pointer on the 'Submit' button in a Project Detail
            Page
        b. As part of the confirmation dialog shown to users when they click the 'Submit' button
            in a Project Detail Page
234 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide


    6. Under Workflow Phase choose the Workflow Phase to correspond with this Workflow
       Stage.
    7. Under Workflow Stage Status Project Detail Page choose the Workflow Stage Status
       Project Detail Page from the dropdown. This page will be displayed as the introduction
       page when the project enters this workflow stage.
    8. In Visible Project Detail Pages select the Project Detail Pages you wish to be visible for
       this workflow stage by selecting them from the Available column and clicking the Add
       button to put them in the Selected Project Detail Pages column.
              Note By default no PDPs are visible for workflow stages but at least one page should be
              selected for a workflow stage.

    9.    Under Additional Settings for the Visible Project Detail Page you may edit the specific
          description of the Visible PDPs by selecting them in the right column from the previous
          step and then editing the description in the text box. You may also check the Project
          Detail Page requires attention check box to highlight the PDP on the Workflow Status
          page.
    10.   Under Required Custom Fields select the Custom Fields that are required for the
          Workflow to enter this Workflow Stage and click the Add button. Take note that these
          Custom Fields are 'Required' just for this Workflow Stage, not for all the subsequent
          Workflow Stages in the Workflow.
    11.   Under Read Only Custom select the Custom Fields that are read only for this Workflow
          Stage and click the Add button.
    12.   Under Strategic Impact Behavior select the radio button to specify whether the Strategic
          Impact values for the project are Read Only, Read Write or Required in this workflow
          stage. If Strategic Impact behavior is set to Required then a strategic impact value needs to
          be specified for every business driver. This is typically accomplished by using the Strategic
          Impact Web part on a project detail page.
    13.   Under Project Check In Required select whether this Workflow Stage requires the
          project to be checked in. If project checkin is required for the current workflow stage, the
          user cannot Submit the Project to Workflow without checking in the Project. This option is
          typically selected if any project updates occur in this Workflow Stage (which will be
          blocked if the project is not checked in).
    14.   Click Save. The Project Workflow Stage is now saved.
Workflow and Project Detail Pages   235
236 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide




         Add a Workflow Stage Details Page




Change or Restart Workflows
The Change or Restart Workflow section allows you to change a project’s in-progress workflow or
change a project’s current stage in a workflow.




         Restart Enterprise Project Type




         Change or Restart a Workflow
     To Change or Restart a Workflow
    1. On the PWA home page, click Server Settings.
Workflow and Project Detail Pages                                                                            237



     2. On the Server Settings page, under Workflow and Project Detail Pages, click Change or
        Restart a Workflow.
     3. Under Choose Enterprise Project Type choose the Enterprise Project Type that needs
        to be changed or restarted.
     4. Under Choose Projects select the project with the workflow instances that need to be
        changed or restarted and add it to the Target List.
               Note Only projects that are not checked out or are checked out to you are shown in the
               Choose Projects section. If a project is checked out to another user the workflow cannot be
               changed or restarted on that project.

     5. Under Choose new Enterprise Project Type or restart workflow for current
        Enterprise Project Type select whether to restart the current workflow for the selected
        projects or to associate the projects with a new Enterprise Project Type. If a new
        Enterprise Project Type is selected, you must then choose from the drop down menu the
        new Enterprise Project Type you wish to use.
     6. Under Choose Workflow Stage to Skip to you can select the target workflow stage this
        workflow will skip to.
     7. Click OK.




          Choose Workflow Stage to Skip


Project Detail Pages
          Project Detail Pages (PDPs) represent a single Web Part Page in Project Web App. PDPs
          can be used to display or collect information from the user. You can create PDPs in much
          the same way you create any Web Part Page in a SharePoint site, where you can add Web
          Parts that provide the experience you want. You can add individual Web Parts from the
          standard Web Part galleries or create custom Web Parts.
          Project Server Web Parts and custom Web Parts used in demand management all contain
          custom fields. Web Parts can make calls to the Project Server Interface (PSI), query the
          Reporting database, or integrate with external systems.

          Create or Edit Project Detail Pages
          There are three types of Project Detail Pages that can be created:
238 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide




         project template that has a workflow for portfolio analysis.


                                   diting

     To create a project detail page
    1. On the PWA home page, click Server Settings.
    2. On the Server Settings page, under Workflow and Project Detail Pages, click Project
       Detail Pages.
    3. Click on the Documents tab.
    4. Select New Document on the ribbon.




    5. On the newly created blank page, select Add a Web Part.
    6. In Categories select Project Web App and then select the web part you would like to add.
Workflow and Project Detail Pages                                                                  239




     7.   The newly selected Web Part is displayed. Now you must select the project fields used to
          populate the web part. From the top right menu select Edit Web Part.




     8.  In the Edit Web Part pane click the Modify button.
     9. Select the project data you wish the web part you selected to display and then click OK.
     10. In the Edit Web Part pane under Appearance enter a title and then click OK.
     11. Select the Page Tools tab on the ribbon and click Stop Editing.




     12. Now select Edit Properties on the ribbon and update the Display Name and Page Type
          for your newly created Project Detail Page.
240 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide



Project Workflow Settings
Project Server 2010 workflows are built from SharePoint Server 2010 Site Workflows which are
built off of Windows Workflow Foundation, which in turn is built off of Windows .NET
Framework 3.5. The workflows are made up of workflow activities that are objects with code within
it.




         Project Server 2010 Workflow Hierarchy

The Project Workflow Settings page designates the Workflow Proxy User account so that the
Project Server Interface (PSI) calls within a workflow can be performed.
By default, all PSI calls within a workflow will be made under the context of the Workflow Proxy
User Account. For these PSI calls to be successful the Workflow Proxy User Account should have
appropriate permissions in Project Server, therefore the only item to be set on this page is to make
sure that the Workflow Proxy User account text box contains a logon account with sufficient
permissions.
Workflow and Project Detail Pages     241




          Project Workflow Settings
242




Appendices
Project Server 2010 Category Permissions                                                     243




A
Project Server 2010 Category
Permissions
The following is a list of category permissions for Microsoft Project Server 2010. The table includes
columns with the following information:
           Description Describes what the permission lets you do.
           Dependencies Lists any other permissions (global or category) or requirements to
               allow the permission to function.
              Previous name, if renamed from Office Project Server 2007 Specifies the
               Microsoft Office Project Server 2007 permission name if the permission was renamed
               from Office Project Server 2007 but provides the same functionality.
              New for Project Server 2010 Displays an X symbol if the permission is new for
               Project Server 2010.


                                                                           Previous
                                                                           name, if       New
                                                                           renamed        for
                                                                           from Office    Project
                                                                           Project        Server
 Permission         Description                    Dependencies            Server 2007    2010

 Accept Task        Allows a user to accept
 Update             updates on projects without
 Requests           requiring that the user have
                    the Save Project to Project
                    Server permission
244 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide



                                                                              Previous
                                                                              name, if      New
                                                                              renamed       for
                                                                              from Office   Project
                                                                              Project       Server
 Permission         Description                      Dependencies             Server 2007   2010

 Adjust             Allows a Project Web App         User must have the
 Timesheet          user to adjust a team            View Resource
                    member’s submitted               Timesheet
                    timesheet entries. Grant this    permission to use this
                    permission to any member         permission.
                    of your organization who
                    requires the ability to adjust
                    a resource’s timesheet entry
                    after that resource has
                    submitted the entry.

 Approve            Allows a user to approve a          User must have
 Timesheets         team member’s submitted              the Approve
                    timesheet entries. Grant this        Timesheets
                    permission to any member             permission
                    of your organization who             through a
                    requires the ability to              category which
                    approve a resource’s                 contains the
                    timesheet.                           resources which
                                                         they want to
                                                         approve
                                                         timesheets on.


 Assign             Allows a user to assign or          User must have
 Resources          allocate a given resource to         the View Team
                    projects. This permission            Builder global
                    controls the list of available       permission in
                    resources in Team Builder            order to use the
                    in both Project Web App              Build Team page
                    and Project Professional.            in Project Web
                    Grant this permission to all         App or Project
                    project managers and                 Professional.
                    resource managers who
Project Server 2010 Category Permissions                                                    245



                                                                            Previous
                                                                            name, if      New
                                                                            renamed       for
                                                                            from Office   Project
                                                                            Project       Server
 Permission         Description                    Dependencies             Server 2007   2010

                    have to assign, manage, or        User must have
                    allocate resources. For            the Build Team
                    example, if you want to add        on Project
                    resource R to project P,           category
                    then you must have                 permission in
                    permission to assign               order to assign a
                    resource R (Assign                 resource in an
                    Resources) plus permission         existing
                    to build the team on Project       enterprise
                    P (Build Team on Project).         project.
                    In addition, you must have
                    access to the Team Builder        User must have
                    page through either Project        the Build Team
                    Web App or Project                 on New Project
                    Professional (Assign               global permission
                    Resources to Project Team).        in order to assign
                                                       a resource in a
                                                       new enterprise
                                                       project.


 Build Team         Allows a user to add              User must have
 On Project         resources to a project that        the View
                    has already been saved to          Enterprise
                    the Project Server database.       Resource Data
                    Grant this permission to           and Assign
                    project managers who want          Resources
                    to use the Build Team              category
                    feature in Project                 permissions in
                    Professional to staff their        order to see
                    projects before they save          resources that are
                    (and publish) them to the          part of the
                    Project Server database. Or,       Enterprise
                    grant this permission to           Resource Pool in
246 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide



                                                                             Previous
                                                                             name, if      New
                                                                             renamed       for
                                                                             from Office   Project
                                                                             Project       Server
 Permission         Description                     Dependencies             Server 2007   2010

                    resource managers who              the Build Team
                    want to use the Build Team         feature in Project
                    feature in the Project Center      Professional and
                    of Project Web App to add          Project Web
                    resources to a project that        App.
                    has already been saved to
                    the Project Server database.      User must have
                                                       permission (at
                                                       the category
                                                       level) to access
                                                       the specific
                                                       projects and
                                                       resources that
                                                       have to be
                                                       accessed to build
                                                       the project team
                                                       or assign
                                                       resources.


 Create New         Determines which projects       User must be granted
 Task or            are available when you are      the New Task
 Assignment         creating new tasks. Grant       Assignment global
                    this permission to any          permission in order to
                    group of projects that          access the New task
                    individual users will be able   page in Project Web
                    to create new tasks in by       App.
                    using the Create a new task
                    page in Project Web App.

 Create             When allowed, this
 Object Links       permission enables a user to
                    create, modify, or delete
                    links between Project Tasks
Project Server 2010 Category Permissions                                                    247



                                                                            Previous
                                                                            name, if      New
                                                                            renamed       for
                                                                            from Office   Project
                                                                            Project       Server
 Permission         Description                      Dependencies           Server 2007   2010

                    and items in the Project
                    Workspace (documents,
                    issues, deliverables or
                    risks).

 Delete             Allows users of Project
 Project            Professional to delete a
                    project saved to the Project
                    Server database from the
                    Open from Microsoft
                    Project Server dialog box in
                    Project Professional. Grant
                    this permission to members
                    of your organization to
                    enable them to more closely
                    manage the projects he or
                    she has saved to the Project
                    Server database from
                    Project Professional or by
                    using the "Delete
                    Enterprise Objects" link in
                    Project Web App. Before
                    letting users delete projects,
                    you should consider how
                    your organization will
                    recover those projects, if
                    you have to do so.

 Edit               Allows a project manager to      User must be granted
 Enterprise         edit enterprise resource data    the View Enterprise
 Resource           by using Project                 Resource Data
 Data               Professional (checked-out        category permission.
                    Enterprise Resource Pool)
                    or a resource manager to
248 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide



                                                                   Previous
                                                                   name, if      New
                                                                   renamed       for
                                                                   from Office   Project
                                                                   Project       Server
 Permission         Description                     Dependencies   Server 2007   2010

                    edit enterprise resources
                    using Project Web App
                    (Resource Center). Grant
                    this permission to project
                    managers and resource
                    managers who have to make
                    updates to resources that
                    belong to the Enterprise
                    Resource Pool. Resource
                    managers with this
                    permission are able to edit
                    enterprise resource data in
                    the Resource Center in
                    Project Web App, and they
                    can make updates to cost
                    data, custom outline code
                    data, custom field data, and
                    other static information
                    related to resources.
                    Resource managers cannot
                    add or delete resources
                    from the Enterprise
                    Resource Pool in Project
                    Web App. Project managers
                    can add or delete resources
                    from the Enterprise
                    Resource Pool in Project
                    Professional if they have the
                    New Resource global
                    permission (to add
                    resources) or the Clean Up
                    Project Server Database
                    global permission (to delete
                    resources). These
Project Server 2010 Category Permissions                                              249



                                                                   Previous
                                                                   name, if       New
                                                                   renamed        for
                                                                   from Office    Project
                                                                   Project        Server
 Permission         Description                     Dependencies   Server 2007    2010

                    permissions are required in
                    addition to the Edit
                    Enterprise Resource Data
                    category permission.

                              Note The Project
                              Server Interface
                              (PSI) can also be
                              used to create or
                              delete resources in
                              the Enterprise
                              Resource Pool and
                              to edit enterprise
                              resource data.


 Edit Project       Allows a user to edit only                     Edit Project   X
 Summary            the enterprise project fields                  Properties
 Fields             shown in the new project                       in Project
                    fields Web Part. If you do                     Center
                    not have this permission,
                    but have "Save Project to
                    Project Server" you can still
                    edit project-level
                    fields/custom fields in the
                    project field Web Part.

 Manage             Controls whether a specific                                   X
 Basic Project      Project Permission can be
 Security           set on a single project
                    through the new Project
                    Permissions feature.

 Manage             Allows a user to see other                                    X
 Resource           users whom he or she
250 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide



                                                                             Previous
                                                                             name, if      New
                                                                             renamed       for
                                                                             from Office   Project
                                                                             Project       Server
 Permission         Description                    Dependencies              Server 2007   2010

 Delegates          manages and to set
                    delegates for them.

 Manage             Allows a user to edit a
 Resource           resource plan.
 Plan

 Open Project       Allows a user to open a
                    project from the Project
                    Server database in read-only
                    mode using Project
                    Professional. Grant this
                    permission to any member
                    of your organization who
                    has to use the Open from
                    Microsoft Project Server
                    dialog box in Project
                    Professional or in the
                    Project Center in Project
                    Web App to open projects
                    that have been saved to the
                    Project Server database. If
                    users are not assigned the
                    Save Project to Project
                    Server permission, then the
                    project will only be open in
                    read-only mode.

 Publish            Allows a user to Publish       User must be granted
 Project            projects to the Project        the Open Project
                    Server Published database      category permission
                    using Project Professional     on any project that has
                    and Project Web App.           to be checked out
                    Grant this permission to all   from the Project
Project Server 2010 Category Permissions                                                      251



                                                                              Previous
                                                                              name, if      New
                                                                              renamed       for
                                                                              from Office   Project
                                                                              Project       Server
 Permission         Description                     Dependencies              Server 2007   2010

                    members of your                 Server database. If the
                    organization who will be        project has changed
                    publishing projects.            since opening, the user
                                                    will be required to
                                                    have the Save Project
                                                    to Project Server
                                                    permission on that
                                                    project. If not, when a
                                                    publish occurs, it will
                                                    only publish the
                                                    outdated version.

 Save Project       Allows a user to save             User must be
 to Project         projects to the Project            granted the New
 Server             Server database using              Project
                    Project Professional. Also         permission in
                    gives Project Web App              order to create
                    users the permission to save       the project.
                    schedules and strategic
                    impact data. Grant this           User must be
                    permission to all members          granted the
                    of your organization who           Open Project
                    will be saving projects from       category
                    Project Professional to the        permission on
                    Project Server database            any project that
                    using the Save to Project          has to be
                    Server dialog box or               checked out
                    through Server-side                from the Project
                    projects.                          Server database.


 Save               Allows a user to save a         User must be granted
 Protected          protected baseline or clear a   the Save Project to
 Baseline           protected baseline              Project Server
252 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide



                                                                              Previous
                                                                              name, if      New
                                                                              renamed       for
                                                                              from Office   Project
                                                                              Project       Server
 Permission         Description                     Dependencies              Server 2007   2010

                    associated with an              category permission.
                    enterprise project published
                    to the Project Server
                    database. Grant this
                    permission to project
                    managers who have to save
                    baselines in their projects.
                    Baselines are saved by using
                    the Set Baseline
                    functionality accessed from
                    the Project Professional
                    ribbon on the Project tab
                    in the Schedule group.
                    Click the Set Baseline
                    button and then select Save
                    Baseline or Clear
                    Baseline. Protected
                    Baselines are in the range of
                    Baseline 0-5 inclusive. Only
                    users who have Save
                    Unprotected Baseline,
                    Open Project and Save
                    Project Category
                    permissions are able to save
                    Baselines in Baseline 6-10.

 View Project       Allows a user to access a       Users also must be
 Summary in         specific project in the         granted the View
 Project            Project Center from Project     Project Center View
 Center             Web App. Grant this             permission in order to
                    permission to any member        see the Project Center.
                    of your organization who
                    has to view projects
                    summaries in the Project
Project Server 2010 Category Permissions                                            253



                                                                  Previous
                                                                  name, if      New
                                                                  renamed       for
                                                                  from Office   Project
                                                                  Project       Server
 Permission         Description                    Dependencies   Server 2007   2010

                    Center.

 View Project       Allows a user to view                         View          X
 Schedule in        project information for a                     Project
 Project Web        specific project from the                     Details in
 App                Project Center in Project                     Project
                    Web App. Grant this                           Center
                    permission to users who
                    have to view project details
                    in the Project Center.

 View               Allows a user to view
 Resource           assignment details using
 Assignments        assignment views in the
 in                 Resource Center. Grant this
 Assignment         permission to project
 Views              managers and resource
                    managers who have to view
                    resource assignment details
                    in the Resource Center
                    from Project Professional
                    or Project Web App.

 View               Allows a user to view
 Enterprise         resources and resource data
 Resource           that is stored in the
 Data               Enterprise Resource Pool.
                    Grant this permission to
                    any user who has to view
                    resources and resource data
                    that is stored in the
                    Enterprise Resource Pool.

 View Project       Allows users to view Risks,                   View          X
254 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide



                                                                 Previous
                                                                 name, if      New
                                                                 renamed       for
                                                                 from Office   Project
                                                                 Project       Server
 Permission         Description                   Dependencies   Server 2007   2010

 Site               Issues, and Documents                        Project
                    areas in Project Web App                     Workspace
                    and Project Professional.
                    Grant this permission to
                    any user of Project
                    Professional who has to
                    select Project site,
                    Documents, Issues, or Risks
                    from the Info page in the
                    Backstage or any user of
                    Project Web App who has
                    to access the Project site,
                    Documents, Issues, or Risks
                    top-level navigation links.
Project Server 2010 Global Permissions                                                      255




B
Project Server 2010 Global
Permissions
The following is a list of global permissions for Microsoft Project Server 2010. The columns in the
table include the following:
           Description Describes what the permission enables you to do.
           Dependencies Lists any other permissions (global or category) or requirements
               necessary for the permission to function.
              Previous name, if renamed from Project Server 2007 Specifies the Office Project
               Server 2007 permission name if the permission was renamed from Office Project
               Server 2007 but provides the same functionality.
              New for Project Server 2010 Displays an X symbol if the permission is new for
               Project Server 2010.



                                                                           Previous
                                                                           name, if
                                                                           renamed        New
                                                                           from           for
                                                                           Office         Project
                                                                           Project        Server
 Permission           Description                   Dependencies           Server 2007    2010

 About                Allows a user to access the
 Microsoft            About Project Server page
 Project Server       through Project Web App
                      Server Settings.
256 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide



                                                                             Previous
                                                                             name, if
                                                                             renamed       New
                                                                             from          for
                                                                             Office        Project
                                                                             Project       Server
 Permission          Description                       Dependencies          Server 2007   2010

 Accept               Allows a user to accept but      Users have access
 Timesheets           not approve a timesheet. An      to the Approval
                      example would be where an        Center if they have
                      administrative assistant would   either the Accept
                      view the timesheets to make      Timesheets or the
                      sure that there were no          View Approvals
                      inaccuracies in them. When it    permission.
                      is accepted then a manager
                      with Approve Timesheets
                      permission will approve the
                      timesheets.

 Build Team           Allows a user to add resources   User has to be
 On New               to a project that has not been   granted the Assign
 Project              saved to Project Server. Grant   Resources and
                      this permission to project       View Enterprise
                      managers who want to use the     Resource Data
                      Build Team feature in            category
                      Microsoft Project Professional   permissions in
                      to staff their projects before   order to see
                      they save (and publish) them     resources that are
                      to Project Server.               part of the
                                                       Enterprise
                                                       Resource Pool in
                                                       the Build Team
                                                       feature in
                                                       Microsoft Project
                                                       Professional.

 Can be               Specifies whether a user can                                         X
 Delegate             be a delegate.

 Change               Allows a user to change their
Project Server 2010 Global Permissions                                                   257



                                                                       Previous
                                                                       name, if
                                                                       renamed       New
                                                                       from          for
                                                                       Office        Project
                                                                       Project       Server
 Permission           Description                       Dependencies   Server 2007   2010

 Password             Forms user account password
                      from Project Web App.
                      Forms-based authentication is
                      provided through a
                      membership provider and
                      individual membership
                      providers may prevent the
                      changing of passwords. Please
                      verify this with your
                      membership provider if you
                      intend to use this permission.

 Change               Allows a user to change a                                      X
 Workflow             project's Enterprise Project
                      type. (Change Project Type).

 Clean up             Allows a user to access the
 Project Server       Delete Enterprise Objects
 database             page available through the
                      Server Settings page in Project
                      Web App. Grant this
                      permission to users who have
                      to delete timesheets, status
                      reports responses, projects,
                      resources, users, and user
                      delegates from Project Server.

 Close Task to        Allows a user to close tasks to
 Updates              Time Reporting. It gives
                      access to the Close Tasks to
                      Update Project Web App
                      page.
258 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide



                                                                       Previous
                                                                       name, if
                                                                       renamed       New
                                                                       from          for
                                                                       Office        Project
                                                                       Project       Server
 Permission          Description                        Dependencies   Server 2007   2010

 Contribute to        Allows users to edit items                       Contribute
 Project Web          within lists in Project Web                      to Project
 App                  App project sites.                               Web App

 Edit Status          Allows a user to access the
 Report               Request a status report link on
 Requests             the Project Web App Status
                      Reports center and to view
                      team reports. Grant this
                      permission to any member of
                      your organization who has to
                      create status report requests
                      and view team reports, usually
                      project managers, resource
                      managers, team leads, and
                      members of your
                      organization’s PMO.

 Edit Status          Allows a user to access the
 Report               Submit a status report link on
 Responses            the Status Reports center in
                      Project Web App. Grant this
                      permission to any user of
                      Project Web App who must
                      be able to submit status
                      reports.

 Log on               Allows a user to connect to
                      Project Server from Microsoft
                      Project Professional or to log
                      on to Project Web App. Grant
                      this permission to any user
                      who is authorized to connect
Project Server 2010 Global Permissions                                                 259



                                                                       Previous
                                                                       name, if
                                                                       renamed       New
                                                                       from          for
                                                                       Office        Project
                                                                       Project       Server
 Permission           Description                       Dependencies   Server 2007   2010

                      to Project Server from
                      Microsoft Project Professional
                      or log on to Project Web App.

 Log on to            Allows a user to load the
 Project Server       Enterprise Global Template
 from Project         when he or she connects
 Professional         Microsoft Project Professional
                      to Project Server. Grant this
                      permission to all users in your
                      organization who will be using
                      Microsoft Project Professional
                      to connect to Project Server.

 Manage               Allows users to modify any
 Active               Active Directory
 Directory            Synchronization settings
 Settings             within the Project Web App
                      Administration. If the user is
                      denied this permission then
                      they cannot modify settings
                      for any of the following:
                       Enterprise Resource Pool
                           synchronization settings.
                       Project Web App Security
                           Groups synchronization
                           settings.
                       Choose an Active
                           Directory Group to
                           synchronize against a
                           specific Security Group
                           within the Add/Modify
                           Group page.
260 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide



                                                                       Previous
                                                                       name, if
                                                                       renamed       New
                                                                       from          for
                                                                       Office        Project
                                                                       Project       Server
 Permission          Description                        Dependencies   Server 2007   2010

 Manage               Allows a user to access the
 Check-Ins            Forced Check-in Enterprise
                      Objects page in Project Web
                      App. This page lets users force
                      check-in projects, resources,
                      custom fields, calendars,
                      lookup tables and resource
                      plans.

 Manage Cube          Allows a user to the set and
 Building             modify the settings for OLAP
 Service              cube creation.

 Manage               Allows a user to access the                                    X
 Drivers              drivers.aspx page to create
                      drivers for Portfolio Analysis.

 Manage               Allows a user to create, modify
 Enterprise           and delete Enterprise
 Calendars            Calendars within Project Web
                      App.

 Manage               Allows a user to modify the
 Enterprise           definitions of Enterprise
 Custom Fields        Custom Fields and lookup
                      table from Project Web App.

 Manage               Allows administrators to                                       X
 Exchange             enable the synchronization of
 Integration          project tasks with Exchange
                      Server.

 Manage Gantt         Allows a user to access the
 Chart and            Gantt chart and grouping
Project Server 2010 Global Permissions                                                   261



                                                                       Previous
                                                                       name, if
                                                                       renamed       New
                                                                       from          for
                                                                       Office        Project
                                                                       Project       Server
 Permission           Description                       Dependencies   Server 2007   2010

 Grouping             formats customization options
 Formats              in the Project Server
                      Administration page for
                      Project Web App views.

 Manage Lists         Allows a user to create,
 in Project           modify, and delete lists within
 Web App              the Project Web App project
                      site. This permission is used
                      when synchronizing a user
                      against the Project Web App
                      project site.

 Manage               Allows a user to manage the                                    X
 Notification         Notification and Reminders
 and                  settings.
 Reminders

 Manage My            Allows users to see the                                        X
 Delegates            "Manage Delegates" link and
                      to set a delegate on the
                      "Add/Modify Delegation"
                      page.

 Manage My            Allows users to set a user who                                 X
 Resource             requires a substitute on the
 Delegates            Add/Modify Delegation page.

 Manage               Allows a user to access the
 Personal             Manage My Alerts and
 Notifications        Reminders page in Project
                      Web App. Grant this
                      permission to any user that
262 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide



                                                                      Previous
                                                                      name, if
                                                                      renamed       New
                                                                      from          for
                                                                      Office        Project
                                                                      Project       Server
 Permission          Description                       Dependencies   Server 2007   2010

                      you want to be able to sign up
                      for e-mail notifications and
                      reminders related to tasks and
                      status reports.

 Manage               Allows a user to create, read,                                X
 Portfolio            update, and delete Portfolio
 Analyses             analyses.

 Manage               Allows a user to create, read,                                X
 Prioritizations      update, and delete driver
                      prioritizations.

 Manage               Allows a user to schedule the
 Project Server       backup or immediately back
 Backup               up several entities on Project
                      Server, including the
                      following:
                       Projects
                       The Enterprise Resource
                           Pool
                       Calendars
                       Custom fields
                       The Enterprise Global
                           template
                       Views
                       System settings
                       Categories
                       Group settings.

 Manage               Allows a user to immediately
 Project Server       restore several entities on
 Restore              Project Server, including the
Project Server 2010 Global Permissions                                                 263



                                                                       Previous
                                                                       name, if
                                                                       renamed       New
                                                                       from          for
                                                                       Office        Project
                                                                       Project       Server
 Permission           Description                       Dependencies   Server 2007   2010

                      following:
                       Projects
                       The Enterprise Resource
                           Pool
                       Calendars
                       Custom fields
                       The Enterprise Global
                           template
                       Views
                       System settings
                       Categories
                       Group settings


                                Note Similar to
                                Server Backup except
                                that the permission
                                does not let you
                                schedule a recovery.


 Manage               Allows a user to access the
 Project Web          Manage Views page in the
 App Views            Server Settings page in Project
                      Web App. Users with
                      permission to access this page
                      are able to add, modify, or
                      delete Project, Project Center,
                      Resource Center, Assignment,
                      or Portfolio Analyzer views,
                      and they are able to modify
                      Timesheet views. Grant this
                      permission to project
                      managers, resource managers,
264 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide



                                                                        Previous
                                                                        name, if
                                                                        renamed       New
                                                                        from          for
                                                                        Office        Project
                                                                        Project       Server
 Permission          Description                         Dependencies   Server 2007   2010

                      and members of your
                      organization’s PMO so they
                      can create project data views
                      for users to access in Project
                      Web App and Microsoft
                      Project Professional. It is
                      important to remember that if
                      your organization is allowing
                      project managers to create
                      custom fields at the project
                      level, then each project may
                      require its own unique view.
                      The number of projects in this
                      kind of environment may be
                      too many for the IT
                      administrator team; offloading
                      this work to the people in your
                      organization that work at the
                      project level on a day-to-day
                      basis is one way to distribute
                      the workload of managing
                      views.

 Manage               Allows the user to read or set
 Queue                queue configuration settings
                      and retry, cancel, and unblock
                      jobs in the queue.

 Manage               Allows a user to access the
 Resource             Alert me about my resources
 Notifications        on tasks and status reports link
                      on the Project Web App home
                      page. Grant this permission to
Project Server 2010 Global Permissions                                                   265



                                                                         Previous
                                                                         name, if
                                                                         renamed       New
                                                                         from          for
                                                                         Office        Project
                                                                         Project       Server
 Permission           Description                         Dependencies   Server 2007   2010

                      any resource manager or
                      project manager you want to
                      be able to sign up for e-mail
                      notifications and reminders
                      related to their resource’s tasks
                      and status reports.

 Manage Rules         Allows a user to access the
                      Rules page from the Approval
                      Center in Project Web App
                      and set rules on how update
                      transactions will be
                      automatically processed. Grant
                      this permission to project
                      managers, resource managers,
                      or members of your
                      organization’s PMO so they
                      can define how they will
                      automatically receive and
                      accept changes to transactions
                      by their resources.

 Manage               Allows a user to access the
 security             Manage security page in
                      Project Web App to define
                      security categories, security
                      templates, and user
                      authentication settings. Grant
                      this permission to Project
                      Server administrators or a very
                      small and closely managed
                      group of people. This page lets
                      users change Project Server
266 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide



                                                                        Previous
                                                                        name, if
                                                                        renamed       New
                                                                        from          for
                                                                        Office        Project
                                                                        Project       Server
 Permission          Description                         Dependencies   Server 2007   2010

                      security settings, create
                      security categories and security
                      templates. Changes to settings
                      on this page, once you have
                      begun using Project Server in
                      your organization, should be
                      carefully managed and (ideally)
                      infrequent.

 Manage               Allows a user to register event                                 X
 Server Events        handlers for specific Project
                      Server server-side events. The
                      Manager Server Events page
                      requires the event handler to
                      be registered by the server as
                      defined in the Project Server
                      SDK.

 Manage               Allows a user to access the
 Server               Project Web App Permissions
 Configuration        page in Project Web App.
                      Users with permission to
                      access the Project Web App
                      Permissions page can enable
                      or disable enterprise features,
                      manage organizational
                      permissions, and create
                      custom menus (both top-level
                      and side-pane) in Project Web
                      App. Grant this permission to
                      Project Server administrators
                      or a very small and closely
                      managed group of people.
Project Server 2010 Global Permissions                                                            267



                                                                                Previous
                                                                                name, if
                                                                                renamed       New
                                                                                from          for
                                                                                Office        Project
                                                                                Project       Server
 Permission           Description                        Dependencies           Server 2007   2010

 Manage               Allows a user to create and        Users with this        Manage        X
 SharePoint           delete project sites, whether or   permission should      Windows
 Foundation           not sites are created on project   be granted             SharePoint
                      publish, permission                administrative         Services
                      synchronization settings, and      privileges to all of
                      site path updates. Grant this      the servers that are
                      permission to members of           running Project
                      your organization who are          Server 2010 and
                      administrators for Project         SharePoint Server
                      Web App or administrators          2010
                      for the servers that are
                      running SharePoint Server
                      2010.

 Manage Site          Allows users or groups the                                              X
 Services             ability to manage Queue
                      Settings, Active Directory
                      Synchronization, and Event
                      handlers.

 Manage Time          Allows a user to create and                               Manage        X
 Reporting and        modify Timesheet and Fiscal                               Timesheet
 Financial            period definitions.                                       and
 Periods                                                                        Financial
                                                                                Periods

 Manage Time          Allows a user to be forwarded
 Tracking             timesheets for review. After
                      reviewing the timesheet, the
                      user will be required the
                      following permissions:

                          Accept Timesheet
268 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide



                                                                       Previous
                                                                       name, if
                                                                       renamed       New
                                                                       from          for
                                                                       Office        Project
                                                                       Project       Server
 Permission          Description                        Dependencies   Server 2007   2010

                         Approve Timesheet




 Manage Users         Allows a user to access the
 and Groups           Manage Users and Groups
                      page in the Server Settings
                      page in Project Web App.
                      Users with this permission will
                      be able to add, modify, or
                      delete Project Server users and
                      manage Project Server security
                      groups. Grant this permission
                      to members of your
                      organization who are Project
                      Server administrators. Only a
                      small group of people should
                      have permission to access this
                      set of pages.

 Manage               Allows a user to manage and                                    X
 Workflow and         view workflow and Project
 Project Detail       Detail Pages (PDPs).
 Pages

 New Project          Allows a user to add a new
                      project to Project Server using
                      Microsoft Project
                      Professional, Project Web
                      App, or the Project Server
                      Interface (PSI). New
                      functionality in Project Server
Project Server 2010 Global Permissions                                                  269



                                                                        Previous
                                                                        name, if
                                                                        renamed       New
                                                                        from          for
                                                                        Office        Project
                                                                        Project       Server
 Permission           Description                        Dependencies   Server 2007   2010

                      2010 for this permission: If
                      you do not also have the Open
                      Project permission, after you
                      create a project, you are taken
                      back to the Project Center.

 New Resource         Allows a project manager to
                      add new resources to the
                      Enterprise Resource Pool
                      using Microsoft Project
                      Professional, the Project Web
                      App Resource Center, or the
                      Project Server Interface (PSI).
                      Grant this permission to any
                      member of your organization
                      who has to create new
                      enterprise resources in Project
                      Server.

                                Note If your
                                organization is using
                                the Active Directory
                                synchronization
                                feature, you may want
                                to consider denying
                                this permission to all
                                non-IT administrators
                                in your organization.


 New Task             Allows users to access the
 Assignment           Create a New Task and Add
                      Yourself to a Task links from
                      the Insert Row button found
270 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide



                                                                              Previous
                                                                              name, if
                                                                              renamed       New
                                                                              from          for
                                                                              Office        Project
                                                                              Project       Server
 Permission          Description                        Dependencies          Server 2007   2010

                      on the Tasks page of Project
                      Web App. Grant this
                      permission to any member of
                      your organization who has to
                      create new assignments on
                      existing tasks in projects that
                      have been published to Project
                      Server. Users with this
                      permission will also be able to
                      use the Create a New Task
                      link to create new tasks in
                      Project Web App for any
                      project to which the user has
                      access. The list of available
                      projects for a user to create
                      new tasks is determined by the
                      Create New Tasks or
                      Assignment category
                      permission. A user who has
                      the New Task Assignment
                      permission must also have
                      access to the projects to which
                      they want to assign themselves
                      to a task.

 Open Project         Allows a user to open an          User must be
 Template             Enterprise Project Template       granted the New
                      from Project Server using         Project global
                      Microsoft Project                 permission in order
                      Professional. Grant this          to save the project
                      permission to all users in your   to the Project
                      organization who will be using    Server database as
                      Microsoft Project Professional    an actual project.
Project Server 2010 Global Permissions                                                  271



                                                                        Previous
                                                                        name, if
                                                                        renamed       New
                                                                        from          for
                                                                        Office        Project
                                                                        Project       Server
 Permission           Description                        Dependencies   Server 2007   2010

                      to create and manage projects
                      that are based on Enterprise
                      Project Templates.

 Reassign Task        Allows a user to delegate an
                      assigned task to another
                      (existing) user. Grant this
                      permission to members of
                      your organization who need
                      the ability to delegate task
                      assignments to other
                      resources. For example, a large
                      project may be run by a single
                      project manager, but actually
                      implemented by several teams,
                      each with their own team lead.
                      A project manager could
                      assign the team leads in the
                      project plan, and then the
                      team leads could in turn
                      delegate each task to individual
                      members of their teams. This
                      example creates an additional
                      layer of task management
                      within the larger organization,
                      but it can also simplify
                      resource allocation within
                      projects themselves and make
                      it easier for a project manager
                      to manage large projects. Or,
                      if you have a resource that is
                      about to leave on a three-week
                      vacation, and this resource had
272 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide



                                                                               Previous
                                                                               name, if
                                                                               renamed       New
                                                                               from          for
                                                                               Office        Project
                                                                               Project       Server
 Permission          Description                        Dependencies           Server 2007   2010

                      this permission, they would be
                      able to assign their tasks
                      directly to other resources
                      instead of having the project
                      manager check out the project
                      and reassign resources.

 Save                 Allows a user to check out,
 Enterprise           modify, and save the
 Global               Enterprise Global Template to
                      the Project Server database
                      from Microsoft Project
                      Professional. This permission
                      should only be granted to a
                      small group of people in your
                      organization; either project
                      managers, members of your
                      organization’s PMO, or
                      Project Server administrators.

 Save Project         Allows a user to create and       User needs to be
 Template             save a project as an Enterprise   granted the Assign
                      Project Template from             Resources and
                      Microsoft Project Professional    View Enterprise
                      to the Project Server database.   Resource Data
                      Grant this permission to          category
                      members of your organization      permissions in
                      who are tasked with creating      addition to this
                      Enterprise Project Templates.     permission if they
                      When a user saves a project to    are also responsible
                      Project Server for the first      for adding Generic
                      time, the option to select        resources to the
                      Template (as opposed to           Enterprise Project
Project Server 2010 Global Permissions                                                    273



                                                                          Previous
                                                                          name, if
                                                                          renamed       New
                                                                          from          for
                                                                          Office        Project
                                                                          Project       Server
 Permission           Description                      Dependencies       Server 2007   2010

                      Project) from the Type drop-     Template.
                      down list in the Save to
                      Project Server dialog box is
                      enabled.

 Save                 Allows a user to save a non-     User needs to be
 Unprotected          protected baseline or clear a    granted the Save
 Baseline             non-protected baseline           Project category
                      associated with an enterprise    permission.
                      project published to the
                      Project Server database.
                      Baselines are saved by using
                      the Set Baseline functionality
                      accessed from the Microsoft
                      Project Professional ribbon on
                      the Project tab in the
                      Schedule group. Click the Set
                      Baseline button and then
                      select Save Baseline or Clear
                      Baseline. Unprotected
                      Baselines are in the range of
                      Baseline 6-10 inclusive.

 Self-Assign          Resources can be members of
 Team Tasks           a Team Assignment Pool.
                      With this permission, it is
                      possible for users to assign
                      tasks, which have been
                      assigned to their Team
                      Assignment Pool, to
                      themselves through the Team
                      Tasks page in Project Web
                      App.
274 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide



                                                                              Previous
                                                                              name, if
                                                                              renamed       New
                                                                              from          for
                                                                              Office        Project
                                                                              Project       Server
 Permission          Description                        Dependencies          Server 2007   2010

 Status Broker        Allows API updates to occur                                           X
 Permission           for a user from places like
                      Microsoft Exchange Server.

 View                 Allows a user to view the         Users have access
 Approvals            Approval Center.                  to the Approval
                                                        Center if they have
                                                        either the Accept
                                                        Timesheets or the
                                                        View Approvals
                                                        permission.

 View Business        Allows a user to see the                                              X
 Intelligence         Business Intelligence link in
 Link                 Quick Launch. However, it
                      has no impact on Report
                      Center Security.

 View OLAP            Allows a user to read from the
 Data                 output for the OLAP cube.
                      This permission is only
                      checked when the OLAP cube
                      is built.

 View Project         Allows users to access the        User needs to be
 Center               Project Center from Project       granted the View
                      Web App or Microsoft Project      Project Summary
                      Professional.                     in Project Center
                                                        category
                                                        permission.

 View Project         Allows a user to access project
 View                 views in Project Web App.
Project Server 2010 Global Permissions                                                        275



                                                                            Previous
                                                                            name, if
                                                                            renamed       New
                                                                            from          for
                                                                            Office        Project
                                                                            Project       Server
 Permission           Description                        Dependencies       Server 2007   2010

                      Grant this permission to users
                      who need to drill down into
                      project details using the
                      Project Center in Project Web
                      App or Microsoft Project
                      Professional.

 View Project         Allows a user to see the link in                                    X
 Schedule             the Quick Launch. However,
 Views                it has no impact on Report
                      Center Security.

 View Project         Allows a user to approve                                            X
 Timesheet            timesheets on a line-by-line
 Line                 basis.
 Approvals

 View                 Allows a user to access the
 Resource             View Resource Availability
 Availability         page to view resource
                      allocation data in Project Web
                      App. Grant this permission to
                      users in your organization who
                      need to view resource
                      availability in Project Web
                      App.

 View                 Allows users to access the         User needs to be
 Resource             Resource Center from Project       granted the View
 Center               Web App or Microsoft Project       Enterprise
                      Professional and view resource     Resource Data
                      allocation data. Grant this        category
                      permission to users who need       permission.
276 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide



                                                                               Previous
                                                                               name, if
                                                                               renamed       New
                                                                               from          for
                                                                               Office        Project
                                                                               Project       Server
 Permission          Description                          Dependencies         Server 2007   2010

                      to view the Resource Center in
                      Project Web App by clicking
                      the Resources link in the top-
                      level navigation, or in
                      Microsoft Project Professional
                      by selecting Resource Center
                      on the Collaborate menu.

 View                 Allows a user to access the                                            X
 Resource Plan        Resource Plan page within
                      Project Web App.

 View                 Allows users to view the            Users must be
 Resource             timesheets, regardless of their     granted the Accept
 Timesheet            state or ownership, for             Timesheet global
                      resources identified in the         permission to use
                      category selection criteria.        this permission.

 View Task            This permission when denied
 Center               prevents users from seeing the
                      Task Center link on the
                      Project Web App Quick
                      Launch menu.

                               Note This permission
                               does not lock down
                               access to the Task
                               Center page. It is still
                               possible for users to
                               navigate to this page.


 View Team            Allows a user to use Build            User needs to
 Builder              Team in Project Web App and            be granted the
Project Server 2010 Global Permissions                                                       277



                                                                             Previous
                                                                             name, if
                                                                             renamed       New
                                                                             from          for
                                                                             Office        Project
                                                                             Project       Server
 Permission           Description                       Dependencies         Server 2007   2010

                      Microsoft Project                     Assign
                      Professional, as well as              Resources
                      determine the list of available       category
                      resources. Grant this                 permission in
                      permission to resource                addition to
                      managers to allow them to use         the View
                      Build Team in Project Web             Team
                      App to add resources to               Builder
                      projects that have been saved         global
                      to the Project Server database.       permission.
                      Project Managers can also use         The Assign
                      this permission to allow them         Resources
                      to use Build Team in                  category
                      Microsoft Project Professional        permission
                      to add resources to projects.         determines
                                                            the list of
                                                            resources
                                                            available in
                                                            Build Team in
                                                            both
                                                            Microsoft
                                                            Project
                                                            Professional
                                                            and Project
                                                            Web App.

                                                           User needs to
                                                            be granted the
                                                            Build Team
                                                            on Project
                                                            category
                                                            permission.
                                                            The Build
278 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide



                                                                             Previous
                                                                             name, if
                                                                             renamed       New
                                                                             from          for
                                                                             Office        Project
                                                                             Project       Server
 Permission          Description                          Dependencies       Server 2007   2010

                                                            Team on
                                                            Project
                                                            permission
                                                            determines
                                                            with which
                                                            projects Build
                                                            Team can be
                                                            used. This
                                                            applies to
                                                            using Build
                                                            Team in both
                                                            Microsoft
                                                            Project
                                                            Professional
                                                            and Project
                                                            Web App.


 View                 When this permission is                                View          X
 Timesheets           denied it prevents users from                          Timesheet
                      seeing the Timesheet Center                            Center
                      link on the Project Web App
                      Quick Launch menu
                               Note This permission
                               does not lock down
                               access to the
                               Timesheet page. It is
                               still possible for users
                               to navigate to this
                               page
Project Server 2010 Global Permissions   279
280 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide




C
Project Server 2010 Default Security
Groups

This article describes the default permissions that are given to the default templates and user groups
in Microsoft Project Server 2010.
Project Server 2010 creates seven default groups during installation:
             Administrators
             Executives
             Portfolio Managers
             Project Managers
             Resource Managers
             Team Leads
             Team Members
Each group is given a default set of permissions (global and category). Templates are also included
to allow these default permissions to be assigned to new groups created by the administrator. After
using the template to create a new group, you can then choose to customize the new group to
better suit your users by editing the permission for the group.
Global permissions differ from category permissions in that they apply to functionality that the user
is allowed to use in Project Server 2010. Category permissions apply to what users are allowed to do
with specific projects, resources, and views as defined by the category that the group is associated
with. For more information about groups and categories, see the Microsoft TechNet article “Plan
groups, categories, and RBS in Project Server 2010” (http://technet.microsoft.com/en-
us/library/cc197354.aspx).
Project Server 2010 Default Security Groups                                                        281



Default global permissions
The following table contains a list of the default global permissions for each of the default user
groups.



 Permission                                          Portfolio   Project    Resource   Team    Team
 Name                Administrators     Executives   Managers    Managers   Managers   Leads   Members

 About Microsoft     X
 Project Server

 Accept              X                               X                      X
 Timesheets

 Build Team On       X                               X           X          X
 New Project

 Can Be Delegate     X

 Change              X                  X            X           X          X          X       X
 Password

 Change              X
 Workflow

 Clean Up            X
 Project Server
 Database

 Close Tasks To      X                  X                        X
 Updates

 Contribute to       X                                                      X          X       X
 Project Web
 App

 Edit Status         X                  X            X           X          X          X
 Report Requests

 Edit Status         X                  X            X           X          X          X       X
 Report
 Responses

 Log On              X                  X            X           X          X          X       X

 Log on to           X                               X           X          X
 Project Server
282 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide



 Permission                                         Portfolio   Project    Resource   Team    Team
 Name               Administrators     Executives   Managers    Managers   Managers   Leads   Members

 from Project
 Professional

 Manage Active       X
 Directory
 Settings

 Manage Check-       X                              X
 Ins

 Manage Cube         X                              X
 Building Service

 Manage Drivers      X                 X            X

 Manage              X                              X
 Enterprise
 Calendars

 Manage              X                              X
 Enterprise
 Custom Fields

 Manage              X
 Exchange
 Integration

 Manage Gantt        X
 Chart and
 Grouping
 Formats

 Manage Lists in     X                 X            X           X
 Project Web
 App

 Manage My           X                                                     X
 Delegates

 Manage My           X                                                     X
 Resource
 Delegates

 Manage              X                                                     X
 Notification and
 Reminders
Project Server 2010 Default Security Groups                                                        283



 Permission                                          Portfolio   Project    Resource   Team    Team
 Name                Administrators     Executives   Managers    Managers   Managers   Leads   Members

 Manage Personal     X                  X            X           X          X          X       X
 Notifications

 Manage              X                  X            X
 Portfolio
 Analyses

 Manage              X                  X            X
 Prioritizations

 Manage Project      X
 Server Backup

 Manage Project      X
 Server Restore

 Manage Project      X                               X
 Web App Views

 Manage Queue        X                               X

 Manage              X                               X           X                     X
 Resource
 Notifications

 Manage Rules        X                                           X

 Manage Security     X

 Manage Server       X
 Configuration

 Manage Server       X
 Events

 Manage              X
 SharePoint
 Foundation

 Manage Site         X
 Services

 Manage Time         X
 Reporting and
 Financial Periods
284 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide



 Permission                                         Portfolio   Project    Resource   Team    Team
 Name                Administrators    Executives   Managers    Managers   Managers   Leads   Members

 Manage Time         X
 Tracking

 Manage Users        X
 and Groups

 Manage              X
 Workflow
 Project Detail
 Pages

 New Project         X                 X            X           X          X          X       X

 New Resource        X                              X                      X

 New Task            X                                          X                     X       X
 Assignment

 Open Project        X                              X           X
 Template

 Reassign Task       X                                          X                             X

 Save Enterprise     X                              X
 Global

 Save Project        X                              X           X
 Template

 Save                X                              X           X
 Unprotected
 Baseline

 Self-assign Team    X                                          X          X          X       X
 Tasks

 Status Broker       X
 Permission

 View Approvals      X                                          X          X          X

 View Business       X                 X            X           X
 Intelligence Link

 View OLAP           X                 X            X           X
 Data
285



Permission                                       Portfolio   Project    Resource   Team    Team
Name               Administrators   Executives   Managers    Managers   Managers   Leads   Members

 View Project      X                X            X           X          X          X       X
 Center

 View Project      X                X            X           X          X          X       X
 Schedule Views

 View Project      X                X            X           X
 Timesheet Line
 Approvals

 View Resource     X                X            X           X          X
 Availability

 View Resource     X                X            X           X          X
 Center

 View Resource     X                X            X           X          X
 Plan

 View Resource     X
 Timesheet

 View Task         X                X            X           X          X          X       X
 Center

 View Team         X                             X           X          X
 Builder

 View Timesheets   X                X            X           X          X          X       X




Default category permissions
The following table contains a list of the default category permissions for each of the default user
groups.

Use the following legend for the table below.

           My Org = My Organization
           My Dir = My Direct Reports
           My Proj = My Projects
286 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide


           My Res = My Resources
           My Tsks = My Tasks
For example, a user in the default Administrators group (who is associated to the My Organization
category by default) has permissions allowed in the Administrators column in the table. These
category permissions only apply to all projects, resources, and views selected for the My
Organization category. However, a user in the default Project Managers group (who is associated to
the My Organization and My Projects categories) has a different set of category permissions for the
objects in the My Organization category. This allows you to conveniently set a more or less
restrictive set of permissions for different types of users to a group of projects, resources, and
views.

For more information about groups and categories, see the Microsoft TechNet article “Plan groups,
categories, and RBS in Project Server 2010” (http://technet.microsoft.com/en-
us/library/cc197354.aspx).



 Permission                                Portfolio Project Resource Team Team
 Name            Administrators Executives Managers Managers Managers Leads Members

 Accept Task      My Org                                 My Proj
 Update
 Requests

 Adjust           My Org
 Timesheet

 Approve          My Org                        My Org               My Dir,
 Timesheets                                                          My Res

 Assign           My Org                        My Org   My Org      My Res
 Resource

 Build Team       My Org                        My Org   My Proj     My Org
 On Project

 Create New       My Org                                 My Proj     My Proj     My      My Tsks
 Task or                                                                         Proj
 Assignment

 Create           My Org              My Org    My Org   My Proj     My Org,     My      My Tsks
 Object                                                              My Proj,    Proj
 Links                                                               My Res
287



Permission                               Portfolio Project Resource Team Team
Name           Administrators Executives Managers Managers Managers Leads Members

Delete         My Org                 My Org    My Proj
Project

Edit           My Org                 My Org              My Res
Enterprise
Resource
Data

Edit Project   My Org                           My Proj
Summary
Fields

Manage         My Org                 My Org    My Proj
Basic
Project
Security

Manage         My Org                                     My Res
Resource
Delegates

Manage         My Org                 My Org    My Org    My Res
Resource
Plan

Open           My Org                 My Org    My Proj                  My Tsks
Project

Publish        My Org                 My Org    My Proj
Project

Save Project   My Org                 My Org    My Proj
to Project
Server

Save           My Org                           My Proj
Protected
Baseline

View           My Org       My Org    My Org    My Org,   My Res
Enterprise                                      My Proj
Resource
288 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide



 Permission                                Portfolio Project Resource Team Team
 Name            Administrators Executives Managers Managers Managers Leads Members

 Data

 View             My Or               My Org    My Org   My Proj             My     My Tsks
 Project                                                                     Proj
 Schedule in
 Project Web
 App

 View             My Org              My Org    My Org   My Proj   My Proj   My     My Tsks
 Project Site                                                                Proj

 View             My Org              My Org    My Org   My Proj   My Proj   My     My Tsks
 Project                                                                     Proj
 Summary in
 Project
 Center

 View             My Org              My Org    My Org   My Proj   My Res    My     My Tsks
 Resource                                                                    Proj
 Assignments
 in
 Assignment
 Views
Project Server 2010 Default Categories                                                             289




D
Project Server 2010 Default
Categories
Microsoft Project Server 2010 creates seven default categories during installation. Each of the
categories is configured to be accessed by specified default user groups. Each category has a
predefined set of category permissions for default user groups that have access to that category. The
following sections list the default settings for each category for Project Server 2010.
In this article:

         Categories

         Category permissions


Categories
Specific default groups are already associated with each of the default categories. The following
table shows the default categories and the default groups that can access each of them.

          Note For more information about the relationship between groups and categories, see the TechNet
          article “Plan groups, categories, and RBS in Project Server 2010”
          (http://technet.microsoft.com/ro-ro/library/cc197354(en-us).aspx).


 Category                                    Portfolio Project Resource Team Team
 Name              Administrators Executives Managers Managers Managers Leads Members

 My Direct                                                                  X
 Reports

 My                X                     X        X            X            X
290 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide



 Category                                   Portfolio Project Resource Team Team
 Name             Administrators Executives Managers Managers Managers Leads Members

 Organization

 My Personal                          X           X            X            X            X        X
 Projects

 My Projects                                                   X            X            X

 My                                                                         X
 Resources

 My Tasks                                                                                         X



Category permissions
The following table describes the default category permissions for each default group. For example,
a user in the default Administrators group (who is associated to the My Organization category by
default) has the permissions allowed in the Administrators column in the table. These category
permissions only apply to all projects, resources, and views selected for the My Organization
category. However, a user in the default Project Managers group (who is associated to the My
Organization and My Projects categories) has a different set of category permissions for the objects
in the My Organization category. This allows you to conveniently set a more or less restrictive set of
permissions for different types of users to a group of projects, resources, and views.

         Note For more information about category permissions, see Appendix A: Project Server 2010
         category permissions. For more information about the relationship between groups and categories,
         see the TechNet article “Plan groups, categories, and RBS in Project Server 2010”
         (http://technet.microsoft.com/ro-ro/library/cc197354(en-us).aspx).

Use the following legend for the table below.

        My Org = My Organization

        My Dir = My Direct Reports

        My Proj = My Projects

        My Res = My Resources

        My Tsks = My Tasks
Project Server 2010 Default Categories                                                  291




 Permission                                 Portfolio Project Resource Team Team
 Name             Administrators Executives Managers Managers Managers Leads Members

 Accept Task      My Org                                   My Proj
 Update
 Requests

 Adjust           My Org
 Timesheet

 Approve          My Org                          My Org             My Dir,
 Timesheets                                                          My Res

 Assign           My Org                          My Org   My Org    My Res
 Resource

 Build Team       My Org                          My Org   My Proj   My Org
 On Project

 Create New       My Org                                   My Proj   My Proj    My     My Tsks
 Task or                                                                        Proj
 Assignment

 Create           My Org                 My Org   My Org   My Proj   My Org,    My     My Tsks
 Object                                                              My Proj,   Proj
 Links                                                               My Res

 Delete           My Org                          My Org   My Proj
 Project

 Edit             My Org                          My Org             My Res
 Enterprise
 Resource
 Data

 Edit Project     My Org                                   My Proj
 Summary
 Fields

 Manage           My Org                          My Org   My Proj
 Basic
 Project
 Security
292 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide



 Permission                                Portfolio Project Resource Team Team
 Name            Administrators Executives Managers Managers Managers Leads Members

 Manage           My Org                                           My Res
 Resource
 Delegates

 Manage           My Org                        My Org   My Org    My Res
 Resource
 Plan

 Open             My Org                        My Org   My Proj                    My Tsks
 Project

 Publish          My Org                        My Org   My Proj
 Project

 Save Project     My Org                        My Org   My Proj
 to Project
 Server

 Save             My Org                                 My Proj
 Protected
 Baseline

 View             My Org              My Org    My Org   My Org,   My Res
 Enterprise                                              My Proj
 Resource
 Data

 View             My Or               My Org    My Org   My Proj             My     My Tsks
 Project                                                                     Proj
 Schedule in
 Project Web
 App

 View             My Org              My Org    My Org   My Proj   My Proj   My     My Tsks
 Project Site                                                                Proj

 View             My Org              My Org    My Org   My Proj   My Proj   My     My Tsks
 Project                                                                     Proj
 Summary in
 Project
 Center
Project Server 2010 Default Categories                                                293



 Permission                                 Portfolio Project Resource Team Team
 Name             Administrators Executives Managers Managers Managers Leads Members

 View             My Org                 My Org   My Org   My Proj   My Res   My     My Tsks
 Resource                                                                     Proj
 Assignments
 in
 Assignment
 Views
294 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide

More Related Content

PDF
SAP_HANA_Modeling_Guide_for_SAP_HANA_Studio_en
PDF
Drools expert-docs
PDF
Enterprise portal development cookbook
PDF
Morph xit
PDF
Microsoft excel 2010 product guide final
PDF
Xi3 ds administrators_guide_en
PDF
A Real Time Application Integration Solution
PDF
200+sql server interview_questions
SAP_HANA_Modeling_Guide_for_SAP_HANA_Studio_en
Drools expert-docs
Enterprise portal development cookbook
Morph xit
Microsoft excel 2010 product guide final
Xi3 ds administrators_guide_en
A Real Time Application Integration Solution
200+sql server interview_questions

What's hot (20)

PDF
Shivprasad Koirala
PDF
Outlook 2007 Tips and Tricks
PDF
Instructor utilities guide
PDF
BizTalk Practical Course Preview
PDF
ZebraNet Bridge Enterprise - Manual do Software
PDF
SchoolAdmin - School Fees Collection & Accounting Software
PDF
Ms excel for Accountants
PDF
Xi3 voyager userguide_en
PDF
School software
PDF
E views 9 command ref
PDF
Data Export 2010 for MySQL
PDF
MarvelSoft Library Management Software Guide
PDF
Plesk Sitebuilder 4.5 for Linux/Unix Wizard User's Guide
PDF
Ppm7.5 cmd tokval
PDF
Supply chain management
PDF
QAD Database Definitions Technical Reference - QAD2013.1EE
PDF
Cs5 5-final-print-guide
PDF
PDF
Windows XP Registry Guide
Shivprasad Koirala
Outlook 2007 Tips and Tricks
Instructor utilities guide
BizTalk Practical Course Preview
ZebraNet Bridge Enterprise - Manual do Software
SchoolAdmin - School Fees Collection & Accounting Software
Ms excel for Accountants
Xi3 voyager userguide_en
School software
E views 9 command ref
Data Export 2010 for MySQL
MarvelSoft Library Management Software Guide
Plesk Sitebuilder 4.5 for Linux/Unix Wizard User's Guide
Ppm7.5 cmd tokval
Supply chain management
QAD Database Definitions Technical Reference - QAD2013.1EE
Cs5 5-final-print-guide
Windows XP Registry Guide
Ad

Viewers also liked (20)

PPTX
Coverage, MTD & P3M Golden St by Location pages
PPSX
departemen p3m
PPTX
CPS - Transitioning from SharePoint to Project Server 2013 for Enterprise Pro...
PDF
APM Corporate Accreditation webinar 02.04.2014
PDF
Highways Agency Corporate Webinar 9th September 2014
PDF
Brendan D'Cruz, Workshop 2
PDF
Why SharePoint and Project Server is the Right Tool Combination For Your Proj...
PPTX
SharePoint 2010 & Managing Projects - A match made in heaven
PPTX
Building advanced Project Server workflows with Nintex Workflow for Project S...
PDF
A fresh project management perspective - from 2011 - RICS Article
PDF
Portfolio, Project and Programme Management
PPTX
Workshop B, Agile P3M benefits, by Steve Messenger
PDF
What's new in microsoft project server and professional 2013
PDF
Organisational project management .. creating the ability to succeed
PDF
Clarity ppm financials made easy
PDF
Indian Readership Survey 2013 Topline Findings
PPTX
What’s New in Project 2016, Project Server 2016, Project Online and Office 36...
PPTX
Rego University: Portfolio Management, CA PPM (CA Clarity PPM)
PDF
SAP PPM 6.0 powered by HANA
PPTX
Project server 2010 presentation itvamp_080411
Coverage, MTD & P3M Golden St by Location pages
departemen p3m
CPS - Transitioning from SharePoint to Project Server 2013 for Enterprise Pro...
APM Corporate Accreditation webinar 02.04.2014
Highways Agency Corporate Webinar 9th September 2014
Brendan D'Cruz, Workshop 2
Why SharePoint and Project Server is the Right Tool Combination For Your Proj...
SharePoint 2010 & Managing Projects - A match made in heaven
Building advanced Project Server workflows with Nintex Workflow for Project S...
A fresh project management perspective - from 2011 - RICS Article
Portfolio, Project and Programme Management
Workshop B, Agile P3M benefits, by Steve Messenger
What's new in microsoft project server and professional 2013
Organisational project management .. creating the ability to succeed
Clarity ppm financials made easy
Indian Readership Survey 2013 Topline Findings
What’s New in Project 2016, Project Server 2016, Project Online and Office 36...
Rego University: Portfolio Management, CA PPM (CA Clarity PPM)
SAP PPM 6.0 powered by HANA
Project server 2010 presentation itvamp_080411
Ad

Similar to Microsoft project server 2010 administrators guide (20)

PDF
G:\Mcse 70 290 Managing And Maintaining Windows Server 2003 Environment
PDF
Hfm user
PPTX
What's new in Exchange 2013?
PDF
Wm4 0 userguideissue3
PDF
Ibm tivoli web access for information management sg246823
PDF
Groupware functionsinm daemon
PDF
CA Service Desk Administrator Guide with Examples
PDF
Backtrack tutorial
PDF
Print Preview - C:\DOCUME~1\fogleman\LOCALS~1\Temp\.aptcache ...
PDF
Getting started with sales logix
PDF
Deployment guide series ibm tivoli access manager for e business v6.0 sg247207
PDF
Deployment guide series ibm tivoli access manager for e business v6.0 sg247207
PDF
Blue Doc User Manual
PDF
Oracle® Trading Community Architecture
PDF
UsersGuide
PDF
UsersGuide
PDF
What's New in Novell Identity Manager 4.0
PDF
Sharepoint Server 2010 Administration 24hour Trainer Bill Crider Martin Reid ...
PDF
The Microsoft Outlook Ideas Book Barbara March
PDF
Macro schedulermanual9
G:\Mcse 70 290 Managing And Maintaining Windows Server 2003 Environment
Hfm user
What's new in Exchange 2013?
Wm4 0 userguideissue3
Ibm tivoli web access for information management sg246823
Groupware functionsinm daemon
CA Service Desk Administrator Guide with Examples
Backtrack tutorial
Print Preview - C:\DOCUME~1\fogleman\LOCALS~1\Temp\.aptcache ...
Getting started with sales logix
Deployment guide series ibm tivoli access manager for e business v6.0 sg247207
Deployment guide series ibm tivoli access manager for e business v6.0 sg247207
Blue Doc User Manual
Oracle® Trading Community Architecture
UsersGuide
UsersGuide
What's New in Novell Identity Manager 4.0
Sharepoint Server 2010 Administration 24hour Trainer Bill Crider Martin Reid ...
The Microsoft Outlook Ideas Book Barbara March
Macro schedulermanual9

More from Apimuk Siripitupum (6)

PDF
Microsoft project server 2010 project managers guide for project web app
PDF
Sharepoint certification path
PDF
Sql server2008 cert_path_complete
PDF
Sql server 2008 certifikati
PDF
Benefits of share_point_2010_as_a_product_platform
PPTX
Share point 2010 100 level overview
Microsoft project server 2010 project managers guide for project web app
Sharepoint certification path
Sql server2008 cert_path_complete
Sql server 2008 certifikati
Benefits of share_point_2010_as_a_product_platform
Share point 2010 100 level overview

Recently uploaded (20)

PDF
Network Security Unit 5.pdf for BCA BBA.
PPTX
Big Data Technologies - Introduction.pptx
PDF
Empathic Computing: Creating Shared Understanding
PDF
cuic standard and advanced reporting.pdf
DOCX
The AUB Centre for AI in Media Proposal.docx
PDF
Peak of Data & AI Encore- AI for Metadata and Smarter Workflows
PDF
Advanced methodologies resolving dimensionality complications for autism neur...
PDF
Profit Center Accounting in SAP S/4HANA, S4F28 Col11
PDF
Optimiser vos workloads AI/ML sur Amazon EC2 et AWS Graviton
PPTX
Effective Security Operations Center (SOC) A Modern, Strategic, and Threat-In...
PDF
Architecting across the Boundaries of two Complex Domains - Healthcare & Tech...
PPT
“AI and Expert System Decision Support & Business Intelligence Systems”
PPTX
KOM of Painting work and Equipment Insulation REV00 update 25-dec.pptx
PPTX
Digital-Transformation-Roadmap-for-Companies.pptx
PDF
TokAI - TikTok AI Agent : The First AI Application That Analyzes 10,000+ Vira...
PDF
MIND Revenue Release Quarter 2 2025 Press Release
PDF
Per capita expenditure prediction using model stacking based on satellite ima...
PDF
How UI/UX Design Impacts User Retention in Mobile Apps.pdf
PDF
Reach Out and Touch Someone: Haptics and Empathic Computing
PPTX
Programs and apps: productivity, graphics, security and other tools
Network Security Unit 5.pdf for BCA BBA.
Big Data Technologies - Introduction.pptx
Empathic Computing: Creating Shared Understanding
cuic standard and advanced reporting.pdf
The AUB Centre for AI in Media Proposal.docx
Peak of Data & AI Encore- AI for Metadata and Smarter Workflows
Advanced methodologies resolving dimensionality complications for autism neur...
Profit Center Accounting in SAP S/4HANA, S4F28 Col11
Optimiser vos workloads AI/ML sur Amazon EC2 et AWS Graviton
Effective Security Operations Center (SOC) A Modern, Strategic, and Threat-In...
Architecting across the Boundaries of two Complex Domains - Healthcare & Tech...
“AI and Expert System Decision Support & Business Intelligence Systems”
KOM of Painting work and Equipment Insulation REV00 update 25-dec.pptx
Digital-Transformation-Roadmap-for-Companies.pptx
TokAI - TikTok AI Agent : The First AI Application That Analyzes 10,000+ Vira...
MIND Revenue Release Quarter 2 2025 Press Release
Per capita expenditure prediction using model stacking based on satellite ima...
How UI/UX Design Impacts User Retention in Mobile Apps.pdf
Reach Out and Touch Someone: Haptics and Empathic Computing
Programs and apps: productivity, graphics, security and other tools

Microsoft project server 2010 administrators guide

  • 1. 1 Microsoft Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide
  • 2. Copyright This document is provided “as-is”. Information and views expressed in this document, including URL and other Internet Web site references, may change without notice. This document does not provide you with any legal rights to any intellectual property in any Microsoft product. You may copy and use this document for your internal, reference purposes. © 2011 Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved. Microsoft, Active Directory, Excel, Internet Explorer, Outlook, SharePoint, SQL Server, and Windows are trademarks of the Microsoft group of companies. All other trademarks are property of their respective owners.
  • 3. Table of Contents Table of Contents Introduction 1 What Will You Learn from this Book? ..................................... 1 Who Should Read this Book? ................................................. 1 How is this Book Structured? ................................................. 2 1 Security 5 Manage Permissions .............................................................. 6 Manage Users ......................................................................... 8 Add or Edit a User ...................................................................................................... 8 Deactivate a user account ...................................................................................... 19 Reactivate a user account ....................................................................................... 20 Manage Groups..................................................................... 20 Create or modify a security group ........................................................................... 21 Delete a security group ............................................................................................ 26 Active Directory Group Synchronization ................................................................. 26 Manage Categories ................................................................31 Create or modify a category .................................................................................... 32 Delete a category ..................................................................................................... 39 Manage Security Templates ................................................. 40 Create or modify a security template ...................................................................... 40 Delete a security template ...................................................................................... 43 Manage Project Web App Permissions ................................. 44 Manage Delegates ................................................................ 45 Turn Delegation on or off ......................................................................................... 46 Set up who can act as delegate .............................................................................. 46 Set up who can have delegates assigned to them ................................................ 48 Create a new delegation .......................................................................................... 49 2 Enterprise Data 50 Enterprise Custom Fields and Lookup Tables .......................51 Understanding Enterprise Custom Fields ............................................................... 52 Creating Enterprise Custom Fields ......................................................................... 52 Creating Enterprise Custom Lookup Tables ........................................................... 64
  • 4. Departments ......................................................................... 68 Configuring departments ......................................................................................... 72 The Resource Breakdown Structure (RBS) ............................74 Enterprise Global................................................................... 77 Enterprise Calendars ............................................................ 79 Create a New Calendar ............................................................................................ 80 Copy an Existing Calendar ....................................................................................... 81 Edit an Existing Calendar ......................................................................................... 82 Delete a Calendar .................................................................................................... 83 Modify Working and Nonworking Times ................................................................. 84 Resource Center.................................................................... 95 Create a New Resource ........................................................................................... 95 3 Database Administration 103 Delete Enterprise Objects ................................................... 103 Delete projects .......................................................................................................103 Delete resources and users ..................................................................................105 Delete status report responses.............................................................................106 Delete timesheets ..................................................................................................106 Delete user delegates............................................................................................107 Force Check-in Enterprise Objects ...................................... 108 Check-in Enterprise Projects .................................................................................109 Check in Enterprise Resources .............................................................................110 Check in Enterprise Custom Fields .......................................................................110 Check in Enterprise Calendars ..............................................................................111 Check in Lookup Tables for Enterprise Custom Fields ........................................111 Check in Resource Plans .......................................................................................112 Daily Schedule Backup ....................................................... 113 Project Retention Policy Versions .........................................................................113 Items .......................................................................................................................113 Administrative Backup and Restore ................................... 115 Administrative Backup ...........................................................................................115 Administrative Restore ..........................................................................................115 OLAP Database Management.............................................. 117 Create an OLAP Cube ............................................................................................117 Configure an OLAP cube ........................................................................................121 Copy an OLAP cube ................................................................................................125 Delete an OLAP cube .............................................................................................126 Build an OLAP cube ...............................................................................................126
  • 5. Table of Contents 4 Look and Feel 128 Manage Views ..................................................................... 129 Create a New View .................................................................................................134 Modify a View .........................................................................................................137 Copy a View ............................................................................................................138 Delete a View .........................................................................................................139 Grouping Formats ............................................................... 139 Gantt Chart Formats ............................................................ 141 Quick Launch .......................................................................142 Change Quick Launch Behavior ............................................................................143 Add a New Link ......................................................................................................144 Modify an Existing Link ..........................................................................................145 Reorder Quick Launch Items .................................................................................145 Delete a Link ..........................................................................................................146 5 Time and Task Management 147 Fiscal Periods .......................................................................148 Define Fiscal Periods .............................................................................................148 Delete Fiscal Periods .............................................................................................151 Time Reporting Periods ....................................................... 151 Create Bulk Time Reporting Periods .....................................................................152 Insert or Delete Time Reporting Periods...............................................................153 Timesheet Adjustment .........................................................155 Line Classifications ..............................................................156 Timesheet Settings and Defaults ........................................158 Administrative Time .............................................................160 Task Settings and Display ....................................................162 Close Tasks to Update..........................................................163 6 Queue Management 165 Queue System Overview ......................................................165 Queuing process ..................................................................167 Queuing architecture ...........................................................168 Queuing modules ...................................................................................................168 How it all works together .......................................................................................172 The Project and Timesheet queues ..................................... 174 How the Project and Timesheet queues are used ...............................................175
  • 6. Queue groupings ..................................................................177 Parent/Child Relationships between submitted Jobs .........178 Queuing states .....................................................................179 Changes in queue state.........................................................................................180 Queue Administration Settings ........................................... 181 Manage Queue Jobs ..............................................................................................182 Queue Settings .......................................................................................................186 7 Operational Policies Management 197 Alerts and Reminders ......................................................... 197 Notification E-mail Settings ...................................................................................198 Schedule E-Mail Reminder Service .......................................................................199 Additional Server Settings................................................... 199 Project 2007 Compatibility Mode .........................................................................200 Project Professional Versions ................................................................................202 Enterprise Settings ................................................................................................203 Currency Settings ...................................................................................................204 Resource Capacity Settings...................................................................................206 Resource Plan Work Day .......................................................................................208 Exchange Server Details ........................................................................................208 Task Mode Settings ...............................................................................................209 Server Side Event Handlers .................................................210 Active Directory Resource Pool Synchronization ................ 212 To configure Enterprise Resource Pool synchronization .....................................213 Project Sites .........................................................................216 Create Site ..............................................................................................................217 Edit Site Address ....................................................................................................218 Synchronize ............................................................................................................219 Delete Site ..............................................................................................................220 Go to Project Site Settings .....................................................................................220 Project Site Provisioning Settings ....................................... 221 Site URL ..................................................................................................................222 Default Site Properties ..........................................................................................222 Automatic Provisioning ..........................................................................................223 Project Site Permissions ........................................................................................224 Bulk Update Project Sites ................................................... 225 Update Site Paths ..................................................................................................226 Update Content Types ...........................................................................................227 Project Site Permissions ........................................................................................227
  • 7. Table of Contents 8 Workflow and Project Detail Pages 228 Enterprise Project Types ..................................................... 229 Create New Enterprise Project Type .....................................................................229 Workflow Phases .................................................................. 231 New Workflow Phase .............................................................................................231 Workflow Stages ................................................................. 233 New Workflow Stages ............................................................................................233 Change or Restart Workflows ............................................. 236 Change or Restart a Workflow ..............................................................................236 Project Detail Pages .............................................................237 Create or Edit Project Detail Pages .......................................................................237 Project Workflow Settings ....................................................240 A Project Server 2010 Category Permissions 243 B Project Server 2010 Global Permissions 255 C Project Server 2010 Default Security Groups 280 Default global permissions ..................................................281 Default category permissions ............................................. 285 D Project Server 2010 Default Categories 289 Categories ........................................................................... 289 Category permissions ......................................................... 290
  • 9. 1 Introduction The Microsoft Project Server 2010 Administrator’s Guide helps your organization understand the tasks involved with administering Microsoft Project Server 2010. Send us your feedback (projdocs@microsoft.com). Please let us know what you think about the quality of this content. If this text does not meet your needs, let us know how we can improve it. If this text was helpful to you, let us know how it helped. What Will You Learn from this Book? There are several important tasks that an administrator must manage in Microsoft Project Server 2010 for Project Web App users to access and interact effectively with project data, including:  Managing users, groups, and categories.  Customizing Project Web App to fit the specific needs of your organization.  Managing workflows.  Managing enterprise data (custom fields, calendars, views, etc.).  Managing queue settings for your specific environment.  Managing time and task tracking.  Configuring Active Directory synchronization to security groups and resources. Who Should Read this Book? This book is designed to produce maximum benefits for the following professionals: Project Server administrators Those individuals who will have administrative privileges for Project Server and will perform the duties required to configure and maintain Project Server. SharePoint Server farm administrators Those individuals responsible for administering the SharePoint Server Central Administration web site and ensuring that Project Server and Microsoft SharePoint
  • 10. 2 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide Server are always properly synchronized and that SharePoint Server features and functionality are available. Project Management Office (PMO) Those individuals who help to define and maintain project management standards and practices throughout the organization. Project site administrators Those individuals who will have administrative privileges for Project Server and will perform the duties required to configure Project Server to meet organizational portfolio and project management needs. Active Directory administrators Those individuals responsible for setting up individual e-mail accounts and security groups in the Active Directory directory service that will be mapped to the Project Server Enterprise Resource Pool and Project Server security groups. Any member of your organization’s Project Server deployment planning team Those individuals within your organization who will plan the deployment of Project Server 2010 and who may need a better understanding of the day-to-day Project Server administrative tasks that are available in Project Web App. How is this Book Structured? This book has eight chapters and four appendices. You can review these chapters in any order you need to; they are organized in the same manner in this book as they are organized in Project Web App. Appendix data is primarily reference data and lists:
  • 11. Introduction  Introduction  Chapter 1, “Security”  Chapter 2, “Enterprise Data”  Chapter 3, “Database Administration”  Chapter 4, “Look and Feel”  Chapter 5, “Time and Task Management”  Chapter 6, “Queue Management”  Chapter 7, “Operational Policies Management”  Chapter 8, “Workflow and Project Detail Pages”  Appendix A, “Project Server 2010 Category Permissions”  Appendix B “ Project Server 2010 Global Permissions”  Appendix C “ Project Server 2010 Default Security Groups”  Appendix D “ Project Server 2010 Default Categories”
  • 13. 5 1 Security This chapter about Project Server 2010 Security contains the following sections:  Manage Permissions  Manage Users  Manage Groups  Manage Categories  Manage Security Templates  Manage Project Web App Permissions  Manage Delegates
  • 14. 6 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide Manage Permissions A permission is the authority to perform a specific action within the context of Project Server. You can Allow, Deny, or not configure (select neither Allow nor Deny) each permission in Project Server. For example, the Log On permission can be allowed or denied for any given user or group. There are two types of permissions in Project Server:  Global Permissions grant users and groups the ability to perform actions throughout an instance of Microsoft Project Web App (PWA). Global Permissions are assigned on a user or group level.  Category Permissions grant users and groups the ability to perform actions on specific projects and resources. Category Permissions also grant permissions to Views in PWA. Category Permissions are assigned on a category level. Permissions can be set in a number of different places within the Project Server 2010 administration menu. You can allow or deny permissions by selecting the check boxes in the Allow and Deny columns. If neither the Allow nor the Deny check boxes are selected, the default state is Not Allow. The Not Allow state does not prevent users from accessing the feature associated with the permission if they are granted permission in some other way. For example, a user might belong to one group for which permission is not configured (Not Allowed), but might be granted permission by means of membership in a group for which the permission is allowed. However, if the permission is explicitly denied anywhere, permission is denied everywhere for a particular user or group.
  • 15. Security 7 Project Server permissions You can configure all Project Server 2010 permissions from the Project Web App Server Settings page. Permissions can be configured in the following ways:  Allow Enables users or group members to perform the actions associated with the permission.  Deny Prevents a user or group from performing the actions associated with the permission. Use caution when denying permissions. Note that if a user is denied a specific permission, the deny setting supersedes any Allow settings that might apply to other groups to which the user belongs. No permissions are set to Deny by default.  Not Allow If you select neither Allow nor Deny for a permission, the default state is Not Allow. If a user belongs to more than one group, and a permission is set to Not Allow for one group and is set to Allow (but not Deny) for another group, then the user is allowed to perform the actions associated with the permission. It is important to consider when you are configuring a permission to Deny that the Deny setting supersedes any Allow settings that apply to the user for that permission by means of other group memberships. Limiting your use of the Deny setting can simplify permissions management for large groups of users. Important The Deny setting enables you to deny access to functionality, because this setting overrides the Allow setting. Therefore, use caution when selecting the Deny check box. Select the Deny check box to prevent a user from outside the organization from accessing Project Server security objects or to deny functionality to a user or group). For organizations that include a large number of users, assigning and administering permissions on an individual basis can be an overwhelming task. You can use groups to assign permissions to multiple users with a single action. Create the groups and define the set of permissions to associate with the groups as part of your initial Project Server 2010 deployment planning process, before you assign users to groups and groups to categories.
  • 16. 8 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide After you define groups, the permissions associated with the groups, and group memberships, the day-to-day administration of users, groups, and categories involves adding users to or removing users from security groups. This helps to reduce the volume of required day-to-day administrative tasks, and can simplify troubleshooting permissions issues. Manage Users When you make the initial connection to Microsoft Project Server 2010 through the Microsoft Project Web App (PWA) site, you must be logged on by using the account used to provision the PWA site. You can use this initial account to create other user accounts that can access Project Server. For example, this initial account can be used to create the user accounts for Project Server administrators, who can create other user accounts and do additional post-installation configuration. You can use the Manage Users page that is available from the Server Settings page to add new individual users, modify existing users, deactivate user accounts, and reactivate inactive user accounts. You can also assign permissions to users by adding them to one of the built- in groups or by creating a custom group and assigning specific permissions to the custom group. Note If you have more than 2,000 users in PWA, the Manage Users page will not display users until you select one of the Show options at the top of the page. Add or Edit a User To add a new user account, perform the following procedure.  To add a user account 1. On the Server Settings page, in the Security section, click Manage Users. 2. On the Manage Users page, click New User. 3. On the New User page, fill out the required information for the user. See the following sections for details on each option. 4. Click Save. To edit an existing user account, perform the following procedure.  To edit a user account 1. On the Server Settings page, in the Security section, click Manage Users. 2. On the Manage Users page, click the user that you want to edit. 3. On the Edit User page, fill out the required information for the user. See the following sections for details on each option.
  • 17. Security 9 4. Click Save. Identification Information Use the Identification Information section to specify user information such as name, email address, and account status. Project Server user identification information The following table describes the user identification options. Attribute Description User can be assigned Select User can be assigned as a resource if you want this as a resource user account to be able to be assigned tasks as a resource. Selecting this entry makes the user an Enterprise Resource. This setting is selected by default. Once a user account becomes an Enterprise Resource it cannot be changed back to a non-Enterprise Resource even if the check box is
  • 18. 10 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide deselected. Display Name The name for the user account. This is a required field. E-mail address The email address for the user. This field is required to synchronize tasks with Exchange Server. RBS The user’s position in the Resource Breakdown Structure hierarchy. Initials The user’s initials. Hyperlink Name The name of the user’s web site (for example, a team web site) if applicable. Hyperlink URL The URL of the user’s web site, if applicable. Account Status Can be set to Active or Inactive. If the value is set to Active, the user account functions normally. If the value is set to Inactive, the user will be unable to access the account. User Authentication Use the User Authentication section to specify the user’s logon account and whether the user account should be synchronized with Active Directory. Project Server user account information The following table describes the user account options. Attribute Description User logon account If you are using Integrated Windows authentication, type the user's account name in the form of DomainNameUserAccountName. If you are using forms-based authentication, type the user account name in the form of MembershipProviderName:UserAccount. Prevent Active Directory Selecting the Prevent Active Directory synchronization for synchronization for this user this user check box prevents a user account from being synchronized during Active Directory Resource Pool Synchronization.
  • 19. Security 11 Assignment Attributes Use the Assignment Attributes section to define information associated with the user’s assignment to tasks, including calendar, booking type, timesheet manager, assignment owner, and cost and availability information. Note If you have not selected the User can be assigned as a resource check box, these options are not available. Project Server assignment attributes The following table describes the Project Server user assignment attribute options. Attribute Description Resource can be leveled Indicates whether the resource can be leveled. Leveling is the process that is used to resolve resource conflicts or over-allocations by delaying or splitting certain tasks.
  • 20. 12 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide Attribute Description When Project levels a resource, its selected assignments are distributed and rescheduled. Base Calendar A base calendar is a calendar that can be used as a project and task calendar that specifies default working and non-working time for a set of resources. Default Booking Type Using the Default Booking Type list, you can configure a user's booking type as either Committed or Proposed. A committed resource is formally allocated to any task assignment within a project. A proposed resource has a pending resource allocation to a task assignment that has not yet been authorized. This resource assignment does not detract from the availability of the resource to work on other projects. Timesheet manager If the user has a timesheet manager, specify that user here. Default Assignment Owner An assignment owner is an enterprise resource who is responsible for entering progress information in PWA. This person can differ from the person first assigned to the task. For example, a material resource cannot log on to PWA but the assignment owner field allows an enterprise resource to enter progress for the resource within PWA. Earliest Available The earliest date that the user is available as a resource. This date corresponds to the resource availability dates for a resource that can be seen in Microsoft Project Professional. Latest Available The latest date that the user is available as a resource. This date corresponds to the resource availability dates for a resource that can be seen in Project Professional. Standard Rate The rate for the work on an assignment that is scheduled during the regular working hours of an assigned resource. To establish variable rates, open the enterprise resource in Project Professional and set this information in the Cost Rate tables. Overtime Rate The rate for the work on an assignment that is scheduled beyond the regular working hours of an assigned resource. To establish variable rates, open the enterprise resource in Project Professional and set this information in the Cost Rate tables. Current Max. Units (%) The percentage of time that the resource is available for assignments. The current max units is tied to the early and late availability dates, if set. For example, if today is 1/1/2011 and the earliest available date is 1/2/2011
  • 21. Security 13 Attribute Description then the max value is 0% and text next to the field will say “Custom availability detected, edit in Project Professional.” Cost/Use The per-use cost of the resource, if applicable. For work resources, a per-use cost accrues every time that the resource is used. For material resources, a per-use cost is accrued only one time. Exchange Server Details Use the Exchange Server Details section to specify whether the user’s tasks should be synchronized with Exchange Server. Exchange synchronization configuration Select the Synchronize Tasks check box if you want to enable task synchronization using Microsoft Exchange for this user. Exchange integration must be configured for task synchronization to function. For more information about how to configure task synchronization with Exchange Server, see Deploy Project Server 2010 with Exchange Server (http://technet.microsoft.com/en- us/library/ff793353.aspx). Departments Use the Departments section to define whether the user is a member of a particular department. You define departments for your organization by populating the Departments custom lookup table. User department configuration
  • 22. 14 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide If the user is a member of a department, click the expand button (...) and select the department from the displayed hierarchy. Security Groups Use the Security Groups section to specify the user’s membership in security groups. Security group configuration To add the user to a security group, select the group in the Available Groups list, and then click Add. The following table describes the security group configuration options for a user. Attribute Description Available Groups The Available Groups list contains the groups that the user is currently not a member of. Groups that contain this The Groups that contain this user list contains the groups user that the user is currently a member of. Security Categories Use the Security Categories section to specify the user’s membership in security categories.
  • 23. Security 15 Security category configuration To add the user to a category, select the category in the Available Categories list, and then click Add. To modify the category permissions for this user in a category, select the category in the Selected Categories list, and then select Allow for the permissions that you want to allow. Important We recommend that you do not set category permissions for a single user. Instead, assign the user to a group and set category permission for the group. This allows for easier maintenance. The following table describes the security category configuration options for a user. Attribute Description Available Categories The Available Categories list contains the categories that the user is not a member of. Selected Categories The Selected Categories list contains the categories that the user is a member of. Permissions for <category> The Permissions for <category> area lets you configure category permissions for this user for the selected category. Set permissions with The Set permission with Template option can be used to Template prepopulate a set of category permissions based on a predefined template for the user’s role (such as Executive or Project Manager).
  • 24. 16 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide Global Permissions Use the Global Permissions section to configure global permissions for the user. Global permissions configuration To allow or deny a global permission for the user, select the Allow or Deny check box for the permission. We recommend that you do not configure global permission for a single user. Instead, configure permissions at the group level and add users to the appropriate group. Doing this allows for much easier administration and helps in troubleshooting permissions issues. For a complete list of global permissions, see Appendix B, “Project Server 2010 Global Permissions.” Group Fields Use the Group Fields section to define group and cost information for the user. Group fields are not tied to Project Server security, but are a way of specifying that a user belongs to a particular group in your organization. These fields appear in the Project Server reporting database and can be used for reporting. Cost Type can be added to the resource and assignment OLAP cubes.
  • 25. Security 17 Group fields configuration If your organization uses group names, codes, or cost center information for individuals, type the information in the Group Fields area. The values available for Cost Type are those that are defined in the Cost Type custom lookup table. By default, the Group field is synchronized with Active Directory if you use Active Directory synchronization. Team Details Use the Team Details section to define a team association for the user. To use teams, you must first do the following: 1. Create a custom lookup table and populate it with the team names that you want to use. 2. Edit the Team Name custom field to use the new lookup table. Team details configuration You can use teams to pool assignments under a single resource where they can be later reassigned to other resources. For example, you could create a team resource named “Development” to which you assign software development tasks. By assigning this resource to the Development team and selecting the Team Assignment Pool check box, you enable other users on the Development team to see any tasks assigned to the Development resource and to accept the assignments in PWA. You could also select Team Assignment Pool for a team lead and have all assignments go through that person for distribution to team members.
  • 26. 18 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide System Identification Data The System Identification Data section displays user meta data, such as when the account was created, updated, or checked out. System identification data In the System Identification Data section, type additional identifying information for the user in the External ID box. This information can be used to link the person to corresponding information elsewhere in the organization, or to facilitate the consolidation of reporting of resource use beyond what Project Server provides. The following table describes the system identification data fields. Attribute Description GUID The unique ID associated with this user. External ID Can be used to link this user to external data. Active Directory GUID The unique ID for this user’s Active Directory account. Date Created The date this user account was created. Date last updated The date this user account was last updated. Checked out by The user who currently has this user account checked out. Checkout date The date this user account was checked out.
  • 27. Security 19 Deactivate a user account At times, you may need to make Project Server user accounts unavailable. When you deactivate a user account, that user’s information and data remains in the database, but the user is unavailable for new assignments. The user account is inactive until it is reactivated. Deactivating a user account means that it can no longer be used to log on to Project Server 2010. Users cannot use this account to send assignment updates, request status reports, or delegate tasks. Once a user is deactivated, the Project Manager is prompted to reassign the user’s remaining work. This prompt occurs when the Project Manager opens the project in Microsoft Project Professional 2010. User accounts, when deactivated, are not actually deleted from the Project Server database. This ensures that any relationships that resource might have with project data can be preserved in case the account is reactivated later. The option to delete a user is available in the Database Administration section in Server Settings. However, deactivating a user to preserve data is recommended. After deactivating an account, the account cannot access Project Server 2010 until it has been reactivated. The Manage users and groups global permission in Project Server 2010 is required to complete this procedure. When using Active Directory synchronization, Project Server users not found in the Active Directory group being synchronized will be deactivated. If a user is to be removed from Active Directory but you do not want the account deactivated, select the Prevent Active Directory synchronization for this user check box under User Authentication on the Edit User page. Deactivate users Use this procedure to deactivate an active Project Server 2010 user account.  To deactivate a user account 1. On the Project Web App home page, in the Quick Launch, click Server Settings.
  • 28. 20 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide 2. On the Server Settings page, in the Security section, click Manage Users. 3. On the Manage Users page, in the Users list, find the user account you want to deactivate. (You can use the Search box to search for a specific user.) Click the check box next to the user name of the account you want to deactivate. Note that you can select multiple user accounts. 4. Click Deactivate Users. 5. A message box will appear asking confirmation. Click OK to deactivate the user account or user accounts. Reactivate a user account After deactivating a user account, you may need to reactivate it at some later time. Because the user information still exists in the Project Server database, you simply need to change the account status from Inactive to Active. Use this procedure to reactivate a deactivated Project Server 2010 user account. After you have performed this procedure, the reactivated account is able to access Project Server 2010. The Manage users and groups global permission in Project Server 2010 is required to complete this procedure.  To reactivate a user account 1. On the Project Web App home page, in the Quick Launch, click Server Settings. 5. On the Server Settings page, in the Security section, click Manage Users. 6. On the Manage Users page, in the Users list, find the user account you want to reactivate. (You can use the Search box to search for a specific user.) Click the user name of the account. 7. On the Edit User page for the selected user, in the Identification Information section, select Active from the Account Status drop-down list. 8. Click Save. Manage Groups A group is a container for users that can be assigned permissions in Microsoft Project Server 2010. Users automatically inherit the permissions of any group to which they belong. By adding users to groups, you can significantly reduce the amount of time spent managing user
  • 29. Security 21 permissions. You can manage groups from the Microsoft Project Web App (PWA) Server Settings page. The following groups are created by default when Project Server 2010 is installed:  Team Members Users have general permissions for using PWA, but limited project-level permissions. This group is intended to give everyone basic access to PWA. All new users are automatically added to the Team Members group. This group is associated with the My Tasks category.  Project Managers Users have most global and category-level project permissions and limited resource permissions. This group is intended for users who maintain project schedules on a daily basis. This group is associated with the My Organization and My Projects categories.  Resource Managers Users have most global and category-level resource permissions. This group is intended for users who manage and assign resources and edit resource data. This group is associated with the My Direct Reports, My Organization, My Projects, and My Resources categories.  Executives Users have permissions to view project and Project Server data, but cannot make changes. This group is intended for high-level users who need visibility into projects but are not themselves assigned project tasks. This group is associated with the My Organization category.  Team Leads Users have limited permissions around task creation and status reports. This group is intended for people in a lead capacity who do not have regular assignments on a project. This group is associated with the My Projects category.  Portfolio Managers Users can create and edit data, but cannot perform Project Server administrative tasks such as adding users or creating groups. Portfolio Managers are able to view and edit all projects and resources in the organization. This group is associated with the My Organization category.  Administrators This group is granted all available Project Server permissions. It is associated with the My Organization category. These default groups are designed to be used together with the five default categories. Create or modify a security group Seven default security groups are installed with Microsoft Project Server 2010. To better meet the security requirements of your own organization, you can also create custom groups by using the Manage Groups page on the Microsoft Project Web App (PWA) site Server Settings page. Perform the following procedure to create a custom group in Project Server 2010.  To add a security group 1. On the Server Settings page, in the Security section, click Manage Groups.
  • 30. 22 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide 2. On the Manage Groups page, click New Group. 3. Complete the required fields on the Add or Edit Group page. See the sections below for information about each area. 4. Click Save. Avoid creating unnecessary groups. Having a large number of groups and categories within an organization can lead to additional management complexity. Additionally, large numbers of groups and categories can stress the authorization system, which can affect performance. You can modify the information associated with any security group in Microsoft Project Server 2010. For example, you may need to modify the group for changes to users or categories, or for changes to the Active Directory group to which it is currently being synchronized. We recommend not modifying the default Project Server groups, but rather creating a new group with the same permissions and modifying the new group. Perform the following procedure to modify an existing group in Project Server 2010.  To modify a security group 1. On the Project Web App home page, in the Quick Launch, click Server Settings. 2. On the Server Settings page, in the Security section, click Manage Groups. 3. On the Manage Groups page, in the Group Name list, click the name of the group you want to modify. 4. On the Add or Edit Group page for the selected group, make your changes to the group information. See the sections below for information about each area. 5. Click Save. Group Information Use the Group Information section to specify a name and description for the group. Group information If you want to synchronize the membership of this group with an Active Directory group, click Find Group and search for the group that you want to synchronize. To stop synchronizing an existing group, click Clear Group.
  • 31. Security 23 The following table describes the group information options. Attribute Description Group Name The name of the group. Description A description of the group. Active Directory Group to The name of the Active Directory group from which this Synchronize group gets its membership. If you configure this group to synchronize with an Active Directory group, the membership of this group will be synchronized with the Active Directory group specified on the schedule that you configure. Users Use the users section to specify which Project Server users are a member of this group. Available users and users in the group To add users to the group, select the users in the Available Users list, and then click Add. To remove users from the group, select the users in the Selected Users list, and then click Remove. If you have configured Active Directory synchronization for this group, the group membership is maintained by that mechanism. Any changes you make manually may be overwritten the next time the group is synchronized with Active Directory. The following table describes the options for users in the group. Attribute Description Available Users The users in Project Server that are not members of this group. Selected Users The users in Project Server that are members of this group. Categories Use the Categories section to define which security categories area associated with this group.
  • 32. 24 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide Categories options To associate a category with this group, select the category in the Available Categories list, and then click Add. To set the category-level permissions for a particular category, select the category in the Selected Categories list, and then click Allow for the permissions that you want to allow for this category/group combination. The following table describes the categories options for a group. Attribute Description Available Categories The categories that are not associated with this group. Selected Categories The categories that are associated with this group. Permissions for <category> The permissions that members of this group have within
  • 33. Security 25 Attribute Description the selected category. This option appears when you select a category in the Available Categories list. Set permissions with To set the category permissions for the selected category Template from a template – such as Project Manager or Team Member – select the desired template from the dropdown list, and then click Apply. Global Permissions Use the Global Permissions section to configure global permissions for this group. Global permissions To allow a permission for the group, select the Allow check box for that permission. To deny a permission for the group, select the Deny check box for that permission. For a complete list of global permissions, see Appendix B, “Project Server 2010 Global Permissions.” Note If neither check box is selected for a permission, the user is not allowed the permission unless it is allowed in another group that the user is a member of, or it is allowed at the user level. If the Deny check box is selected for a permission, that permission is denied for all users in the group and cannot be allowed through other group or user settings.
  • 34. 26 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide Delete a security group If you no longer need a security group in Microsoft Project Server 2010, you can delete it. Before you delete a group, ensure that no other users or groups depend on it for required permissions. Security groups are permanently deleted, unlike deactivated user accounts (which can be reactivated). If you delete a security group and then find that you want to have it again, you must recreate it. The Manage users and groups global permission in Project Server 2010 is required to complete this procedure. Important We highly recommend not deleting the default Project Server groups. The Team Members group cannot be deleted. Delete a custom security group Perform the following procedure to delete a group in Project Server 2010.  To delete a custom group 1. On the Server Settings page, in the Security section, click Manage Groups. 2. On the Manage Groups page, in the Group Name list, find the group you want to delete. Select the check box next to the group that you want to delete. Note that you can select multiple groups. 3. Click Delete Group. 4. A message box appears, asking for confirmation and noting that the group will be permanently removed. Click OK to delete the group. Active Directory Group Synchronization Project Server 2010 security group synchronization controls Project Server security group membership by automatically adding and removing users from specified Project Server security groups based on group membership in the Active Directory directory service. Each Project Server
  • 35. Security 27 security group can be mapped to a single Active Directory group. This Active Directory group can, however, contain nested groups whose members will also be synchronized. The following actions can occur during a Project Server security group synchronization process:  A new Project Server user account can be created based on an Active Directory account.  An existing Project Server user can be removed from a Project Server security group.  An existing Project Server user can be added to a Project Server security group.  An existing Project Server user account's metadata (name, e-mail address, and so on) can be updated if it has changed in Active Directory.  A previously inactive Project Server user account can be reactivated. Before you perform this procedure, confirm that:  You have access to Project Server through Project Web Access with an account with the Manage Active Directory Settings and the Manage users and groups global settings.  The Service Application service account for the Project Server instance has Read access to all Active Directory groups and user accounts involved in the synchronization. You can verify this account in the on the Service Application page on the Central Administration site. To configure security group synchronization Use this procedure to configure security group synchronization with Active Directory in Project Server 2010. The following table describes possible scenarios and corresponding actions that occur when security group synchronization takes place: Scenario Action The user exists in Active Directory and is a A new corresponding user account is created in member of the Active Directory group Project Server and is granted membership to the mapped to the current Project Server current Project Server security group. security group. The user does not exist in Project Server. The user is not a member of the Active The existing Project Server user is removed as a Directory group mapped to the current member of the current Project Server security Project Server security group. The user group. also exists in Project Server and is a
  • 36. 28 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide Scenario Action member of the current Project Server security group. The user exists in Active Directory and is a The existing Project Server user is given member of the Active Directory group membership to the current Project Server security mapped to the current Project Server group. security group. The user also exists in Project Server, but is not a member of the current Project Server security group. The user exists in Active Directory and is a The corresponding Project Server user member of the Active Directory group information is updated (if applicable). mapped to the current Project Server security group. The user also exists in Project Server and is a member of the current Project Server security group. User information has been updated in Active Directory. The user exists in Active Directory and is a If the Automatically reactivate currently member of the Active Directory group inactive users if found in Active Directory mapped to the current Project Server during synchronization option is selected in security group. The user also exists in Project Server, the account is reactivated and is Project Server, but as an inactive account. added to the current Project Server security group. If the option is not selected, the account remains inactive in Project Server.  To configure security group synchronization 1. On the Project Web App Home page, click Server Settings. 2. On the Server Settings page, in the Security section, click Manage Groups. 3. On the Manage Groups page, in the Group Name column, click the name of the security group that you want to synchronize. 4. On the Add or Edit page for the group you selected, in the Group Information section, for Active Directory Group to Synchronize, click Find Group.
  • 37. Security 29 5. On the Find Group in Active Directory page, in the Group Name field, enter all or part of the name of the Active Directory group which you want to synchronize with your security group. Click the button next to the Group Name field to search the Active Directory forest based on your search criteria. To select a group from a remote forest, type the fully qualified domain name of the group (for example, group@corp.contoso.com). You can synchronize to a security or distribution group of any scope (Local, Global, or Universal). Note The Active Directory forest that is search is displayed at the top of the Find Group in the Active Directory page. The forest is defined by the fully qualified domain name of the account for the Service Application on which the Project Server instance is running. 6. From the Group Name list, select the group with which you want to synchronize your Project Server security group. Click OK. 7. On the Add or Edit Group page, you should see the Active Directory group you selected in the Group Information section next to Active Directory Group to Synchronize. Click Save. 8. On the Manage Groups page, in the Group Name column, select the check box next to the security group that you just configured for synchronization. Then click Active Directory Sync Options.
  • 38. 30 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide Synchronize Project Server Groups with Active Directory 9. If you want to schedule synchronization to occur on a scheduled basis, on the Synchronize Project Server Groups with Active Directory page, in the Scheduling section, select Schedule Synchronization. Alternatively, you can choose to manually run the security group synchronization. If you prefer the manual option, skip the following step and continue to step 11. 10. In the Frequency fields, define the frequency at which you want synchronization to occur between the Project Server security group and the Active Directory group. This can be scheduled over a defined period of days, weeks, or months. Select a start date and time. 11. You can enable inactive user accounts to be reactivated if they are found in the Active Directory group during synchronization. To do so, in the Options section, select Automatically reactivate currently inactive users if found in Active Directory during synchronization. (For example, enabling this option would ensure that if an employee were rehired, the employee's user account would be reactivated). 12. Click Save to save the settings. Click Save and Synchronize Now if you want to synchronize your Project Server security group immediately. If you choose not to schedule the synchronization, you can rerun it manually when needed by returning to this page and clicking Save and Synchronize Now. 13. You can check the status of the security group synchronization by returning to the Synchronize Project Server Groups with Active Directory page for the specific security
  • 39. Security 31 group and reviewing the information in the Status section. It will contain information such as when the last successful synchronization occurred. Manage Categories Categories are the collections of projects, resources, and views to which users and groups in Project Server are granted access. Categories define which collections of specific data (projects, resources, and views) that these users and groups have access to. Categories also allow the administrator to filter data using security rules, like Resource Breakdown Structure (RBS), that can help organize and display data in specific ways. You can manually add projects and resources to categories by choosing them from lists, or you can use dynamic filters to automatically add them to categories. Any user associated with a category can be granted permission to the projects and resources in that category. You must have the Manage users and groups global permission to add, modify, or delete a group. Avoid creating unnecessary categories. Having a large number of groups and categories within an organization can stress the authorization system, which can affect performance. Microsoft Project Server 2010 creates five default categories during installation. These default categories enable Project Server to provide the most common layer of security for a hierarchical organization or matrix organization. The Manage users and groups global permission in Project Server 2010 is required in order to create, modify, or delete a category. Default category Default groups in the Description category My Tasks Team Members Primarily used by project resources who have assigned tasks. My Projects Project Managers Provides access to all projects that a user Resource Managers owns. Team Leads My Resources Resource Managers Intended for resource managers and is useful only after the Resource Breakdown Structure (RBS) is defined. My Direct Reports Resource Managers Intended for users who need to approve timesheets. My Organization Executives Used to grant access to all information in Portfolio Managers the organization. This category is intended Project Managers for members of a Project Management Office (PMO), executives in an organization, Resource Managers
  • 40. 32 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide Default category Default groups in the Description category Administrators and other key users who require the ability to view projects and resources across the entire organization. Create or modify a category In Microsoft Project Server 2010, you can add custom security categories as necessary to create a Project Server security model that meets the specific needs of users and groups in your organization. Avoid creating unnecessary categories. Having a large number of groups and categories within an organization can lead to greater administrative complexity. Additionally, large numbers of groups and categories can stress the authorization system, which can affect performance. If there are many users at the highest level of the RBS, consider adding them to a custom category that gives them visibility of all projects (avoiding dynamic rules). Top-level RBS users probably have access to all projects, so assigning them to this category avoids unneeded work by the authorization system. The Manage users and groups global permission in Project Server 2010 is required to complete these procedures. To create a new category, perform the following procedure.  To create a category 1. On the Project Web App home page, in the Quick Launch, click Server Settings. 2. On the Server Settings page, in the Security section, click Manage Categories. 3. On the Manage Categories page, click New Category. 4. Complete the Add or Edit Category page. See the following sections for information about each setting. 5. Click Save. To modify an existing category, perform the following procedure.  To modify a category 1. On the Project Web App home page, in the Quick Launch, click Server Settings. 2. On the Server Settings page, in the Security section, click Manage Categories. 3. On the Manage Categories page, click the category that you want to modify. 4. Complete the Add or Edit Category page. See the following sections for information about each setting. 5. Click Save.
  • 41. Security 33 Name and Description Use the Name and Description section to specify a name and description for the category. Category name and description The following table describes the name and description options for a category. Attribute Description Category Name The name of the category. This name must different be than that of other categories. Description Description of the category. Users and Groups Use the Users and Groups section to specify which users and groups are associated with this category. Category users and groups To associate a user or group with this category, select the user or group in the Available Users and Groups list, and then click Add. To remove the association between a user or group and this category, select the user or group in the Users and Groups with Permissions list and then click Remove. For easiest administration, only associate groups with categories. Attribute Description Available Users and Groups Users and groups that are not associated with this category. Users and Groups with Users and groups that are associated with this category. Permissions
  • 42. 34 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide To select the category permissions for each user or group, select the user or group in the Users and Groups with Permissions list. This will display the category permissions for the selected group in this category. Category permissions for the Project Managers group Each user or group can be assigned distinct permission within a category. For a complete list of category permissions, see Appendix A, “Project Server 2010 Category Permissions.” Projects Use the Projects section to specify the projects that users associated with this category can view.
  • 43. Security 35 Category / project association You can explicitly select projects that users with permissions in this category can view, or you can use one of the dynamic security options to have projects made available to users based on their relationship to the project or their RBS value. Attribute Description All current and future When this option is selected, users in this category can projects in Project Server see all projects in this instance of Project Web App. database Only the projects indicated When this option is selected, users in this category can view the projects in the Selected Projects list and any projects from the Available Projects list that the user has permissions to see using the dynamic permissions options. The dynamic permissions features only work when this option is selected. Available projects Projects that are not explicitly part of this category. Users may still be able to view these projects if any of the dynamic permissions options are configured to allow it. Selected projects Projects that users in this category can view. The User is the Project Gives users permissions on any project they own. Also Owner or the User is the gives Status Managers permissions on projects that Status Manager on contain assignments that they manage.
  • 44. 36 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide Attribute Description assignments within that Project. The User is on that Gives users permissions on any project where they are on project's Project Team the project team. Users do not need to have assignments on the project. The Project Owner is a Gives users permissions on any project that is managed descendant of the User via by resources subordinate to them in the Resource RBS Breakdown Structure (RBS) hierarchy. A resource on the project's Allows a user to view any project where a resource Project Team is a subordinate to the user in the RBS is on the project team. descendant of the User via Avoid using this rule for users who have many resources RBS under them in the RBS. If the resources under them are on many projects involving many categories, this stress on the authorization system can affect performance (for example, delay the loading of the Project Center page). The Project Owner has the Allows a user to view projects managed by persons that same RBS value as the have the same RBS value that the user has. User Resources Use the Resources section to specify which resources the users associated with this category can view.
  • 45. Security 37 Category / resource association You can explicitly select resources that users with permissions in this category can view, or you can use one of the dynamic security options to have resources made available to users based on their relationship to the resource or their RBS value. Attribute Description All current and future When this option is selected, users in this category can resources in Project Server see all resources in this instance of Project Web App. database Only the resources When this option is selected, users in this category can indicated view the resources in the Selected Resources list and any resources from the Available Resources list that the user has permissions to see using the dynamic permissions options. Available Resources Resources that are not explicitly part of this category. Users may still be able to view these resources if any of the dynamic permissions options are configured to allow it. Selected Resources Resources that users in this category can view. The User is the resource Gives users permissions to view information about themselves (such as assignments). They are members of a Gives users permissions to view information for all
  • 46. 38 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide Attribute Description Project Team on a project resources in projects they own. owned by the User They are descendants of Gives users permissions to view information for all the User via RBS resources under them in the RBS. They are direct Gives users permissions to view information about descendants of the User resources that are directly under them in the RBS. via RBS They have the same RBS Gives user permissions to view information about value as the User resources that have the same RBS value. Views – Add to Category Use the Views – Add to Category section to specify views that users associated with this category can see. Global permissions To add a view to the category, select the Add check box for that view. To remove a view, clear the Add check box for that view.
  • 47. Security 39 Delete a category In Project Server 2010, you can delete any existing custom category from the Manage Categories page in Microsoft Project Web App. Note Default Project Server categories cannot be deleted. The Manage users and groups global permission in Project Server 2010 is required to complete this procedure. Delete a custom category Perform the following procedure to delete an existing category in Project Server 2010. Caution Verify that the category you are deleting is the one you intend to delete. If you accidentally delete the wrong category, it is permanently deleted and will need to be recreated.  To delete a category 1. On the Project Web App home page, in the Quick Launch, click Server Settings. 2. On the Server Settings page, in the Security section, click Manage Categories. 3. On the Manage Categories page, in the Category Name list, find the category that you want to delete. Select the check box next to the category that you want to delete. Note that you can select multiple categories. 4. Click Delete Categories. 5. A warning message appears, noting that the category will be permanently removed. Click OK.
  • 48. 40 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide Manage Security Templates Security templates provide a method for you to quickly apply or reset predefined permission profiles to new or existing users, groups, and categories. By applying security templates, you can easily standardize the permissions that you assign according to user's role in the organization. A number of predefined security templates are created by default when Microsoft Project Server 2010 is installed. These align with the predefined groups. You can customize these security templates or create new security templates according to your needs. Creating custom templates requires planning. You must first identify the common Project Server usage patterns in your organization that are not reflected in the default Project Server security templates. This helps you to identify your requirements for custom security templates. Then, determine the permissions that the users who share the common Project Server usage patterns require. This defines the security template. Next, determine the set of projects, resources, views, and so on, that the users and groups require access to; this defines the security category. Create the custom security template and apply it to the group of users that share the common usage pattern. The permissions that you define in the custom security template enables users to access the Project Server security objects that they require. Project Server 2010 creates eight default security templates during installation:  Administrators  Executives  Portfolio Managers  Project Managers  Proposal Reviewers  Resource Managers  Team Leads  Team Members Each security template is given a set of default category and global permissions, based on the functions that each group typically does in an organization. As mentioned previously, when creating new security templates, you are allowed to copy the permissions for a default security template and then customize it to suit your needs. We recommend not modifying the default templates. The Manage users and groups global permission in Project Server 2010 is required to create, modify, or delete a security template. Create or modify a security template In Microsoft Project Server 2010, you can group commonly used permissions into a security template and then use it to assign permissions to users, groups, and categories.
  • 49. Security 41 The Manage users and groups global permission in Project Server 2010 is required to complete this procedure. Perform the following procedure to create a template in Project Server 2010.  To create a template 1. On the PWA home page, in the Quick Launch, click Server Settings. 2. On the Server Settings page, in the Security section, click Manage Templates. 3. On the Manage Templates page, click New Template. 4. Complete the Add or Edit Template page. See the following sections for information about each setting. 5. Click Save. In Microsoft Project Server 2010, you can modify the permissions for any existing template in the Manage Templates page in Microsoft Project Web App Server Settings. As a best practice, do not make any changes to the default Project Server templates. The Manage users and groups global permission in Project Server 2010 is required to complete this procedure. Note Modifying a template does not make any changes to users, groups, or categories to which the template was applied in the past. Perform the following procedure to modify an existing template in Project Server 2010.  To modify a template 1. On the Project Web App home page, in the Quick Launch, click Server Settings. 2. On the Server Settings page, in the Security section, click Manage Templates. 3. On the Manage Templates page, in the Template Name list, click the template that you want to edit. 4. On the Add or Edit Template page, make your changes to the template. See the following sections for information about each setting. 5. Click Save. Name Use the Name section to specify a name and description of the template and, optionally, to select an existing template to copy the settings from an existing template into the new template.
  • 50. 42 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide Template name and Copy Template options If you choose a template from the Copy Template dropdown list, the values from that template are copied to this template. Important The values from the copied template will overwrite any existing values in this template. After you copy the template, you can modify the values as needed to meet your needs. If you do not copy a template, this template will be blank and you can modify the values as needed. Category Permissions Use the Category Permissions section to set the category permissions for this template. Category Permissions To allow a category permission for this template, select the Allow check box for that permission. If you do not select the Allow check box for a permission, that permission will not be allowed in the categories where you use this template, but could be allowed in other categories.
  • 51. Security 43 To deny a category permission for this template, select the Deny check box for that permission. Global Permissions Use the Global Permissions section to set the global permissions for this template. Global Permissions To allow a global permission for this template, select the Allow check box for that permission. If you do not select the Allow check box for a permission, that permission will not be allowed in the groups where you use this template, but could be allowed in other groups. To deny a global permission for this template, select the Deny check box for that permission. Delete a security template In Microsoft Project Server 2010, you can delete any existing security templates from the Manage Templates page on the Microsoft Project Web App site. As a best practice, do not delete any of the default Project Server templates. The Manage users and groups global permission in Project Server 2010 is required to complete this procedure.
  • 52. 44 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide Delete a template Perform the following procedure to delete a template.  To delete a template 1. On the Project Web App home page, in the Quick Launch, click Server Settings. 2. On the Server Settings page, in the Security section, click Manage Templates. 3. On the Manage Templates page, in the Template Name list, select the check box next to the templates that you want to delete. 4. Click Delete Template. A warning message appears, noting that the template will be permanently removed. 5. Click OK. Manage Project Web App Permissions You can use the Manage Project Web App Permissions page to control which global and category permissions are enabled on a given Microsoft Project Server 2010 instance. An administrator can use the Project Web App Permissions page to deny access to all Project Server 2010 users for a particular feature in Microsoft Project Professional or a Microsoft Project Web App (PWA) instance. If a Project Web App permission is disabled on this page, the equivalent global or category permission is disabled for users throughout PWA. All permissions on this page are enabled by default. For example, if you deny the Delete project permission, users throughout PWA cannot delete projects, regardless of whether they have the Delete project category permission. Important Before disabling a Project Web App permission, thoroughly consider the effects on your organization of doing so. If you want to turn off a permission for only some Project Web App users, verify whether you can do it by creating a custom group and denying the permissions you want to restrict.
  • 53. Security 45 Disable Project Web App Permission The Manage users and groups global permission in Project Server 2010 is required to complete this procedure. Perform the following procedure to disable a Project Web App organizational permission in Project Server 2010.  To disable a Project Web App permission 1. On the Project Web App home page, in the Quick Launch, click Server Settings. 2. On the Server Settings page, in the Security section, click Project Web App Permissions. 3. On the Project Web App Permissions page, in the Available Project Web App Permissions list, clear the Enable check box next to the permission that you no longer want to make available to Project Web App users. (All Project Web App permissions are enabled by default.) 4. Click Save. Enabling a previously disabled permission is simply done by selecting the Enable check box next to the permission that has been disabled. Manage Delegates Microsoft Project Server 2010 enables user delegation throughout all of Project Web App. This means that one user can act as another user in every part of Project Web App, regardless of the permission level difference of one user compared to the other.
  • 54. 46 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide Turn Delegation on or off The user delegation feature in Project Web App can be enabled or disabled globally, for all users and groups. When user delegation is turned on, you can set permissions to control the specific behavior of the feature in Project Web App.  To turn delegation on or off 1. On the PWA home page, click Server Settings. 2. On the Server Settings page, under Security, click Project Web App Permissions 3. In the Resource section, select the check box for the Manage Resource Delegates permission to turn on the user delegation feature within Project Web App. 4. Choose any additional delegation permissions that meet your organization's needs:  Manage My Resource Delegations Select this check box to enable users to set up delegations for other users.  Manage My Delegations Select this check box to enable users to create delegations for themselves.  Can be Delegate Select this check box to enable users to actively become a delegate for another user, after a delegation has been created. 5. Click Save to save the permissions on the server. Set up who can act as delegate In Project Web App, there are user or group level permissions that enable you to determine which users or groups can act as delegates for other people. By default, the only group with these permissions turned on is the administrators group, so if you want users in your organization to be able to act as delegates, you'll need to set the appropriate permissions.
  • 55. Security 47  To set permissions for a specific user 1. On the PWA home page, click Server Settings. 2. Under Security, click Manage Users. 3. Click the name of the user for which you are setting permissions. 4. On the Edit User page, expand the Global Permissions section. 5. In the Global Permissions section, under Resource, choose the appropriate permissions for this user.  Can be Delegate Select the Allow check box for this permission to enable this user to actively become a delegate for another user.  Manage My Delegations Select the Allow check box for this permission to enable this user to create his or her own delegations.  Manage My Resource Delegations Select the Allow check box for this permission to enable this user to set up delegations for other users. 6. Click Save to save the permissions on the server.  To set permissions for a group 1. On the PWA home page, click Server Settings. 2. Under Security, click Manage Groups. 3. Click the name of the group for which you are setting permissions. 4. On the Add or Edit Group page, expand the Global Permissions section. 5. In the Global Permissions section, under Resource, choose the appropriate permissions for this group.
  • 56. 48 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide  Can be Delegate Select the Allow check box for this permission to enable members of this group to actively become delegates for other users.  Manage My Delegations Select the Allow check box for this permission to enable members of this group to create their own delegations.  Manage My Resource Delegations Select the Allow check box for this permission to enable members of this group to set up delegations for other users. 6. Click Save to save the permissions on the server. Set up who can have delegates assigned to them Categories are used to determine which users or groups can have delegates do work on their behalf. For a delegation to work properly, the user requesting the delegation must have the correct category permissions, and the user who will act as the delegate must have the correct individual user or group permissions.  To set up who can have delegates assigned to them 1. On the PWA home page, click Server Settings. 2. Under Security, click Manage Categories. 3. Click the name of the category that contains the user or group for which you want to enable user delegation. 4. In the Users and Groups section, click the name of group or a specific user in the Users and Groups with Permissions box.
  • 57. Security 49 5. In the permissions box that appears, scroll down to the Resource section, and select the check box for the Manage Resource Delegates permission to turn on the user delegation feature for that user or group. 6. Click Save to save the permissions on the server. Create a new delegation Creating a new delegation allows one user to work on behalf of another user, such as submitting a second user’s timesheet.  To create a delegation 1. On the PWA home page, click Server Settings. 2. Under Security, click Manage Delegates. 3. On the interface ribbon click New 4. In the Set Delegation Period section, select the date range for the period during which the delegate will be able to manage work. 5. In the Set Delegation section, select the delegate that you want to manage work during the specified period. 6. In the Working on Behalf of section, select the user who requires a substitute. 7. Click Save to save the permissions on the server.
  • 58. 50 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide 2 Enterprise Data This chapter about Project Server 2010 Enterprise Data Administration contains the following sections:  Enterprise Custom Fields and Lookup Tables  Departments  The Resource Breakdown Structure (RBS)  Enterprise Global  Enterprise Calendars  Resource Center
  • 59. Enterprise Data 51 Enterprise Custom Fields and Lookup Tables You can use Enterprise Custom Fields to help to establish consistency across all of your organization’s projects. That way you can ensure that fields and associated lookup tables are used in the same way for all projects, tasks, resources, and assignments. Enterprise Custom Fields can include custom formulas and can allow the use of lookup tables and graphical indicators. By using Enterprise Custom Fields effectively, you can help to customize Project Server 2010 to fit the unique needs of your organization. When you use Enterprise Custom Fields, all users in your organization have access to a standard set of fields, which enables operations to be applied the in same way across entire sets of projects. For example:  You can customize project management to reflect your organization’s structure and processes. All users in your organization can have access to a standard set of fields, enabling the same operations to be completed across entire sets of projects.  You can set Enterprise Custom Fields as required fields so that users are prompted to enter information in that field before saving.  You can use Enterprise Custom Fields on a per-department basis. Because creating Enterprise Custom Fields can range from being simple to being very complex and time-consuming, it is important to correctly design your Enterprise Custom Fields. To determine the scope of Enterprise Custom Fields that your organization requires, consider the following questions:
  • 60. 52 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide  What words or phrases are used by stakeholders in your organization, such as return on investment (ROI), Key Performance Indicator (KPI), and so on? You might want to quantify and codify these concepts by means of Enterprise Custom Fields. Also consider the concepts behind the common words and phrases used by stakeholders in your organization.  What are the user requirements in your organization? User requirements are frequently based on reporting requirements.  How will you sort and select data? How will you use graphical indicators to help users identify the correct data? Understanding Enterprise Custom Fields You can use Enterprise Custom Fields to create a set of project management standards that can be applied across your organization and to enhance the capabilities of Project Server 2010. You can create Enterprise Custom Fields at the task, project, and resource level. It is important to determine which specific Enterprise Custom Fields your organization needs when you review your business requirements while planning your Project Server 2010 deployment. It is best to do this after you have performed a gap analysis by comparing the capabilities of Project Server 2010 against the business needs of your organization. For example, a group of executives in an organization wants to be able to view project data by department. In order to achieve this business requirement, they need to define a consistent method for identifying departments within the organization. In addition, if each department has a different accounting method or funding process, the executives might need to identify a method for defining this, as well. You can use the Project Departments or Resource Departments custom fields in conjunction with the Department custom lookup table, or any enterprise custom filed with the Department property set to accomplish this. The most important use for Enterprise Custom Fields is to enable organizations to enforce consistency across all projects. For example, if two project managers use different fields to identify a resource’s location, then users will be unable to identify when the same resource is assigned to projects managed by each project manager. Creating Enterprise Custom Fields Project Server Enterprise Custom Fields are created and maintained through the Server Settings page in Microsoft Project Web App (PWA).
  • 61. Enterprise Data 53 New Custom Field page The New Custom Field page allows you to specify the options for a custom field. Use the following procedure to create a new enterprise custom field.  To create Enterprise Custom Fields 1. On the PWA Server Settings page, click Enterprise Custom fields and Lookup Tables. 2. Under Enterprise Custom Fields, click New Field.
  • 62. 54 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide 3. Fill out the New Custom Field page with the custom field options that you want to use. See the descriptions for each field in the following sections. 4. Click Save. Name and Description Use the Name and Description areas to specify a name and description for the custom field. Custom Field Name and Description The following table describes the name and description fields. Attribute Description Name The name of the custom field. Description A description of the custom field. Entity and Type Use the Entity and Type areas to specify whether you want a Project, Resource, or Task custom field, and what data type the field should be. Custom Field Entities The following table describes each of the available entities. Attribute Description Project Select to create Enterprise Custom Fields that are applied at the project level. Resource Select to create Enterprise Custom Fields
  • 63. Enterprise Data 55 Attribute Description that are applied at the resource level. Task Select to create Enterprise Custom Fields that are applied at the task level. The Type selection defines the data type of the custom field. The value you choose here will affect which options are available in the Custom Attributes, Calculation for Summary Rows, and Behavior section. Custom Field Types The following table describes the available custom field types. Attribute Description Cost Use custom cost fields to define currency data. For example, you can use a custom cost field to define a project’s Approved Budget. Date Use custom date fields to specify date-driven data. For example, you can create an Enterprise Custom Field called Project Approval Date, and use it to record the date on which a project is approved. Duration Use custom duration fields to define a duration. These are frequently defined as calculations that use custom formulas. For example, a custom duration field can enable your organization to define a way for a project manager to show and store the difference between a project’s original schedule and the actual schedule. Flag Use custom flag fields to define anything that can have only two choices for defining the data. For example, you might use a flag field to determine whether to display a field or to enable a macro that controls whether a particular set of data will be available in the project. Number Use custom number fields to define any numeric set of data or to perform a custom calculation by using a custom formula. For example, you might use a task-level field to record the estimated lines of code in a software development project or to compare a project’s actual cost to its proposed cost. Text Use custom text fields to define simple, non-hierarchical, alphanumeric
  • 64. 56 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide Attribute Description data. For example, you can create a custom text field called Project Status that includes options such as Initiated, Approved, In-Progress, Suspended, Cancelled, and Closed. Custom Attributes When you select a Project Text custom field, you have the option of specifying one or multiple lines of text for the custom field. Custom Attributes - text The following table describes the custom text options. Attribute Description Single line of text Select if you want the custom field to be a single line of text. This option is available only for Project Text fields. Multiple lines of text Select if you want the custom field to be multiple lines of text. This option is available only for Project Text fields. The project field created with this option is not visible in project information tab in Project Professional. This field however can be exposed via web based PDP page. You can choose to have a custom lookup table supply the values for a custom field. This allows you to control the values chosen for the custom field. You can:  Choose whether to have a default value if no other is chosen  Choose whether to allow multiple values to be selected from the lookup table  Choose to restrict available values to those values in the table that have no subordinates The lookup table option is available when you have selected Text as the filed type. Custom Attributes – lookup table
  • 65. Enterprise Data 57 The following table describes the lookup table options for custom fields. Attribute Description Lookup Table The name of the Enterprise Custom Lookup Table that you want to associate with this custom field. Once you have associated a lookup table with a field and have saved it, you will not be able to remove the lookup table relationship. Therefore, make sure you need the lookup table before making this association. Choose a values to use as If you want to have a default value included in this custom field a default when adding in cases where the user does not specify one, select this check new items box, and then select the default value. Default value The default value to be used in this field when users do not specify a value. To set the value, click the browse button and select the desired value. Only allow codes with no Select this option if you want to allow only values in the lookup subordinate values table that have no subordinate values (that is, values at the lowest level of each branch). Allow multiple values to Select this option if you want to allow users to select more than be selected from lookup one value from the lookup table. Once this selection has been table made and saved, it cannot be removed. Note If you plan to create a custom field that will refer to a lookup table, create the lookup table before creating the custom field. You can use formulas to define your own parameters for how your Enterprise Custom Fields will measure data or present information when they are used in a project. Formulas cannot be used with all types of Enterprise Custom Fields. The formula option is available with all field types.
  • 66. 58 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide Custom Attributes - formula Note Once a formula is associated with a custom field, it can be edited but it cannot be removed.  To use a known formula, type the formula in the Edit formula box.  To add a field to the formula, click Pick field, point to a field type, and then click the name of the field that you want to reference. For example, Baseline Finish and Finish in this example. To reference an existing Enterprise Custom Field, point to a field type, point again to a custom field type (such as Custom Date or Custom Finish), and then click the Enterprise Custom Field that you want.  To use a function in the formula, click Pick function, click a function type, and then click the function that you want. Each function includes placeholder arguments that you can replace with the fields and values that you want to use.
  • 67. Enterprise Data 59  To build a formula by using a standard set of operators, click Pick operator and choose the operator that you need. The formula can operate by using referenced fields, functions, or literal data. The following table describes the formula options. Attribute Description Enter formula Type the formula you want to use in the Enter formula text box. Insert field Use Insert field to insert a field (cost, date, duration, flag, number, or text) into the formula. Insert function Use Insert function to insert a function (conversion, date/time, general, math, Microsoft Project, or text) into the formula. Insert operator Use Insert operator to insert an operator (mathematical or Boolean) into the formula. Department You can select a department to be associated with a custom field. Selecting a department allows you to limit a user’s ability to see the custom field if they are not a member of that department. If you do not specify a department, then all users will be able to see the custom field.
  • 68. 60 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide Custom fields department selector The values available for Department are specified in the Department custom lookup table. Calculation for Summary Rows For entity types of Resource and Task, you can select options for the calculation of summary rows. Summary row calculation options Note that summary row calculation is not available with a field type of Text. The following table describes the options for summary task calculation. Attribute Description None Choose None if you do not want the custom field to be applied to summary and group summary rows. Rollup Choose Rollup to roll up the individual rows for the summary row. Use formula Choose Use formula to use a specific formula to calculate the summary row. You must specify the formula to use under Custom Attributes. Calculation for Assignment Rows For resource types of Resource and Task, you choose to use a roll down calculation for assignment rows. The following table describes the options for calculating assignment rows.
  • 69. Enterprise Data 61 Attribute Description None Choose None if you do not want to roll down assignment rows. Roll down, unless Choose Roll down if you want data entered at task or resource level to manually specified be rolled down and copied to each assignment with the same value. Values to Display You can choose to display raw data or to have the data represented graphically. Values to display - data If you choose Graphical indicators, you can choose different criteria for Non-summary rows, Summary rows, and, if you are using an entity type of Project, Project summary. Graphical indicators options When you choose an option, further configurable parameters specific to that option will be displayed. The following table describes the options for graphical indicators. Attribute Description Non-summary rows Choose Non-summary rows to specify criteria for graphical representation of data rows that are not summary rows. Summary rows Choose Summary rows to specify criteria for graphical representation of summary rows. Project summary Choose Project summary to specify criteria for graphical representation of the project summary. When you configure graphical indicators, you can specify the exact value and comparison parameters that determine when a particular graphic will be used. The available comparison (test) parameters are:  Equals
  • 70. 62 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide  Does not equal  Is greater than  Is greater than or equal to  Is less than  Is less than or equal to  Is within  Is not within  Contains  Does not contain  Contains exactly  Is any value These are used to compare the data value with a threshold value that you specify to determine which graphic to display. For example, you can configure values greater than or equal to 50 to display a green indicator and values less than 50 to display a red indicator. Graphical indicators You can specify as many different images for different values as required. Add a new row to the table for each test/value comparison. Rows in the table will be evaluated from top to bottom and the image associated with the first row where the test/value combination is true will be displayed. The following table describes the graphical indicator options for non-summary rows. Attribute Description
  • 71. Enterprise Data 63 Attribute Description Test Choose the operator (equals, less than, etc.) to apply to the field value to determine the image to use. Values Type the field value or a field reference (e.g., [cost]) that, combined with the operator in the test column, determines when to use the image in the Image column. Image Choose the image to display when the test/value combination is true. Move Use the move buttons to move a row up or down in the table. Show data values in Select the Show data values in ToolTips to show the field value in ToolTips the tool tip associated with the image. When using graphical indicators for summary rows, you can choose to inherit the graphical indicator settings that you have defined for non-summary rows. Graphical indicators – summary rows If you select the Inherit criteria from non-summary rows check box when configuring graphical indicators for summary rows, the graphical indicator parameters you configured for the non-summary rows will be used. Graphical indicators – project summary If you select the Inherit criteria from summary rows check box when configuring graphical indicators for project summary, the graphical indicator parameters you configured for the summary rows will be used. Behavior You can configure a custom field to be controlled by workflow or to require a value.
  • 72. 64 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide Behavior options If you choose to have the custom field controlled by a workflow, the required field option will not be available since that behavior will be controlled by workflow. The following table describes the options for configuring custom field behavior. Attribute Description Behavior controlled by Select this check box if you want the custom field behavior to workflow be controlled by workflow. Require that this field has Choose whether you want this to be a required field (that is, the information field cannot be left blank). This option is not available if the Behavior controlled by workflow option is selected. Creating Enterprise Custom Lookup Tables Consider using custom lookup tables for any Enterprise Custom Field for which standardization of data is the most important factor. For example, it might not be a good practice to allow users to enter any integer value in a custom Status field. One project manager might enter Started, and another might enter In-Progress, both indicating that the project has begun and is underway. Without using lookup tables, it is difficult to standardize terminology in your organization. For example, you might create a custom text field that is associated with Resources. To do this, you click the Resource option, select Text from the list, and rename it Manager. If you do not specify a lookup table for this custom text field, a user can enter any text value in the Manager field.
  • 73. Enterprise Data 65 New custom lookup table page The New Lookup table page allows you to specify the options for a custom lookup table. Use the following procedure to create a new enterprise custom lookup table.  To create Enterprise Custom Fields 1. On the PWA Server Settings page, click Enterprise Custom fields and Lookup Tables. 2. Under Lookup Tables for Custom Fields, click New Field. 3. Type a name for the lookup table in the Name box. 4. Fill out the New Custom Field page with the custom field options that you want to use. See the descriptions for each field in the following sections. 5. Click Save.
  • 74. 66 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide Type You must specify a data type for each lookup table. It is not possible to mix field types within a table. Lookup table types The table below describes the options for data types within a custom lookup table. Attribute Description Cost Each field in the table will be a cost value. Date Each field in the table will be a date value. Duration Each value in the table will be treated as a duration. Number Each value in the table will be a number. Text Each value in the table will be text. Choosing Text also allows a hierarchy of values to be specified if desired. Code Mask The code mask option only appears when a field type of Text has been selected. Code mask options The code mask allows you to specify what type of text characters will appear in the lookup table, the length of the string, and what characters to use to separate levels in a hierarchy. If you
  • 75. Enterprise Data 67 are creating a hierarchical lookup table, you must specify a code mask for each level of the hierarchy. The following table describes the options available for configuring code masks. Attribute Description Code preview Displays a preview of the code mask for the table. Sequence Specify the type of text characters to allow. Choose Numbers, Uppercase characters, Lowercase characters, or Characters. Length Specify the maximum length of the string. Choose a number from 1 to 255 or Any. Separator Specify from one to three characters to use as a separator between levels of the table hierarchy. Lookup Table Use the Lookup Table section of the New Lookup table page to specify the values in the lookup table. Lookup table options Type each that you want in the lookup table in the Value column. Create as many rows as needed to accommodate the values that you want to include. Optionally, include a description for the value in the Description column. The following table describes the options for creating lookup table values. Attribute Description
  • 76. 68 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide Attribute Description Level Denotes the level in the hierarchy. This is a read-only field. Select the row and use the Indent and Outdent buttons to change levels. Value The value of the field. Description An optional description of what the field represents. Move Use the Move buttons to change the position of rows in the table. Select the row and click the Up or Down Move button to move a row. Display Use the display order options do specify how to sort the lookup table. If you order for choose By row number, the table will remain sorted as you specify it. If you lookup table choose to sort ascending or descending, the table will be sorted based on the values in the Value column. Departments The Department field is a new feature for Project Server 2010. Both projects and resources can have departments. The main purpose of departments is to act as a filter for what custom fields are displayed to users within given areas of Microsoft Project Professional 2010 and PWA. Departments allow for different business units to define and make visible their own set of custom fields. Departments are also used to filter OLAP databases so that only the data for that department is loaded. When configuring a cube, you can specify both the project and resource departments so that the database data is filtered based on these criteria. These values are specified in the OLAP Database Build Settings page. Also, within the OLAP database configuration, you can add the Project department field as a dimension to the Project and Tasks cubes. And you can add the Resource department field as a dimension to the Resource cube as long as the department field has not been converted to a multi-value field. With Project Server 2010, departmental custom fields help relieve the problem of too much information and too many choices. Departments help you manage the custom field list, and help you define, at a resource, task, or project level, which fields are required or not required. In Microsoft Office Project Server 2007 all custom fields are globally scoped, which means the fields are available to all users. In Project Server 2010, fields can be globally scoped or they can be scoped to a specific department. Departmental fields enable two primary functions:  Filtering custom fields so that a user sees, by default, only those fields that are either global to the system or in the department that the user belongs to.  Controlling which fields require input.
  • 77. Enterprise Data 69 Example of departments in use Field Scope Department Required? ProjectCustomText1 Global - No ProjectCustomText2 Global - Yes ProjectCustomText3 Department Marketing No ProjectCustomText4 Department Marketing Yes ProjectCustomText5 Department Development Yes ProjectCustomText6 Department Development No If John Woods belongs to the Development department, then when he views areas of the product that have departmental custom fields enabled, he will see:  ProjectCustomText1  ProjectCustomText2  ProjectCustomText5  ProjectCustomText6 John will be required to enter data into ProjectCustomText2 and ProjectCustomText5. Cindy White belongs to the Marketing department; when she views areas of the product that have departmental custom fields enabled, she will see:  ProjectCustomText1  ProjectCustomText2  ProjectCustomText3  ProjectCustomText4 Cindy will be required to enter data into ProjectCustomText2 and ProjectCustomText4. By default, departments filter the list of custom fields that John Woods and Cindy White see. But the filter does not prevent them from viewing custom fields assigned to the other departments. Important Departmental fields are not tied into security. You cannot use them with security categories and groups to enable or disable fields and their functions. Instead, their main purpose is to filter out fields which are not useful for the target user. Department considerations for cubes Which cubes are No project department Project department specified filtered by which value specified No resource department All data is loaded for all Project non-timephased cube specified cubes Task non-timephased cube Issues cube Risks cube
  • 78. 70 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide Which cubes are No project department Project department specified filtered by which value specified Deliverables cube MSP_Project_WSS virtual cube MSP_Project_Timesheet virtual cube MSP_Portfolio_Analyzer virtual cube Assignment non-timephased cube Assignment timephased cube EPM timesheet cube Resource department Assignment non- Filtered by Project Department: specified timephased cube  Project non-timephased cube  Task non-timephased cube Assignment timephased  Issues cube cube  Risks cube Resource non-  Deliverables cube timephased cube  MSP_Project_WSS virtual cube Resource timephased cube Filtered by Resource & Project Department: Timesheet cube  Assignment non-timephased cube MSP_Project_Timesheet  Assignment timephased cube virtual cube  EPM timesheet cube  MSP_Project_Timesheet MSP_Portfolio_Analyzer virtual cube virtual cube  MSP_Portfolio_Analyzer virtual cube Filtered by Resource Department:  Resource no- timephased cube  Resource timephased cube  Timesheet cube
  • 79. Enterprise Data 71 Cubes include assignments for resources in projects that belong to other departments or to no department. This ensures that all data is present when examining data such as a department's resources full calendar capacity. The subset of projects and resources will be used to filter at the project and timesheet level as follows: Project non-timephased:  The data in this cube will be filtered by the departmental project list.  Projects with assignments to the department’s resources will be included. Task non-timephased:  Non-departmental tasks with assignments to the department's resources will be included. The full non-departmental project will not be included.  All tasks for departmental projects will be included. Assignment non-timephased:  Non-departmental project assignments for the department’s resources will be included.  All assignments for departmental projects will be included. Assignment timephased:  Non-departmental project assignments for the department's resources will be included.  All assignments for departmental projects will be included. Deliverables:  All deliverables owned by the filtered list of projects will be included.  All deliverables to which the filtered list subscribes and the projects/tasks that subscribe to the filtered list's deliverables will be included.  All deliverables offered by non-departmental projects that are subscribed to by departmental projects will be included. Issues:  Issues connected to the filtered list of projects and tasks will be included. Risks:  Risks connected to the filtered list of projects and tasks will be included. Resource non-timephased:  Resources in the departmental list will be included. Resource timephased:  Resources in the departmental list will be included. Timesheet:  Timesheets for departmental list resources will be included.
  • 80. 72 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide EPM Timesheet:  Timesheets for departmental list resources will be included.  Task assignments from projects outside the department will be included. Resources are described in three ways in the OLAP databases:  Fact focus (timesheets, capacity)  Associated with Facts (project task assignments)  Owning Facts (project owner, issue owner, assignment owner) The departmental resource list is used to filter facts with focus (Timesheets). Consequently, a non-departmental resource will never have any timesheets or capacity in the OLAP database if the database has a resource filter. However the non-departmental resource will be in the Resource List dimension if it has association with a departmental project, and will only have the relevant assignment facts. Resources who own things that have separate dimensions (that is, Assignment Owner) do not have to be in the resource list. The Resource List dimension for a specific OLAP database contains:  The departmental resources  All resources with assignments to departmental projects Configuring departments Departments are configured using a built in Enterprise Custom Lookup Table called Departments. By configuring values in this table, you can define a hierarchy of departments for your organization.
  • 81. Enterprise Data 73 Department custom lookup table Use the following procedure to add initial values to the Department custom lookup table or to modify it.  To modify the Department lookup table 1. On the PWA Server Settings page, click Enterprise Custom Fields and Lookup Tables. 2. On the Enterprise Custom Fields and Lookup Tables page, under Lookup Tables for Custom Fields, click Department. 3. In the Code Mask section, create a code mask for each level of the hierarchy that you plan to have for the Department lookup table: a. In the Sequence column, choose Characters from the dropdown list. b. Keep the defaults for the Length and Separator columns.
  • 82. 74 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide 4. In the Lookup Table section, type a Value and optionally a Description for each Department. 5. If you are creating a hierarchy with more than one level, use the Indent and Outdent buttons to change the level values for each department as required for you hierarchy. 6. Click Save. The Resource Breakdown Structure (RBS) The Resource Breakdown Structure (RBS) is a hierarchical structure typically based on the management reporting structure of your organization, although it can also be structured in other ways. The RBS can be an important element in your Project Server security model when it is used to define the reporting relationships among users and projects in your organization. When you specify an RBS value for each Project Server user, you can take advantage of the dynamic security options that can be defined for each security category.
  • 83. Enterprise Data 75 RBS custom lookup table The RBS structure is defined by adding values to the RBS custom lookup table that is built in to Project Server 2010. Once you define the structure, you can assign RBS values to individual users by setting the RBS property in the user's account settings page. Once the RBS is configured, Categories can use RBS codes to dynamically determine which projects and resources particular users can view or access. Dynamic filtering based on RBS code can be applied to projects in the following ways:  Users can see projects owned by their descendants in the RBS  Users can see projects on which their descendants in the RBS are a resource  Users can see projects owned by other users with the same RBS value Dynamic filtering based on RBS can applied to resources in the following ways:  Users can see their descendants in the RBS  Users can see their direct descendants in the RBS  Users can see other users with the same RBS value Use the following procedure to create a new Resource Breakdown Structure or to modify an existing one.  To modify the Resource Breakdown Structure 1. On the PWA Server Settings page, click Enterprise Custom Fields and Lookup Tables. 2. On the Enterprise Custom Fields and Lookup Tables page, under Lookup Tables for Custom Fields, click RBS. 3. In the Code Mask section, create a code mask for each level of the hierarchy that you plan to have for the Department lookup table:
  • 84. 76 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide a. In the Sequence column, choose Characters from the dropdown list. b. Keep the defaults for the Length and Separator columns. 4. In the Lookup Table section, type a Value and optionally a Description for each Department. 5. If you are creating a hierarchy with more than one level, use the Indent and Outdent buttons to change the level values for each department as required for you hierarchy.
  • 85. Enterprise Data 77 6. Click Save. Enterprise Global The Enterprise Global setting allows you to make changes to the Enterprise Global file in Project Professional 2010. The Enterprise Global file contains all custom enterprise objects that are available to your users (for example, views, tables, groups, filters, and reports). When a Project Professional user connects to Project Server 2010, the latest version of the Enterprise Global file is loaded and cached on the client computer. This allows the user to access all enterprise custom objects available on the server. Through the Enterprise Global file, you are able to enforce standards in your organization that can be applied to all project and resources that work with Project Server data. By using views, tables, filters, and other related elements contains in the Enterprise Global file, you can help to ensure effective standardization in your organization.
  • 86. 78 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide Decisions regarding what to include in the Enterprise Global file should be made at an organizational level. You should check with your Project Management Office (PMO) before making any significant changes to the Enterprise Global file. Note To be able to modify the Enterprise Global file, you must have the Save Enterprise Global permission Project Server 2010. To open the Enterprise Global file through the Enterprise Global setting: 1. On the Quick Launch, under Settings, click Server Settings. 2. On the Server Settings page, under Enterprise Data, click Configure Project Professional. 3. Project Professional will open the Enterprise Global file. The name of the project in the title bar will be “Checked-out Enterprise Global”. 4. Make changes to your custom objects through your Enterprise Global file. 5. After you have completed your changes, click File, and then click Save. 6. After Save has completed successfully, click File, and then click Close. 7. A dialog box will display asking if you would like to check-in the Enterprise Global file. Click Yes.
  • 87. Enterprise Data 79 Note If users have Project Professional open when an updated Enterprise Global file is checked in to the server, the changes in the updated Enterprise Global file will not be available until Project Professional is closed and reopened. Important Make sure not to add into the Enterprise Global file any view, table, filter, grouping, reports, etc. that has the same name as an element that exists natively in Project. Verify that you give any new enterprise-wide elements a unique name that does not conflict. Enterprise Calendars Enterprise calendars capture the predefined working hours, holidays, and other schedule details within an organization. They are used to standardize the working time for all of an organization’s projects. In Project Web App, you can view a list of existing calendars, select a calendar to edit, or begin the process of creating a new calendar. However, to create or modify a calendar, you must have Project Professional 2010 installed on the computer that you are using to access Project Web App.
  • 88. 80 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide Create a New Calendar Project Server uses a standard enterprise calendar for scheduling, by default. Some organizations may use multiple calendars. For example, if some of your organization’s employees work in another country, those workers will likely observe different holidays, and so will need a different enterprise calendar for scheduling project work. You can create a new, blank enterprise calendar using Project Web App and Project Professional 2010. To create a new, blank enterprise calendar 1. On the Quick Launch, under Settings, click Server Settings. 2. On the Server Settings page, under Enterprise Data, click Enterprise Calendars. 3. On the Enterprise Calendars page, click New Calendar. 4. On the Windows Security dialog box, type your user name and password to connect to Project Server through Project Professional 2010, and then click OK. Note If you are using integrated Windows authentication and your Internet Explorer settings are set to automatically log you on, or if Project is already connected to the server using the correct profile, then you will not be prompted for credentials. Project Professional 2010 opens and displays the Change Working Time dialog box. 5. Type a name for the new calendar in the For calendar box.
  • 89. Enterprise Data 81 6. Use the calendar with the Exceptions and Work Weeks tabs to modify the working and nonworking times for your organization. For more information, see the “Modify Working and Nonworking Times” section of this guide. 7. Click OK on the Change Working Time dialog box to save the new calendar to Project Server. 8. Close Project Professional 2010. Copy an Existing Calendar If an existing calendar has many of the same holidays and other calendar items that you want to use in a new calendar, you can base a new calendar on an existing calendar. Copy the existing calendar in Project Web App, and then modify the copy in Project Professional 2010. For example, if the standard calendar in your organization captures all of your organization’s unique holidays and events, but you need a separate calendar to reflect a 24/7 working schedule, you can copy the standard calendar and then modify it for the 24/7 schedule. To create a new calendar as a copy of an existing calendar 1. On the Quick Launch, under Settings, click Server Settings. 2. On the Server Settings page, under Enterprise Data, click Enterprise Calendars. 3. Click the row containing the calendar you want to copy, and then click Copy Calendar. 4. On the Copy Calendar dialog box, type a name for the new calendar in the Name box, and then click OK. The calendar is added to the list on the Enterprise Calendars page.
  • 90. 82 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide 5. Click the row containing the new, copied calendar, and then click Edit Calendar. If the Windows Security dialog box appears, log on to Project Server. Project Professional 2010 opens and displays the Change Working Time dialog box. 6. Use the calendar with the Exceptions and Work Weeks tabs to modify the working and nonworking times for your organization. For more information, see the “Modify Working and Nonworking Times” section of this guide. 7. Click OK on the Change Working Time dialog box to save the new calendar to Project Server. 8. Close Project Professional 2010. Edit an Existing Calendar As you are initially configuring Project Server, you can modify the default standard enterprise calendar to account for the working and nonworking times observed by your organization. You can modify any enterprise calendar at any time by selecting the calendar in Project Web App, and making changes in Project Professional 2010. To modify an existing enterprise calendar 1. On the Quick Launch, under Settings, click Server Settings. 2. On the Server Settings page, under Enterprise Data, click Enterprise Calendars. 3. Click the row containing the calendar you want to change, and then click Edit Calendar.
  • 91. Enterprise Data 83 If the Windows Security dialog box appears, log on to Project Server. Project Professional 2010 opens and displays the Change Working Time dialog box. 4. Use the calendar with the Exceptions and Work Weeks tabs to modify the working and nonworking times for your organization. For more information, see the “Modify Working and Nonworking Times” section of this guide. 5. Click OK on the Change Working Time dialog box to save the new calendar to Project Server. 6. Close Project Professional 2010. Delete a Calendar If you find your organization is not using a specific enterprise calendar, you can easily delete it in Project Web App. To delete an enterprise calendar 1. On the Quick Launch, under Settings, click Server Settings. 2. On the Server Settings page, under Enterprise Data, click Enterprise Calendars. 3. Click the row containing the calendar you want to delete, and then click Delete Calendar. 4. When prompted, click OK to delete the selected calendar. Note If the calendar is currently in use, a notification will appear.
  • 92. 84 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide Modify Working and Nonworking Times When working with calendars in Project Professional 2010, there are a few different things you can do to accurately account for working and nonworking time in your organization. The following sections provide examples for each type of change, and walk you through the steps involved with making each change. Change a working day into a nonworking day Occasionally, you may need to turn a working day into a nonworking day. For example, if your organization observes specific days as holidays, you can turn those holidays into nonworking days. Project Server will not schedule work on nonworking days. To change a working day into a nonworking day 1. Click the date on the calendar that you want to turn into a nonworking day. 2. On the Exceptions tab, type a name for the nonworking day in the Name column. The Start and Finish columns are automatically populated with the date you clicked in Step 1.
  • 93. Enterprise Data 85 Note While you can create multiple exceptions that contain a specific day, only the lowest-level exception will apply on that day. For example, you might have one exception that changes the standard working times for a month, and another exception that calls out a specific day within that month as a nonworking day. Because the single-day exception is at a lower level than the month-long exception, the single nonworking day exception will be applied on that day. You cannot create multiple single-day exceptions on the same day. Change a nonworking day into a working day There may be times when your organization has to work on what would otherwise be a nonworking day. For example, say your organization participates in a convention each year that takes place over a weekend. You can turn the weekend days of the convention into working days, so that Project Server knows to schedule work on those days. To change a nonworking day into a working day 1. Click the date on the calendar that you want to turn into a nonworking day.
  • 94. 86 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide 2. On the Exceptions tab, type a name for the working day in the Name column, and then press Enter. Note While you can create multiple exceptions that contain a specific day, only the lowest-level exception will apply on that day. For example, you might have one exception that changes the standard working times for a month, and another exception that calls out a specific day within that month as a nonworking day. Because the single-day exception is at a lower level than the month-long exception, the single nonworking day exception will be applied on that day. You cannot create multiple single-day exceptions on the same day.
  • 95. Enterprise Data 87 3. Click the row you added for the working day, and then click Details. 4. Under Set working times for these exceptions, click Working times, and then set the working times for that day by adjusting the times in the From and To columns. 5. If your organization observes these working times on a regular basis (for example, once a month or once a year), under Recurrence pattern, choose whether these times should recur Daily, Weekly, Monthly, or Yearly, and then set the following options:  Daily Set the frequency for these working times. For example, every 10 days. Tip If you find that the working day exception is happening very frequently, you may find it easier to change the default calendar options under Schedule on the Project Options dialog box in Project Professional 2010. All calendars begin with these default days and times. It may be easier to change the default calendar options than to set up exceptions that recur frequently.  Weekly Specify how often you want the working times to recur, and on what day of the week you want them to recur. For example, every two weeks on Saturday.
  • 96. 88 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide  Monthly Choose what day of the month and at what monthly frequency you want the working times to recur. For example, day 15 of every 3 months, or the third Saturday of every 6 months.  Yearly Choose what day of the year you want the working times to recur. For example, August 21, or the third Saturday of July. 6. Under Range of recurrence, choose the period when you want the recurrence to take place, if appropriate.  Start Choose the date when you want the recurrence pattern to begin.  End after If you want the recurrence to happen only a set number of times, choose End after, and then type the number of instances when the working times should occur.  End by If you want the recurrence to happen only during a certain time period, choose End by, and then choose when the recurrence should stop. 7. Click OK.
  • 97. Enterprise Data 89 Change the working times for a working day While the specific days on the calendar may be accurately accounted for as working and nonworking, there may be working days that use a different time schedule than the typical 8- hour work day. You can adjust the working times for a specific working day so that work is accurately scheduled on that day. To change the working times for a working day 1. Click the date on the calendar for the working day that you want to adjust. 2. On the Exceptions tab, type a name for the changed working day in the Name column, and then press Enter.
  • 98. 90 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide Note While you can create multiple exceptions that contain a specific day, only the lowest- level exception will apply on that day. For example, you might have one exception that changes the standard working times for a month, and another exception that calls out a specific day within that month as a nonworking day. Because the single-day exception is at a lower level than the month-long exception, the single nonworking day exception will be applied on that day. You cannot create multiple single-day exceptions on the same day. 3. Click the row you added for the changed working day, and then click Details. 4. Under Set working times for these exceptions, click Working times, and then set the working times for that day by adjusting the times in the From and To columns.
  • 99. Enterprise Data 91 5. If your organization observes these working times on a regular basis (for example, once a month or once a year), under Recurrence pattern, choose whether these times should recur Daily, Weekly, Monthly, or Yearly, and then set the following options:  Daily Set the frequency for these working times. For example, every 10 days.  Weekly Specify how often you want the working times to recur, and on what day of the week you want them to recur. For example, every two weeks on Saturday.  Monthly Choose what day of the month and at what monthly frequency you want the working times to recur. For example, day 15 of every 3 months, or the third Saturday of every 6 months.
  • 100. 92 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide  Yearly Choose what day of the year you want the working times to recur. For example, August 21, or the third Saturday of July. 6. Under Range of recurrence, choose the period when you want the recurrence to take place, if appropriate.  Start Choose the date when you want the recurrence pattern to begin.  End after If you want the recurrence to happen only a set number of times, choose End after, and then type the number of instances when the working times should occur.  End by If you want the recurrence to happen only during a certain time period, choose End by, and then choose when the recurrence should stop. 7. Click OK. Change the working times for each day of a work week If your organization has a specific work week (or set of work weeks) when the working times are different from the default, you can make those changes to the working times for each day in a work week, during a set period of time. For example, if your organization does not use the default Monday through Friday, 8am to 5pm schedule, you can change the working times for each day in the work week to reflect your organization’s accurate schedule. To change the working times for each day of a work week 1. Click the date on the calendar when you want the changed working times to begin.
  • 101. Enterprise Data 93 2. On the Work Weeks tab, type a name for the changed work week(s) in the Name column, and then press Enter. 3. Change the date in the Finish column for the row you just added, to reflect the last day that you want to include in the changed work week(s).
  • 102. 94 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide 4. Click Details. 5. Under Select day(s), click the day of the week that you want to use adjusted working times. Press Ctrl and click, or press Shift and click to select multiple days. 6. If you want to turn the selected day(s) into nonworking time, click Set days to nonworking time. 7. If you want to change the working times for the selected day(s), click Set day(s) to these specific working times, and then set the working times by typing in the From and To columns.
  • 103. Enterprise Data 95 8. Click OK. Resource Center The Resource Center is a view in Project Web App that can be used to create new resources and modify existing ones. It can be accessed from the Server Settings page. Tip Depending on how your organization has Project Web App configured, you may also be able to access the Resource Center from the Quick Launch. Create a New Resource When you create a new Project Server user, you can choose to also make that user a resource. However, sometimes you may want to create a resource that cannot log on to Project Server. For example, you may want to add a material resource, such as a conference room, that has no need to be able to log on to Project Server. Project managers can still assign the resource to work, but if there is not any work to track, and the project manager can account for when the resource is actually used, there is not a need for that resource to also be a user. To create a new resource 1. On the Quick Launch, under Settings, click Server Settings. 2. On the Server Settings page, under Enterprise Data, click Resource Center. 3. On the Resources tab, in the Editing group, click New Resource.
  • 104. 96 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide 4. In the Type section, complete the following:  Type Choose whether you are creating a Work, Material, or Cost resource.  Budget If the resource is a budget resource, select the Budget check box.  Generic If the resource is generic, meaning that you will use it for planning purposes and replace it with at least one named resource further in the planning process, select the Generic check box. 5. In the Identification Information section, complete the following:  Resource can logon to Project Server Select this check box if you want the resource to also be a Project Web App user.  Display Name Type the resource’s name in this box. This field is required.  E-mail address If this resource has an e-mail address that he or she wants associated with project work, type the address in this box.  RBS If your organization uses a resource breakdown structure (RBS), click the button next to this field and choose the appropriate RBS code for this resource from the list.  Initials This field is automatically populated with the resource’s initials, based on the name typed in the Display Name box. If you want to use different initials to refer to this resource, type them in the Initials box.  Hyperlink Name If this resource has an associated Web site, type the name of that site in this box.  Hyperlink URL If this resource has an associated Web site, type the URL to that site in this box.
  • 105. Enterprise Data 97 6. In the Assignment Attributes section, complete the following:  Resource can be leveled If you want to enable project managers to balance this resource’s workload based on his or her availability and assignments (leveling), select this check box.  Base Calendar Choose the calendar that most closely represents this resource’s overall availability. For example, if your organization has a base calendar that accounts for specific holidays or events, you can set that as this resource’s calendar, and work assigned to this resource will be scheduled around the calendar’s nonworking days.  Default Booking Type Choose whether you want this resource to be Committed or Proposed when assigning work.  Timesheet manager Type the name of the person who approves or rejects this resource’s timesheets, or click Browse to choose the timesheet manager from a list. Resources may not have separate timesheet managers.  Default Assignment Owner Type the name of the person who approves or rejects this resource’s task progress, or click Browse to choose the assignment owner from a list. Resources may not have separate assignment owners. For example, if the resource is a conference room, and the project manager tracks the amount of time that the conference room is used, the assignment owner may be the project manager. Tip You can set the assignment owner within the project on an assignment-by-assignment basis.  Earliest Available Choose the date when the resource becomes available to assign to tasks, if appropriate. If the resource does not have a set period of availability (that is, if he or she is always available), leave this blank.
  • 106. 98 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide Note The earliest and latest available dates correspond to the resource availability dates for a resource, as seen in Project Professional.  Latest Available Choose the last date that the resource is available to work on tasks, if appropriate. If the resource does not have a set period of availability (that is, if he or she is always available), leave this blank.  Standard Rate Type the resource’s standard pay rate in this box.  Overtime Rate Type the resource’s overtime pay rate in this box.  Current Max. Units (%) Specify the maximum amount of time that a resource is available for work, as a percentage. For example, if the resource is available full-time, type 100%. If the resource is available half-time, type 50%.  Cost/Use If the resource has a flat fee associated with each use, type that cost in this box. For example, a van rental may require a flat fee upfront, with an added standard cost per mile. The flat fee is its cost per use.
  • 107. Enterprise Data 99 7. In the Departments section, click the button next to the Resource Departments box, and choose which department(s) the resource is associated with. If the resource is not associated with a particular department, leave this blank. Tip Associating a resource with a department narrows down what the resource sees when using Project Web App. It can help the resource find what he or she is looking for more quickly, by removing things from other departments that do not apply to his or her work. 8. If your organization created codes for grouping and costing purposes, in the Group Fields section, complete the following:  Group Type the name of the group in this box.  Code Type the code for the group in this box.  Cost Center Type the cost center code for the group in this box.
  • 108. 100 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide  Cost Type Click the button next to the Cost Type field, and then choose the type of cost associated with this group. 9. In the Team Details section, click the button next to the Team Name box, and choose which team the resource belongs to, if appropriate. If the resource will be managing and delegating tasks that are assigned to the team, select the Team Assignment Pool check box. Tip Some organizations create a generic resource for each team, so that tasks assigned to the team first go to the generic resource. This way, no single resource takes on the task assignment before it is appropriately delegated. If you choose to use a generic resource in this way, set the assignment owner for the resource as the team manager, select the Team Assignment Pool check box, and choose the team from the Team Name list. 10. In the System Identification Data section, type additional identifying information for the user in the External ID box, if appropriate. For example, your organization’s HR department may use employee ID numbers to track data in their HR systems. By providing that ID number in the External ID box, you identify an association between the resource that you are creating and the HR department’s employee data. The External ID box can also be used to facilitate the consolidation of reporting of resource use beyond what Project Server provides. Tip If you are not sure whether you should be capturing any data in the External ID box, check with other departments in your organization to find out if it would be useful to connect resource data with other systems, or simply leave this box blank.
  • 109. Enterprise Data 101 11. Click Save to create the new resource. Once a resource is added, you may find that you need to make changes to the resource’s information. Perhaps the resource had a rate change, or needs to use a different base calendar. To edit a resource 1. On the Quick Launch, under Settings, click Server Settings. 2. On the Server Settings page, under Enterprise Data, click Resource Center. 3. Select the check box in the left column for the row containing the resource you are editing. Tip If your organization has a lot of resources and you cannot easily find the one you want to edit, you can filter the Resource Center. On the Resources tab, in the Data group, click Custom Filter in the Filter list. Identify the parameters for the resource you are editing, and then click OK. 4. On the Resources tab, in the Editing group, click Edit Resource. 5. Make changes to the resource data, as needed, and then click Save. In some cases, several resources may require the same change. For example, if several resources use the same timesheet manager, and that person takes a job elsewhere, you will need to replace
  • 110. 102 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide the timesheet manager for those resources with whoever steps in as a replacement. Project Web App supports bulk editing of several resources at once. You can bulk edit the Timesheet manager, Default Assignment Owner, RBS, Team Name, Cost Type, and Resource Departments fields. Tip Another good way to edit many resources simultaneously is by using Project Professional 2010. By making changes through the Project Professional 2010, you can add fields that you will not see if you make bulk changes through Project Server 2010, and you can also copy and paste from Microsoft Excel or another list. To make the same change to several resources simultaneously 1. On the Quick Launch, under Settings, click Server Settings. 2. On the Server Settings page, under Enterprise Data, click Resource Center. 3. Select the check box in the left column for each row containing a resource you are editing. 4. On the Resources tab, in the Editing group, click Bulk Edit. 5. For each field that you want to edit, select the Apply Changes check box, to the left of the field, and then make your changes. Tip If you are having trouble remembering which resources you are editing, expand the Resources Selected section. This section displays a list of all resources that will be changed when you click Save. 6. Click Save to save your changes to all selected resources.
  • 111. Database Administration 103 3 Database Administration This chapter about Project Server 2010 Database Administration contains the following sections:  Delete Enterprise Objects  Force Check-in Enterprise Objects  Daily Schedule Backup  Administrative Backup and Restore  OLAP Database Management Delete Enterprise Objects You can delete enterprise objects from Project Server when they are no longer needed. You can delete the following types of objects from PWA:  Projects  Resources and users  Status report responses  Timesheets  User delegates Delete projects When a project is no longer needed, you can delete it from Project Server. Note that this process deletes the project entirely from Project Server and it cannot be retrieved.
  • 112. 104 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide Delete project Use the following procedure to delete a project from Project Server. Important The project will be permanently deleted from Project Server.  To delete a project 1. On the PWA home page, click Server Settings. 2. On the Server Settings page, under Database Administration, click Delete Enterprise Objects. 3. On the Delete Enterprise Objects page, select the Projects option. 4. Select one of the following options:  Delete projects from Draft and Published databases to display a list of projects found in both the Draft and Published databases.  Delete projects only from the Published database to display a list of projects in the Published database.  Delete projects only from the Archived database to display a list of projects in the Archive database.
  • 113. Database Administration 105 5. To delete the associated SharePoint site, select the Delete the associated Microsoft SharePoint Foundation sites check box. Note If you do not delete the associate SharePoint site and you save and publish a new project with the same name as the deleted project, the SharePoint site publish process will fail. 6. Select the project that you want to delete. 7. Click Delete. Delete resources and users When a resource or user is no longer needed, you can delete it from Project Server. Important We recommend not deleting resources from Project Server as this can affect the reporting of actuals. Instead, deactivate resources that are no longer needed. Delete resources and users Use the following procedure to delete resources and users from Project Server. Important The resources and users will be permanently deleted from Project Server.  To delete resources and users 1. On the PWA home page, click Server Settings. 2. On the Server Settings page, under Database Administration, click Delete Enterprise Objects. 3. On the Delete Enterprise Objects page, select the Resources and Users option.
  • 114. 106 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide 4. Select the user or resource that you want to delete. 5. Click Delete. Delete status report responses When a status report response is no longer needed, you can delete it from Project Server. Note that this process deletes the status report response entirely from Project Server and it cannot be retrieved. Delete status report responses Use the following procedure to delete status report responses from Project Server.  To delete status report responses 1. On the PWA home page, click Server Settings. 2. On the Server Settings page, under Database Administration, click Delete Enterprise Objects. 3. On the Delete Enterprise Objects page, select the Status Report Responses option. 4. Specify a period end date parameter (number of days, weeks, months, or years ago prior to which you want to delete all status report responses). 5. Click Delete. Delete timesheets When a timesheet is no longer needed, you can delete it from Project Server. Note that this process deletes the timesheet entirely from Project Server and it cannot be retrieved.
  • 115. Database Administration 107 Delete timesheets Use the following procedure to delete timesheets from Project Server.  To delete timesheets 1. On the PWA home page, click Server Settings. 2. On the Server Settings page, under Database Administration, click Delete Enterprise Objects. 3. On the Delete Enterprise Objects page, select the Timesheets option. 4. Select the range of timesheet end dates that you want to delete. 5. Click Delete. Delete user delegates When a user delegate is no longer needed, you can delete it from Project Server. Note that this process deletes the user delegate entirely from Project Server and it cannot be retrieved.
  • 116. 108 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide Delete delegates Use the following procedure to delete user delegates from Project Server.  To delete 1. On the PWA home page, click Server Settings. 2. On the Server Settings page, under Database Administration, click Delete Enterprise Objects. 3. On the Delete Enterprise Objects page, select the User Delegates option. 4. Specify a period end date parameter (number of days, weeks, months, or years prior to which you want to delete all user delegates). 5. Click Delete. Force Check-in Enterprise Objects If an enterprise object has been checked out and the user who checked it out is unavailable or unable to check it back in, you can force a check-in. Important If you force check-in an enterprise object that a user is modifying, the modifications may be lost. You can force check-in the following types of enterprise objects:  Enterprise projects  Enterprise resources  Enterprise custom fields  Enterprise calendars  Lookup tables for enterprise custom fields  Resource plans
  • 117. Database Administration 109 Enterprise object check-in options On the Force Check-in Enterprise Objects page in PWA Server Settings, choose the type of enterprise object that you want to check in to see a list of objects of that type that are checked out. Check-in Enterprise Projects You can force the check-in of an enterprise project that is checked out. Note that forcing a check-in of a project that is being modified by a user may result in the loss of those changes. We highly recommend that users check in projects normally and that you use force check-in only when absolutely necessary. Check in Enterprise Projects Use the following procedure to check in enterprise projects.  To check in Enterprise Projects 1. On the Server Settings page, click Force Check-in Enterprise Objects. 2. From the Select the type of object you want to force check-in dropdown list, choose Enterprise Projects. 3. Select the projects that you want to check in. 4. Click Check In.
  • 118. 110 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide Check in Enterprise Resources You can force the check-in of an enterprise resource that is checked out. Note that forcing a check-in of a resource that is being modified by a user may result in the loss of those changes. Check in Enterprise Resources Use the following procedure to check in enterprise resources.  To check in Enterprise Resources 1. On the Server Settings page, click Force Check-in Enterprise Objects. 2. From the Select the type of object you want to force check-in dropdown list, choose Enterprise Resources. 3. Select the resources that you want to check in. 4. Click Check In. Check in Enterprise Custom Fields You can force the check-in of an enterprise custom field that is checked out. Note that forcing a check-in of a custom field that is being modified by a user may result in the loss of those changes. Check in Enterprise Custom Field Use the following procedure to check in enterprise custom fields.
  • 119. Database Administration 111  To check in Enterprise Custom Fields 1. On the Server Settings page, click Force Check-in Enterprise Objects. 2. From the Select the type of object you want to force check-in dropdown list, choose Enterprise Custom Fields. 3. Select the custom fields that you want to check in. 4. Click Check In. Check in Enterprise Calendars You can force the check-in of an enterprise calendar that is checked out. Note that forcing a check-in of an enterprise calendar that is being modified by a user may result in the loss of those changes. Check in Enterprise Calendars Use the following procedure to check in enterprise calendars.  To check in Enterprise Calendars 1. On the Server Settings page, click Force Check-in Enterprise Objects. 2. From the Select the type of object you want to force check-in dropdown list, choose Enterprise Calendars. 3. Select the calendars that you want to check in. 4. Click Check In. Check in Lookup Tables for Enterprise Custom Fields You can force the check-in of an enterprise lookup table that is checked out. Note that forcing a check-in of a lookup table that is being modified by a user may result in the loss of those changes.
  • 120. 112 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide Check in Lookup Tables for Enterprise Custom Fields Use the following procedure to check in lookup tables.  To check in Lookup Tables for Enterprise Custom Fields 1. On the Server Settings page, click Force Check-in Enterprise Objects. 2. From the Select the type of object you want to force check-in dropdown list, choose Lookup Tables for Enterprise Custom Fields. 3. Select the lookup tables that you want to check in. 4. Click Check In. Check in Resource Plans You can force the check-in of an enterprise resource plan that is checked out. Note that forcing a check-in of a resource plan that is being modified by a user may result in the loss of those changes. Check in Resource Plans Use the following procedure to check in resource plans.  To check in Resource Plans 1. On the Server Settings page, click Force Check-in Enterprise Objects. 2. From the Select the type of object you want to force check-in dropdown list, choose Resource Plans.
  • 121. Database Administration 113 3. Select the resource plans that you want to check in. 4. Click Check In. Daily Schedule Backup Daily Schedule Backup allows you to define your daily backup schedule to support item-level restore. Item-level backup is designed to work with, not instead of, SQL Server database backups. Project Retention Policy Versions The Project Retention Policy sets the number of versions of daily backups that will be kept for item level restore. Increasing the project retention policy will affect your archive database. The more versions in the Project Retention Policy that you keep, the greater the disk space required. Project Retention Policy Items In this area you can select whether or not you want to schedule item level backups for Projects, Enterprise Resource Pool and Calendars, Enterprise Custom Fields, Enterprise Global, View Definitions, System settings, and Category and Group settings. Delete resources and users Use the following procedure to delete resources and users from Project Server.
  • 122. 114 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide Important The resources and users will be permanently deleted from Project Server.  To schedule an item level backup 1. On the PWA home page, click Server Settings. 2. On the Server Settings page, under Database Administration, click Daily Backup Schedule 3. On the Daily Backup Schedule page, set the Project Retention Policy to your desired number keeping in mind your disk storage capacity and backup needs. 4. Under Item change the Option dropdown from “Never” to “Schedule” for each item you would like to backup daily. 5. Under Time set the dropdown for the time for which you would like to have the system perform he daily backup. 6. Click Save.
  • 123. Database Administration 115 Administrative Backup and Restore Administrative Backup allows you to manually backup individual item-level objects to your archive database. As an administrator, you can also restore items that have been accidentally deleted from the database using Administrative Restore. Administrative Backup On this page you can manually select the items that you wish to have backed up. Items that can be backed up are: Projects, Enterprise Resource Pool and Calendars, Enterprise Custom Fields, Enterprise Global, View Definitions, System settings, and Category and Group settings. Items For Backup  To Backup data manually 1. On the PWA home page, click Server Settings. 2. On the Server Settings page, under Database Administration, click Administrative Backup. 3. In the Select Items section, select the check box next to each project item that you want to back up. 4. Click Backup. The items that you selected are backed up immediately. Administrative Restore Here you can individually select backed up items that you wish to restore.
  • 124. 116 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide Delete resources and users Use the following procedure to delete resources and users from Project Server. Important The resources and users will be permanently deleted from Project Server.  To restore project items manually 1. On the PWA home page, click Server Settings. 2. On the Server Settings page, under Database Administration, click Administrative Restore. 3. In the Item list, select the item that you want to restore. 4. If you selected Projects from the Item list, select the version of the project that you want to restore as the current working version of the project. Note The versions that are available for you to restore depend upon the number of backups that have been completed and the total number of backups that you have chosen to retain. Project Version Selection 5. Click Restore.
  • 125. Database Administration 117 OLAP Database Management Through Microsoft Project Web App (PWA), multiple OLAP databases can be delivered that contain the specific resources, projects, and custom fields that each group within your organization requires for its particular group reporting needs. In Microsoft Project Server 2010, you can create multiple OLAP databases that have the following characteristics:  They only contain data for projects and resources that they administer  They only contain facts and dimensions that they select from the new integrated OLAP database management user interface  They support departmental filtering to restrict which projects and resources are loaded into the OLAP database  They include data for Inactive Tasks and User Scheduled Tasks  They have support for Multiple Measure groups in a single OLAP database  They contain field names in multiple languages to enable multi-language report creation Also, when a new OLAP database is created, the necessary Office Data Connections and Excel Reporting templates are created in the Business Intelligence Center in the Reports folder. This data-connected blank template will help you quickly create new reports that are based on the new OLAP database. Create an OLAP Cube OLAP cubes are managed on the OLAP Database Management page in Server Settings on a Microsoft Project Web App (PWA) site. To create an OLAP cube, you must have the Manage Cube Building Service Global Permission. Perform the following procedure to create a new OLAP cube. Use the following procedure to create an OLAP cube.  To create an OLAP cube 1. On the PWA home page, click Server Settings. 2. On the Server Settings page, in the Database Administration section, click OLAP Database Management. 3. On the OLAP Database Management page, click New. 4. Configure the settings on the OLAP Database Build Settings page. See the following sections for details on each setting. 5. Click Save.
  • 126. 118 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide Analysis Services Settings Use the Analysis Services Settings area to specify server and database name information along with, optionally, an extranet URL and description. Analysis Services Settings The following table describes the server and network settings for an OLAP cube. Attribute Description Analysis Services Server The name of the instance of Microsoft SQL Server Analysis Services (SSAS) where you want to build the cube. Analysis Services Database to The name of the database that you want to create. be created Extranet URL The URL for the extranet site. Description A description of this OLAP cube. Project Department Use the Project Department area to specify which department to use to filter project data in the OLAP cube. OLAP Department settings (example) If you have projects assigned to departments, you can use this setting to specify the department that you want to have included in the cube. If no department is selected, then no departmental filtering occurs.
  • 127. Database Administration 119 The selection of departments available is controlled by the Department custom lookup table. To allow multiple selections, modify the Project Departments custom field and select the Allow multiple values to be selected from lookup table check box. Note To deselect a department once selected, click the department again. Resource Department Use the Resource Department area to specify which department to use to filter resource data in the OLAP cube. OLAP Resource settings (example) If you have resources assigned to departments, you can use this setting to specify the department that you want to have included in the cube. If no department is selected, then no departmental filtering occurs. The selection of departments available is controlled by the Department custom lookup table. To allow multiple selections, modify the Resource Departments custom field and select the Allow multiple values to be selected from lookup table check box. Note To deselect a department once selected, click the department again. Database Date Range Use the Database Date Range area to specify the date range of projects, based on project start date, to include in the OLAP cube.
  • 128. 120 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide OLAP database date range settings The following table describes the database date range options for an OLAP cube. Attribute Description Use the earliest project start Select this option if you want to base the date range of date and the latest project finish the cube on the earliest start date of any project and the date latest finish date of any project. Use the following last and next Select this option if you want the date range to be time units to calculate the date configured automatically based on a delta from the date range at the time that the OLAP on which the cube is built. In the Last and Next boxes, database is built type the number of days, weeks, or months that you want to use for the delta. Use the fixed date range Select this option if you want to use a fixed date range. specified below In the From and To boxes, type the dates that you want to use. OLAP Database Update Frequency Use the OLAP Database Update Frequency area to specify when and how often you want to build the OLAP cube. We recommend you choose a time of low system use because building cubes can be resource intensive.
  • 129. Database Administration 121 OLAP database update settings The following table describes the database update settings for an OLAP cube. Attribute Description Update periodically Select this option if you want to schedule an update frequency. If this option is not selected, the cube is not updated automatically. Immediately retry the OLAP If the scheduled cube build fails because the queue is not database update if available, selecting this option causes the build job to start scheduled time fails because automatically when the queue becomes available instead of of queue down time waiting for the next scheduled time. Update every Select the number of hours, days, weeks, or months for the cube to be rebuilt. Start date Select the start date for the first automated cube build. Start time Select the start time for each automated cube build. Configure an OLAP cube OLAP cubes are managed on the OLAP Database Management page in Server Settings on a Microsoft Project Web App (PWA) site. You can configure OLAP cube dimensions and measures, or you can configure the build settings of a cube. To configure an OLAP cube, you must have the Manage Cube Building Service Global Permission. There are two sets of parameters that can be configured on an existing OLAP cube:  Dimensions and measures  Cube build settings Use the following procedure to configure the build settings of an existing OLAP cube.  To configure OLAP cube build settings 1. On the PWA home page, click Server Settings.
  • 130. 122 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide 2. On the Server Settings page, in the Database Administration section, click OLAP Database Management. 3. On the OLAP Database Management page, in the OLAP Database Name column, click the database that you want to configure. 4. Configure the settings on the OLAP Database Build Settings page: 5. Click Save. Use the following procedure to configure the dimensions and measures of an existing OLAP cube.  To configure OLAP cube dimensions and measures 1. On the PWA home page, click Server Settings. 2. On the Server Settings page, in the Database Administration section, click OLAP Database Management. 3. On the OLAP Database Management page, select an OLAP database from the list, and then click Configuration. 4. Configure the settings on the Database Configuration page: 5. Click Save. Cube dimensions Use the Cube dimensions area to specify the custom fields that you want to add to the OLAP cube as dimensions. Cube selector Select a cube from the dropdown list to display the available and selected dimensions.
  • 131. Database Administration 123 Cube dimension selector Choose the dimensions that you want to include in that cube in the Available fields list and click Add to include them in the cube. Do this for each cube in the Cube dropdown list. Cube measures Use the Cube measures area to specify the custom fields that you want to add to the OLAP cube as measures. Cube selector Select a cube from the dropdown list to display the available and selected measures. Cube measure selector Choose the measures that you want to include in that cube in the Available fields list and click Add to include them in the cube. Do this for each cube in the Cube dropdown list.
  • 132. 124 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide Built-in measures Use the Built-in measures area to select the build-in measures that you want to include in the OLAP cubes. Cube built-in measure selector The fields that you select will be added to the Project, Task, and Assignment cubes as measures. Inactive tasks Use the Inactive tasks area to specify if you want to include inactive tasks in the OLAP cubes. Inactive tasks selector If you want the cube to include inactive tasks, select the Include Inactive Tasks check box. Calculated measures Use the Calculated measures area to specify an MDX expression to define a calculated measure. Cube selector
  • 133. Database Administration 125 Select the cube that you want to define an expression for from the Cube dropdown list. MDX expression tool Click Insert to add a custom MDX expression. For more information about MDX expressions, see Multidimensional Expressions (MDX) Reference (http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/ms145506.aspx). Copy an OLAP cube OLAP cubes are managed on the OLAP Database Management page in Server Settings on a Microsoft Project Web App (PWA) site. To copy an OLAP cube, you must have the Manage Cube Building Service Global Permission. Perform the following procedure to copy an existing OLAP Cube. Copying a cube will create a new cube with the same settings and configuration as the cube you copied. Copying a cube does not copy the Analysis Services database, but rather copies all the cube settings from which you can build a new Analysis Services database. Note You must specify a new name for the Analysis Services database after you copy the cube. Copy an OLAP cube Use the following procedure to copy an OLAP cube.  To copy an OLAP cube 1. On the PWA home page, click Server Settings. 2. On the Server Settings page, in the Database Administration section, click OLAP Database Management. 3. On the OLAP Database Management page, select the cube that you want to copy, and then click Copy.
  • 134. 126 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide 4. On the OLAP Database Build Settings page, type the name of the server and the database that you want created and adjust any other desired settings. 5. Click Save. Delete an OLAP cube OLAP cubes are managed on the OLAP Database Management page in Server Settings on a Microsoft Project Web App (PWA) site. To delete an OLAP cube, you must have the Manage Cube Building Service Global Permission. Perform the following procedure to delete an OLAP Cube. Note Deleting an OLAP cube in Project Server does not delete the OLAP database from Analysis Services. Delete an OLAP cube Use the following procedure to delete an OLAP cube.  To delete an OLAP cube 1. On the PWA home page, click Server Settings. 2. On the Server Settings page, in the Database Administration section, click OLAP Database Management. 3. On the OLAP Database Management page, select the cube that you want to delete, and then click Delete. Build an OLAP cube OLAP cubes are managed on the OLAP Database Management page in Server Settings on a Microsoft Project Web App (PWA) site. OLAP cubes can be scheduled to be built on a regular basis. For more information, see Configure an OLAP cube (Project Server 2010). You can also start the build process manually. To build an OLAP cube, you must have the Manage Cube Building Service Global Permission. Perform the following procedure to build an existing OLAP cube.
  • 135. Database Administration 127 Build an OLAP cube Use the following procedure to build an OLAP cube.  To build an OLAP cube 1. On the PWA home page, click Server Settings. 2. On the Server Settings page, in the Database Administration section, click OLAP Database Management. 3. On the OLAP Database Management page, select the cube that you want to build, and then click Build Now.
  • 136. 128 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide 4 Look and Feel Project Server 2010 supports customization of various user interface elements, including:  Views  Color and text formats of grouping levels within views  Color and shape options for Gantt bars  Links, or groups of links, included on the Quick Launch in Project Web App The options that are described in this chapter are available under Look and Feel on the Server Settings page in Project Web App. Server Settings page
  • 137. Look and Feel 129 Manage Views Team members can view project information by selecting different views from the View list at the top of most pages within Project Web App. As an administrator, you can better meet the information needs of your organization by adding new views and changing the existing views. There are several different kinds of views in Project Web App, as listed in the following table. View Type Example Project Use this type of view to review the task, assignment, and resource details of a specific project when a team member clicks a project in the Project Center. Project Center Use this type of view to review information about all projects in the Project Center.
  • 138. 130 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide View Type Example Resource Assignments Use this type of view to review details about specific resource assignments. Resource Center Use this type of view to review and compare all resources in the Resource Center.
  • 139. Look and Feel 131 View Type Example My Work Team members use this type of view to review their task assignments. Resource Plan Managers use this type of view to create resource plans for their projects.
  • 140. 132 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide View Type Example Team Tasks Team members use this type of view to review the tasks to which their team is assigned as a resource. Team Builder Managers use this type of view to create a team for their project (not a resource plan).
  • 141. Look and Feel 133 View Type Example Timesheet Team members use this type of view to report time against the projects to which they are assigned. Portfolio Analyses Portfolio managers use this type of view to compare project proposals and determine which meet organizational goals.
  • 142. 134 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide View Type Example Portfolio Analysis Project Selection Portfolio managers use this type of view to choose which proposals to approve as projects. Create a New View Options for creating a new view vary depending on the type of view you are creating. To create a new view 1. On the Quick Launch, under Settings, click Server Settings. 2. On the Server Settings page, click Manage Views. A list of views is displayed. 3. Click New View. 4. In the Name and Type section, in the View Type list, select the type of view you are creating. 5. In the Name box, type the name of the new view.
  • 143. Look and Feel 135 6. In the Description box, type a description of the new view. 7. Complete the remaining fields on the New View page. Not all options listed below are available for every view type.  Task, Resource, or Assignment Choose the type of information to display in the view. Note These choices are only available when Project is selected as the View Type.  Available fields and Displayed fields In the Available fields list, select the fields that you want to include in the view and then click Add. To reorder the fields, click a field name in the Displayed fields box, and then click Up or Down to move it within the list.  Field width Click the name of a field in the Displayed fields box, and then type a number of pixels in the Field width box. You can repeat this for each field listed in the Displayed fields box. Setting this value is optional.  Custom Label Click the name of a field in the Displayed fields box, and then type a display name in the Custom Label box. You can repeat this for each field listed in the Displayed fields box. Setting this value is optional. Note Custom labels are not available for the Resource Plan, Team Tasks, Team Builder, or Portfolio view.  Make column read only Click the name of a field in the Displayed fields box, then select this check box to make that field read-only. Not all fields can be made read-only. Note Only the Timesheet and My Work views have this option.  Gantt Chart format Select the type of Gantt chart that you want to use to display information. Note This option is only available for views that can show a Gantt chart.  Left offset for the splitter bar Type an offset measurement in pixels to define the placement of the splitter bar in the view. Note This option is only available for views that can show a Gantt chart.
  • 144. 136 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide  Show Select the number of outline levels that you want to display, by default, in this view. People using the view will be able to expand additional outline levels.  Grouping format Select the grouping style that you want to use, and then define the order of grouping by using the Group by and Then by lists. For more information on setting up grouping formats, see “Grouping Formats,” later in this chapter.  Sort by Select the fields by which you want to sort the view. In the Order list, select Ascending or Descending to define the order in which you want to sort the view.  Filter Click this button to create or edit filters that you can apply to this view. For more information, see “To set up a filter for a view   Filter Resources to user’s RBS branch Select this check box to display only those resources that fall under the resource breakdown structure branch of the resource looking at the view. Note This option is only available in Resource Center views.  Available categories and Categories which access this view Click a category in the Available categories list, and then click Add to make the new view available to users in that security category. Tip If users are unable to see views that they think they should be able to see, a best practice is to first check that the correct categories are added to the view.
  • 145. Look and Feel 137 8. After you have set all appropriate options for the new view, click Save. You can apply a filter to a view, so that data in the view is automatically narrowed down based on a set of criteria. To set up a filter for a view 1. On the New View page, in the Filter section, click Filter. The Custom Filter dialog box is displayed. 2. On the Custom Filter dialog box, select a field in the Field Name list and a test in the Test list, and then type a value to test for in the Value box. You can set a range of values by typing two values separated by a comma (,) in the Value box. Tip As you create the filter rules, a green check mark or a red X is displayed to the left of the rule, under the Valid? heading. If you see a red X next to a rule, hover over the X for more information on why the rule is not considered. 3. If the filter contains more than one row, select an operator in the And/Or column to start a new row. 4. Click OK when you have finished setting up filters. Modify a View After you have been using a view in Project Web App, you may find that it needs some fine- tuning. It may need a field added, or some adjustments to the security settings. You can easily modify existing views. To modify an existing view 1. On the Quick Launch, under Settings, click Server Settings. 2. On the Server Settings page, under Look and Feel, click Manage Views. 3. Click the name of the view you want to modify, in the Name column.
  • 146. 138 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide Tip If you know the view type for the view you want to modify, you can collapse the other view types to reduce the number of views to scroll through. 4. Modify the fields and options for the view, and then click Save. Copy a View Sometimes it may be easier to create a new view by basing it on an existing view. You can select a view and copy it to create a new view. To create a new view as a copy of an existing view 1. On the Quick Launch, under Settings, click Server Settings. 2. On the Server Settings page, under Look and Feel, click Manage Views. 3. Click a cell in the row for the view you are copying, and then click Copy View. Note Be careful NOT to click the name of the view, in the Name column. This will open that view for editing, instead of selecting it. 4. On the Copy View dialog box, type a name for the new view, and then click OK. The copied view is added to the table on the Manage Views page. 5. Scroll through the list of views to find the view you just created, and then click the name of the new view in the Name column. 6. Modify the fields and options for the new view, and then click Save.
  • 147. Look and Feel 139 Delete a View If a view is not meeting your organization’s needs, or is just not being used, you can delete it from Project Web App. To delete a view 1. On the Quick Launch, under Settings, click Server Settings. 2. On the Server Settings page, under Look and Feel, click Manage Views. 3. Click a cell in the row for the view you are deleting, and then click Delete View. Note Be careful NOT to click the name of the view, in the Name column. This will open that view for editing, instead of selecting it. 4. When prompted, click OK to delete the view. Grouping Formats You can change how rows (or levels) of information appear when task and resource information is grouped in the Project Center, Resource Center, Project, Task, Timesheet, and Assignment views. By changing the appearance of these grouping levels, you can highlight specific information for your team members. The following figure shows an example of grouping level formatting. The first-level groups are shaded in yellow with bold text, and the second-level groups are shaded in blue with bold text.
  • 148. 140 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide To change the appearance of grouping levels 1. On the Quick Launch, under Settings, click Server Settings. 2. On the Server Settings page, under Look and Feel, click Grouping Formats. A list of grouping formats appears. 3. In the Grouping format list, above the table, select the grouping level that you want to format. This will refresh the table and narrow down which levels are displayed. 4. To rename the selected grouping level, click Rename. Type the new name in the New name for the grouping format box, and then click OK. If you do not want to rename the selected grouping level, skip this step. 5. Use the lists in the Cell Color, Font Color, and Font Style columns to define the appearance of each grouping level. 6. Click Save, at the bottom of the page.
  • 149. Look and Feel 141 After you have created a format for grouped task or resource information, you apply the formatting when a new view is created or modified. See “Manage Views,” earlier in this chapter, for more information. Gantt Chart Formats You can format the color, shape, and pattern of the Gantt bars in Gantt Charts views, Project Center views, and other views. To format a Gantt chart 1. On the Quick Launch, under Settings, click Server Settings. 2. On the Server Settings page, under Look and Feel, click Gantt Chart Formats. 3. In the Gantt Chart list, above the table, select the name of the Gantt chart view that you want to format. 4. To rename the selected Gantt chart view, click Rename. Type the new name in the New name for Gantt Chart box, and then click OK. If you do not want to rename the selected Gantt chart view, skip this step. Note You cannot change the names of the individual Gantt bars. 5. For each bar type within the selected Gantt chart view (represented as a row in the table), choose the following:  Display Select this check box to display this bar type on the selected Gantt chart view.  Middle bar shape Select the shape you want to use for the bar type.
  • 150. 142 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide  Bar Color Choose a color to fill in the selected bar shape.  Bar Pattern Choose a pattern to fill in the selected bar shape.  Start shape Choose a graphic to display at the start of a Gantt bar of this type.  Start color Choose a color to fill in the start shape.  End shape Choose a graphic to display at the end of a Gantt bar of this type.  End color Choose a color to fill in the end shape. A preview of the resulting Gantt bar is displayed on the right side of the table. 6. Click Save, at the bottom of the page, below the table. Quick Launch The Quick Launch is the left navigation list in Project Web App.
  • 151. Look and Feel 143 You can change how links behave on the Quick Launch, add new links or groups of links, reorder the links, or delete links or groups of links. Change Quick Launch Behavior Links on the Quick Launch can be displayed at all times, or you can choose to collapse links based on the context of what a user is currently viewing. You can also choose whether to include links from Microsoft SharePoint Foundation. To change how the Quick Launch displays links 1. On the Quick Launch, under Settings, click Server Settings. 2. On the Server Settings page, under Look and Feel, click Quick Launch. 3. In the Edit Quick Launch section, under Expand menu items for, choose from the following options:  All sections If you want to display all Quick Launch items at all times, regardless of what view is currently displayed, click All sections.  Current section only If you want to collapse the Quick Launch items to just the top- level headings for sections that do not apply to the current view, click Current section only. For example, if you have selected Current section only, when you are looking at the Project Center, you will only see the Quick Launch items under the Projects heading.
  • 152. 144 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide 4. Select the Show menu items from Microsoft SharePoint Foundation check box to also show any applicable Quick Launch items that are part of SharePoint Foundation. If you clear this check box, only Project Web App items will be displayed on the Quick Launch. 5. Click Save. Add a New Link You can also add new links to the Quick Launch, to meet your organization’s needs. Links can be to views within Project Web App, intranet sites, or even external Web sites. To add a link to the Quick Launch 1. On the Quick Launch, under Settings, click Server Settings. 2. On the Server Settings page, under Look and Feel, click Quick Launch. 3. Under Set Menu Item Details, click New Link. 4. Type a name for the link in the Custom link name box. This is the text that will appear linked on the Quick Launch. 5. Type the URL for the link in the Custom Web address box. 6. In the Heading section, choose the placement for the new link:  If you are creating a new heading link for the Quick Launch, similar to the Projects and My Work headings, select New Heading.  If you are creating a link to be included below an existing heading, select the existing heading from the list. The link will be indented below the selected heading.
  • 153. Look and Feel 145 7. If you want to hide the new link from the Quick Launch, click No in the Display link in Quick Launch list. For example, if you are creating a new group of links below a new heading, you can choose to hide the new heading, then create all of the new links below the heading and set those to display. When you have the group of links ready to go, you can change the Display link in Quick Launch setting for the new heading to Yes, and the group of links is added to the Quick Launch. 8. Click OK to add the link to the Quick Launch. Modify an Existing Link If a link on the Quick Launch is not pointing to the right place, is not categorized under the right heading, or needs to be temporarily hidden, you can easily make those changes. To modify an existing Quick Launch item 1. On the Quick Launch, under Settings, click Server Settings. 2. On the Server Settings page, under Look and Feel, click Quick Launch. 3. Under Set Menu Item Details, click the name of the link you want to modify, in the Name column. Tip If you have a long list of Quick Launch items to scroll through, you can collapse the headers to hide the links you do not want to modify. 4. Modify the link name, URL, and/or display option for the link, and then click OK. Reorder Quick Launch Items As you use Project Web App, you may find that the links on the Quick Launch would be more helpful if they appeared in a different order. You can reorder the links to meet your organization’s needs. To reorder the links on the Quick Launch 1. On the Quick Launch, under Settings, click Server Settings. 2. On the Server Settings page, under Look and Feel, click Quick Launch.
  • 154. 146 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide 3. Under Set Menu Item Details, click a cell in the row for the Quick Launch item you are moving, and then click Move Up or Move Down. If you select a heading, all items indented below the heading will move with it. Note Be careful NOT to click the name of the link, in the Name column. This will open that link for editing, instead of selecting it. Delete a Link If you find that your organization is not using a link that is currently included on the Quick Launch, you can easily remove it. To delete a link from the Quick Launch 1. On the Quick Launch, under Settings, click Server Settings. 2. On the Server Settings page, under Look and Feel, click Quick Launch. 3. Under Set Menu Item Details, click a cell in the row for the Quick Launch item you are deleting, and then click Delete Link. If you select a heading, all items indented below the heading will also be deleted. Note Be careful NOT to click the name of the link, in the Name column. This will open that link for editing, instead of selecting it. 4. When prompted, click OK to delete the link, or group of links, from the Quick Launch.
  • 155. Time and Task Management 147 5 Time and Task Management Site administrators and others with appropriate permissions can configure how timesheets and task status are captured and handled in Project Server 2010. This includes:  Setting up fiscal periods and time reporting periods  Adjusting timesheets  Setting up timesheet line classifications  Choosing the right timesheet settings  Configuring administrative time categories  Choosing task status settings  Preventing certain tasks from being updated The options that are described in this chapter are available under Time and Task Management on the Server Settings page in Project Web App.
  • 156. 148 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide Server Settings page Fiscal Periods Fiscal periods define the start and beginning dates of the business calendar. They are used to calculate financial statements on an annual basis. By setting up fiscal periods in Project Server 2010, you provide a way to map project work against your organization’s fiscal planning structure. Once set up, you can use fiscal periods as a dimension in your OLAP cubes. Define Fiscal Periods Using Project Web App, you can easily define the fiscal periods for a specific year. By creating the fiscal periods in bulk, you can base them off of several different models, and Project Server will calculate the dates accordingly. For example, if your organization divides each quarter into three periods—one that is four weeks long, followed by one that is five weeks long, and then another that is four weeks long— you can specify this model in Project Web App, and Project Server will create fiscal periods for the year according to that schedule. So, if the fiscal year begins on January 1, 2011, the first quarter will have three periods:  Period 1: 1/1/2011 – 1/28/2011  Period 2: 1/29/2011 – 3/4/2011  Period 3: 3/5/2011 – 4/1/2011
  • 157. Time and Task Management 149 To set fiscal periods in Project Web App 1. On the Quick Launch, under Settings, click Server Settings. 2. On the Server Settings page, under Time and Task Management, click Fiscal Periods. 3. In the Manage Fiscal Period section, click the year that you want to define as the fiscal period, and then click Define. 4. In the Define Fiscal Period Start Date section, type the date on which the fiscal year should begin, or select it using the date picker. 5. In the Set Fiscal Year Creation Model section, select a formatting method for the fiscal period:  4,5,4 Method This fiscal quarter method sets a four-week fiscal period, followed by a five-week fiscal period, and then another four-week fiscal period.  4,4,5 Method This fiscal quarter method sets a four-week fiscal period, followed by another four-week fiscal period, and then a five-week fiscal period.  5,4,4 Method This fiscal quarter method sets a five-week fiscal period, followed by a four-week fiscal period, and then another four-week fiscal period.  13 months This method sets each fiscal period as four weeks.  Standard calendar year This method sets each fiscal period according to the standard 12 month year, beginning on January 1. Note If you want to use a different model for your organization’s fiscal year, use the steps in this procedure to choose a model that is closest to what you would like your fiscal year to look like. Once you have saved, you can go back and modify the calendar dates to refine the schedule to meet your organization’s needs. 6. In the Define Period Naming Convention section, create a unique name for the periods by entering:  Prefix A prefix of up to 15 characters.  Next Sequence Number A sequence number of up to six digits.  Suffix A suffix of up to 15 characters. Tip As you enter a naming convention in the Prefix, Next Sequence Number, and Suffix fields, an example of the final naming convention is displayed below the fields, next to Sample.
  • 158. 150 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide 7. Click Create and Save. On the Fiscal Periods page, the fiscal period will be displayed with the individual periods showing in the Adjust Fiscal Months grid. After defining a fiscal period, you can edit it by using the Adjust Fiscal Months grid. To refine the fiscal period dates 1. On the Quick Launch, under Settings, click Server Settings. 2. On the Server Settings page, under Time and Task Management, click Fiscal Periods. 3. In the Manage Fiscal Period section, select the year that you want to adjust. 4. In the Adjust Fiscal Months section, in the End Date column, click the end date that you want to modify, and then use the date picker to choose a new end date. Start and end dates for periods following the modified end date will be automatically adjusted so that all periods are contiguous. 5. Click Save.
  • 159. Time and Task Management 151 Delete Fiscal Periods After you have initially defined the fiscal periods for your organization, you may decide that a 13 month schedule would work better, or that you would prefer a 5,4,4 schedule over the 4,5,4 schedule that you initially selected. Instead of redefining each date, it may be easier to delete the fiscal periods altogether and start over from scratch. To delete the fiscal period for a specific year in Project Web App 1. On the Quick Launch, under Settings, click Server Settings. 2. On the Server Settings page, under Time and Task Management, click Fiscal Periods. 3. In the Manage Fiscal Period section, select the year that contains the fiscal periods you want to delete. 4. In the Adjust Fiscal Months section, click Delete. All periods are deleted, and the year returns to an Undefined status. Once you have deleted the fiscal periods for a year, you can redefine them using the process outlined in the “Define Fiscal Periods” section. Time Reporting Periods Time reporting periods define the start and end dates used for each timesheet and task status report. You can create several time reporting periods in bulk to set them up, and then insert or delete individual periods, as necessary. For example, you can create several time reporting
  • 160. 152 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide periods for an entire fiscal year, and then modify those periods, as needed, to meet the individual needs of your organization. Create Bulk Time Reporting Periods Rather than creating each time reporting period individually, you will save yourself quite a bit of time if you create them in bulk, using parameters for how many periods to create, when the first period should begin, and how long each period should last. To create several time reporting periods at once 1. On the Quick Launch, under Settings, click Server Settings. 2. On the Server Settings page, under Time and Task Management, click Time Reporting Periods. 3. In the Define Bulk Period Parameters section, enter the following:  Number of periods to be created Type the number of time reporting periods you want to create at one time. If you want to create time reporting periods for each week in a year, leave this set to 52.  Date the first period starts Type the date on which you want the first time reporting period to start, or use the date picker to choose a date. Project Server will calculate the dates for all subsequent periods, based on the date selected in this field. Note Be sure to select the correct day of the week, as all time reporting periods will be based on this date.  Length of the standard period (days) Type the number of days in each time reporting period. If you want to use one-week time reporting periods, leave this set to 7. 4. In the Define Batch Naming Convention section, create a unique name for each of the periods by entering:  Prefix A prefix of up to 20 characters.  Next Sequence Number A sequence number of up to six digits.  Suffix A suffix of up to 20 characters. Tip As you enter a naming convention in the Prefix, Next Sequence Number, and Suffix fields, an example of the final naming convention is displayed below the fields, next to Sample.
  • 161. Time and Task Management 153 5. Click Create Bulk to create the time reporting periods you specified. Note The Status column for all new time reporting periods is set to Open. Only a Project Server administrator can close a period. It is possible to restrict future timesheets from being submitted. See the “Timesheet Settings and Defaults” section for more information. 6. To make changes to a period label, date, or status, click in the grid in the Create Periods section, and then enter the modifications. See “Insert or Delete Time Reporting Periods” for more information. 7. Click Save. Insert or Delete Time Reporting Periods Occasionally, you may need to insert an additional time reporting period. For example, if the current fiscal year uses Monday-Sunday time reporting periods, and you have decided that the next fiscal year will use Sunday-Saturday time reporting periods, you may need to insert a shortened period to transition between the two models. To insert a time reporting period 1. On the Quick Launch, under Settings, click Server Settings. 2. On the Server Settings page, under Time and Task Management, click Time Reporting Periods. 3. In the Create Periods section, scroll through the list to find where you want to insert a new time reporting period, and then click the nearest existing period. 4. Click Insert Before or Insert After to create a new row for the period you are inserting.
  • 162. 154 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide 5. In the Period Label column, replace the New Period text with the name of the inserted period. 6. Replace the dates in the Start Date and End Date columns, if necessary. 7. If the inserted period is not currently open for resources to report data, select Closed in the Status column. 8. Click Save. You may also find that you occasionally need to delete existing time periods. For example, if your organization has already set up one-week time reporting periods for the entire year, and partway through the year you decide to switch to two-week time reporting periods, you will need to delete the remaining one-week periods, and recreate the rest of the year as two-week periods. To delete a time reporting period 1. On the Quick Launch, under Settings, click Server Settings. 2. On the Server Settings page, under Time and Task Management, click Time Reporting Periods. 3. In the Create Periods section, click the row for the time period you want to delete, and then click Delete. Important To protect project data provided by team members, time reporting periods that have associated timesheets cannot be deleted. Because it is common for time reporting periods to have associated timesheets, it is unlikely that you will be able to delete past time reporting periods.
  • 163. Time and Task Management 155 4. Click Save. Timesheet Adjustment Occasionally, a resource will identify changes that need to be made to a timesheet after the timesheet has been submitted and approved. People with the appropriate permissions can adjust timesheet data. To adjust timesheets 1. On the Quick Launch, under Settings, click Server Settings. 2. On the Server Settings page, under Time and Task Management, click Timesheet Adjustment. 3. Choose filter options to help you display the timesheet you want to adjust:  Approved by me Choose this option to display only timesheets that you have approved.  Available timesheets to adjust Choose this option to display all timesheets available for adjustment.  My Resources Unsubmitted Timesheets Choose this option to show all timesheets for resources assigned to your projects. This option may display a very long list of timesheets. You can use the options to the right of the line in the shaded filter section to narrow down the list.
  • 164. 156 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide  Date Use this option in combination with Approved by me, Available timesheets to adjust, or My Resources Unsubmitted Timesheets. Select the Date check box, and then choose whether you want to filter for a specific Fiscal Period, or a Custom Date Range.  Resources Use this option in combination with Approved by me, Available timesheets to adjust, or My Resources Unsubmitted Timesheets. Select the Resources check box, and then choose whether you want to filter for a specific Cost Center, and/or a specific Resource Name. 4. Click Apply, on the far right side of the shaded filter section, to filter the list of timesheets using the options you selected. 5. Click the name of the timesheet you want to adjust, in the Timesheet Name column. This opens the timesheet. 6. Make adjustments to the timesheet, as necessary. Rows that you have adjusted will show as Not Submitted in the Process Status column, indicating that the data for those rows was not submitted by the resource. 7. On the Timesheet tab of the ribbon, in the Actions group, click Save. Line Classifications Timesheet line classifications are used to report different types of time against the same task assignment. For example, your organization may have different classifications for Travel, Training and Standard (default) work. Using classifications enables the timesheet user to add the same task assignment once per classification type. Note The Standard line classification is required, even if all work on the task assignment is being reported against timesheet lines with other classifications.
  • 165. Time and Task Management 157 By default, all timesheet lines use the Standard (or default) line classification. Resources can manually change a timesheet line to use one of the additional line classifications you have configured. To create a new timesheet line classification 1. On the Quick Launch, under Settings, click Server Settings. 2. On the Server Settings page, under Time and Task Management, click Line Classifications. 3. In the Edit, Enter Line Classification section, click New Classification. 4. In the grid, type a new name and description that identifies the timesheet line classification for team members. 5. Click Save. If you no longer want resources to be able to use a classification in timesheets, but that classification has been used in previous timesheets, you can make the classification inactive. This will maintain the classification in previous timesheets, for historical reporting purposes, but prevent it from being available in future timesheets. To inactivate an existing timesheet line classification 1. On the Quick Launch, under Settings, click Server Settings. 2. On the Server Settings page, under Time and Task Management, click Line Classifications. 3. In the Edit, Enter Line Classification section, choose Inactive in the Status column for the line classification you no longer want available to resources. Note The Standard line classification cannot be inactivated. 4. Click Save. If a line classification has never been used on a timesheet, you can delete it from Project Server altogether. To delete an existing timesheet line classification 1. On the Quick Launch, under Settings, click Server Settings. 2. On the Server Settings page, under Time and Task Management, click Line Classifications. 3. In the Edit, Enter Line Classification section, click the row for the line classification you are deleting, and then click Delete Classification.
  • 166. 158 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide 4. Click Save. Timesheet Settings and Defaults Site administrators can choose several different options to control how resources enter time on their timesheets, and whose approval is required. The Timesheet Settings and Defaults page is also where you choose whether your organization will use Single Entry Mode, a feature new to Project Server 2010 that combines task status updates with timesheets in one view. To configure timesheet settings and defaults 1. On the Quick Launch, under Settings, click Server Settings. 2. On the Server Settings page, under Time and Task Management, click Timesheet Settings and Defaults. 3. In the Project Web App Display section, select the The timesheet will use standard Overtime and Non-Billable time tracking check box to enable team members to submit overtime and non-billable time. If you do not want team members to be able to submit overtime or non-billable time, clear this check box. 4. In the Default Timesheet Creation Mode section, specify which data should be included in the default timesheet:  Select Current task assignments to pre-populate timesheets with information about the team members' tasks assignments.  Select Current projects to pre-populate timesheets with information about the team members' current projects.  Select No prepopulation to create blank timesheets for team members. 5. In the Timesheet Grid Column Units section, specify whether you want timesheet columns to represent Days or Weeks. If you choose Weeks, each column in a timesheet represents 7 days, and the date in the column represents the first day of the week. 6. In the Default Reporting Units section, specify whether team members report time within each timesheet column in Hours or Days. 7. To specify how many hours constitute an entire day's worth of work, type the hours in the The number of hours in a standard timesheet day is box.
  • 167. Time and Task Management 159 8. To specify how many hours constitute a standard work week, type the hours in the The number of hours in a standard timesheet work week is box. 9. In the Hourly Reporting Limits section, specify the maximum and minimum hours allowed in a timesheet, as well as the maximum number of hours allowed to be reported in a day. If team members report time beyond these limits, errors will appear on their timesheets when they submit them. Note You may need to put some restrictions on how time is entered based on accounting systems, customers, or internal business policies. Also, if your organization uses team resources, remember this when setting the maximum and minimum values in the Hourly Reporting Limits section. If you don't want to set a maximum or a minimum hourly reporting limit, type 999 in the Maximum Hours per Timesheet box to represent unlimited hours, or type 0 in the Minimum Hours per Timesheet box to represent no minimum time. Typing either of these options effectively turns off reporting limits. 10. In the Timesheet Policies section, specify the following:  Select the Allow future time reporting check box to enable team members to record time for periods in the future.  Select the Allow new personal tasks check box to enable team members to create as many personal tasks as needed. This time is not mapped to any Project Server project or task. Personal tasks will not show up outside of a team member’s timesheet and/or task status.  Select the Allow top-level time reporting check box to enable team members to report time against summary tasks. If this check box is cleared, team members must report time against lower-level tasks, and those values will roll up to the summary level.  Under Task Status Manager Approval, click Enabled to allow project managers to coordinate or approve/reject timesheet lines on a per-line basis. If you select Enabled, you can choose to select the Require line approval before timesheet approval check box, if you want each line approved before the entire timesheet can be approved. If you only want to approve entire timesheets (no line-by-line approval), select Disabled. Note If you are using Single Entry Mode, you must enable task status manager approval.
  • 168. 160 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide 11. In the Auditing section, select the Enable Timesheet Auditing check box to create a detailed record of all changes made to a timesheet. Tip Click Purge Log to clear the auditing log. 12. In the Approval Routing section, select the Fixed Approval Routing check box to prevent team members from manually specifying the next approver when they submit their timesheet. 13. In the Single Entry Mode section, select the Single Entry Mode check box if you want to enable team members to report task progress, as well as actual work, on their timesheets. 14. Click Save. Administrative Time Time spent on things other than project work can be classified as administrative time. Administrative time may include vacation, sick leave, organizational meetings, training, or travel. Site administrators can set up different categories for administrative time, so that resources can capture those hours on their timesheets to accurately represent what they have done during a given reporting period. To add an administrative time category 1. On the Quick Launch, under Settings, click Server Settings. 2. On the Server Settings page, under Time and Task Management, click Administrative Time. 3. Click New Category. A row is added to the table.
  • 169. Time and Task Management 161 4. Type a name for the new administrative time category in the Categories column. 5. In the Status column, choose whether the category is currently Open for use on timesheets, or Closed. 6. In the Work Type column, choose whether the category captures Working time, such as training or travel, or Non Work time, such as vacation or sick leave. 7. In the Approve column, choose whether you want time reported in this category to require approval from a manager. 8. Select the check box in the Always Display column if you want to display a row for this category, by default, on every timesheet for every user. For example, you might choose to always display a timesheet row for the Sick time category, so that team members are reminded to report those hours. 9. Click Save. Tip Before clicking Save, be sure you have the right set of categories listed. Once you click Save, any new categories you have added cannot be deleted. As you create administrative time categories, you may decide that you do not actually need a category and would rather delete it. If you have not yet saved the new categories, you can easily delete the category you do not need. Tip If you want to make it so that a category that has been saved is no longer available for selection in a timesheet, change the Status column for that category to Closed, and be sure the check box in the Always Display column is cleared. To delete an administrative time category 1. On the Quick Launch, under Settings, click Server Settings. 2. On the Server Settings page, under Time and Task Management, click Administrative Time. 3. Click the row header for the category you are deleting, and then click Delete Category. The category is removed.
  • 170. 162 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide Note You can only delete categories that are not yet saved. For example, say you have created several new categories on the Administrative Time page, but have not yet clicked Save on that page. You can delete any of the new categories you created while on that page. Once you click Save on the Administrative Time page, the categories you added can no longer be deleted. 4. Click Save. Task Settings and Display Site administrators can use the Task Settings and Display page to change how resources report task progress, how actual work can be updated, and other task settings. To configure task settings and display options 1. On the Quick Launch, under Settings, click Server Settings. 2. On the Server Settings page, under Time and Task Management, click Task Settings and Display. 3. In the Tracking Method section, select the tracking method that best represents how you want team members to report their progress on project tasks. Options in this section can only be modified if you are not using Single Entry Mode. If you are using Single Entry Mode, the Hours of work done per period and Force project managers to use progress reporting method specified above for all projects options are automatically selected and cannot be modified. Tip If you want project managers to have the option of displaying different reporting methods for their projects, clear the Force project managers to use the progress reporting method specified above for all projects check box. However, requiring the same reporting method provides a consistent user experience throughout all projects in your organization, and may make it easier for team members to report progress. 4. In the Reporting Display section, choose whether you want resources to report their hours daily or weekly. If you choose the Resources should report their total hours worked for a week option, select the appropriate day from the Week starts on list. 5. In the Protect User Updates section, specify how you want updates on actuals to occur:
  • 171. Time and Task Management 163  To prevent the project manager from updating a team member's actual time worked, select the Only allow task updates via Tasks and Timesheets check box.  To import actual work from all timesheet lines, regardless of line classification, select the Import all timesheet line classifications check box. If this check box is cleared, only actual work from timesheet lines that have a standard classification will be imported into task status.  To enable users to provide task updates using periods that they define, select the Allow users to define custom periods for task updates check box. 6. In the Define Near Future Planning Window section, type the number of reporting periods you want to include in the Near Future Planning Window on the Tasks page. Close Tasks to Update If you have the appropriate permissions, you can lock project tasks in order to prevent people from submitting task updates. Note Changes to task updating will not take effect until the next time that the project is published. To prevent updates to a task 1. On the Quick Launch, under Settings, click Server Settings. 2. On the Server Settings page, under Time and Task Management, click Close Tasks to Update. 3. On the Close Tasks to Update page, in the Select a project list, click the project that contains that task you want to close for updating. 4. In the Select Tasks section, in the Lock column, select the check box for each task that you want to close to updating. Tip If you want to prevent updates to all tasks in a project, click Select All, below the table in the Select Tasks section. You can also click Clear All to remove all current selections in the Lock column.
  • 172. 164 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide 5. Do one of the following:  To publish your project and close the selected tasks to updating, click Publish. Note Publishing your project to close tasks to updating will also publish all applied task updates and any other changes that were made to the plan. If you are not ready to publish that information, click Submit instead, to save your task closure settings. When you are ready to publish other changes to your project, the task closure settings will also be published.  To save your changes without publishing the project, click Submit. Tasks that you selected to be closed for updating will remain open until you publish the project.
  • 173. 165 6 Queue Management This chapter describes the Microsoft Project Server 2010 Queuing System. This chapter provides an overview of the Queuing System, which describes the queuing process and architecture, the methods in which queuing jobs are grouped, states that queuing jobs can be in, and how multithreading works in the queue. This chapter also describes how to manage queuing through the Microsoft Project Web App Server Settings page. Queue System Overview A queue is a waiting line that becomes a necessity when the number of service requests becomes greater than the optimum serving capacity. In an Enterprise Project Management System, there are several instances when this is true. For example:
  • 174. 166 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide  At the end of the workday on Friday, nearly all 500 employees of a small company submit their timesheets.  A few hours before their team status meeting, nearly all project managers publish their projects. The purpose of the Project Server 2010 Queuing System is to handle these abrupt changes in demand gracefully and reliably. The Project Server 2010 Queuing System takes all the users' input, records entries for the requests in Microsoft SQL Server, and then processes the data asynchronously on a first-come, first-served basis. Having a queue ensures that the Project Server 2010 EPM solution does not stop working when a spike in demand occurs. Nearly all critical operations in the Project Server 2010 system go through the Project Server 2010 Queuing System. These include:  Project Save  Project Publish  Timesheet Save  Timesheet Submit  Project Backup/Recovery  Report Data Service operations  Cube Building Service operations  Server Side Scheduling The Project Server Queuing System provides the following advantages:  Reliability o Data integrity: There is a well-defined protocol to save any job in the queue. If a job is just half-saved, it is not processed. Also, all jobs are saved into SQL Server (not the file system) and take advantage of SQL Server transactions. o In-order delivery: If a user of Project Professional clicks Save and then Publish, the Project Queuing System ensures that the Save job is processed first and is then followed by a Publish job. o Fault tolerance: Failed jobs in the queue can be retried. Also, when more than one instance of the Queue NT Service is running, if one of them stops responding, the other one picks up the extra load automatically. (This process is called transparent failover.)  Scalability
  • 175. Queue Management 167 o Multithreading: The Project Server 2010 Queuing System can process multiple jobs at the same time. For example, Project 1 Save, Project 2 Publish, and a cube building job can be processed simultaneously. o You can simply add more middle-tier servers to handle load better. Each middle-tier server will have a Project Queuing Service, and the loads will be balanced automatically. o The number of jobs in the queue is limited only by the scale limitations of SQL Server.  Manageability Queuing process The following illustration shows the queuing process: Queuing Process
  • 176. 168 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide 1. The user makes a server request from a client application (for example, publishing a project from Project Professional). The user passes a Job ID (a unique identifier that tracks the request) as part of the request. 2. The Project Web service takes the request and puts it in the queue. 3. A Job ID is issued to the user as an acknowledgement. 4. The user queries to check the status of the request through the issued Job ID. 5. The Project Server 2010 Queuing System returns the status of the request to the user. Queuing architecture This section describes:  Queuing modules  How the Queuing modules work together Queuing modules The Queue NT Service is installed on every Project Server application server computer as part of provisioning. It starts one "Queue Worker Process" per Service Application defined in the farm. The Queue Worker Process services all the instances of Project Web App (PWA) that are associated with its Service Application, and it runs under the "Service Application Administrator" identity. For example, if two Project Web App sites are defined for the Service Application, the Queue Worker Process will service both of them. Remember this deployment model when going through the rest of this section. The Project Server Queuing System is composed of the following four modules, and is dependent on how the four modules work together: 1. Job Storage: Queue jobs are stored in the Draft and Published Project Server databases. In this manner, the jobs are backed up and restored as part of the normal Project Server database backup and recovery routines.
  • 177. Queue Management 169 2. Job Polling: Job storage is polled at regular intervals by a Job Polling thread to check for new jobs. Polling intervals are configured by administrators in the Project Web App Server Settings Queue Management pages.  The Queue Worker process starts the Job Polling threads for each instance of PWA that it services. The Job Polling thread runs inside the "Queue Worker Process" process and under the "Queue Worker Process" identity.  The Job Polling thread has two main properties: o Type - A given job polling thread could be a "project job polling thread" (looking for project-related jobs) or a "timesheet job polling thread" (looking for timesheet- related jobs). o Project Web App instance - Every job polling thread looks for jobs originating from a specific instance of Project Web App.
  • 178. 170 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide 3. Job Processing: The Job Polling thread spawns one Job Processing thread for each job that it finds. The maximum number of Job Polling threads can be configured by administrators. Note that the job processing threads run under the "Microsoft Project Server Queue Service 2010" identity. 4. Job Status Check and Management: This is the module of the Project Server Queue that the end user sees.  Project Web App Manage Queue page: Administrators use this to see the status of any job in the queue. They can also cancel or retry failed jobs. This feature is part of PWA — there is no need to download a special tool.
  • 179. Queue Management 171 Job Grid on the Manage Queue page  Project Web App Queue Settings page: Administrators can view or change the settings of a queue, such as the polling interval and the maximum number of job processor threads. This feature is part of PWA — there is no need to download a special tool. Queue Settings page  Project Web App My Queued Jobs page: Any user can check the status of a job using this interface. This feature is part of PWA — there is no need to download a special tool.
  • 180. 172 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide  Queue Status PSI: Software developers can use these APIs to get the status of any queue job. There are several powerful filters to narrow the search. How it all works together The Project Server Queuing System modules must interact and work as a whole when the system is tasked with requests, such as adding jobs, processing jobs, and retrieving job status. Adding Jobs There are many ways in which jobs can be added to the queue. For example, a project manager can save a project from Project Professional, a team member can submit a timesheet, or a third- party application can publish a project. Each of these actions causes a call to an element in the Project Server Interface (PSI), which in turn adds the appropriate jobs to the queue. Job Processing Job processing occurs in different phases and involves interaction between various modules: 1. Start Queue Worker Process: When the Queue NT Service starts, it starts one child Queue Process per PWA instance. The Queue NT Service should always be running for the Project Queuing System to work.
  • 181. Queue Management 173 2. Start Job Polling threads: When the Queue Worker Process starts, it starts the job polling threads, which are specific to instances of Project Web App. 3. Pick up new jobs: The polling thread looks for new jobs in the project databases. 4. Create job processing threads: If there are new jobs, job processing threads are created. 5. Write status: Once a job processing thread finishes, the status of the job (success or failure) is written back to the database.
  • 182. 174 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide Retrieving status Job status can be checked in various ways. Administrators can use the Project Web App Queue Management pages, team members can use the My Queued Jobs page, or software developers can programmatically get status using the Queue PSI methods. The Project and Timesheet queues The Project Server 2010 Queuing System is composed of two separate queues:  Project Queue Primarily used for project-related messages such as Saving, Publishing, Reporting, and Cube Building, although other types of messages may be sent to this queue as well. Its tables and stored procedures are stored in the Project Server 2010 Draft database.
  • 183. Queue Management 175  Timesheet Queue Primarily used for timesheet-related messages such as Timesheet Save and Timesheet Submit, although other types of messages may be sent to this queue as well. Its tables and stored procedures are stored in the Project Server 2010 Published database. The two queues are designed the same way, except that their jobs reside in different databases. The advantages in having two types of queues include:  Performance: Storing queue job data in the same database as the core data saves the queue from making expensive cross-database calls during job processing. Let us look at an example: When a Timesheet Submit job occurs, the data entered by the user (for example, hours worked) is packaged as part of the submitted queue job and put into the SQL Server job store. Also, there is already existing information about a timesheet (duration, name, and so forth), and this information is available in the "Published" database. To process the Timesheet Submit job, both sets of data are necessary. Performance is improved if both these sets of data reside in the same database. That is why Timesheet queue jobs are stored in the "Published" database (where all timesheet core data resides) and Project queue jobs are stored in the "Draft" database (where most of the project core data resides).  Fine-tuning: Every setting in the queue can be specified separately for the Project and Timesheet queues. This gives administrators flexibility in configuration. For example, if a customer is using Project Server 2010 primarily for timesheets and there are very few projects, the polling interval of the timesheet queue can be set to 10 seconds, and the project queue could be set to a slightly higher time interval. Note The polling interval specifies the frequency with which the queuing service checks either of the queues for new jobs. This setting can be specified in the Project Web App Queue Settings page. How the Project and Timesheet queues are used The following image shows how the modules in the Project Server Queuing System work with the project and timesheet queues.
  • 184. 176 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide 1. Start Job Polling threads: For every instance of Project Web App serviced by the queue (the queue can service more than one instance of Project Web App), a polling thread pair is launched — one thread to service the project queue, another to service the timesheet queue. Both of these threads reside within the "Queue Worker Process" process space and run under the "Queue Worker Process" identity (which is the Service Application Administrator identity). 2. Job Storage: As mentioned above, the project-related jobs (Project Save, Publish, Reporting, Cube Building, and so on) are stored in the "Draft" database. The timesheet-related jobs (Timesheet save, Timesheet submit, and so on) are stored in the "Published" database. 3. Job processing: When the "job polling threads" discover new jobs, new job processing threads are created. Note that the job processing threads still reside within the "Queue Worker Process" process space and run under the "Queue Worker Process" identity (which is the Service Application Administrator identity). Status-checking modules will continue to check for status of a job; they do not care which queue the job is part of. Queue management is always done on a per-queue basis — in the
  • 185. Queue Management 177 Project Web App Queue Management pages, administrators have to select which queue (project or timesheet) they are changing the settings for. Queue groupings There are three distinct levels of grouping for queued data: 1. Jobs A job is a trackable packet of work that gets executed by Project Server (for example, project save, project publish, timesheet submit). Some jobs are not explicitly initiated by the user (for example, email notifications, reporting data synch-up). Jobs are the level at which queuing is tracked (using a Job ID). 2. Correlated Job Group A correlated job group is a categorization of jobs imposed by internal rules of Project Server. Jobs within a correlated job group are always processed together and in order (with some exceptions). In the example below, Project 1 is edited and saved from Project Professional and then checked in. Project 1 is then checked out by another user, who then publishes it. Publishing Project 1 triggers Reporting and a Reporting job is added to the queue as well. Project Server assembles a correlation group comprised of the four jobs related to Project 1. It then will attempt to process the jobs in sequence since the Project Server internal rules dictates that there is a dependency between the jobs. The dependency that exists is that the Project 1 publish and the Reporting database update cannot occur until Project 1 is saved. Also, if any of the jobs in the correlation fail, the other jobs after it in the correlation group will be blocked. For example, if the Save Project 1 job (job ID 12) fails, the Checkin Project 1 job (job ID 13) should get blocked. If the Checkin Project 1 job were executed, this would lead to problems because someone else may then checkout Project 1 and then attempt to modify it which may be in an inconsistent state due to the failed save. 3. Sub-jobs Each job can be broken down further into smaller segments called sub-jobs. If a job is very large (such as saving a 10 MB project) it will be broken into multiple sub-jobs. Sub-jobs are not exposed to the PSI or the Project Web App user. However, sub-jobs may be noted in ULS logs (depending on the verbosity option that is selected).
  • 186. 178 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide Parent/Child Relationships between submitted Jobs It is important to realize that parent/child relationships can exist for submitted jobs which require that further processing be done. For example, if a user publishes Project 1, a reporting request for Project 1 will be generated, as well as notification requests regarding Project 1. Note that Notifications for Project 1 will always be generated, but since Reporting Project 1 is generated only if the Publish of Project 1 is successful, should the publish job fail, the Reporting Project 1 job will not be generated. Similarly, a child job may fail without any effect to the parent job. For example, if Notification Project 1 should fail, there will be no effect on Publish Project 1 since it will have already occurred. It is important to note that although the user may be aware that the publish of Project 1 was processed through the queue, he/she may not be aware that a child job may have failed. If you would like to verify what child jobs were spawned from a parent job that they had entered into the queue as well as their status, you can do this through the My Queued Jobs page in Project Web App. Administrators can use the Queue Management UI and see all jobs in the queue.
  • 187. Queue Management 179 Queuing states When a job is submitted to the queue it can transition through various states. The table below describes each of these states: State Description Getting queued Job is put into the queue. A job ID is issued. Waiting to be Job is in the queue and is waiting to be processed. Processed Processing Job is being processed. Success Job has been successfully processed. This is a terminating state in which the job can go no further. Blocked Job has been blocked by failure of another job before it in the same correlation group. The user will need to retry or cancel. Failed and Not Job has failed, but is not blocking any other jobs in its group. This is a Blocking terminating state in which the job can go no further. Correlation Failed and Job has failed and may be blocking one or more dependent jobs. Blocking Correlation Skipped for Job has been skipped because a duplicate job has been found after it within optimization the group. For example, a project manager may attempt the following in sequence when working with a project: 1. Saves Project 1 2. Publishes Project 1 3. Changes a task in Project 1 4. Save Project 1 5. Publishes Project 1 6. Changes the start date of Project 1 7. Save Project 1 8. Publishes Project 1 All three incremental saves to Project 1 will be processed. However, all three publish attempts do not need to be processed. If the last publish job is processed, it would produce the same results as if all three publish jobs were processed. For optimization, the first two publish attempts are skipped.
  • 188. 180 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide State Description Cancelled Job has been cancelled. A job can be cancelled from any state except the two terminating states (Success, Failed and Not Blocking Correlation). Sleeping Job could not process immediately because of another conflicting job and is temporarily in an inactive mode. The job will be retried. Changes in queue state As jobs are entered into the queue and processed, it is important to understand the possible changes in queue state that can occur. The following flowchart describes the possible paths through each state. State Next Possible State Getting Queued  Waiting to be Processed  Cancelled
  • 189. Queue Management 181 State Next Possible State Waiting to be Processed  Processing  Cancelled  Blocked  Skipped for optimization Processing  Success  Failed and Not Blocking Correlation  Failed and Blocking Correlation  Cancelled Success  End Blocked  Processing  Cancelled Failed and Not Blocking  End Correlation Failed and Blocking  Cancelled Correlation  Processing Skipped for Optimization  Blocked (due to a failed job)  Cancelled  Success  Failed and Not Blocking Correlation  Failed and Blocking Correlation  Processing Cancelled  End Queue Administration Settings Queue management and administration can be done through the Project Web App Server Settings page. In the Queue section of the Server Settings page there are two options to administer the queue:
  • 190. 182 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide  Manage Queue Jobs You can use this page to view jobs in the queue. You can use the configuration options to filter jobs and only see the ones you are interested in viewing. You can also retry or cancel jobs through this page.  Queue Settings You can set configuration options that control the way by which jobs are pulled from the Project and Timesheet queues and processed. These settings get applied without the need to restart the Queue Service. You must have the Manage Queue permission in order to access the Queue Administration settings pages. Manage Queue Jobs The Manage Queue Jobs page allows you to view jobs in the queue through the jobs grid. Viewable jobs are displayed according to the following filter options  Filter Type  Job History  Job Types  Job Completion States  Columns  Advanced Options Filter Type This configuration option allows you to select filters to query for specific types of jobs that will display in the Job Grid. The filters available in the Filter Type drop-down menu are:  By Status- Displays jobs in the queue in order by status. This is the default setting.
  • 191. Queue Management 183  My Jobs – Displays only jobs initiated by you.  By Project – Displays jobs in the queue in order by project.  By ID – Displays jobs in the queue in order by Job ID.  Active – Displays all jobs that have a status of Active.  Blocked- Displays all jobs that have a status of Blocked. Job History This configuration option enables you to select the date range of jobs that display in the Job Grid. Use the From and To fields to select a beginning and end data. The default selection is to select the one-day date range for the present date. You can use the Maximum Number of Jobs field to limit the number of jobs that display for a given date range. If the selected date range contains a huge number of jobs that need to display in the Job Grid, the load time for the Manage Queue Jobs page can be very long. The Maximum Number of Jobs field allows you to limit the jobs that display. The default setting is 500. Job Types The Job Types configuration option enables you to select the type of job (for example, Project Create, Timesheet Submit, Notifications etc.) that you want to appear in the Job Grid. By default, all job types will be listed in the Selected Jobs list.
  • 192. 184 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide Job Completion States The Job Completion States configuration option enables you to select the job states (for example, Success, Blocked Due to a Failed Job, Processing, etc. ) of the jobs that you want to appear in the Job Grid. By default, all job state types except Success will be listed in the Selected Jobs list. Success is not available by default because we assume Project Server Administrators would be more interested about problems that can be caused by non-successful jobs rather than successful one. This setting can be helpful for troubleshooting jobs that are not completing successfully in the queue. For example, some of your users might be experiencing problems over the past few days. You can see specifically which jobs are not completing successfully by going to the Job Completion States setting and adding all job states except Success. You can also select a Job History date range for that corresponds to when shortly before the problems occurred (for example, seven days). The Job Grid should display information about all jobs that are in a non- successful job status that have occurred over the past week. Columns The columns configuration option allows you to select the columns that will appear in the Jobs Grid section.
  • 193. Queue Management 185 Advanced Options The Advanced Options queue settings both apply to the way that jobs in the queue are cancelled:  Cancel jobs getting enqueued: Selecting this option will cancel all jobs that remain in a “getting enqueued” state for a prolonged period of time. When a job is in this state, it means that the queue has been told to start receiving a job that will be processed later, but it has not received a tag telling it that all the data for the job has been received. Until the full job has been received, the job will remain in the getting queued state. If a job remains in the getting queued state for a prolonged period of time, it is likely that something is preventing the job from finishing. If the job continues to remain in this state after rerunning it, review your ULS logs to troubleshoot why they problem is occurring. Saving a project from Project Professional to Project Server is a job that typically enqueues. When you save a project from Project Profession to the Project Server, the job synchronizes with the server. If the synchronization does not complete, then the job remains in the enqueued state. This setting is enabled by default.  Cancel subsequent jobs in the correlation: When you cancel a job that spawns additional jobs, this option will automatically cancel those jobs as well. For example, a Project 1 Publish job that is cancelled will also cancel the Project 1 Reporting job that was automatically created. This setting is also enabled by default.
  • 194. 186 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide Jobs Grid The Jobs Grid provides a view the jobs that meet the criteria listed in the Manage Queue Jobs page. Options within this section enable you to select a job or group of jobs and to apply the following options to them, if applicable:  Retry Job: Allows you to try to rerun selected jobs in the queue that did not complete successfully.  Cancel Job: Allows you to selected jobs in the queue that did not complete successfully.  View Related Jobs: Allows you to view jobs that have a dependency relationship (for example, jobs in the same correlation) with a selected job in the queue.  Refresh Status: Allows you to update the jobs in your job grid with the latest status. Queue Settings Queue Settings options allow you to configure the way the queue does operates. The Queue Settings page contains the following configuration options:  Queue Type  Maximum Number of Job Processor Threads  Polling Interval (in milliseconds)  Retry Interval (in milliseconds)  Retry limit  SQL retry interval (in milliseconds)  SQL retry limit  SQL Timeout (in seconds)  Cleanup Interval (in hours)  Cleanup Interval Offset (in minutes)  Cleanup Age Limit for Successful Jobs (in hours)
  • 195. Queue Management 187  Cleanup Age Limit for Non-Successful Jobs (in hours)  Bookkeeping Interval (in milliseconds)  Queue Timeout (in minutes)  Fast Polling Queue Type The Queue Type setting allows you to select the queue (either Project or Timesheet) to which the settings on the page will apply. Maximum Number of Job Processor Threads The Maximum Number of Job Processor Threads setting determines how many job processor threads are available for use for the selected queue type (Project or Timesheet).
  • 196. 188 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide As a starting point, we recommend that you set the maximum number of processor threads settings based on the number of available processors (or cores). For example, if the Project Server application server uses a single dual-core processor, configuring the settings for two threads per queue is a good starting point. If your application server uses a quad dual-core processor, you might be able to use eight threads per queue. You can adjust these settings accordingly based not only on the volume of transactions, but also the average size of the transactions (for example, publishing 10-line projects versus 1000-line projects). You should also take into account the farm topology and other applications that are running on the farm. For example, if you have four application servers on the farm and each server has two cores, a setting of “4” gives you the potential for 32 threads to be operating. Adjust the setting accordingly if your application server is also serving as a front-end Web server or running search or other processor-intensive activities. It is also important to consider the throughput of the SQL Server hosting the Project Server databases. For instance, suppose you have eight application servers that can process threads and the Maximum Number of Job Processor Threads setting is at “4” (potential for 32 threads all processing jobs). The SQL Server may start having contention issues simply because all the threads are operating on the same table. Additionally, you can monitor performance counters, application logs, and ULS logs to guide you in fine-tuning the queue to work with your normal server loads. Polling Interval The Polling Interval setting allows you to specify the time interval (in milliseconds) in which the Queue NT Service polls the project or timesheet database (depending what you selected for Job Type) for new jobs. The valid range is 500 through 300000, with a default value of 1000.
  • 197. Queue Management 189 Retry Interval The Retry Interval setting allows you to set the length of time (in milliseconds) between retries for jobs that have failed through SQL-related issues, such as SQL deadlocks. The valid range is 0 (immediate retry) to 300000, with a default value of 1000. Retry Limit The Retry Limit setting allows you to set the limit on retries on a failed polling query. The Project Server Queuing System polls the databases on a regular basis to retrieve jobs that need processing. If this query should fail for an SQL-related reason, the system will attempt to poll the database again after a period of time.
  • 198. 190 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide SQL Retry Interval The queue polls the database at regular intervals for jobs that need processing. If the query fails, the SQL Retry Interval setting allows you to set the length of time (in milliseconds) before the query is retried. The valid range is 0 (immediate retry) to 60000, with a default value of 1000. SQL Retry Limit The queue polls the database at regular intervals for jobs that need processing. If the query fails, the SQL Retry Limit setting allows you to set the number of times the query will be retried. The valid range is 0 (no retries) to 100, with a default value of 5.
  • 199. Queue Management 191 SQL Timeout The queue makes SQL calls for retrieving and executing jobs. This SQL Timeout setting allows you to set the timeout value (in seconds) for these calls. If any job fails due to an SQL Timeout error, you can increase the value for this setting and retry the job. The valid range is 30 to 86400 (one day), with a default value of 1800 (30 minutes). Cleanup Interval This Cleanup Interval setting allows you to configure the frequency (in hours) with which the Queue Cleanup job runs. The valid range is 1 to 100000, with a default value of 24 (one day). For example, if the cleanup interval is set to the default value of “24”, the Queue Cleanup job will run every 24 hours. You can set the time which the Queue Cleanup job will run with the Cleanup Interval Offset setting.
  • 200. 192 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide Cleanup Interval Offset The Cleanup Interval Offset setting determines the time at which the Queue clean up job will run. The default value is 0, which sets the cleanup to occur at 12:00AM. The valid range is 0 (12:00 a.m.) to 1439 (11:59 p.m.). Use this in conjunction with the Cleanup Interval setting. For example, if the Cleanup Interval Offset value is set to “180”, and the Cleanup Interval value is set to “24”, the Queue Cleanup job will run daily at 3:00AM. You may want to use the Cleanup Interval Offset to run after the Cube service is scheduled to run. In this situation, if the Cube service starts at midnight, you may want to postpone the cleanup to occur a couple of hours after midnight. Cleanup Age Limit for Successful Jobs The Cleanup Age Limit for Successful Jobs setting allows you to configure when a job that has been completed successfully will be removed from the system. You can configure this setting by entering the value (in hours) in the Cleanup Age Limit for Successful Job field. The value you enter configures the queue to delete the job during the cleanup interval, only if the age of the successfully created job is equal to or greater than that value.
  • 201. Queue Management 193 For example, you configure the Cleanup Age Limit for Successful Jobs value to be 24 (default value). Cleanup Interval Offset is configured to clean up jobs at 12:00AM daily. If you have a publish job that completed successfully on 11:55PM on Sept 1, it will not be removed from the system until September 3 at 12:00AM when it will be over 24 hours old. The Sept 2 12:00AM cleanup will not remove the job since it will only be five minutes old. Note Typically the number of successful jobs in comparison to non-successful jobs is very high. Therefore, Cleanup Age for Successful Jobs is usually set to a lower value in comparison to the Cleanup Age Limit for Non-Successful Jobs value. Note Default Project Server categories cannot be deleted. Cleanup Age Limit for Non-Successful Jobs The Cleanup Age Limit for Non-Successful Jobs setting allows you to configure when a job that has completed in an unsuccessful state will be removed from the system. You can configure this setting by entering the value (in hours) in the Cleanup Age Limit for Non- Successful Job field. The value you enter configures the queue to delete the job during the cleanup interval, only if the age of the unsuccessful job is equal to or greater than that value. The method in which unsuccessful jobs are removed from the system is identical to the way successfully completed jobs are removed from the system.
  • 202. 194 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide Note Jobs that are in an “Unsuccessful and blocking correlation” state will stay in the history until they are successfully retried or cancelled. The cleanup for non-successful jobs does not affect jobs in this state. The default value of this setting is 168 hours (7 days). Since job status information is important in helping to troubleshoot problems when a job has not completed successfully, it is recommended to not set this value to less than the default setting. Bookkeeping Interval There are a number of "bookkeeping" tasks that are run by the Queuing System. For example, these include awakening jobs in a "sleeping" state, updating the heartbeat timestamp, or checking if the Queue Cleanup job needs to be run. The Bookkeeping Interval setting controls the time interval (in milliseconds) at which these tasks are run. The valid range is 500 to 300000, with a default value of 10000 (ten seconds).
  • 203. Queue Management 195 Queue Timeout In a farm containing multiple Application servers, if the Queue Service fails on one of the servers, jobs are automatically distributed the remaining Application servers on which the Queuing service is active. A Queue Service is considered to have timed out if it has not updated its heartbeat for longer than the Queue Timeout value (in minutes). The heartbeat is updated by the Queue in all the Project Web App databases that it touches (for example, each time the Published and Draft databases are polled for jobs). The valid range is 2 to 20, with a default value of 3. Note The Queue Timeout value cannot be less than four times the Bookkeeping Interval at any time. If the Queue Timeout value will automatically be changed to four times the Bookkeeping value if the rule is violated. Note Default Project Server categories cannot be deleted.
  • 204. 196 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide Fast Polling The Fast Polling setting is enabled by default and allows the Queue to process all jobs in a Waiting to be Processed state to be processed as soon as possible. However, if this fast processing overwhelms the server and the Queue needs to slow down, this setting can be disabled. If Fast Polling is disabled, the Queue will check if there are any free threads to process jobs. If there are, the free threads will be loaded with jobs in a Waiting to be Processed state. It will then wait for the polling interval, and repeat the process. If Fast Polling is enabled, the Queue will not wait for the polling interval if there are pending jobs. As jobs get processed, all pending jobs will start getting processed immediately.
  • 205. Operational Policies Management 197 7 Operational Policies Management This chapter about Operational Policies Management contains the following sections:  Alerts and Reminders  Additional Server Settings  Server-Side Event Handlers  Active Directory Resource Pool Synchronization  Project Sites  Project Site Provisioning Settings  Bulk Update Project Sites Alerts and Reminders
  • 206. 198 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide Project Server 2010 generates e-mail notifications and reminders for each user whenever new, overdue, rejected, or forthcoming events occur. Administrators can configure alerts for their reminders from the Alerts and Reminders page in the Additional Settings page of your Project Web App Server Settings. Before e-mail notifications and reminders can be used by members of your organization, the appropriate server and account information must be identified. As a Project Web App administrator, you can configure the following settings in the Alerts and Reminders page:  Notification E-mail Settings  Schedule E-mail Reminder Service Notification E-mail Settings The Notification E-mail Settings allows the Project Server Administrator to maintain the default sender e-mail address and message information that is automatically included with each email notification or reminder sent by Project Server. It also allows you to specify the SMTP server and associated port number. To configure the Notification E-mail setting: 1. On the Server Settings page, in the Operational Policies page, click Alerts and Reminders. 2. On the Alerts and Reminders page, in the Notification E-mail Settings section, enter the following information: a. Select Turn on notifications with the following settings check box to maintain all of your Notification email settings, but turn off notifications globally. Note This setting was not available in Project Server 2007. In Office Project Server 2007, you had to remove the SMTP server details to stop notifications and reminders from being sent. b. In the SMTP mail server box, type the name of your SMTP server. Verify the port number in the Port box.
  • 207. Operational Policies Management 199 c. In the From address box, enter the default email address. This address is the reply-to address for all notification and reminder e-mails. d. In the Company domain box, enter the domain name of your company (for example, Contoso.com). e. In the E-mail foot box, type the default message you want appended to all notification emails. For example: This email message may contain confidential information and is intended only for the recipients named above. 3. Click Save. Schedule E-Mail Reminder Service The Schedule E-mail Reminder Service allows a Project Server Administrator to set the time of day at which the e-mail reminder service scans the Project Server databases to determine who should receive e-mail reminders (users with upcoming or overdue tasks and status reports). Depending on the volume of notification and reminder e-mails, you should consider setting the service to run at a time when the overall load on the server is low. To configure the Schedule E-mail Reminder service: 1. On the Server Settings page, in the Operational Policies page, click Alerts and Reminders. 2. On the Alerts and Reminders page, in the Schedule E-Mail Reminder Service section, click the Schedule e-mail reminder service to run every day at drop-down menu and select the time at which you want the service to run. 3. Click Save. Additional Server Settings The Alerts and Reminders page allows you to configure settings for:  Project 2007 Compatibility Mode  Project Professional Versions  Enterprise Settings
  • 208. 200 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide  Currency Settings  Resource Capacity Settings  Resource Plan Work Day  Exchange Server Details  Task Mode Settings Project 2007 Compatibility Mode The Project 2007 Compatibility Mode setting allows an upgraded Project Server 2010 instance to accept client connections from Project Professional 2007 with Service Pack 2 (SP2) as well as Project Professional 2010. This setting is only configurable if your deployment has been upgraded from Office Project Server 2007 (it is enabled by default after the upgrade). This feature in Project Server 2010 is also referred to as Backward Compatibility Mode (BCM). Note Project Server 2010 will not accept connections from Project Professional 2003, even if BCM in enabled. Backward compatibility mode (BCM) is a feature in Project Server 2010 that assists in the upgrade of your Enterprise Project Management environment. Project Server 2010 accepts connections from the Microsoft Project Professional 2010 client, but it can also accept connections from Microsoft Office Project Professional 2007 with Service Pack 2 (SP2) if BCM is enabled in Project Server 2010. BCM is enabled automatically after you upgrade to Project Server 2010. After you upgrade to Project Server 2010 (by either the in-place or database-attach upgrade method), BCM allows you to avoid having to upgrade your Office Project Professional 2007 client computers at the same time. Because Project Server 2010 accepts connections from both Office Project Professional 2007 SP2 and Project Professional 2010 clients when BCM is enabled, you can decide to upgrade your clients later, and in batches (running in a mixed environment), if you want. When you have finished upgrading the clients to Project
  • 209. Operational Policies Management 201 Professional 2010, you can turn off BCM in Project Server 2010 server settings, which then allows for only Project Professional 2010 connections. Important Once the Project 2007 Compatibility Mode is disabled, it cannot be re-enabled. Verify that you want to disable BCM if you are going to make the change. We recommend that BCM be enabled only as a temporary measure to help in the upgrade process. When Project Server 2010 is configured in backward compatibility mode, Project Professional 2010 clients that connect with Project Server 2010 have certain features that are disabled. These include the following:  Manually scheduled tasks are not available on the server or client.  Tasks cannot be set to inactive.  Font strikethrough is not available.  All departmental custom fields are enforced in Office Project Professional 2007. All new features that are available in Project Professional 2010 (for example, Timeline, Team Planner, 32-bit colors) are available to Project Professional 2010 users, but not to Office Project Professional 2007 SP2 users. Office Project Professional 2007 SP2 connecting to Project Server 2010 in BCM mode is blocked from providing functionality that requires loading a Microsoft Project Web App page in the client. This includes doing approvals and opening enterprise resources. As a workaround, you can use Project Web App on a Web browser to do these functions until you are ready to upgrade to Project Professional 2010. Additionally, workflow-controlled custom fields are not available in Office Project Professional 2007 SP2. Project Server 2010 prevents you from creating cross-project type links (resource sharing, cross- project dependencies, and master/subproject) on mixed Project file versions. For example, you cannot create a cross-project link from a project that is in Compatibility mode (Office Project 2007 format) with one that is in the Native mode (Project 2010 format). What this means is that after you disable backward compatibility mode, as you open and save projects, they are converted to Native mode. However, projects that have not been opened and saved remain in Compatibility mode. Project Server 2010 does not allow you to create or even connect projects that are in different modes. Therefore, your cross-project links do not fully function until all of the related projects are opened and saved so that they are all in Project 2010 format. When BCM is disabled in Project Server 2010, Project Server is running in Native mode. In Native mode, only Project Professional 2010 clients are able to connect to Project Server 2010. However, Project Professional 2010 features that were not available in BCM (such as manually scheduled tasks), become available in Native mode.
  • 210. 202 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide To disable Project 2007 Compatibility Mode (Backward Compatibility Mode): 1. Verify that all projects are checked in to Project Server 2010. You can verify this by 2. On the Server Settings page, in the Operational Policies page, click Additional Server Settings. 3. On the Additional Settings page, in the Project 2007 Compatibility Mode section, clear the Enable Project 2007 Compatibility Mode check box. 4. Click OK. 5. After making the change, you must check out and open the Enterprise Global file in Microsoft Project Professional 2010. In the Enterprise Global file, make a very minor change (for example, dragging the splitter bar on the screen), save the file, and then check it back in. This is required to upgrade the Enterprise Global file to the newer version of the Microsoft Project Professional client. Important The Enterprise Global file must be upgraded to the Project Professional 2010 client after BCM is disabled (step 5 in the procedure above). This step ensures that all new projects are in native mode with all Project Professional 2010 features enabled. (All new projects are based on the Enterprise Global file). Neglecting to upgrade the Enterprise Global file with the Microsoft Project Professional client can lead to serious problems. Objects in the file (for example, views, tables, filters) will remain in Office Project 2007 format and they will be expected to be in Project 2010 format when new projects are created. Project Professional Versions The Project Professional Versions setting allows you to specify which versions (build numbers) of Project Professional client will be able to connect to your Project Server 2010 environment. This setting allows you to ensure that Project Professional client connections to the server are all at a required base level. For example, if you recently updated both Project Server 2010 and Project Professional 2010 to the October 2010 Cumulative Update, you can verify that all clients connecting to the server are at least at this level by entering the build number (14.0.5128.5000). All
  • 211. Operational Policies Management 203 Project Professional 2010 clients that have not been updated to the October 2010 Cumulative Update or later will not be able to connect. Note If Backward Compatibility Mode (BCM) is enabled, you do not need to make any additional changes to this setting to allow Project Professional 2007 SP 2 clients to connect to the server. However, you can enter a build number for the Office Project Server 2007 client if you require a minimum build. For example, BCM is enabled and you only want the following two builds (and higher) to connect to Project Server 2010:  Project Professional 2007 with Service Pack 3 (SP3)  Project Professional 2010 with the December 2010 Cumulative update In the above example, for the Project Professional Versions setting you would enter the build number for each version, separated by a comma. To configure the Project Professional Versioning Settings: 1. On the Server Settings page, in the Operational Policies section, click Additional Server Settings. 2. On the Additional Server Settings page, in the Project Professional Versions section, type the build number of each Project Professional version that you want to connect to Project Server 2010. Versions older than the build number you enter will not be able to connect. 3. Click Save. Enterprise Settings The Enterprise Settings setting allows you to determine whether or not Project Server 2010 allows projects to have the following capabilities:  Allow master projects to be saved and published to Microsoft Project Server 2010 (enabled by default) – Enabling this setting allows master projects to be used in Project Server 2010. Master projects are projects that contain sub-projects, and usually contain tasks that are dependent on each other. Check with your Project Management Office to see if your organization prohibits the use of master projects.  Allow projects to use local base calendars – Enabling this settings allows users to not only use enterprise base calendars that are on the system for their enterprise
  • 212. 204 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide projects, but to also use base calendars local base calendars that your users create. Disabling this setting (default) will restrict users to using only enterprise base calendars that are on the system for their projects. Restricting your users to use only enterprise calendars gives you more control by preventing problems that can occur when projects use local base calendars that contain conflicting data. For example, a project using a local base calendar that differs from an enterprise calendar (for example, July 4th as a working day versus a holiday) can lead to faulty calculations and other issues. To configure the Enterprise Settings: 1. On the Server Settings page, in the Operational Policies section, click Additional Server Settings. 2. On the Additional Server Settings page, in the Enterprise settings section: a. Select Allow master projects to be saved and published to Microsoft Project Server 2010 if you to enable this setting (enabled by default). b. Select Allow projects to use local base calendars if you want to enable this setting (cleared by default). 3. Click Save. Currency Settings Through the currency setting you can select the default currency setting for projects that are published to the server (used for reports and the default view for new projects). The default value will be based on the default currency of the language used for the Project Web App instance. You can also select the currency settings for publishing:  Allow projects to be published in various currencies – Select this option if your company uses multiple currencies for costs within projects (this is the default setting).  Enforce that projects are published in the server currency – Select this option if your company only uses a single currency for costs within projects. The currency used will be the one selected as the default server currency.
  • 213. Operational Policies Management 205  To configure the Currency settings: 1. On the Server Settings page, in the Operational Policies section, click Additional Server Settings. 2. On the Additional Server Settings page, in the Currency Settings section, select one of the following currency options:  Allow projects to be published in various currencies (default).  Enforce that projects are published in the server currency 3. You will see the following message box if you selected Enforce that projects are published in the server currency: This message box warns you that the change will only be enforced on all subsequent projects that are published to the server. All projects that are not using the default server currency must be changed to the default currency and republished. Click OK. 4. All projects published to the server that are using a currency that is in conflict with the server currency will be displayed in the Currency Settings section: You can use this as a reference to note which projects need to have their currency changed to the server currency. 5. Click Save.
  • 214. 206 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide Change currency option for a project Use the following procedure in Project Professional 2010 to change the currency settings for a project. You can use this procedure to:  Select the currency for a specific project if the currency setting allows you to use multiple currencies.  Change the currency setting on a project to the server currency if the currency setting allows you to only use the server currency. To change the currency for a project in Project Professional 2010: 1. Open Project Professional 2010 and log on to Project Server 2010. 2. Check out and open a project from Project Server 2010. 3. Click File, and then click Options. 4. On the Project Options page, click Display. 5. On the Display page, in the Currency options for this project section, select the Currency that you want to use for this project. 6. Click OK. 7. Click File, and then click Save to save the project. 8. Click File, and then click Publish to publish the project. Resource Capacity Settings The Resource Capacity Settings are used to calculate your resources availability for work over a specified time range. Your resources capacity data for the specified time range is stored on the Reporting database, and is updated daily through a timer job which is run at a time you specify in the settings. You are able to set the Active capacity view by entering a time range in relative terms - months in the past, and months in the future – using the
  • 215. Operational Policies Management 207 current date as a relative date point. You can use the Resource Capacity report or create a custom report to view this data from the Reporting database. The default Active capacity view settings are “1” month behind and “12” months ahead. This means that when you view the data in the Reporting database, you can view a resources future availability for up to 12 months from the current date, as well as utilization over the last month. By increasing the Month Ahead setting, you will get more capacity computed for future periods. For example, a company is planning for new projects later in the year and wants to forecast the capacity for resources from 12 months to 24 months. Some customers might want to increase the months behind value if they want to get an accurate report of work completed in the past (for example, to account for any users who might report time long after work in completed). Note that increasing either value will also increase the amount of time it will take for the daily timer job to run. The data from the timer job is stored on the Reporting database on a day-to-day basis, and can be configured to run at a specific time through the “Scheduled Time” setting. The default value for the Scheduled Time setting is 1:00 AM. To configure the Resource Capacity setting: 1. On the Server Settings page, in the Operational Policies section, click Additional Server Settings. 2. On the Additional Server Settings page, in the Resource Capacity Settings section, for Active capacity view, enter the following: a. In the Months behind field, enter the number of months in the past that you want resource data to be calculated from. b. In the Months ahead field, enter the number of months in the future that you want resource data to be calculated from. c. For Scheduled time, enter the time at which you would like latest resource capacity information to be processed (the default value is 1:00 AM). 3. Click Save.
  • 216. 208 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide Resource Plan Work Day The Resource Plan Work Day setting allows you to specify the length of a work day (full- time equivalents or FTE) for all resources in your resource plan. This value can be calculated from either the resource’s base calendar, or can be manually entered in as a value. To configure the Resource Plan Work Day setting: 1. On the Server Settings page, in the Operational Policies section, click Additional Server Settings. 2. On the Additional Server Settings page, in the Resource Plan Work Day section, for Calculate resource full-time equivalent from, select one of the two options: a. Resource base calendars – Use this option if you want the full-time equivalents to be calculated from each resources base calendar. This is the default option. b. Hours per day – Use this option if you want to specify the full-time equivalents for your resources in the resource plan. After selecting this option, enter the value (in hours) of the standard work day you would like to use for your organization. Note that this value will be used for all resources in the resource plan. 3. Click Save. Exchange Server Details In Office Project Server 2007, users could view their tasks in Microsoft Outlook with the use of an Outlook Add-in that had to be downloaded and installed to each user’s computer. In Project Server 2010, Exchange Server can be integrated with Project Server 2010 to provide task synchronization with Outlook 2007 or Outlook 2010. For more information about how to configure task integration with Exchange Server, see the
  • 217. Operational Policies Management 209 TechNet article set “Deploy Project Server 2010 with Exchange Server” (http://technet.microsoft.com/en-us/library/ff793353.aspx). To configure the Exchange Server Details setting: 1. On the Server Settings page, in the Operational Policies section, click Additional Server Settings. 2. On the Additional Server Settings page, in the Exchange Server Details section, click Synchronize Tasks if you want to automatically synchronize tasks from Project Server 2010 with Outlook 2007 or Outlook 2010. 3. Click Save. Task Mode Settings The Task Mode Settings allow you to select the default mode in which tasks are scheduled (manually or automatically). Additionally, if you select the default setting (Manually Scheduled), you can also configure if you want task to be published to team members. Manually scheduled tasks (also referred to as “User-Controlled Scheduling”) is a new feature available in Project Server 2010. When a new project is using the manually scheduled task mode, when a new task is created it ignores the scheduling engine and creates the task without a duration, start date, or finished date (can be entered manually). It can be useful for scheduling tasks with hard dates that are difficult to move (for example, training). For more information about the Manually Scheduled task feature, see the MSDN article “Project 2010: Introducing User-Controlled Scheduling” (http://blogs.msdn.com/b/project/archive/2009/10/23/project-2010-introducing-user- controlled-scheduling.aspx). To configure the Task Mode setting: 1. On the Server Settings page, in the Operational Policies section, click Additional Server Settings.
  • 218. 210 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide 2. In the Task Mode Settings section: a. Select Manually Scheduled tasks can be published to team members (enabled by default) if you want to allows project managers to publish their manually scheduled task to team members. b. For Default task mode in new projects, select one of the two following settings:  Manually Scheduled – You need to enter duration, start, and finish dates for your tasks. This is selected by default.  Automatically Scheduled: Scheduling engine will automatically calculate durations, start, and finish dates for your tasks. c.Select Users can override the default selection in Project Professional (enabled by default) if you want to allow your Project Professional users to override your default task mode settings you selected. 3. Click Save. Server Side Event Handlers Similar to Office Project Server 2007, Project Server 2010 provides public events that enable development of custom processes such as adding and enforcing business rules, validation, data processing, notification services, and workflow. These custom processes are written as server side event handlers by developers in an organization and can be associated to Project Server 2010 events through the Server Side Event Handlers page in Project Web App Server Settings. For example, developers in your organization can create an event handler that starts a custom workflow. Through the Server Side Event Handlers page, you can associate that event handler with the Project Published event so that a workflow starts whenever the event occurs. For more information about Project Server Events, see the MSDN article “Project Server Events” (http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/ms481079(v=office.12).aspx) For more information about Project Server Event Handlers, see the MSDN article “How to Write and Debug a Project Server Event Handler” (http://msdn.microsoft.com/en- us/library/ms469450(office.12).aspx).
  • 219. Operational Policies Management 211 To associate an event handler with a server side event: 1. On the Server Settings page, in the Operational Policies section, click Server Side Event Handlers. 2. On the Server Side Event Handlers page, in Events list, find the event that you want to associate your new event with, and then click the Event Source listed next to the Event Name (for example, click the Project Event Source for the Published Event Name). 3. In the Event Handlers section, the Event Source and Event Name should populate with the Event you selected. Any event handlers that are currently associated with the event will display in the Event Handlers list. Click New Event Handler. 4. In the New Event Handler page, enter the following information for the event handler you want to associate with the selected event: a. In the Display Information section, enter the Event Handler name. You can also optionally enter a description of the Event Handler. b. In the System Information section, in the Assembly Name field, enter the full name of the strongly named event handler assembly. c. In the Class Name field, enter the fully qualified name of the class the implements the event handler functionality.
  • 220. 212 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide d. In the Order field, provide the order number of the event handler. If it is the only event handler associated with the event, enter “1”. If there are multiple event handlers associated with the event, enter the order number in which this event handler will be executed. 5. Click Save. Active Directory Resource Pool Synchronization Project Server 2010 Active Directory Enterprise Resource Pool synchronization is used to create or update multiple Project Server enterprise resources at once. Project Server enterprise resources can also be automatically activated and deactivated based on group membership in the Active Directory directory service. For example, new employees in your department can automatically be added as Project Server enterprise resources as long as they are in the Active Directory group selected for synchronization. Conversely, employees who are removed from the Active Directory group have their Project Server accounts deactivated upon synchronization. Enterprise Resource Pool synchronization also updates enterprise resource properties with the most current data from Active Directory. For example, an employee's name and e-mail address may change due to marriage. As long as the change is made in Active Directory and the user is in the linked group, the change occurs in the user’s Enterprise Resource properties when synchronization occurs. The Enterprise Resource Pool can be mapped to a single Active Directory group for synchronization. This Active Directory group can, however, contain nested groups whose members are also synchronized. The following actions can occur during the Enterprise Resource Pool synchronization process:  A new Project Server enterprise resource and corresponding user account can be created based on an Active Directory account.  An active Project Server resource/user account can be deactivated.
  • 221. Operational Policies Management 213  An existing Project Server user account’s metadata (for example, name, e-mail address, and so on) can be updated if it has changed in Active Directory.  A previously inactive Project Server resource/user account can be reactivated. Before you perform this procedure, confirm that:  You have access to Project Server through Project Web App with an account with the Manage Active Directory Settings and the Manage users and groups global settings.  The Service Application (SA) service account for the Project Server instance has Read access to all Active Directory groups and user accounts involved in the synchronization. You can verify this account in the SA's properties on the Service Application Administration page on the SharePoint Central Administration Web site. To configure Enterprise Resource Pool synchronization Use this procedure to configure Enterprise Resource Pool synchronization in Project Server 2010. The following table describes possible scenarios and corresponding actions that occur when Enterprise Resource Pool synchronization takes place: Scenario Action The user exists in Active Directory and is a A new corresponding Project Server user and member of the Active Directory group enterprise resource is created in Project Server mapped to the Enterprise Resource Pool. and added to the Team Members Project Server The user does not exist in Project Server. security group. The user exists in Project Server, but does If Prevent Active Directory synchronization not exist in Active Directory or is not a for this user is not enabled for the user account member of the Active Directory group in Project Server, the corresponding Project mapped to the Enterprise Resource Pool. Server user account status is set to inactive. Otherwise the account will stay active. The user exists in Active Directory and is a The corresponding Project Server enterprise member of the Active Directory group resource and user information is updated (if mapped to the Enterprise Resource Pool. applicable). The user exists in Project Server as an enterprise resource and a user. The user's information has been updated in Active Directory. The user exists in Active Directory and is a If the Automatically reactivate currently
  • 222. 214 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide Scenario Action member of the Active Directory group inactive users if found in Active Directory mapped to the Enterprise Resource Pool. during synchronization resource option is The user exists in Project Server, but as an selected in Project Server, the account is inactive account. reactivated. If the option is not selected, the account remains inactive in Project Server. Configure Enterprise Resource Pool synchronization 1. On the Server Settings page, in the Operational Policies section, click Active Directory Resource Pool Synchronization. 2. On the Active Directory Enterprise Resource Pool Synchronization page, in the Active Directory Group section, under Active Directory Group to Synchronize, click Find Group. 3. On the Find Group in Active Directory — Webpage Dialog page, in the Group Name field, enter all or part of the name of the Active Directory group which you want to synchronize with the Enterprise Resource Pool. Click the button next to the field to search the Active Directory forest based on your search criteria. 4. To select a group from a remote forest, type the fully qualified domain name of the group (for example, group@corp.contoso.com). You can synchronize to a security or distribution group of any scope (Local, Global, or Universal). Note The Active Directory forest that is searched is shown at the top of the Find Group in Active Directory — Webpage Dialog page. The forest is defined by the fully qualified domain name of the account for the Shared Services Provider on which the Project Server instance is running.
  • 223. Operational Policies Management 215 5. From the Group Name list, select the group with which you want to synchronize your Enterprise Resource Pool. Click OK. When you do so, the Active Directory group membership of the selected group is put into memory. This includes all users who are members of nested active directory groups across domains and forests. 6. On the Active Directory Enterprise Resource Pool Synchronization page, you should see the Active Directory group you selected next to Active Directory Group to Synchronize: in the Active Directory Group section. 7. If you want to configure synchronization to occur on a scheduled basis, in the Scheduling Options section, select Schedule Synchronization. Alternatively, you can choose to manually run Active Directory Enterprise Resource Pool synchronization. If you prefer the manual option, skip the following step and continue to step 8. 8. In the Frequency fields, define the frequency at which you want synchronization to occur between the Enterprise Resource Pool and the Active Directory group. This can be scheduled over a defined period of days, weeks, or months. Select a start date and time.
  • 224. 216 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide 9. You can enable inactive accounts to be reactivated if they are found in the Active Directory group during synchronization. To do so, in the Resource Option section, select Automatically reactivate currently inactive users if found in Active Directory during synchronization. (For example, enabling this option would ensure that if an employee were rehired, the employee's user account would be reactivated). 10. Click Save to save the settings. Click Save and Synchronize Now if you want to synchronize your Enterprise Resource Pool immediately. If you choose not to schedule Enterprise Resource Pool synchronization, you can rerun it manually when needed by returning to this page and clicking Save and Synchronize Now. 11. You can check the status of the Enterprise Resource Pool synchronization by returning to the Active Directory Enterprise Resource Pool Synchronization page and reviewing the information in the Synchronization Status section. It contains information such as when the last successful synchronization occurred. Project Sites Project Sites were referred to as Project Workspaces in previous versions of Project Server. The Project Sites page in Server Settings allows you to manage Project Sites for your projects in Project Server 2010. You can do the following through the Project Sites page:  Create a new Project Site  Edit a Project Site Address  Synchronize  Delete a Project Site  Go to Project Site Settings
  • 225. Operational Policies Management 217 Create Site The Create Site setting allows you to create a new Project Site for your project if you did not originally create one when the project was originally published to Project Server 2010. You can view the Project Sites list to determine if a project does not have an existing Project. All projects without project sites will not have a corresponding URL next to it in the Site Address column. To create a Project site for a project: 1. On the Server Settings page, in the Operational Policies section, click Project Sites. 2. From the Project Name list, select a project for which you want to create the project site. 3. Click Create Site. 4. The Create Project Site message box appears.
  • 226. 218 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide 5. In the Web Application list, select the Web Application you want for the Project Site. 6. In the Site Application field, verify the site URL for the project site. You can edit the Site URL information if needed. The site URL will be appended to the Web Application to provide you with the Destination URL (as seen in the Destination URL field). 7. Click OK. The project site you created will now display next to the project name you selected in step 2. Edit Site Address The Edit Site Address setting allows you to edit the destination URL for a project site to point to a new site address. Changing the site address information breaks the existing link between the project and the existing Project Site. You can then enter the information to the new Project Site. Note Before changing the Project Site URL for a project, be sure to provision a new Project Site with a new site template. To edit a site address for a Project site: 1. On the Server Settings page, in the Operational Policies section, click Project Sites. 2. From the Project Name list, select a project for which you want to edit the Project site information. 3. Click Edit Site Address. 4. The Edit Site Address dialog box appears.
  • 227. Operational Policies Management 219 5. Type a new SharePoint site URL will be selected by default. Change the project site URL information to the new URL. 6. Click Test URL to verify if the new project site URL can be opened. 7. Click OK. The project site URL for the project you selected in step 2 will be changed to the new URL. Synchronize The Synchronize button allows you to manually synchronize the Project Site’s users, permissions, and other Project Server-related information between Project Server 2010 and the Web Server that is running SharePoint Foundation. If you want to automatically run synchronization for your Project Sites, see the Project Site Provisioning Settings Automatic Provisioning setting. To synchronize your Project Site information between Project Server and SharePoint Foundation Server: 1. On the Server Settings page, in the Operational Policies section, click Project Sites. 2. From the Project Name list, select a project for which you want to synchronize your Project site information between Project Server 2010 and SharePoint Foundation. 3. Click Synchronize. Note To view a confirmation that Synchronization occurred, you can go to the Manage Queue Job Server Settings and verify that the synchronization job completed successfully.
  • 228. 220 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide Delete Site The Delete Site setting allows you to permanently remove a Project Site and its content. Important Verify that you truly want to permanently remove a site and its content before you proceed with this procedure. Deleted Project Sites are not recoverable. To delete a Project site: 1. On the Server Settings page, in the Operational Policies section, click Project Sites. 2. From the Project Name list, select a project for which you want to delete a Project Site. 3. Click Delete Site. 4. A message box appears that will ask you to confirm if you want to delete the Project Site. It will also warn you that Click OK to proceed with deleting the site. Click Cancel if you no longer want to delete the site. 5. If you clicked OK, the Project Site will be deleted and will no longer display next to the project it was associated with in the Project Sites page. Go to Project Site Settings The Go to Project Site Settings setting allows you to go directly to a Project Site’s site settings page. From the Site Settings page, you can make changes to the site, such as add or remove users to the site, add Web Parts to the site, customize the site’s look and feel, and many others.
  • 229. Operational Policies Management 221 To go to the Site Settings page for a Project site: 1. On the Server Settings page, in the Operational Policies section, click Project Sites. 2. From the Project Name list, select a project for which you want to view the Project Site settings page. 3. Click Go to Project Site Settings. 4. The Site Settings page for the selected Project Site will open. You can make changes to the Project Sites site settings from this page. Project Site Provisioning Settings The Project Site Provisioning Settings page allows you to configure settings for the Project Sites that are created for projects. You can configure the following settings:  Site URL  Default Site Properties  Automatic Provisioning  Project Site Permissions
  • 230. 222 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide Site URL The Site URL settings allow you to change the default Web application in which your Project Sites are created. The default Site URL information on this page is based on the information provided during the provision of the Project Web App instance. To specify Site URL information: 1. On the Project Web App Home page, click Server Settings. 2. On the Server Settings page, in the Operational Policies section, click Project Site Provisioning Settings. 3. On the Project Site Provisioning Settings page, in the Site URL section, select the Web application you want to be the default Web Application that your Project Sites will be created in from the Default Web application drop-down menu. 4. In the Site URL field, type the URL path (for example, PWA). 5. Click Save. Default Site Properties The Default Site Properties settings allow you select the default site template language and the default Project Site template that will be used to create your Project Sites. When selecting a Project Site template, you can only use the “Microsoft Project Site” template that installs with Project Server 2010, or a template that is derived from it. The
  • 231. Operational Policies Management 223 Microsoft Project Site template is built to supports features and functionality in SharePoint Server 2010. Important Project Server 2010 and Office Project Server 2007 do not support the use of the Project Tracking Workspace template from the SharePoint Server 2010 “Fab 40” templates to create project sites. For more details, see Project Server 2010 –The Fab 40 Strikes Again! on the Microsoft Project Support Weblog (http://blogs.msdn.com/b/brismith/archive/2010/12/06/project-server-2010-the-fab-40-strike- again.aspx). To configure default site properties for your Project Sites: 1. On the Server Settings page, in the Operational Policies section, click Project Site Provisioning Settings. 2. On the Project Site Provisioning Settings page, in the Default Site Properties section, select the default language for your Project Sites from the Default site template language drop-down menu. 3. In the Default Project Site template drop-down menu, select the Project Site template that will be used to create your Project Sites. 4. Click Save. Automatic Provisioning The Automatic Provisioning setting allows you to indicate whether you want to have Project Server 2010 create Project Sites for projects when the projects are newly published to the server. Alternatively, the settings can be configured to allow the Project Server Administrator to create Project Sites manually after projects have been published, if desired. Note If you have a group of Project Managers who will not need to create Project sites, you can set the provision mode to Allow users to manually crate project sites in Project Server as noted above. Additionally, denying this group of users the “Manage SharePoint Foundation” global permission will eliminate the display of a Publish Project Site dialog box that typically displays whenever a project is created.
  • 232. 224 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide To configure the Automatic Provisioning setting: 1. On the Server Settings page, in the Operational Policies section, click Project Site Provisioning Settings. 2. On the Project Site Provisioning Settings page, in the Automatic Provisioning section, under Provisioning Mode select one of the two options:  Automatically create a project site for each project when first published to Project Server  Allow users to manually create project sites in Project Server 3. Click Save. Project Site Permissions The Project Site Permissions setting allows you to specify access is granted to Project sites in Project Server 2010. This setting allows you to automatically synchronize Project Web App users with Project Sites over the following circumstances:  When Project Sites are created  When project managers publish projects  When user permissions change in Project Server 2010 When the Project Site Permissions setting is enabled, the following occur automatically when any of the circumstances above occur:  Project managers who have published a project or who have Save Project permissions on a project are added to the Project Managers (Microsoft Project Server) site group.  Team members with assignments in a project are added to the Team Members (Microsoft Project Server) site group.  Other Project Server users who have View Project Site permission on a project are added to the Readers (Microsoft Project Server) site group.
  • 233. Operational Policies Management 225 To enable the Project Site Permissions setting: 1. On the Project Web App Home page, click Server Settings. 2. On the Server Settings page, in the Operational Policies section, click Project Site Provisioning Settings. 3. On the Project Site Provisioning Settings page, in Project Site Permissions section, click Check to automatically synchronize Project Web App users with Project Sites when they are created, when project managers publish projects, and when user permissions change in Project Server. When the check box is cleared, Project Server users are never synchronized with Project Sites. 4. Click Save. When the check box is cleared, users are not automatically added to their respective Web sites. To add or update users to their sites, click the Synchronize button on the Project Sites page of the Operational Policies section of Project Web App Server Settings. Bulk Update Project Sites The Bulk Update Project Sites page allows you to change site path information for Project Sites in one Web application to a different one (for example, when migrating). It allows you to break the original links between Project and their corresponding Project Sites in one site collection, and then relinking to the new Project Sites in the new site collection.  Update Site Paths  Update Content Types  Project Site Permissions
  • 234. 226 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide Update Site Paths The Update Site Paths setting allows you break links between projects and Project Sites contained in one site collection and relink with the new Project Sites in a different site collection. To update Project Site paths to a new site collection: 1. On the Server Settings page, in the Operational Policies section, click Bulk Update Project Sites. 2. On the Bulk Update Project Sites page, in the Update Site Paths section, for Previous Site Paths:  Select the Web Application for your Project Sites that you want to break the link to. If you are migrating project sites on the same server, the Web Application you need to select may display as a URL. If you are migrating projects sites from a different server, the Web Application you need to select may display as a GUID.  In the Site URL field, type the site URL information (for example, PWA). 3. In the New Site Paths:  Select the Web Application that contains the Project Sites that you want to link to (for example, http://hr1.contoso.com).  In the Site URL field, type the site URL information (for example, PWA). 4. Click Save.
  • 235. Operational Policies Management 227 Update Content Types The Update Content Types setting allows you to ensure that when migrating content from one farm to another, that the content types of Project Issues, Risks, and Documents are updated in the new location so that item links will remain functional. To enable the Update Content Types setting: 1. On the Server Settings page, in the Operational Policies section, click Bulk Update Project Sites. 2. On the Bulk Update Project Sites page, in the Update Content Types section, click Update Content Types. 3. Click Save. Project Site Permissions The Project Site Permissions setting allows you to synchronize permissions to the Project Sites while updating the site paths. This allows users to immediately access their Project Sites. Note For the Project Site Permissions site permissions setting to be enabled, the Project Site Permissions setting must also be enabled on the Project Site Provisioning page. To enable the Synchronize Site Permissions setting: 1. On the Server Settings page, in the Operational Policies section, click Bulk Update Project Sites. 2. On the Bulk Update Project Sites page, in the Project Site Permissions section, click Synchronize site permissions. 3. Click Save.
  • 236. 228 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide 8 Workflow and Project Detail Pages This chapter about Project Server 2010 Workflow and Project Detail Pages contains the following sections:  Enterprise Project Types  Workflow Phases  Workflow Stages  Change or Restart Workflows  Project Detail Pages  Project Workflow Settings
  • 237. Workflow and Project Detail Pages 229 Enterprise Project Types An enterprise project type represents a wrapper that encapsulates phases, stages, a single workflow, and PDPs. Each EPT represents a single project type. Normally, project types are aligned with individual departments, for example, marketing projects, IT projects, or HR projects. Using project types helps to categorize projects within the same organization that have a similar project life cycle. For a user, the EPTs appear in a drop-down list of project types when the user clicks New Project on the Ribbon in Project Web App. Create New Enterprise Project Type  To create a new enterprise project type 1. On the PWA home page, click Server Settings. 2. On the Server Settings page, under Workflow and Project Detail Pages, click Enterprise Project Types 3. Click New Enterprise Project Type. In the Name box, enter a name for the type, and then provide a brief description in the Description box.
  • 238. 230 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide 4. Select a workflow from the Site Workflow Association list. Once you associate a site workflow with a project type and save the type, you cannot go back and update the type to use a different workflow. Note If you're not seeing any workflows in this list, be sure that your server administrator has installed and configured workflows on the Microsoft Project Server 2010 machine. The Project Server 2010 workflow platform is built on the SharePoint workflow platform, which, in turn, is built on the Windows workflow platform. 5. Select a project detail page from the New Project Page list. 6. If you selected No Workflow from the Site Workflow Association list, select the project detail pages that you want to include in this project type from the Available Project Detail Pages box, and then click Add to move them to the box on the right. 7. If the enterprise project type that you are creating is the one that all new projects should use by default, select the Use this as the default Enterprise Project Type during Project Creation check box. 8. Click the button next to the Departments field to select the departments you want to associate with this project type, if appropriate. 9. If you want to associate an image with this project type, provide the URL for the image in the Type the URL box. 10. In the Order section, choose whether you want this project type to appear at the end of the list of project types, or if you want to control its placement in the list. 11. To include this type at the end of the list, select the Position this type at the end check box. 12. To control the placement of this type in the list, clear the Position this type at the end check box, and then choose the type that you want to appear just before the type you're creating from the Choose the type before which the current type should be positioned list. 13. Select a template from the Project Plan Template list, if appropriate. 14. Select a template from the Project Site Template list, if appropriate. 15. Click Save to save this enterprise project type to the server, making it available for new project or proposal creation.
  • 239. Workflow and Project Detail Pages 231 Workflow Phases A phase represents a collection of stages grouped to identify a common set of activities in the project life cycle. Examples of phases are project creation, project selection, and project management (shown as Create, Select, and Manage Phases). Phases do not have any direct technical effect on the behavior of an Enterprise Project Type. That is, changing the order of phases does not affect how the system reacts. The primary purpose of demand management phases is to provide a smoother user experience where users have the option of organizing stages into logical groups. Default Workflow Phases New Workflow Phase  To create a new workflow phase 1. On the PWA home page, click Server Settings. 2. On the Server Settings page, under Workflow and Project Detail Pages, click Workflow Phases 3. Click the New Workflow Phase button on the toolbar. 4. Under Name enter the name of the desired phase and optionally enter a description of the phase in the Description text box. 5. Click Save. Add Workflow Phase
  • 240. 232 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide  To edit an existing workflow phase 1. On the PWA home page, click Server Settings. 2. On the Server Settings page, under Workflow and Project Detail Pages, click Workflow Phases 3. Click the existing workflow phase in the Workflow Phases column that you wish to modify. 4. Under Name change the name to the desired phase name and optionally enter a description of the phase in the Description text box. 5. Click Save.
  • 241. Workflow and Project Detail Pages 233 Workflow Stages A stage represents one step within a project life cycle. A stage is composed of one or more Project Detail Pages linked by common logic or theme. Stages at a user level appear as steps within a project. At each step, data must be entered, modified, reviewed, or processed. Workflow Stages New Workflow Stages  To create a new workflow stage 1. On the PWA home page, click Server Settings. 2. On the Server Settings page, under Workflow and Project Detail Pages, click Workflow Stages. 3. Click the New Workflow Phase button on the toolbar. 4. Under Name enter the name of the desired stage and optionally enter a description of the stage in the Description text box. 5. Under Description for Submit type the description that will be displayed to end-users when submitting to workflow. By default, this description will be displayed in the following places: a. As a Tool Tip when users rest the pointer on the 'Submit' button in a Project Detail Page b. As part of the confirmation dialog shown to users when they click the 'Submit' button in a Project Detail Page
  • 242. 234 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide 6. Under Workflow Phase choose the Workflow Phase to correspond with this Workflow Stage. 7. Under Workflow Stage Status Project Detail Page choose the Workflow Stage Status Project Detail Page from the dropdown. This page will be displayed as the introduction page when the project enters this workflow stage. 8. In Visible Project Detail Pages select the Project Detail Pages you wish to be visible for this workflow stage by selecting them from the Available column and clicking the Add button to put them in the Selected Project Detail Pages column. Note By default no PDPs are visible for workflow stages but at least one page should be selected for a workflow stage. 9. Under Additional Settings for the Visible Project Detail Page you may edit the specific description of the Visible PDPs by selecting them in the right column from the previous step and then editing the description in the text box. You may also check the Project Detail Page requires attention check box to highlight the PDP on the Workflow Status page. 10. Under Required Custom Fields select the Custom Fields that are required for the Workflow to enter this Workflow Stage and click the Add button. Take note that these Custom Fields are 'Required' just for this Workflow Stage, not for all the subsequent Workflow Stages in the Workflow. 11. Under Read Only Custom select the Custom Fields that are read only for this Workflow Stage and click the Add button. 12. Under Strategic Impact Behavior select the radio button to specify whether the Strategic Impact values for the project are Read Only, Read Write or Required in this workflow stage. If Strategic Impact behavior is set to Required then a strategic impact value needs to be specified for every business driver. This is typically accomplished by using the Strategic Impact Web part on a project detail page. 13. Under Project Check In Required select whether this Workflow Stage requires the project to be checked in. If project checkin is required for the current workflow stage, the user cannot Submit the Project to Workflow without checking in the Project. This option is typically selected if any project updates occur in this Workflow Stage (which will be blocked if the project is not checked in). 14. Click Save. The Project Workflow Stage is now saved.
  • 243. Workflow and Project Detail Pages 235
  • 244. 236 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide Add a Workflow Stage Details Page Change or Restart Workflows The Change or Restart Workflow section allows you to change a project’s in-progress workflow or change a project’s current stage in a workflow. Restart Enterprise Project Type Change or Restart a Workflow  To Change or Restart a Workflow 1. On the PWA home page, click Server Settings.
  • 245. Workflow and Project Detail Pages 237 2. On the Server Settings page, under Workflow and Project Detail Pages, click Change or Restart a Workflow. 3. Under Choose Enterprise Project Type choose the Enterprise Project Type that needs to be changed or restarted. 4. Under Choose Projects select the project with the workflow instances that need to be changed or restarted and add it to the Target List. Note Only projects that are not checked out or are checked out to you are shown in the Choose Projects section. If a project is checked out to another user the workflow cannot be changed or restarted on that project. 5. Under Choose new Enterprise Project Type or restart workflow for current Enterprise Project Type select whether to restart the current workflow for the selected projects or to associate the projects with a new Enterprise Project Type. If a new Enterprise Project Type is selected, you must then choose from the drop down menu the new Enterprise Project Type you wish to use. 6. Under Choose Workflow Stage to Skip to you can select the target workflow stage this workflow will skip to. 7. Click OK. Choose Workflow Stage to Skip Project Detail Pages Project Detail Pages (PDPs) represent a single Web Part Page in Project Web App. PDPs can be used to display or collect information from the user. You can create PDPs in much the same way you create any Web Part Page in a SharePoint site, where you can add Web Parts that provide the experience you want. You can add individual Web Parts from the standard Web Part galleries or create custom Web Parts. Project Server Web Parts and custom Web Parts used in demand management all contain custom fields. Web Parts can make calls to the Project Server Interface (PSI), query the Reporting database, or integrate with external systems. Create or Edit Project Detail Pages There are three types of Project Detail Pages that can be created:
  • 246. 238 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide project template that has a workflow for portfolio analysis. diting  To create a project detail page 1. On the PWA home page, click Server Settings. 2. On the Server Settings page, under Workflow and Project Detail Pages, click Project Detail Pages. 3. Click on the Documents tab. 4. Select New Document on the ribbon. 5. On the newly created blank page, select Add a Web Part. 6. In Categories select Project Web App and then select the web part you would like to add.
  • 247. Workflow and Project Detail Pages 239 7. The newly selected Web Part is displayed. Now you must select the project fields used to populate the web part. From the top right menu select Edit Web Part. 8. In the Edit Web Part pane click the Modify button. 9. Select the project data you wish the web part you selected to display and then click OK. 10. In the Edit Web Part pane under Appearance enter a title and then click OK. 11. Select the Page Tools tab on the ribbon and click Stop Editing. 12. Now select Edit Properties on the ribbon and update the Display Name and Page Type for your newly created Project Detail Page.
  • 248. 240 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide Project Workflow Settings Project Server 2010 workflows are built from SharePoint Server 2010 Site Workflows which are built off of Windows Workflow Foundation, which in turn is built off of Windows .NET Framework 3.5. The workflows are made up of workflow activities that are objects with code within it. Project Server 2010 Workflow Hierarchy The Project Workflow Settings page designates the Workflow Proxy User account so that the Project Server Interface (PSI) calls within a workflow can be performed. By default, all PSI calls within a workflow will be made under the context of the Workflow Proxy User Account. For these PSI calls to be successful the Workflow Proxy User Account should have appropriate permissions in Project Server, therefore the only item to be set on this page is to make sure that the Workflow Proxy User account text box contains a logon account with sufficient permissions.
  • 249. Workflow and Project Detail Pages 241 Project Workflow Settings
  • 251. Project Server 2010 Category Permissions 243 A Project Server 2010 Category Permissions The following is a list of category permissions for Microsoft Project Server 2010. The table includes columns with the following information:  Description Describes what the permission lets you do.  Dependencies Lists any other permissions (global or category) or requirements to allow the permission to function.  Previous name, if renamed from Office Project Server 2007 Specifies the Microsoft Office Project Server 2007 permission name if the permission was renamed from Office Project Server 2007 but provides the same functionality.  New for Project Server 2010 Displays an X symbol if the permission is new for Project Server 2010. Previous name, if New renamed for from Office Project Project Server Permission Description Dependencies Server 2007 2010 Accept Task Allows a user to accept Update updates on projects without Requests requiring that the user have the Save Project to Project Server permission
  • 252. 244 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide Previous name, if New renamed for from Office Project Project Server Permission Description Dependencies Server 2007 2010 Adjust Allows a Project Web App User must have the Timesheet user to adjust a team View Resource member’s submitted Timesheet timesheet entries. Grant this permission to use this permission to any member permission. of your organization who requires the ability to adjust a resource’s timesheet entry after that resource has submitted the entry. Approve Allows a user to approve a  User must have Timesheets team member’s submitted the Approve timesheet entries. Grant this Timesheets permission to any member permission of your organization who through a requires the ability to category which approve a resource’s contains the timesheet. resources which they want to approve timesheets on. Assign Allows a user to assign or  User must have Resources allocate a given resource to the View Team projects. This permission Builder global controls the list of available permission in resources in Team Builder order to use the in both Project Web App Build Team page and Project Professional. in Project Web Grant this permission to all App or Project project managers and Professional. resource managers who
  • 253. Project Server 2010 Category Permissions 245 Previous name, if New renamed for from Office Project Project Server Permission Description Dependencies Server 2007 2010 have to assign, manage, or  User must have allocate resources. For the Build Team example, if you want to add on Project resource R to project P, category then you must have permission in permission to assign order to assign a resource R (Assign resource in an Resources) plus permission existing to build the team on Project enterprise P (Build Team on Project). project. In addition, you must have access to the Team Builder  User must have page through either Project the Build Team Web App or Project on New Project Professional (Assign global permission Resources to Project Team). in order to assign a resource in a new enterprise project. Build Team Allows a user to add  User must have On Project resources to a project that the View has already been saved to Enterprise the Project Server database. Resource Data Grant this permission to and Assign project managers who want Resources to use the Build Team category feature in Project permissions in Professional to staff their order to see projects before they save resources that are (and publish) them to the part of the Project Server database. Or, Enterprise grant this permission to Resource Pool in
  • 254. 246 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide Previous name, if New renamed for from Office Project Project Server Permission Description Dependencies Server 2007 2010 resource managers who the Build Team want to use the Build Team feature in Project feature in the Project Center Professional and of Project Web App to add Project Web resources to a project that App. has already been saved to the Project Server database.  User must have permission (at the category level) to access the specific projects and resources that have to be accessed to build the project team or assign resources. Create New Determines which projects User must be granted Task or are available when you are the New Task Assignment creating new tasks. Grant Assignment global this permission to any permission in order to group of projects that access the New task individual users will be able page in Project Web to create new tasks in by App. using the Create a new task page in Project Web App. Create When allowed, this Object Links permission enables a user to create, modify, or delete links between Project Tasks
  • 255. Project Server 2010 Category Permissions 247 Previous name, if New renamed for from Office Project Project Server Permission Description Dependencies Server 2007 2010 and items in the Project Workspace (documents, issues, deliverables or risks). Delete Allows users of Project Project Professional to delete a project saved to the Project Server database from the Open from Microsoft Project Server dialog box in Project Professional. Grant this permission to members of your organization to enable them to more closely manage the projects he or she has saved to the Project Server database from Project Professional or by using the "Delete Enterprise Objects" link in Project Web App. Before letting users delete projects, you should consider how your organization will recover those projects, if you have to do so. Edit Allows a project manager to User must be granted Enterprise edit enterprise resource data the View Enterprise Resource by using Project Resource Data Data Professional (checked-out category permission. Enterprise Resource Pool) or a resource manager to
  • 256. 248 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide Previous name, if New renamed for from Office Project Project Server Permission Description Dependencies Server 2007 2010 edit enterprise resources using Project Web App (Resource Center). Grant this permission to project managers and resource managers who have to make updates to resources that belong to the Enterprise Resource Pool. Resource managers with this permission are able to edit enterprise resource data in the Resource Center in Project Web App, and they can make updates to cost data, custom outline code data, custom field data, and other static information related to resources. Resource managers cannot add or delete resources from the Enterprise Resource Pool in Project Web App. Project managers can add or delete resources from the Enterprise Resource Pool in Project Professional if they have the New Resource global permission (to add resources) or the Clean Up Project Server Database global permission (to delete resources). These
  • 257. Project Server 2010 Category Permissions 249 Previous name, if New renamed for from Office Project Project Server Permission Description Dependencies Server 2007 2010 permissions are required in addition to the Edit Enterprise Resource Data category permission. Note The Project Server Interface (PSI) can also be used to create or delete resources in the Enterprise Resource Pool and to edit enterprise resource data. Edit Project Allows a user to edit only Edit Project X Summary the enterprise project fields Properties Fields shown in the new project in Project fields Web Part. If you do Center not have this permission, but have "Save Project to Project Server" you can still edit project-level fields/custom fields in the project field Web Part. Manage Controls whether a specific X Basic Project Project Permission can be Security set on a single project through the new Project Permissions feature. Manage Allows a user to see other X Resource users whom he or she
  • 258. 250 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide Previous name, if New renamed for from Office Project Project Server Permission Description Dependencies Server 2007 2010 Delegates manages and to set delegates for them. Manage Allows a user to edit a Resource resource plan. Plan Open Project Allows a user to open a project from the Project Server database in read-only mode using Project Professional. Grant this permission to any member of your organization who has to use the Open from Microsoft Project Server dialog box in Project Professional or in the Project Center in Project Web App to open projects that have been saved to the Project Server database. If users are not assigned the Save Project to Project Server permission, then the project will only be open in read-only mode. Publish Allows a user to Publish User must be granted Project projects to the Project the Open Project Server Published database category permission using Project Professional on any project that has and Project Web App. to be checked out Grant this permission to all from the Project
  • 259. Project Server 2010 Category Permissions 251 Previous name, if New renamed for from Office Project Project Server Permission Description Dependencies Server 2007 2010 members of your Server database. If the organization who will be project has changed publishing projects. since opening, the user will be required to have the Save Project to Project Server permission on that project. If not, when a publish occurs, it will only publish the outdated version. Save Project Allows a user to save  User must be to Project projects to the Project granted the New Server Server database using Project Project Professional. Also permission in gives Project Web App order to create users the permission to save the project. schedules and strategic impact data. Grant this  User must be permission to all members granted the of your organization who Open Project will be saving projects from category Project Professional to the permission on Project Server database any project that using the Save to Project has to be Server dialog box or checked out through Server-side from the Project projects. Server database. Save Allows a user to save a User must be granted Protected protected baseline or clear a the Save Project to Baseline protected baseline Project Server
  • 260. 252 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide Previous name, if New renamed for from Office Project Project Server Permission Description Dependencies Server 2007 2010 associated with an category permission. enterprise project published to the Project Server database. Grant this permission to project managers who have to save baselines in their projects. Baselines are saved by using the Set Baseline functionality accessed from the Project Professional ribbon on the Project tab in the Schedule group. Click the Set Baseline button and then select Save Baseline or Clear Baseline. Protected Baselines are in the range of Baseline 0-5 inclusive. Only users who have Save Unprotected Baseline, Open Project and Save Project Category permissions are able to save Baselines in Baseline 6-10. View Project Allows a user to access a Users also must be Summary in specific project in the granted the View Project Project Center from Project Project Center View Center Web App. Grant this permission in order to permission to any member see the Project Center. of your organization who has to view projects summaries in the Project
  • 261. Project Server 2010 Category Permissions 253 Previous name, if New renamed for from Office Project Project Server Permission Description Dependencies Server 2007 2010 Center. View Project Allows a user to view View X Schedule in project information for a Project Project Web specific project from the Details in App Project Center in Project Project Web App. Grant this Center permission to users who have to view project details in the Project Center. View Allows a user to view Resource assignment details using Assignments assignment views in the in Resource Center. Grant this Assignment permission to project Views managers and resource managers who have to view resource assignment details in the Resource Center from Project Professional or Project Web App. View Allows a user to view Enterprise resources and resource data Resource that is stored in the Data Enterprise Resource Pool. Grant this permission to any user who has to view resources and resource data that is stored in the Enterprise Resource Pool. View Project Allows users to view Risks, View X
  • 262. 254 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide Previous name, if New renamed for from Office Project Project Server Permission Description Dependencies Server 2007 2010 Site Issues, and Documents Project areas in Project Web App Workspace and Project Professional. Grant this permission to any user of Project Professional who has to select Project site, Documents, Issues, or Risks from the Info page in the Backstage or any user of Project Web App who has to access the Project site, Documents, Issues, or Risks top-level navigation links.
  • 263. Project Server 2010 Global Permissions 255 B Project Server 2010 Global Permissions The following is a list of global permissions for Microsoft Project Server 2010. The columns in the table include the following:  Description Describes what the permission enables you to do.  Dependencies Lists any other permissions (global or category) or requirements necessary for the permission to function.  Previous name, if renamed from Project Server 2007 Specifies the Office Project Server 2007 permission name if the permission was renamed from Office Project Server 2007 but provides the same functionality.  New for Project Server 2010 Displays an X symbol if the permission is new for Project Server 2010. Previous name, if renamed New from for Office Project Project Server Permission Description Dependencies Server 2007 2010 About Allows a user to access the Microsoft About Project Server page Project Server through Project Web App Server Settings.
  • 264. 256 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide Previous name, if renamed New from for Office Project Project Server Permission Description Dependencies Server 2007 2010 Accept Allows a user to accept but Users have access Timesheets not approve a timesheet. An to the Approval example would be where an Center if they have administrative assistant would either the Accept view the timesheets to make Timesheets or the sure that there were no View Approvals inaccuracies in them. When it permission. is accepted then a manager with Approve Timesheets permission will approve the timesheets. Build Team Allows a user to add resources User has to be On New to a project that has not been granted the Assign Project saved to Project Server. Grant Resources and this permission to project View Enterprise managers who want to use the Resource Data Build Team feature in category Microsoft Project Professional permissions in to staff their projects before order to see they save (and publish) them resources that are to Project Server. part of the Enterprise Resource Pool in the Build Team feature in Microsoft Project Professional. Can be Specifies whether a user can X Delegate be a delegate. Change Allows a user to change their
  • 265. Project Server 2010 Global Permissions 257 Previous name, if renamed New from for Office Project Project Server Permission Description Dependencies Server 2007 2010 Password Forms user account password from Project Web App. Forms-based authentication is provided through a membership provider and individual membership providers may prevent the changing of passwords. Please verify this with your membership provider if you intend to use this permission. Change Allows a user to change a X Workflow project's Enterprise Project type. (Change Project Type). Clean up Allows a user to access the Project Server Delete Enterprise Objects database page available through the Server Settings page in Project Web App. Grant this permission to users who have to delete timesheets, status reports responses, projects, resources, users, and user delegates from Project Server. Close Task to Allows a user to close tasks to Updates Time Reporting. It gives access to the Close Tasks to Update Project Web App page.
  • 266. 258 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide Previous name, if renamed New from for Office Project Project Server Permission Description Dependencies Server 2007 2010 Contribute to Allows users to edit items Contribute Project Web within lists in Project Web to Project App App project sites. Web App Edit Status Allows a user to access the Report Request a status report link on Requests the Project Web App Status Reports center and to view team reports. Grant this permission to any member of your organization who has to create status report requests and view team reports, usually project managers, resource managers, team leads, and members of your organization’s PMO. Edit Status Allows a user to access the Report Submit a status report link on Responses the Status Reports center in Project Web App. Grant this permission to any user of Project Web App who must be able to submit status reports. Log on Allows a user to connect to Project Server from Microsoft Project Professional or to log on to Project Web App. Grant this permission to any user who is authorized to connect
  • 267. Project Server 2010 Global Permissions 259 Previous name, if renamed New from for Office Project Project Server Permission Description Dependencies Server 2007 2010 to Project Server from Microsoft Project Professional or log on to Project Web App. Log on to Allows a user to load the Project Server Enterprise Global Template from Project when he or she connects Professional Microsoft Project Professional to Project Server. Grant this permission to all users in your organization who will be using Microsoft Project Professional to connect to Project Server. Manage Allows users to modify any Active Active Directory Directory Synchronization settings Settings within the Project Web App Administration. If the user is denied this permission then they cannot modify settings for any of the following:  Enterprise Resource Pool synchronization settings.  Project Web App Security Groups synchronization settings.  Choose an Active Directory Group to synchronize against a specific Security Group within the Add/Modify Group page.
  • 268. 260 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide Previous name, if renamed New from for Office Project Project Server Permission Description Dependencies Server 2007 2010 Manage Allows a user to access the Check-Ins Forced Check-in Enterprise Objects page in Project Web App. This page lets users force check-in projects, resources, custom fields, calendars, lookup tables and resource plans. Manage Cube Allows a user to the set and Building modify the settings for OLAP Service cube creation. Manage Allows a user to access the X Drivers drivers.aspx page to create drivers for Portfolio Analysis. Manage Allows a user to create, modify Enterprise and delete Enterprise Calendars Calendars within Project Web App. Manage Allows a user to modify the Enterprise definitions of Enterprise Custom Fields Custom Fields and lookup table from Project Web App. Manage Allows administrators to X Exchange enable the synchronization of Integration project tasks with Exchange Server. Manage Gantt Allows a user to access the Chart and Gantt chart and grouping
  • 269. Project Server 2010 Global Permissions 261 Previous name, if renamed New from for Office Project Project Server Permission Description Dependencies Server 2007 2010 Grouping formats customization options Formats in the Project Server Administration page for Project Web App views. Manage Lists Allows a user to create, in Project modify, and delete lists within Web App the Project Web App project site. This permission is used when synchronizing a user against the Project Web App project site. Manage Allows a user to manage the X Notification Notification and Reminders and settings. Reminders Manage My Allows users to see the X Delegates "Manage Delegates" link and to set a delegate on the "Add/Modify Delegation" page. Manage My Allows users to set a user who X Resource requires a substitute on the Delegates Add/Modify Delegation page. Manage Allows a user to access the Personal Manage My Alerts and Notifications Reminders page in Project Web App. Grant this permission to any user that
  • 270. 262 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide Previous name, if renamed New from for Office Project Project Server Permission Description Dependencies Server 2007 2010 you want to be able to sign up for e-mail notifications and reminders related to tasks and status reports. Manage Allows a user to create, read, X Portfolio update, and delete Portfolio Analyses analyses. Manage Allows a user to create, read, X Prioritizations update, and delete driver prioritizations. Manage Allows a user to schedule the Project Server backup or immediately back Backup up several entities on Project Server, including the following:  Projects  The Enterprise Resource Pool  Calendars  Custom fields  The Enterprise Global template  Views  System settings  Categories  Group settings. Manage Allows a user to immediately Project Server restore several entities on Restore Project Server, including the
  • 271. Project Server 2010 Global Permissions 263 Previous name, if renamed New from for Office Project Project Server Permission Description Dependencies Server 2007 2010 following:  Projects  The Enterprise Resource Pool  Calendars  Custom fields  The Enterprise Global template  Views  System settings  Categories  Group settings Note Similar to Server Backup except that the permission does not let you schedule a recovery. Manage Allows a user to access the Project Web Manage Views page in the App Views Server Settings page in Project Web App. Users with permission to access this page are able to add, modify, or delete Project, Project Center, Resource Center, Assignment, or Portfolio Analyzer views, and they are able to modify Timesheet views. Grant this permission to project managers, resource managers,
  • 272. 264 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide Previous name, if renamed New from for Office Project Project Server Permission Description Dependencies Server 2007 2010 and members of your organization’s PMO so they can create project data views for users to access in Project Web App and Microsoft Project Professional. It is important to remember that if your organization is allowing project managers to create custom fields at the project level, then each project may require its own unique view. The number of projects in this kind of environment may be too many for the IT administrator team; offloading this work to the people in your organization that work at the project level on a day-to-day basis is one way to distribute the workload of managing views. Manage Allows the user to read or set Queue queue configuration settings and retry, cancel, and unblock jobs in the queue. Manage Allows a user to access the Resource Alert me about my resources Notifications on tasks and status reports link on the Project Web App home page. Grant this permission to
  • 273. Project Server 2010 Global Permissions 265 Previous name, if renamed New from for Office Project Project Server Permission Description Dependencies Server 2007 2010 any resource manager or project manager you want to be able to sign up for e-mail notifications and reminders related to their resource’s tasks and status reports. Manage Rules Allows a user to access the Rules page from the Approval Center in Project Web App and set rules on how update transactions will be automatically processed. Grant this permission to project managers, resource managers, or members of your organization’s PMO so they can define how they will automatically receive and accept changes to transactions by their resources. Manage Allows a user to access the security Manage security page in Project Web App to define security categories, security templates, and user authentication settings. Grant this permission to Project Server administrators or a very small and closely managed group of people. This page lets users change Project Server
  • 274. 266 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide Previous name, if renamed New from for Office Project Project Server Permission Description Dependencies Server 2007 2010 security settings, create security categories and security templates. Changes to settings on this page, once you have begun using Project Server in your organization, should be carefully managed and (ideally) infrequent. Manage Allows a user to register event X Server Events handlers for specific Project Server server-side events. The Manager Server Events page requires the event handler to be registered by the server as defined in the Project Server SDK. Manage Allows a user to access the Server Project Web App Permissions Configuration page in Project Web App. Users with permission to access the Project Web App Permissions page can enable or disable enterprise features, manage organizational permissions, and create custom menus (both top-level and side-pane) in Project Web App. Grant this permission to Project Server administrators or a very small and closely managed group of people.
  • 275. Project Server 2010 Global Permissions 267 Previous name, if renamed New from for Office Project Project Server Permission Description Dependencies Server 2007 2010 Manage Allows a user to create and Users with this Manage X SharePoint delete project sites, whether or permission should Windows Foundation not sites are created on project be granted SharePoint publish, permission administrative Services synchronization settings, and privileges to all of site path updates. Grant this the servers that are permission to members of running Project your organization who are Server 2010 and administrators for Project SharePoint Server Web App or administrators 2010 for the servers that are running SharePoint Server 2010. Manage Site Allows users or groups the X Services ability to manage Queue Settings, Active Directory Synchronization, and Event handlers. Manage Time Allows a user to create and Manage X Reporting and modify Timesheet and Fiscal Timesheet Financial period definitions. and Periods Financial Periods Manage Time Allows a user to be forwarded Tracking timesheets for review. After reviewing the timesheet, the user will be required the following permissions:  Accept Timesheet
  • 276. 268 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide Previous name, if renamed New from for Office Project Project Server Permission Description Dependencies Server 2007 2010  Approve Timesheet Manage Users Allows a user to access the and Groups Manage Users and Groups page in the Server Settings page in Project Web App. Users with this permission will be able to add, modify, or delete Project Server users and manage Project Server security groups. Grant this permission to members of your organization who are Project Server administrators. Only a small group of people should have permission to access this set of pages. Manage Allows a user to manage and X Workflow and view workflow and Project Project Detail Detail Pages (PDPs). Pages New Project Allows a user to add a new project to Project Server using Microsoft Project Professional, Project Web App, or the Project Server Interface (PSI). New functionality in Project Server
  • 277. Project Server 2010 Global Permissions 269 Previous name, if renamed New from for Office Project Project Server Permission Description Dependencies Server 2007 2010 2010 for this permission: If you do not also have the Open Project permission, after you create a project, you are taken back to the Project Center. New Resource Allows a project manager to add new resources to the Enterprise Resource Pool using Microsoft Project Professional, the Project Web App Resource Center, or the Project Server Interface (PSI). Grant this permission to any member of your organization who has to create new enterprise resources in Project Server. Note If your organization is using the Active Directory synchronization feature, you may want to consider denying this permission to all non-IT administrators in your organization. New Task Allows users to access the Assignment Create a New Task and Add Yourself to a Task links from the Insert Row button found
  • 278. 270 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide Previous name, if renamed New from for Office Project Project Server Permission Description Dependencies Server 2007 2010 on the Tasks page of Project Web App. Grant this permission to any member of your organization who has to create new assignments on existing tasks in projects that have been published to Project Server. Users with this permission will also be able to use the Create a New Task link to create new tasks in Project Web App for any project to which the user has access. The list of available projects for a user to create new tasks is determined by the Create New Tasks or Assignment category permission. A user who has the New Task Assignment permission must also have access to the projects to which they want to assign themselves to a task. Open Project Allows a user to open an User must be Template Enterprise Project Template granted the New from Project Server using Project global Microsoft Project permission in order Professional. Grant this to save the project permission to all users in your to the Project organization who will be using Server database as Microsoft Project Professional an actual project.
  • 279. Project Server 2010 Global Permissions 271 Previous name, if renamed New from for Office Project Project Server Permission Description Dependencies Server 2007 2010 to create and manage projects that are based on Enterprise Project Templates. Reassign Task Allows a user to delegate an assigned task to another (existing) user. Grant this permission to members of your organization who need the ability to delegate task assignments to other resources. For example, a large project may be run by a single project manager, but actually implemented by several teams, each with their own team lead. A project manager could assign the team leads in the project plan, and then the team leads could in turn delegate each task to individual members of their teams. This example creates an additional layer of task management within the larger organization, but it can also simplify resource allocation within projects themselves and make it easier for a project manager to manage large projects. Or, if you have a resource that is about to leave on a three-week vacation, and this resource had
  • 280. 272 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide Previous name, if renamed New from for Office Project Project Server Permission Description Dependencies Server 2007 2010 this permission, they would be able to assign their tasks directly to other resources instead of having the project manager check out the project and reassign resources. Save Allows a user to check out, Enterprise modify, and save the Global Enterprise Global Template to the Project Server database from Microsoft Project Professional. This permission should only be granted to a small group of people in your organization; either project managers, members of your organization’s PMO, or Project Server administrators. Save Project Allows a user to create and User needs to be Template save a project as an Enterprise granted the Assign Project Template from Resources and Microsoft Project Professional View Enterprise to the Project Server database. Resource Data Grant this permission to category members of your organization permissions in who are tasked with creating addition to this Enterprise Project Templates. permission if they When a user saves a project to are also responsible Project Server for the first for adding Generic time, the option to select resources to the Template (as opposed to Enterprise Project
  • 281. Project Server 2010 Global Permissions 273 Previous name, if renamed New from for Office Project Project Server Permission Description Dependencies Server 2007 2010 Project) from the Type drop- Template. down list in the Save to Project Server dialog box is enabled. Save Allows a user to save a non- User needs to be Unprotected protected baseline or clear a granted the Save Baseline non-protected baseline Project category associated with an enterprise permission. project published to the Project Server database. Baselines are saved by using the Set Baseline functionality accessed from the Microsoft Project Professional ribbon on the Project tab in the Schedule group. Click the Set Baseline button and then select Save Baseline or Clear Baseline. Unprotected Baselines are in the range of Baseline 6-10 inclusive. Self-Assign Resources can be members of Team Tasks a Team Assignment Pool. With this permission, it is possible for users to assign tasks, which have been assigned to their Team Assignment Pool, to themselves through the Team Tasks page in Project Web App.
  • 282. 274 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide Previous name, if renamed New from for Office Project Project Server Permission Description Dependencies Server 2007 2010 Status Broker Allows API updates to occur X Permission for a user from places like Microsoft Exchange Server. View Allows a user to view the Users have access Approvals Approval Center. to the Approval Center if they have either the Accept Timesheets or the View Approvals permission. View Business Allows a user to see the X Intelligence Business Intelligence link in Link Quick Launch. However, it has no impact on Report Center Security. View OLAP Allows a user to read from the Data output for the OLAP cube. This permission is only checked when the OLAP cube is built. View Project Allows users to access the User needs to be Center Project Center from Project granted the View Web App or Microsoft Project Project Summary Professional. in Project Center category permission. View Project Allows a user to access project View views in Project Web App.
  • 283. Project Server 2010 Global Permissions 275 Previous name, if renamed New from for Office Project Project Server Permission Description Dependencies Server 2007 2010 Grant this permission to users who need to drill down into project details using the Project Center in Project Web App or Microsoft Project Professional. View Project Allows a user to see the link in X Schedule the Quick Launch. However, Views it has no impact on Report Center Security. View Project Allows a user to approve X Timesheet timesheets on a line-by-line Line basis. Approvals View Allows a user to access the Resource View Resource Availability Availability page to view resource allocation data in Project Web App. Grant this permission to users in your organization who need to view resource availability in Project Web App. View Allows users to access the User needs to be Resource Resource Center from Project granted the View Center Web App or Microsoft Project Enterprise Professional and view resource Resource Data allocation data. Grant this category permission to users who need permission.
  • 284. 276 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide Previous name, if renamed New from for Office Project Project Server Permission Description Dependencies Server 2007 2010 to view the Resource Center in Project Web App by clicking the Resources link in the top- level navigation, or in Microsoft Project Professional by selecting Resource Center on the Collaborate menu. View Allows a user to access the X Resource Plan Resource Plan page within Project Web App. View Allows users to view the Users must be Resource timesheets, regardless of their granted the Accept Timesheet state or ownership, for Timesheet global resources identified in the permission to use category selection criteria. this permission. View Task This permission when denied Center prevents users from seeing the Task Center link on the Project Web App Quick Launch menu. Note This permission does not lock down access to the Task Center page. It is still possible for users to navigate to this page. View Team Allows a user to use Build  User needs to Builder Team in Project Web App and be granted the
  • 285. Project Server 2010 Global Permissions 277 Previous name, if renamed New from for Office Project Project Server Permission Description Dependencies Server 2007 2010 Microsoft Project Assign Professional, as well as Resources determine the list of available category resources. Grant this permission in permission to resource addition to managers to allow them to use the View Build Team in Project Web Team App to add resources to Builder projects that have been saved global to the Project Server database. permission. Project Managers can also use The Assign this permission to allow them Resources to use Build Team in category Microsoft Project Professional permission to add resources to projects. determines the list of resources available in Build Team in both Microsoft Project Professional and Project Web App.  User needs to be granted the Build Team on Project category permission. The Build
  • 286. 278 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide Previous name, if renamed New from for Office Project Project Server Permission Description Dependencies Server 2007 2010 Team on Project permission determines with which projects Build Team can be used. This applies to using Build Team in both Microsoft Project Professional and Project Web App. View When this permission is View X Timesheets denied it prevents users from Timesheet seeing the Timesheet Center Center link on the Project Web App Quick Launch menu Note This permission does not lock down access to the Timesheet page. It is still possible for users to navigate to this page
  • 287. Project Server 2010 Global Permissions 279
  • 288. 280 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide C Project Server 2010 Default Security Groups This article describes the default permissions that are given to the default templates and user groups in Microsoft Project Server 2010. Project Server 2010 creates seven default groups during installation:  Administrators  Executives  Portfolio Managers  Project Managers  Resource Managers  Team Leads  Team Members Each group is given a default set of permissions (global and category). Templates are also included to allow these default permissions to be assigned to new groups created by the administrator. After using the template to create a new group, you can then choose to customize the new group to better suit your users by editing the permission for the group. Global permissions differ from category permissions in that they apply to functionality that the user is allowed to use in Project Server 2010. Category permissions apply to what users are allowed to do with specific projects, resources, and views as defined by the category that the group is associated with. For more information about groups and categories, see the Microsoft TechNet article “Plan groups, categories, and RBS in Project Server 2010” (http://technet.microsoft.com/en- us/library/cc197354.aspx).
  • 289. Project Server 2010 Default Security Groups 281 Default global permissions The following table contains a list of the default global permissions for each of the default user groups. Permission Portfolio Project Resource Team Team Name Administrators Executives Managers Managers Managers Leads Members About Microsoft X Project Server Accept X X X Timesheets Build Team On X X X X New Project Can Be Delegate X Change X X X X X X X Password Change X Workflow Clean Up X Project Server Database Close Tasks To X X X Updates Contribute to X X X X Project Web App Edit Status X X X X X X Report Requests Edit Status X X X X X X X Report Responses Log On X X X X X X X Log on to X X X X Project Server
  • 290. 282 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide Permission Portfolio Project Resource Team Team Name Administrators Executives Managers Managers Managers Leads Members from Project Professional Manage Active X Directory Settings Manage Check- X X Ins Manage Cube X X Building Service Manage Drivers X X X Manage X X Enterprise Calendars Manage X X Enterprise Custom Fields Manage X Exchange Integration Manage Gantt X Chart and Grouping Formats Manage Lists in X X X X Project Web App Manage My X X Delegates Manage My X X Resource Delegates Manage X X Notification and Reminders
  • 291. Project Server 2010 Default Security Groups 283 Permission Portfolio Project Resource Team Team Name Administrators Executives Managers Managers Managers Leads Members Manage Personal X X X X X X X Notifications Manage X X X Portfolio Analyses Manage X X X Prioritizations Manage Project X Server Backup Manage Project X Server Restore Manage Project X X Web App Views Manage Queue X X Manage X X X X Resource Notifications Manage Rules X X Manage Security X Manage Server X Configuration Manage Server X Events Manage X SharePoint Foundation Manage Site X Services Manage Time X Reporting and Financial Periods
  • 292. 284 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide Permission Portfolio Project Resource Team Team Name Administrators Executives Managers Managers Managers Leads Members Manage Time X Tracking Manage Users X and Groups Manage X Workflow Project Detail Pages New Project X X X X X X X New Resource X X X New Task X X X X Assignment Open Project X X X Template Reassign Task X X X Save Enterprise X X Global Save Project X X X Template Save X X X Unprotected Baseline Self-assign Team X X X X X Tasks Status Broker X Permission View Approvals X X X X View Business X X X X Intelligence Link View OLAP X X X X Data
  • 293. 285 Permission Portfolio Project Resource Team Team Name Administrators Executives Managers Managers Managers Leads Members View Project X X X X X X X Center View Project X X X X X X X Schedule Views View Project X X X X Timesheet Line Approvals View Resource X X X X X Availability View Resource X X X X X Center View Resource X X X X X Plan View Resource X Timesheet View Task X X X X X X X Center View Team X X X X Builder View Timesheets X X X X X X X Default category permissions The following table contains a list of the default category permissions for each of the default user groups. Use the following legend for the table below.  My Org = My Organization  My Dir = My Direct Reports  My Proj = My Projects
  • 294. 286 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide  My Res = My Resources  My Tsks = My Tasks For example, a user in the default Administrators group (who is associated to the My Organization category by default) has permissions allowed in the Administrators column in the table. These category permissions only apply to all projects, resources, and views selected for the My Organization category. However, a user in the default Project Managers group (who is associated to the My Organization and My Projects categories) has a different set of category permissions for the objects in the My Organization category. This allows you to conveniently set a more or less restrictive set of permissions for different types of users to a group of projects, resources, and views. For more information about groups and categories, see the Microsoft TechNet article “Plan groups, categories, and RBS in Project Server 2010” (http://technet.microsoft.com/en- us/library/cc197354.aspx). Permission Portfolio Project Resource Team Team Name Administrators Executives Managers Managers Managers Leads Members Accept Task My Org My Proj Update Requests Adjust My Org Timesheet Approve My Org My Org My Dir, Timesheets My Res Assign My Org My Org My Org My Res Resource Build Team My Org My Org My Proj My Org On Project Create New My Org My Proj My Proj My My Tsks Task or Proj Assignment Create My Org My Org My Org My Proj My Org, My My Tsks Object My Proj, Proj Links My Res
  • 295. 287 Permission Portfolio Project Resource Team Team Name Administrators Executives Managers Managers Managers Leads Members Delete My Org My Org My Proj Project Edit My Org My Org My Res Enterprise Resource Data Edit Project My Org My Proj Summary Fields Manage My Org My Org My Proj Basic Project Security Manage My Org My Res Resource Delegates Manage My Org My Org My Org My Res Resource Plan Open My Org My Org My Proj My Tsks Project Publish My Org My Org My Proj Project Save Project My Org My Org My Proj to Project Server Save My Org My Proj Protected Baseline View My Org My Org My Org My Org, My Res Enterprise My Proj Resource
  • 296. 288 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide Permission Portfolio Project Resource Team Team Name Administrators Executives Managers Managers Managers Leads Members Data View My Or My Org My Org My Proj My My Tsks Project Proj Schedule in Project Web App View My Org My Org My Org My Proj My Proj My My Tsks Project Site Proj View My Org My Org My Org My Proj My Proj My My Tsks Project Proj Summary in Project Center View My Org My Org My Org My Proj My Res My My Tsks Resource Proj Assignments in Assignment Views
  • 297. Project Server 2010 Default Categories 289 D Project Server 2010 Default Categories Microsoft Project Server 2010 creates seven default categories during installation. Each of the categories is configured to be accessed by specified default user groups. Each category has a predefined set of category permissions for default user groups that have access to that category. The following sections list the default settings for each category for Project Server 2010. In this article:  Categories  Category permissions Categories Specific default groups are already associated with each of the default categories. The following table shows the default categories and the default groups that can access each of them. Note For more information about the relationship between groups and categories, see the TechNet article “Plan groups, categories, and RBS in Project Server 2010” (http://technet.microsoft.com/ro-ro/library/cc197354(en-us).aspx). Category Portfolio Project Resource Team Team Name Administrators Executives Managers Managers Managers Leads Members My Direct X Reports My X X X X X
  • 298. 290 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide Category Portfolio Project Resource Team Team Name Administrators Executives Managers Managers Managers Leads Members Organization My Personal X X X X X X Projects My Projects X X X My X Resources My Tasks X Category permissions The following table describes the default category permissions for each default group. For example, a user in the default Administrators group (who is associated to the My Organization category by default) has the permissions allowed in the Administrators column in the table. These category permissions only apply to all projects, resources, and views selected for the My Organization category. However, a user in the default Project Managers group (who is associated to the My Organization and My Projects categories) has a different set of category permissions for the objects in the My Organization category. This allows you to conveniently set a more or less restrictive set of permissions for different types of users to a group of projects, resources, and views. Note For more information about category permissions, see Appendix A: Project Server 2010 category permissions. For more information about the relationship between groups and categories, see the TechNet article “Plan groups, categories, and RBS in Project Server 2010” (http://technet.microsoft.com/ro-ro/library/cc197354(en-us).aspx). Use the following legend for the table below.  My Org = My Organization  My Dir = My Direct Reports  My Proj = My Projects  My Res = My Resources  My Tsks = My Tasks
  • 299. Project Server 2010 Default Categories 291 Permission Portfolio Project Resource Team Team Name Administrators Executives Managers Managers Managers Leads Members Accept Task My Org My Proj Update Requests Adjust My Org Timesheet Approve My Org My Org My Dir, Timesheets My Res Assign My Org My Org My Org My Res Resource Build Team My Org My Org My Proj My Org On Project Create New My Org My Proj My Proj My My Tsks Task or Proj Assignment Create My Org My Org My Org My Proj My Org, My My Tsks Object My Proj, Proj Links My Res Delete My Org My Org My Proj Project Edit My Org My Org My Res Enterprise Resource Data Edit Project My Org My Proj Summary Fields Manage My Org My Org My Proj Basic Project Security
  • 300. 292 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide Permission Portfolio Project Resource Team Team Name Administrators Executives Managers Managers Managers Leads Members Manage My Org My Res Resource Delegates Manage My Org My Org My Org My Res Resource Plan Open My Org My Org My Proj My Tsks Project Publish My Org My Org My Proj Project Save Project My Org My Org My Proj to Project Server Save My Org My Proj Protected Baseline View My Org My Org My Org My Org, My Res Enterprise My Proj Resource Data View My Or My Org My Org My Proj My My Tsks Project Proj Schedule in Project Web App View My Org My Org My Org My Proj My Proj My My Tsks Project Site Proj View My Org My Org My Org My Proj My Proj My My Tsks Project Proj Summary in Project Center
  • 301. Project Server 2010 Default Categories 293 Permission Portfolio Project Resource Team Team Name Administrators Executives Managers Managers Managers Leads Members View My Org My Org My Org My Proj My Res My My Tsks Resource Proj Assignments in Assignment Views
  • 302. 294 Project Server 2010 Administrator's Guide